Home

Q Corresponding Serial Communication Module User`s Manual (Basic)

1. KS 485 l Q series C24 side RS232 signal RS485 signal External device side cDo PH 1 FG swt se U FG 2 RD 2 2 RD 1l ON TRD SDA SD 3 3 SD a ON TRD 5 i SDB DIR 4 5 cs SI N FG C4 RDA IR se B 6 ER RRB 6 7 4 OFF SG DSR SG EOF rs 2 20 DR 6 OFF cs 24 Tc RI 9 25 CNT 7 ON 8 ON x Data communication can be made in half duplex communication The CD terminal check setting should be set to No check according to the explanation in Section 3 2 1 1 e Transmission control cannot be used Connection example 4 KS 485 I External device side RS232 signal RS485 signal Q series C24 side FG 1 FG swt se FG SD 2 Rp Don TRD SDA gt 3 TRD gt SDB l gt RD me 2 ON 9 UI When connecting 5 FG RDA RS CS 3 ON R with other stations cs 6 ER BOE le 7 4 OFF SG gt DSR SG LORE en SG 20 DR 24 6 OFF CD TC These switches should DTR 257 CNT 7 OFF be ON when the KS 485 8 OFF is at the terminal of the x Data communication can be made line in half duplex communication Transmission control cannot be used App 23 App 23 APP
2. QJ71C24N QJ71C24N R2 QJ71C24N R4 QJ71C24 1 QJ71C24 R2 2 QJ71C24N QJ71C024N R2 QJ71C024N R4 RUN ERR RUN ERR RUN ERR 1 gt NEU NEU 1 gt NEU NEU 1 gt NEU NEU 4 CH SD sD cH2 cHi SD SD cH2 cHi SD SD cH2 L RD RD 7 CRD RD L RD RD __ CH1 J RS 422 485 ZO CH1 SUA pm 2 Rs 232 SDB RDA 2 RS 232 a RDB 2 SG raal LD CH2 RS 422 485 O SDA SDB RDA 2 r BEA R SG waal QJ71C24N R2 QJ71C24N R4 T a e aen x1 The appearance of the QJ71C24 is almost the same as that of the QJ71C24N except for the model name part and serial number plate x2 The appearance of the QJ71C24 R2 is almost the same as that of the QU71C24N R2 except for the model name part and serial number plate PS Name U O Contents Display LED For details see 1 RS232 interface for serial communication with external devices D Sub 9 pin RS422 485 interface for serial communication with external devices 2 piece terminal block RS422 485 interface for serial communication with external 4 RS 422 485 interface k devices 2 piece plug in socket block Serial number plate Indicates the serial No of the serial communication module 2 RS 232 interface 3 RS 422 485 interface 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION 1 LED display list QJ71C24N QJ71C24N
3. nn QJ71C24N R4 ere kee RUN ERR NEU NEU om sb 0 Jrz pelea 7 RS 4221485 O 1 1 SDA OO bec Sas Z SDB Pas oS ee ar CN R3 i RDA l s Qn i 1 LO Roa ae aN lt z a 5 r2 SS X ri D eae ss Tj 35 CH2 O SSS gt i Q RS 422 485 V O R AR SDA An SDB o RDA o RDB fini SG l oa S aanl Q F QJ71C24N R4 he Gl 2 nr 2 23 0 91 90 3 54 11 5 27 4 1 08 0 45 Unit mm in App 20 Outside cable diameter QJ71C24N R2 RUN ERR NEU NEU on sD SD CH2 RD RD CH1 RS 232 98 3 86 CH2 RS 232 5 B QJ71C24N R2 27 4 1 08 Unit mm in x 4 1 R3 Bending radius near the plug in socket block Outside cable diameter X 4 2 r2 Bending radius near the wire connection Connectable as long as not bended extremely App 20 APPENDIXE MELSEC Q Appendix 6 Connection Examples When Using a Converter This section provides connection examples where an RS 232 to RS 422 485 converter is used in order to communicate data using data communication functions with the MC non procedure or bidirectional protocol The converters covered in this Appendix are as follows Model name Manuf
4. r Flash ROM setting Write to MONA Save file Read from EETA Load file Details Current value Monitoring display Cannot execute test Make text file tart monitor Stop monitor Close Monitor items a cn i iii Data transmission result Chapter 11 of Data a reception result User s Manual Basic X07 CH2 Transmission normal completion X01 CH1 Transmission abnormal IE T X08 CH2 Transmission abnormal IE T X02 CH1 Transmission processing in Se Se CH2 Transmission processing in progress Chapter 7 of X03 CH1 eer e Ane data read request User s Manual Basic XOA CH2 eer e Ane data read request Y00 CH1 Transmission Ca e a e Y07 CH2 Transmission Ca e a e Y01 CH1 Reception data read Se Y08 CH2 ese o data read completion Section 7 3 of Simutaneousiy varsrission data vaidivai destraton transmission data valid invalid designation 13B User s Manual Basic 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 9 6 7 Pre defined protocol monitor test Purpose Monitor the data communication status and test the values set for the pre defined protocol Operating procedure Monitor screen CHO Pre defined protocol monitor test Monitor Test screen CH1 Pre defined protocol monitor test Module information Module type Serial Communications Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name QJ71C24N Setting item Current value Setting value X1
5. EJ o E Loopback data Sum check In case of format 1 Data name 5 8 amp catawith the code xe E amp a length given w 8 g 3 by Character o 8 5 length External Q 2 16 Two characters hexadecimal device side HiL HiL HL bo e Hook OOlFiF T T 0 o5 ABCDE 7 8 Example 1 yi ali eee id I I 1 I i 1 i 304135 H f 1 gt i Re e e Character A part S 2 2 roopback data E Sum check Data name Sh Ou Gee Pata MILNE code Sia 5 length given Ti Y by Character T Programmable v D fi length controller Becomes the X O x CPU side same data HILHA L ttt Horek 4 O 0 F F O S ABICIDE eater I I I i i i I i Example i i et shoes 0 i 30H 30H 46H46H 30H 354414424 43H 4H 45H i EE Header data to be sent by Character B part the programmable controller 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 9 Maintenance and Inspection This section explains the maintenance and inspection and installing and removing of the Q series C24 4 9 1 Maintenance and inspection The Q series C24 has no special inspection items other than below For items other than listed below perform inspection according to the inspection items listed in the User s Manual of the programmable controller CPU module in order to always use the system in the optimal condition the Q series C24 inspection items 1 Check if the terminal resistors and cables a
6. MELSEC Q Function 1 Data stored in the device designated in S2 and succeeding devices are sent according to the control data of the device designated in S1 and succeeding devices via the non procedure protocol of the module specified in Un QCPU Q series C24 _ Channel to be we used is set by b15 to bO E the control data S2 0 J Ee ral a N ss 2 Simultaneous execution of dedicated instructions The following table shows the handling for when executing another instruction during execution of the OUTPUT instruction or executing the OUTPUT instruction during execution of another instruction in the same channel Availability of Instruction simultaneous Handling of simultaneous execution execution e The next instruction will be ignored until the active instruction has been completed However simultaneous execution is available when channels to be used are not the same e Dedicated instructions simultaneous execution error 7FFOH occurs in the dedicated instruction attempted later However simultaneous execution is available when channels to be used are not the same Available X Not available 1 Since the dedicated instructions shown below use a different communication protocol from that for the OUTPUT instruction they are not used in the same channel e ONDEMAND BIDOUT BIDIN CPRTCL If the dedicated instructions shown above are used in the same channel with the OUTPUT instruction the communicati
7. PECIFICATION eS A ae MELSEC Q 3 SPECIFICATIONS The following shows the Q series C24 performance specifications See the User s Manual of the QCPU Q mode for general specifications 3 1 Performance Specifications The following shows the Q series C24 performance specifications For the transmission specifications when communicating via the modem function see this section and Chapter 3 of User s Manual Application 1 Transmission specification Specifications item QJ71C24N QJ71C24N R2 QJ71C24 QJ71C24 R2 QJ71C24N R4 RS 422 485 compliance 2 piece plug in connector socket block RS 422 485 compliance 2 piece plug in connector socket block RS 232 compliance RS 232 compliance CHI D sub 9 pin D sub 9 pin Interface RS 422 485 compliance RS 232 compliance 2 piece terminal block D sub 9 pin Line Full duplex half duplex communications MC protocols ae P A Half duplex communications communication PEE Non procedure protocol ara Communications P ign P Full duplex half duplex communications communication system 1 ESD Bidirectional protocol Se ty Pe Full duplex half duplex communications communication Pre defined protocol communication 6 Synchronization method Start stop synchronization method QJ71C24N R2 R4 so so eo 1290 2490 so so 14400 19200 28800 38400 57600 115200 230400 bps e Transmission speed 230400 bps is available for only CH1 Not available
8. 2 3 4 2 2 x1 When accessing other stations a module used for routing can access the following modules e CC Link IE controller network MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 network modules e Q series C24 Ethernet interface modules 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 2 4 Use with Basic Model QCPU This section describes the use of the Q series C24 with a Basic model QCPU 1 Available functions The following table indicates the functions that can be used when the Q series C24 is mounted with a Basic model QCPU Function Availability Communications using the MC protocol 1 Communications using non procedure protocol Data reception by interrupt program O Communications using the bidirectional protocol Communications using the pre defined protocol Communications using dedicated instructions o o Communications via public line etc modem function e Transmission o cate a Control __ DTRIDSR ER DR conto S o O Communications protocol switching o oo O Independent linked operation of each interface o o Initial setting and monitoring testing of setting values by the utility package o o o Connecting the GX Developer and GOT o o O Available x Not available x1 Communications are according to the MC protocol See the Reference Manual concerning the number of devices that can be accessed a
9. ccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeensieeess 5 3 5 1 5 Support for the QCPU remote password FUNCTION cceecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeceeseneeteeeeeieeess 5 4 5 2 Utilizing the MX Component w cci cccccececccccetecceedeeecceeceteeteectientiacedandiecuteeceedeteedeeesievdiensdsedienuinediedtieedieeeteedts 5 6 6 1 Data Reception from the External Device cccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeecaeeeeeaeeceaeessaeescaeeeseneeseaeenaeessaees 6 2 PET RRECCIVINGMEINOS aiea ch icdead eusdehangetagaanendeh E A E 6 2 6 1 2 The receive area and the received data list cc eeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeseeseeseesieeseesieesneesireteseee 6 6 6 1 3 Sequence program for data reception cccccecceceecceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeaeeeeaeeesaeeeeaeeseaeeecaeeesieeenseeeaes 6 11 6 1 4 Receive data Clea a a T r a ar a a a a a a a r a a Ea r aa Aa aa Aa arana aaa 6 14 6 1 5 How to detect reception Crrors ceccccescceeeceececeeeeneeceeeeeeaeeeceneesneeseaeeesacessaneesneeseaeeeseeseeesieeesans 6 17 6 1 6 Received data count and receive complete code settings ceceecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeetieeneetieeeieee 6 20 6 2 Sending Data to the External Device 0 eeeeeeneeeneeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeseaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeneeeaeeeatesas 6 22 6 25 1 TANSMISSION MEMOS e202 ginn ch buchen chicensneh ingen chi E lnghelons dans EE E 6 22 6 2 2 Arrangement and contents of the transmission area and the transmi
10. e Setting value fixed value of CPU abnormal monitoring is out of range e Read point of monitoring device is out of range e Setting value fixed value of CPU abnormal monitoring is out of range e The OS of the Q series C24 detected some error e Modem is connected to an incorrect channel CHn ERR Corrective action e Re execute the write operation If the error is generated again replace the module e Check and correct the contents of the external device transmit message and restart data communications e Recheck the switch setting on the Q series C24 e Review the program e Reset the Flash ROM write count address 24011 to 0 and restart data communications e Correct the communication protocol setting value MELSEC Q Non ie MC Bidire ctional dure defined e Correct the I O number of the module to which data is sent e Cancel the programmable controller CPU monitoring and perform the programmable controller CPU monitoring registration again e Correct the setting value of the cycle time units O O e Correct the setting value of the programmable controller CPU monitoring function e Correct the setting value of the transmission measure A e Correct the setting value of the registration point word byte e Correct the setting value of the programmable controller CPU abnormal monitoring Correct the setting value of the ransmission condition
11. Setting item Setting value al The data which can be changed is shown by Hff and the following byte Please specify the registering part of the control code as code Hex Ex 02C24503 in case of registering a 5 bytes of data ST 02H C24 ETX 03H User frame 1 H03e8 2 H03e9 3 H03ea 4 HO3eb 5 H03ec 6 H03ed HO3ee rn r Details r Flash ROM setting Weite to Save file module Readfiom Load fie Cannot execute test Close Make text file Setting item Buffer memory address H1 H2 hapt f User frame 1 to 200 Chapter 9 o o ooo User s Manual Application Use code to specify hexadecimal numbers in the control code registration field if QSCU is used for registering a user frame Example To register the 5 bytes of data STX 02H C24 and ETX 031 specify the following 02C24 03 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 9 4 2 Data for modem initialization registration Purpose Register the data for initializing the modem connected to the Q series C24 Operating procedure e Online operation Monitor screen Data for user modem initialization e Offline operation Flash ROM setting screen gt Data for user modem initialization Setting screen Data for modem connection la x Module information Module type Serial Communications Module Module model name QJ 71C24N Setting item S
12. 5 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE MELSEC COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 5 1 5 Support for the QCPU remote password function This section explains an overview of the remote password function when a remote password is set for the Q series C24 mounted to a QCPU See Chapter 3 of the User s Manual Application for a detailed explanation 1 Checking remote passwords If the following items are set to the QCPU using GX Developer the Q series C24 performs a remote password check whenever an external device accesses the programmable controller using the modem function of the Q series C24 a Setting by GX Developer When the remote password is set on the QCPU with the Q series C24 e When the Q series C24 is set to be subject to the remote password check b Access in which the remote password is checked The remote password is checked when the following access is attempted Access attempts to all programmable controllers of the local station the local station with the Q series C24 and other stations accessed via the local station are subject to the remote password checking The remote password is checked for validity of access to a programmable controller Data communication using the MC protocol e Access to the programmable controller using GX Developer x The remote password is not checked in data communication using the non procedure bi directional or pre defined protocol c Remote password to be checked The chec
13. 21531 0 No designation 1 or more Number to read points Monitoring condition designation judgment condition 8276 8532 For designation designation 20541 2154 of programmable 0 No designation Chapter 2 of controller CPU 1 or more Monitoring condition 0 Allowed User s Manual monitoring Monitoring condition value designation Application 8277 8533 A function No 1 At bit device 0 OFF 1 ON Ea 7 block At word device 0 to FFFFH Monitoring condition value monitoring Transmission pointer designation for condition device agreement transmission and non procedure data transmission 0 No designation 8278 8534 1 to 100 Output head point send from nth 2056n 21561 Send the user frames designated in the following transmission frame No designation areas from the designated pointer position address CH1 side BAH to 11DH CH2 side 15AH to 1BDH Output count designation for condition agreement 8279 8535 transmission and non procedure data transmission 20574 21575 1 to 100 Output count designate the number of frame transmissions Data No for connection designation for condition 8280 8536 agreement transmission and notification OBB8H to OBD5n 8001H to 801FH Data No for connection 3 SPEC Address Decimal Hex 8422 20E6x 8678 21E6x 8679 21E7x 8680 21E8x 20E74 8424 20E8x 8448 8449 2101 8450 2102H 8451 21031 8452 2104n 8453
14. After the BIDIN instruction is executed the user designated read completion signal MO comes on for 1 scan The reading of received data is performed by the programmable controller CPU Q series C24 Buffer memory Data reception result Receive data count When the received data count is larger than the allowable received data count only the data up to the allowable received data count will be stored and the excess data will be discarded 7 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 1 Receive data can also be read using interrupt programs For more details on reading receive data with interrupt programs see Chapter 4 of the User s Manual Application Note that if the reading of data received from the same interface is to be performed it is not possible to combine the reading of data received by the main program and reading of data received by the interrupt program Accordingly use one or the other of the above programs to read the data received The SPBUSY instruction is used to read the execution status when using a dedicated instruction See Chapter 10 More than one BIDIN instruction cannot be executed simultaneously Execute the next BIDIN instruction only after the execution of the first BIDIN instruction is completed If the communication data count is set in byte units and the receive data count is an odd byte when requesting the reading of receive dat
15. Number of transmission Monitoring condition arrival block No Section 9 6 8 Chapter 2 of User s Manual Application Pre defined protocol function error code Section 11 2 1 1 See Section 11 1 for the contents of the buffer memory 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 1 Devices a Set the word device of the programmable controller CPU which stores error and status information in the setting item field when using the auto refresh function between the Q series C24 and the programmable controller CPU b The devices used must be of the types X Y M L B T C ST D W R or ZR x If bit devices of types X Y M L or B are used a number that can be divided by 16 points e g X30 Y120 M16 etc should be specified The buffer memory data is stored in 16 point units from the specified device number e g if M16 is set data is stored from M16 to M31 c The device can be set to auto refresh for required information only 2 Writing auto refresh settings to QCPU and saving them in a file a Writing auto refresh settings to QCPU Use online programmable controller write function of GX Configurator SC or GX Developer b Saving in a file Use the file storage function shown in the file items in the parameter module selection screen shown in Section 9 3 2 of GX Configurator SC 1 The auto refresh settings are stored in the intelligent function module parameter
16. CH1 MC protocol monitor CH1 Transmission control and others system setting CH1 Transmission control a D panana aas CH1 MC protocol system setting CH1 MC protocol Witeto cave fie Cument value Monitoring module display CH1 Non procedure system setting CH1 Non procedure Cannot execute test Read tion Load fie Make text fle File save File read Close Stop monitor Erene lest Close x1 The selection menus for system setting registration are displayed by scrolling on the Monitor screen during online operation The selection buttons pertaining to flash ROM registration are displayed in blue on the screen 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC Setting Items MELSEC Q The following table shows the selection menus for system setting registration to be displayed Function User frame registration Data for modem initialization registration Resetting buffer memory flash ROM setting values to default values Flash ROM write allow prohibit setting Section 9 4 1 Section 9 4 2 Section 9 4 3 Section 9 4 4 Section 9 4 5 Section 9 4 6 Section 9 4 7 Section 9 4 8 Section 9 4 9 Section 9 4 10 Section 9 4 11 Section 9 4 12 Section 9 4 13 Section Remarks Can be used via online operation Can be used via offline operation Can be used only via online operation 1 The User s Manual Basic and GX Configurator SC s Help function provide the code li
17. D1 status address 255 2651 The following shows an example of a program that reads from the transmission sequence status input output signals X Y00 to X Y1F of the Q series C24 Example of FROM instruction Read command z oe x Reads the status of data communication nese on the CH1 side from address 255n FROMP H0 H265 Di Ki Reads the status of data communication on the CH2 side from address 265n b15 to bO The CH1 side is waiting to receive a command message and is using non procedure or bidirectional protocol 4 CH2 is accessing the programmable controller CPU upon reception of a command message 11 11 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 1 5 Reading the switch setting status This section explains how to read the switch setting status of the Q series C24 When GX Configurator SC is used check the status in the Monitor test others screen see Section 9 6 10 1 The switch settings can be changed when the mode is switched or when the UINI instruction is executed The station No setting can be changed only when the UINI instruction is executed For the mode switching refer to Chapter 15 of the User s Manual Application For the UINI instruction refer to Chapter 17 of the User s Manual Application 2 For the switch settings refer to Section 4 5 1 Setting status storage area The switch settings by GX Developer and setting error information are stor
18. ON Requesting error clear Section 9 6 11 ON Requesting error clear Modem initialization request standby request ON Requesting initialization Y11 6 Connection request l ON Requesting connection Y12 6 Modem disconnection request ON Requesting disconnection Y13 Use prohibited Y14 6 Notification pued request l OFF Requesting notification issuance Y15 YO Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7 Y8 Y9 YA YB YC YD YE YF Section 9 6 2 Application Chapter 3 Use prohibited Y16 Y17 Flash ROM read request Y18 Flash ROM write request ON Requesting Y19 Flash ROM system setting write request ON Requesting ON Requesting 3 SPECIFICATIONS Device Reference Signal description ee e CH1 Global signal ON Output instructed Section 3 10 xB CH2 Global signal ON Output instructed Reference System setting default completion xe ON Completed Section 9 4 12 Operating Manual Pre defined protocol support function section X1D 7 Pre defined protocol ready ON Ready XIE 4 Q series C24 Q series C24 ready ON Accessible ON Accessible Watchdog timer error WDT error X1F 5 ON Module error occurred OFF Module being normally operated MELSEC Q Device fig Reference Signal description section ri da System setting default request f ON Requesting Section 9 4 12 number Use prohibited x1 The device does not turn on off by execution of a dedicated
19. d Help items Code table Product information a dialog asking for file saving will appear Saves the parameter file Deletes the parameter file Close this screen Activates the Select monitor test module screen Reads intelligent function module parameters from the CPU module Writes intelligent function module parameters to the CPU module Starts the flash ROM setting screen Displays the ASCII code list Use this list as reference when setting data Displays the version information of the intelligent function module utility 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 1 Saving intelligent function module parameters in a file Since files cannot be saved using the GX Developer project saving operation save the files using the Select a target intelligent function module screen shown above Reading writing intelligent function module parameters from to a programmable controller using GX Developer a Intelligent function module parameters can be read from and written into a programmable controller after having been saved in a file Set a target programmable controller CPU in GX Developer Online Transfer setup Perform Write to PLC for the intelligent function module parameters in a multiple CPU system only to the control CPU of the Q series C24 Use GX Developer to perform Read from PLC Write to PLC operations for the intelligent function module parameters at the remote I O
20. 1 11 17 x1 Create a program in which data communication processing will not be performed while the interlock signal for communication stop M100 is ON Precautions a Execute the programmable controller CPU information clear after communication with the external device is stopped And do not perform communication with the external device during the programmable controller CPU information clear processing If any data are received from the external device during the clear processing the data will be discarded When a modem is connected cut off the line linked with the external device before executing the programmable controller CPU information clear The line is cut off at execution of the programmable controller CPU information clear b c Do not execute the UINI instruction during the programmable controller CPU information clear If the programmable controller CPU information clear is attempted during execution of the UINI instruction the clear processing will be executed after completion of the UINI instruction 11 17 11 TROUBLESHOOTIN Sea MELSEC Q 11 2 Error Code Tables The following shows the error codes error contents and corrective action for errors that are generated during communication between the Q series C24 and an external device The signal name in the following table indicates the CHO side LED on status or communication error status that is stored into buffer memory address 201H 2
21. 1 Initial settings for communication using the MC protocol Setting the unit of data length sent by the on demand function Word byte units designation addresses 150 96H 310 136h e Setting the buffer memory used by the on demand function Buffer memory head address designation addresses 160 A0H 320 140n Transmission buffer memory length designation addresses 163 A3H 323 143H 2 Initial settings for communication using the non procedure bidirectional protocols e Setting the unit of data length to be sent and received Word byte units designation addresses 150 96H 310 136h Setting the transmission area Transmission buffer memory head address designation addresses 162 A2H 322 142H Transmission buffer memory length designation addresses 163 A3H 323 143H Setting the reception area Receive buffer memory head address designation addresses 166 A6H 326 146H Receive buffer memory length designation addresses 167 A7H 327 147h For more details on the registration operation by GX Configurator SC see the explanation of the system settings of the corresponding protocol in Sections 9 4 5 to 9 4 8 For more details on the CSET instruction see Section 17 4 of the User s Manual Application PECIFICATION eS A ae MELSEC Q Address a Pane Initial Protocol Reference Decimal Hex Application Name valie Registration Section mc non Bi Pa Communication error clear request for
22. 1 To turn off only the ERR LED write a 1 to the Communication error clear request and to turn LED off address 0H 1h 2 To turn off the ERR LED and clear the error code turn ON the ERR clear request YE YF Example To perform the ERR LED OFF and the error code clear on the CH1 side Read command MI YOE XOE 7 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 2 Confirmation using the module and GX Configurator SC 1 2 Confirmation using the display LED When the Q series C24 detects an error including a reception error the ERR LED lights up See Chapter 11 Confirmation using GX Configurator SC e The monitor function is used to check for errors See Sections 9 6 3 and 9 6 6 e The ERR LED is turned off with the ERR LED OFF function See Section 9 6 11 Confirming the error code Use one of the following to confirm the error code GX Configurator SC monitor function See Section 9 6 6 e GX Developer buffer memory monitor function monitors addresses 257H 267H 7 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 7 3 Processing when Simultaneous Transmission Performed During Full Duplex Communications This section explains the processing when simultaneous transmissions occur in full duplex communication 7 3 1 Processing when simultaneous transmissions occur This section explains the processing performed by the Q series C24 when the external device an
23. 4 D sub 9 pin male screw type 5 h O 98 3 86 in H X 27 4 1 08 in W X 90 3 54 in D mm 0 20kg 0 44lb 1 Set to transfer data with external devices using a full duplex communication system when the Q series C24 is started For switching to a half duplex communication system refer to the User s Manual Application 2 Indicates possible combinations when connecting the programmable controller CPU and external devices external device side programmable controller CPU side The total number of n and m n is up to 32 stations 3 In order to use the Q series C24 it is necessary to set the GX Developer switches To set the GX Developer switches refer to Section 4 5 4 Recommended cables SPEV SB MPC 0 2 X 3P and SPEV SB 0 2 X 3P are equivalent in the electrical characteristics but partially different in the outside diameter internal wire colors etc 5 See Section 3 2 1 3 for the recommended connector x6 Pre defined protocol communication is available for the QJ71C24N QJ71C24N R2 and QU71C24N R4 3 2 3 2 PECIFICATION ees aie MELSEC Q 3 2 RS 232 Interface Specification The following shows the RS 232 interface specifications 3 2 1 RS 232 connector specifications The following shows the specifications of the RS 232 connector that connects the Q series C24 to an external device Sid Signal direction Finnumber ereh Signal name C24
24. 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC 9 1 to 9 56 9 1 Functions Available with Utility Package ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeesaeeeaeeereeaeeeaeesas 9 3 9 2 Installing and Uninstalling the Utility Package ooo cece ee cent tent eeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeaeeeaeesas 9 4 9 271 Handling precautions 2 sa cetie aiieiana dia dadadida aan N ia eeu ae ace 9 4 9 2 2 Operating environment anas ae AA AA EA NEE ead eateries AA qaeed 9 7 9 3 Utility Package Operation ceccccessceeccestensccestceeccestensecestensecestansecnstenseeestensecestensecesterseecseenseeestenseeeszenses 9 9 9 3 1 Operation OVEPVIOW e a a r aa a aar aa a a ar aaa raar e rra aa a aeaa Trea aain aeeai 9 9 9 3 2 Starting the Intelligent function module utility oo eee eee eee teee tees eeeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseaeseneeeateneeeaes 9 13 9 3 3 Common utility package operations eeceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeaeeseeeeesaeeseeseesieesieesieesieesieeteesieee 9 16 9 4 System Registration to Flash ROM ecceeceeseeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeseaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeesaeesaeeereeaeeeaeeeas 9 19 94 1 User frame registration 22 2 A dadehiti debasisdas Gudivada 9 21 9 4 2 Data for modem initialization registration eeeceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeseesieeseesieesieesieeneesieees 9 22 9 4 3 Data for modem connection registration ceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseesieesieesieesieesieesiresienae
25. Data for modem connection Setting screen MEE r Module information Module type Serial Communications Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name QJ71C24N Setting item Setting value 4 Data for modem connection 1 H0bb8 No notification Pager receiver designation Telephone number Extemal line dialing No external line dialing z Line types Pulse Wait time for message transmission units sec J Message Comment Data for modem connection 2 H0bb9 No notification Pager receiver designation Telephone number Extemal line dialing No external line dialing v Line types Pulse a4 r Flash ROM setting Details Sis ta Save file module 2 Select input Read ftom oad fie Lee LI No notification Notification Make text file Execute test Close Setting items Item SHS eee Addres Reference section i Pager receiver designation Telephone number External line dialing ee are apter 3 o Line t Ine types User s Manual Application Wait time for message transmission units s Message Comment 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 9 4 4 Modem function system setting registration Purpose For data communication using the modem function register system setting values Operating procedure e Online operation Monitor screen Modem function system setting e Offline operation Flash ROM setting screen Modem function system setting Set
26. Procedure 1 Connecting the Q series C24 to an external device Turn off the power to the station on which the Q series C24 is installed and connect a communication cable to an external device to perform data communication using the MC protocol see Section 4 4 Procedure 2 Switch setting with GX Developer 1 Set the switch settings with GX Developer as shown in Section 4 5 and write the parameters to the programmable controller CPU in order to perform data communication using the MC protocol 2 The following shows an example of the settings when performing a loopback test on the interface on the CH1 side e Switch 1 0544H Transmission Operation setting Independent operation setting Data bit 7 bit Parity bit Yes odd Stop bit 1 bit Sum check code No Write during RUN _ Allowed Setting modification Prohibited Communication rate setting 9600 bps e Switch 2 00014 Communication protocol setting MC protocol format 1 e Switch 3 0000H e Switch 4 0000H e Switch 5 0000 Station number setting 0 station Procedure 3 Performing a loopback test 1 Set the programmable controller CPU to STOP status and turn the power on or reset the CPU communication is enabled in about one second 2 Create a program for a loopback test on the external device side and send a command message like the one in the example below to the Q series C24 The commands used are as follows When performing communication test in an
27. Set data Setting range Set by S2 0 Execution type Select 0 1 o u User The execution result at the completion of the instruction is stored Complete status 0 Normal System Other than 0 Abnormal error code Cer p p 4 Receive data clear request S2 3 to For system System S2 111 1 See the Error explanation on the following page for details on errors caused by wrong data specifications by the user 2 The setting sides are partitioned as follows e User Data set by the user before executing the dedicated instruction e System The programmable controller CPU stores the execution result of the dedicated instruction 10 23 10 23 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Function 10 24 MELSEC Q 1 This function clears reception data in the OS area It does not clear the user data reception area in the buffer memory 2 Ifthe CSET instruction is executed while the reception data read request X3 XA or reception abnormal detection signal X4 XB is turned on the CSET instruction is kept waiting until the signal is turned off 3 Simultaneous execution of dedicated instructions The following table shows the handling for when executing another instruction during execution of the CSET instruction or executing the CSET instruction during execution of another instruction in the same channel Availability of simultaneous Handling of simultaneous execution execution Instruction 1 ONDEMAND Dedicate
28. Write to Save fik Current value a module ner display Cannot execute test mae tse Load file Make text file Close Stop monitor Monitor item Buffer E address Item Reference section BAn to 15A1 to Chapters 9 through 11 of Output frame No designation 1st to 100th 11DH 1BDuH User s Manual Application 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 9 6 10 Monitor test others Purpose Monitor the result of access to the flash ROM the data communication status of each interface and the result of the intelligent function module switch settings using GX Developer Operating procedure Monitor screen gt Monitor test others Monitor Test screen Monitor test others E as ae am eee Start monitor 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q Monitor Test items eee ffer eH a address Flash ROM access register read delete result ata Station No Switch setting Station No Instruction setting 201H 2024 Communication error clear request for CH1 and to turn LED off oon NEU LED status ERR LED status Communication error clear request for CH2 and to turn LED off CH1 Communication protocol setting No error CH1 Transmission speed setting error 203H CH1 Mode switching error of setting change prohibit time CH2 Communication protocol setting No error CH2 Transmission speed setting error 203H CH2 Mode switching error of s
29. a i E bo LN L te Lt I bet J J MELSEC Q Changes the registration command into pulses Sets the registration instruction Sets the frame No Sets the number of data bytes registered Sets the user frame Transfers the setting values to the flash ROM access area of the buffer memory registration instruction and frame No Registration instruction 2 Abnormal completion of REMTO instruction Transfers the setting values to the flash ROM access area of the buffer memory number of registered data bytes and later Sets the registration flag Abnormal completion of REMTO instruction Turns ON the flash ROM write request signal Registration result acquisition command Reads the registration result from the flash ROM access area of the buffer memory to D2 Normal completion of REMFR instruction Abnormal completion of REMFR instruction Turns OFF the flash ROM write request signal Resets the registration flag App 53 APPENDIXE Z MELSEC Q Appendix 9 10 When reading user frame The following program example reads a user frame registered to the flash ROM of the Q series C24 using the REMFR REMTO instruction and I O signals Refer to Section 9 4 of the User s Manual Application for details It is recommended to use GX Configurator SC when reading a user frame registered to the flash ROM of the Q series C24 Refer to Chapter 8 1 Program conditions Th
30. e The buffer memory monitor screen of GX Developer see the GX Developer Manual for the operation method When checking errors in the buffer memory monitor screen of GX Developer monitor the following buffer memory Check the error descriptions on the screens by bit decoding the monitored value 16 bit integer Each bit corresponds to the following error description Buffer memory monitored Address CH1 side CH2 side CH1 CH2 side Description when corresponding bit is on Corrective action cae Tas location 2014 2024 ee a as eee When linked operation Transmission setting error_ Oo e RO fen Protocol setti PERA P g rotocol setting error see Section 4 5 2 poss When indepenctont pt NT operation setting Protocol setting error b5 to b O a en ooo e a b7 nu Test completed Pp l b8 to b13 See CH2ERR RAMerror et b14 Setting station Review Te a Out of the setting station number range Ees DE eee eal eee Section 4 5 2 CH1ERR ERR DOO O ROMerr o O error hoe n x1 x1 T your nearest dealer 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q Procedure 4 Ending a ROM RAM switch test 1 Perform the following procedures after checking normal completion abnormal completion of the test results Normal completion Perform operation 2 to finish tests Upon error occurrence When an error occurs in a switch check or linked operation setting check set the correct value
31. programs for communications between the QJ71C24N R2 R4 and external device can be debugged In the Protocol execution log window the protocol name start and end dates and times and result of each execution can be monitored The circuit trace function allows tracing of send receive packet data and the signal line status By the State monitor the error status and signal lines of the QJ71C24N R2 R4 can be monitored 1 VERVIEW MELSEC Q 5 Monitoring the programmable controller CPU Details are explained in the User s Manual Application a The self station s programmable controller CPU can be monitored at time intervals set by the user without using a sequence program 1 The following monitoring information can be sent notified as the result of monitoring the programmable controller CPU Transmission of information on devices and the programmable controller CPU status to be monitored It is also possible to send the monitoring information through combined use of the modem function e Notification of a notification message string data registered as the connection data of the modem function through combined use of the modem function 2 The user can select either one of the following timing choices at which to send the programmable controller CPU monitoring result to the external device e Send notify every time the programmable controller CPU is monitored periodic transmission e Send notify when the informa
32. 1 If data is not received by user frame a sequence program that ignores the receive data other than the receive data addressed to the local station by sequence program including the data indicating the objective programmable controller CPU in the message must be written Sample message Example T Station Station SDE SPREE S No0 li No 2 cin a Data eR LE 02 20h 32h 32h 0Du OAn x1 See chapter 11 of User s Manual Application 6 30 6 30 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 4 Retry processing for data reception errors The data when reception error occurred is discarded and only the data for the normal reception is taken into the Q series C24 For this reason the reception message may be missing data when an error occurs To assure the correct transmission and reception of data it is recommended that a normal error response message is received and a response message reception timeout check is conducted for data transmitted between the programmable controller CPU and the external equipment and that measures be taken when an error message is received or when an error timeout occurs such as retransmitting the data transmission retry 7 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 7 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL Data communication using the bidirectional protocol is a function for sending receiving any data using the message format and t
33. After the intelligent function module parameters have been written to the CPU module it enables the auto refresh setting by turning the power OFF ON or by resetting the CPU module 2 The auto refresh settings cannot be changed from the sequence program However it is possible to add a process similar to auto refresh by using the FROM TO command of the sequence program 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 7 Individual Station Test After installing the Q series C24 to the base unit of QCPU perform an individual station test first to check the switch setting see Section 4 5 2 and operation of the Q series C24 1 When a problem occurs during data communication with an external device perform an individual station test as described in this section to check whether or not there is any problem in the operation of the Q series C24 In order to avoid problems set the programmable controller CPU to STOP status during the individual station test Test both interfaces of the Q series C24 simultaneously in an individual station loopback test Alternatively either one of the interfaces can be tested in an individual station loopback test In that case ignore the test results on the interface side for which the test is not performed Cable removal and reconnection before and after the individual station loopback test should be performed with the power to the Q series C24 mounting station turned off To
34. Fuse Status oo Input Type Status of 1 0 Address Verify Agree Remote password setting status Nothing r Eror Display 1 I7F68 HEX C DEC 2 7F68 E TAOTI 3 7F68 4 7F68 The display sequence of the error history is from the oldest error 5 7F68 The latest error is displayed in the line as under __ _ ____ Display loa aeaee marren Tose Ener 7F68 l r Error contents Disposal Contents Framing error a Data does not match the stop bit setting A malfunction occurred in the network because the power source of the xl Disposal Match the Q series C24 and external device settings Clear the error information according to the error information initialization request YE ZYF In addition when communicating data with the non procedure protocol execute the INPUT instruction and read and discard the unnecessary data xi HZW Information Stop monitor Close 11 1 11 1 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Displays e Module The following information is displayed Module name The name of the module installed I O Address The start input output signal number of the target module Implementation Position The slot position where the module is mounted Product information Product information x The last character of the product information indicates the function version of the module Example If the last character is B it means that the
35. I l RI RDB RDB Roa E SG SG _ l SG pi I FO ype EG Qe FG VARADI LA FG RS 422 485 RS 422 485 RS 422 485 cable cable cable Terminal resistor c External device and Q series C24 with n 1 multidrop system configuration External device 1 External device 2 External device n C24 1 E o ana OSA ae GRE SaNa mis a ty SDA SDA it n SDA 1 SDB SDB SDB RDA RDA P RDA CRI RDB RDB Ti CRI RDB SG SG JH It SG Vi PGs gna spite FG iy ed FG Genep a FG RS 422 485 RS 422 485 RS 422 485 cable cable cable LR Terminal resistor 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION External device 1 MELSEC Q d External device and Q series C24 with m n multidrop system configuration 1 Connection example 1 External device 2 RS 232 SD RD ae LA I i I 1 Io I l Ll l i Ved I VAES SAN oT RS 422 485 cable 2 Connection example 2 External device 1 SDA SDB C24 1 RDA RDB SG RI FG RS 422 485 cable cable RS 422 485 C24 2 SDA SDB RDA RDB SG FG External device 2 LR Terminal resistor C24n Py e Voi al in Lt f SDA l t SDB a RDA CRI poe oes Et eas a SG Ud l V gt FG RS 422 485 cable CR Terminal resistor 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 5 Settings for GX Developer This chapter explains various settings via GX Developer
36. If the setting of one side is data bit length 7 bits and with parity and the setting of the te Data does not match other side is data length 8 bits and without the parity bit setting parity the number of transmission receive bits will be the same and the data will sent e Data that cannot be and receive without generating an error decoded was i csived settings do not match transmission rates e With a multidrop link e Check if the terminal resistor 110 Q or the terminal resistor is 330 Q in case of the Q series C24 is not connected connected to the stations at both ends of the correctly link e When CH1 and CH2 e When using CH1 and CH2 independently are used to the linked check that the Q series C24 is not in the mode there is an linked mode interface without cable e When using CH1 and CH2 in the linked connection mode also connect the cable to both of the interfaces If the cable is not connected to one of the interfaces when CH1 and CH2 are used in the linked mode noise may enter and destroy the data and Data cannot be decoded or Communication error cause may occur 11 51 11 51 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 3 15 Whether the communication error is caused on the Q series C24 or external device is unclear Symptom Corrective action Bidirectional procedure Pre defined Test the Q series C24 as described below to check where the cause is 1 Check the hardware Th
37. Make the length of the data area in the message to be transmitted and received the size of the Q series C24 buffer memory transmission data designation area and receive data storage area or less NAK code response 1 Response from the Q series C24 to external device After the error detection message reception complete it transmits the NAK code to the external device 2 Response from external device to the Q series C24 Transmit the error code 0022H to 005FH immediately after the NAK response 7 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 1 Perform error processing according to the error code received immediately after the NAK message at the device that received NAK as the response message after data transmission Chapter 11 shows the error codes that are transmitted from the Q series C24 If the Q series C24 receives an NAK response while transmitting data to an external device it completes data transmission then reads the NAK perform abnormal completion If the Q series C24 detects an error while receiving data it ignores the receive data corresponding to the data length If the data length is abnormal the Q series C24 ignores all the data up to the receive message head data ENQ etc received thereafter 5 External device time out check When checking time out up to reception of the response message at the external device during data transmission from external device to the Q series C24 mak
38. Procedure 11 2 Data Reception 11 3 Receive Program 11 4 Data Transmission 11 5 Transmission Program 12 TRANSPARENT CODES AND ADDITIONAL CODES 12 1 Handling the Transparent Code and Additional Code Data 12 2 Registering Transparent Codes and Additional Codes 12 3 Handling Transparent Codes and Additional Codes during Non Procedure Protocol Data Communication 12 4 Example of Data Communication Using the Non Procedure Protocol 12 5 Handling Transparent Codes and Additional Codes During Bidirectional Protocol Data Communication 12 6 Example of Data Communication Using the Bidirectional Protocol A 14 13 COMMUNICATING WITH ASCII CODE ASCII BIN CONVERSION 13 1 ASCII BIN Conversion 13 2 Settings for ASCII BIN Conversion 13 3 Performing ASCII BIN Conversion for Data Communicated via Non Procedure Protocol 13 4 Example of Data Communication Using the Non Procedure Protocol 13 5 Performing ASCII BIN Conversion for Data Communicated via the Bidirectional Protocol 13 6 Example of Data Communication Using the Bidirectional Protocol 14 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING EXTERNAL DEVICE AND PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU M N CONFIGURATION 14 1 Data Communications Precautions 14 2 External Devices Interlock Conditions 14 3 Examples of Procedure for Data Communications with the Programmable Controller CPU 15 SWITCHING THE MODE AFTER STARTING 15 1 Mode Switching Operation and Contents that can be Changed 15 2 Mode Switching
39. Reads communication protocol setting and transmission setting description on CH2 from addresses 2604 to 261n Error description 1 Communication protocol number setting error Setting station number of the Q series C24 0 Communication protocol setting number 9 transmission setting description Communication protocol setting number 1 transmission setting description Displays communication protocol number setting error status on the CH1 side 11 13 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 1 6 How to read the current operation status This section explains how to read the current operation status of the Q series C24 When GX Configurator SC is used check the status in the Transmission control and others monitor test screen see Section 9 6 3 e The status of the switch settings by GX Developer can be checked by performing read operations as described in Section 11 1 5 e Refer to Section 4 5 for the switch settings 1 Operation mode status storage area The current operation status of the Q series C24 is stored into the following buffer memory areas 1 Station No instruction setting address 24Fn b15 to bO Buffer memory address 24Fu 0 to 31 Station No 2 Communication protocol status address 252H 262n b15 to bO Buffer memory address 252 0to9 Information on the CH1 side 262H 0 to 7 9 Information on the CH2 side Mode number currently operating 3 Transmission status add
40. Step 2 back into the system and register the system setting data to the flash ROM of the Q series C24 using the Write to module function of GX Configurator SC lt Operation procedure when replacing the QCPU gt Step 1 Read the PLC parameters with GX Developer from the QCPU and save them Step 2 Replace the QCPU See the user s manual for QCPU Step 3 Register the PLC parameter saved by GX Developer back into the QCPU again 1 It is recommended to record and save the system setting parameters not only when replacing the module but also when changing the system setting parameters using GX Configurator SC 5 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE MELSEC COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 5 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE MELSEC COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL This chapter explains an overview of the MELSEC communication protocol hereinafter abbreviated as the MC protocol See the following manual for a detailed explanation of the data communication functions that are available when using the MC protocol Q Corresponding MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual SH 080008 5 1 Data Communication Functions The MELSEC protocol MC protocol is a communication system for the Q series programmable controllers Using this protocol the external devices can read or write device data and programs for the programmable controller CPUs via the Q series C24 or Q series Ethernet interface module Any external devices on which application programs
41. gt External device 1 CD Carrier detect lt 2 RD RXD Receive data t 3 SD TXD Send data 4 DTR ER Data terminal ready 5 SG Signal ground gt 6 DSR DR Dataset ready o 7 RS RTS Request to send d 8 CS CTS Clear to send o 9 RI CI Call Indicate SS 1 The control signals are described below The pin numbers of the connector are enclosed in parentheses 1 CD signal 1 The Q series C24 operates according to the setting CD terminal check see Section 9 4 5 of the Q series C24 Po CD terminal check enabled CD terminal check disabled The Q series C24 performs send and receive The Q series C24 performs send and receive processing when the CD signal receive processing regardless of the ON OFF status Full duplex carrier detection is ON of the CD signal communication e If the CD signal is turned off during data e Data communications is possible with an communication the Q series C24 initializes external device that cannot turn the CD the transmission sequence signal ON OFF Half duplex etek Tiea ee See Chapter 8 of User s Manual Application Setting impossible communication 2 RD signal This is a signal to receive data 3 SD signal This is a signal to send data PECIFICATION ea MELSEC Q 4 DTR signal 4 e When communicating data using the non procedure protocol the Q series C24 turns on or off on when data is receivable depending on the amount
42. information contained in the message messages of any size can be sent from the external device Programmable controller CPU Q series C24 Sequence Buffer memory eis program Receive area 2 4 Arbitrary data Read request When normal ENQ Data length Data area Sum check code 3 When abnormal 00H to FFn Read Ignored BIDIN n L instructions Arbitrary data 4 00H to FFH Contents CH1 CH2 Control Timing X3 XA Reception data read request BIDIN instruction completion device BIDIN instruction 7 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 1 When the control code ENQ is received the Q series C24 starts data reception processing When the data specified by the data length is received the Q series C24 ends the reception processing of that data If Sum check is set with GX Developer the Q series C24 checks whether the message is normal or abnormal using the sum check code received immediately after the message and the sum check code calculated by internal processing If No sum check is set with GX Developer messages are not checked using the sum check codes If the message has normally been received the reception data read request X3 XA turns ON If an error has been detected when receiving the message the Q series C24 sends an abnormal end response NAK message to the external devic
43. interrupted 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Description Error code Hexa Error decimal Data does not match the stop bit setting A malfunction occurred in the network because the power source of the 7F68H Framing error partner station was on or off Noise occurs in the network When the multidrop was connected data was transmitted simultaneously by ce multiple devices Data does not match the parity bit setting A malfunction occurred in the network because the power source of the Parity error partner station was on or off Noise occurs in the network When the multidrop was connected data was transmitted simultaneously by multiple devices 7F69u 7F6Au Buffer full error 7F6Bu CD signal control error 7F6C Transmission error OS receive buffer overflowed and receive data was skipped Data was received when CD signal is OFF when CD terminal check enabled was designated Data cannot be sent because the line is not connected 11 27 MELSEC Q Protocol Corrective action pea Bidire MC Proce _ ctional dure Match the Q series C24 and external device settings Clear the error information according to the ERR clear request YE YF In addition when communicating data with the non procedure protocol execute the INPUT instruction and read and discard the unnecessary data Measure the noise When connecting the multidrop remove the interlock so that data will not be transmitted simultaneousl
44. of digits defined protocol is executed the ERR LED turns on 2 When an error check code exists in the receive packet check for an error in the setting of Processing method Code type Data length Data flow Complement calculation or Calculating range 3 When Length exists in the receive packet and a conversion variable is included in the calculating range of the Length check for an error in Code type Data length Data flow or Calculating range set for the Length An expected packet was e Using Circuit trace communication data not received anda monitoring function of GX Configurator SC monitoring timeout error Pre defined protocol support function occurred check the data sent from the external device If the data sent from the external device is correct take measures according to Sections 11 3 11 and 11 3 12 e A communication error e Confirm the error by the system monitor occurs and remove the cause of the error 11 47 11 47 11 TROUBLESHOOTIN See MELSEC Q When the ERR LED is turned on an error code is stored in the following buffer memory Switch setting error or Mode Switch setting error and mode switching error area address 203h switching error On demand execution error On demand execution result area address 256H 266H Data transmission result area address 257H 267H Data reception error Data reception result area address 258H 268n Modem function error Modem f
45. or longer after the high impedance set by the operations described in 1 and 2 above is reset e Transmission processing completion timing The following times are necessary as H W gate OFF time from the time that data transmission is completed until transmission processing is completed the state changes to the high impedance state The transmission rate set in the Q Series C24 is the object When the transmission rate is 600 bps or higher Data transfer time of less than 1 bit When the transmission rate is 50 bps 300 bps several ms Output control input sa a External device Q series C24 Output control input pa a mark for 2 characters or longer Data send time range H W gate OFF time aran See explanation above Output control input Output control input ON time range OFF time range Low impedance state High impedance state gt lt 1 he Q series C24 is in the data Q series C24 is in the data transmission and data reception enable state reception enable status 3 SPECIFICATIONS 2 MELSEC Q When the external device and the Q series C24 connected in n 1 and m n configurations When the send signal of each device is connected as shown below if the Output control input is turned ON at two or more devices the relevant devices output send data at the same time For the external device to transfer data normally e Output control input must be turned ON only whe
46. 1 In case of operation errors the error flag SMO turns on and the error code is stored in SDO See one of the following manuals according to the error code and check and correct the error lt Error code gt 4FFFu or less QCPU Q Mode User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 7000H or more Section 11 2 of the User s Manual Basic Program example The following example shows a program that sends any data stored in D11 to D15 using the bidirectional protocol When the input output signals of the Q series C24 are from X Y00 to X Y1F fi PLs 450 Transmission command is converted to pulse M50 _ t M0OV ABCDEFG 11 Transmission data is stored Mov HOAOD 15 1 aa KI g Designate the number of the interface I CHD that will send the data Hoy Ko 1 Clear the transmission result storage device J to 0 Designate the transmission data count in p _ i AMA ___ tov KS 2 word units Designate K10 when the unit is bytes Fr BDU Ud DO D11 Mo The transmission data stored in the designated device is sent Mi After the BIDOUT instruction is executed t SET M101 the user designated transmission complete signal M1 turns ON for one scan M1 Storing the transmission data and writing the J transmission data count in the buffer memory and issuing a transmission request SET W102 to Q series C24 are all executed by the programmable con
47. 1 3 6 3 9 Section 4 2 4 4 1 2 a Figure 4 6 1 Chapter 5 all Section 6 1 1 6 1 3 6 1 4 Section 7 1 1 7 1 2 7 2 2 Section 8 1 8 2 1 8 2 2 8 3 1 8 3 2 Section 9 2 to 9 7 Section 10 1 1 10 2 1 10 3 8 10 3 18 Appendix 1 1 2 Appendix 2 all Appendix 3 2 Appendix 7 Appendix 8 Addition Entire manual add the explanation on MELSECNET H remote I O station The Manual s Use and Structure Section 2 1 Section 3 1 Table Section 4 4 2 1 d 4 9 2 Section 8 3 2 POINT Section 10 2 1 7164H 7E70H Appendix 3 1 Put Windows base software product together from Mitsubishi Programmable Controller MELSEC Series to Mitsubishi integrated FA Software MELSOFT Series Standardize the name from software package GPP function to Product name GX Developer Standardize the name from utility package QSCU to Product name GX Configurator SC Correction Conformation to the EMC Directive and Low Voltage Instruction About the Generic Terms and Abbreviations Product Configuration Program Examples Section 6 1 4 6 2 3 Section 7 2 3 Section 9 3 9 5 Appendix Section 1 2 1 d 1 2 4 b Diagram 1 2 8 b 1 3 Section 2 1 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 7 Section 3 1 Table 3 2 1 3 3 3 3 2 3 4 Table 3 9 Section 4 3 4 5 2 Section 5 1 5 3 5 2 Section 6 1 4 Section 8 2 8 3 2 POINT 8 4 2 8 4 9 Table 8 6 3 Table 8 6 7 Table Section 10 1 2 b 10 3 Table Appendix 1 1 2 1 6 7 9 Addition Se
48. 1 To turn off only the ERR LED write 1 to the LED off Communication error clear request address 0H 1H 2 To turn off the ERR LED and clear the error code turn ON the ERR clear request YE YF Example To perform the ERR LED OFF and the error code clear on the CH1 side OUTPUT instruction Complete device 1 M1 1 XOE YOE 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 2 Confirmation using the module and GX Configurator SC 1 Confirmation using the display LED When the Q series C24 detects an error including a transmission error the ERR LED lights up See Chapter 11 2 Confirmation using the GX Configurator SC e The monitor function is used to check for errors See Sections 9 6 3 and 9 6 5 The ERR LED is turned off with the ERR LED OFF function See Section 9 6 11 3 Confirming the error code Use one of the following to confirm the error code GX Configurator SC monitor function See Section 9 6 5 e GX Developer buffer memory monitor function monitors addresses 257H 267h When a transmission error occurs the programmable controller CPU may not transmit all the designated data It is recommended that data communications be performed by establishing a user arbitrary communication procedure that can check normal transmission by reception of a response to data transmission 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 6 3 Data Communications
49. 4 3 44 4 5 Control Procedures and Message Formats Contents of the Data Designation Items List of Commands and Functions for QnA Compatible 2C Frames Precautions on the Data Communication Example of Data Communication Using QnA Compatible 2C Frames 5 WHEN COMMUNICATING USING THE A CO 5 5 MPATIBLE 1C FRAMES Control Procedures and Message Formats Device Memory Read Write Extension File Register Read and Write Reading and Writing in the Buffer Memory of an Intelligent Function Module Loopback Test 6 WHEN COMMUNICATING USING THE A CO 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 MPATIBLE 1E FRAMES Message Formats and Control Procedures List of Commands and Functions for A Compatible 1E Frames Device Memory Read Write Extension File Register Read and Write Reading and Writing in the Buffer Memory of an Intelligent Function Module APPENDIX Appendix 1 Reading and Writing by Designation of the Device Memory Extension Appendix 2 Reading from and Writing to the Buffer Memory Appendix 3 Processing Time of the Programmable Controller CPU Side While Communicating Using the MC Protocol About Manuals The following table lists the manuals relating to this product Please order the desired manual s as needed Related manuals Manual Number Manual Name Model Code Q Corresponding Serial Communication Module User s Manual Application This manual explains the specifications and operating procedures for the special
50. 485 interface specification 3 6 RUN LED inniinn iian 10 34 Remote password check 06 1 11 5 4 Index 2 T U 1 Serial communication module 065 1 1 Setting for GX Developer 4 14 Settings and procedures prior to operation tlinaded E E indians EEE 4 2 Simultaneous transmissions ee 7 24 SlOhnniane ana aa ada 11 45 SP BUG T eoar AR 10 21 Starting the utility ee eeeeeeeeeeeeees 9 13 Station number setting cesses 4 19 SUM check code 4 17 Switch Setting osacmnirianniinn 4 15 System configuration cc eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 2 5 System registration to flash ROM 9 19 Transmission area bidirectional 7 16 Transmission area non procedure 6 23 Transmission data bidirectional 7 18 Transmission data non procedure 6 25 Transmission methods bidirectional 7 15 Transmission methods non procedure 6 22 Transmission Setting ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 16 Transmission specification c00c 3 1 Troubleshooting 0 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeetetereteeeeeees 11 1 Uninstalling utility package 0 eee 9 4 Utility PACKAGE eee eee eeteeeeteteteeeteeeteeeeeeteees 9 1 Utility package operation eects 9 9 1 1 system configuration ceceeeees 2 5 TN gi EE EEEE EE T REE REET E E 2 6 Index 2 WARRANTY Please confirm the following product warranty details before using
51. 7 Data transmission reception is performed using dedicated instructions 3 The external device can transmit or receive data in the same way as the UC24 C24 S8 5 Others 1 The Q series C24 has other functions that are equivalent to those of UC24 C24 S8 which are not mentioned above 2 Check functions and specifications in this manual and the manuals listed below and use the applicable functions e User s Manual Application e Reference Manual App 13 App 13 APPENDIXE MELSEC Q Appendix 2 3 2 Installing the Q series C24 into existing systems This section shows the notes when installing the Q series C24 into an existing system that uses UC24 C24 S8 1 Data communication using m n connection When the Q series C24 is installed into an existing system that has an m n system structure between the programmable controller CPU and external devices and data communication is performed using the MC protocol the following notes should be considered a Accessing the programmable controller using a frame for form 5 When the UC24 C24 S8 is connected on the line it is not possible to access the programmable controller in the QnA compatible 4C frame form 5 for binary code communication b Data communication between external devices 1 When data communication is performed in order to link with an external devices to perform a 1 1 communication with the programmable controller CPU it is necessary to change the statio
52. A compatible 1C frame TT command for an example see the following page When performing communication test in a QnA compatible frame 0619 command See the Reference Manual when performing communication tests in a QnA compatible frame Procedure 4 Checking loopback test result 1 The Q series C24 sends a response message to the external device when it receives a loopback test command message The Q series C24 sends the external device the received data as is 2 Check on the external device whether the data received from the Q series C24 matches the data sent from the external device 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q Procedure 5 Ending the loopback test Perform the following procedure according to the function used and start data communication e Set the switch settings with GX Developer according to the procedure specified in Section 4 5 2 Turn on the power to the station on which the Q series C24 is installed x An example of control procedure when the TT command is used in the loopback test mentioned in Procedure 3 Station number 00 sum check code Yes TT ACPU common command Two characters hexadecimal Designate the number of characters 1 to 254 of return data to be sent immediately afterward Designate with a text string consisting of 0 to 9 and A to F capital letter Header data sent by the external device
53. ASCII code data QnA compatible 2C frame This is the same message format as the communication frame using the protocol for the QnA Formats 1 to 4 series serial communication modules QnA compatible 2C frame Formats 1 to 4 QnA simplified frame Formats 1 to 4 Details are explained in Chapter 4 of the Reference Manual One of the message formats for the serial communication module for performing communication using the MC protocol and ASCII code data QnA compatible 3C frame Le Sn P This is the same message format as the communication frame using the protocol for the QnA Formats 1 to 4 QnA compatible 4C frame Formats 1 to 4 series serial communication modules QnA compatible 3C frame Formats 1 to 4 QnA frame Formats 1 to 4 QnA compatible 4C frame Formats 1 to 4 QnA extension frame Formats 1 to 4 Details are explained in Chapter 3 of the Reference Manual One of the message formats for the serial communication module for performing communication using the MC protocol and binary code data QnA compatible 4C frame This is the same message format as the communication frame using the protocol for the QnA Format 5 series serial communication modules QnA compatible 4C frame Format 5 QnA extension frame Format 5 Details are explained in Chapter 3 of the Reference Manual Data name when the fixed format portion of messages to be sent or received between a serial communication module and an opposite
54. After checking error codes and changed setting values designate the correct setting values and switch mode DO D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 r b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO Communication protocol o olojojoj o ojojoloj ololo ol1 o air Pern Error description 2 Communication rate error 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 eee Setting communication protocol number 6 ololololi1 1 1 1 olololol1alolailo alge transmission setting description o olojojoj ojojojolojololololo a1 i CH2 side Setting communication protocol number 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 transmission setting description 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0j 1 Station No 1 being set While the CH1 side is set to the non procedure protocol and the CH2 side is set to the MC protocol format 1 this indicates the communication rate setting error on the CH1 side 11 15 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 1 7 Clearing the programmable controller CPU information 11 16 This section explains how to clear the programmable controller CPU information 1 Programmable controller CPU information a This is information about the access target CPU type used in MC protocol communications The Q series C24 obtains this information from the access target CPU at the time of initial access and stores it inside the Q series C24 Since access is made based on this inform
55. C24 in the following cases Ignore setting contents e When data is communicated with half duplex communication e When communication time and the RS and CS signals are controlled by the modem function x2 The DTR signal is controlled by the Q series C24 in the following cases Ignore setting contents When the DTR and DSR signals are controlled When data is communicated by the modem function 3 After writing in the buffer memory a lag of 0 to 20 ms occurs until it is reflected in the signal x4 When a functional protocol RS DTR signal status specification protocol No 204 to 207 is executed with the CPRTCL instruction the corresponding bit in the RS DTR signal status specification address 92H 132H turns on or off For functional protocol details refer to the Operating Manual Pre defined protocol support function Be sure to control the RS and DTR signals with the Q series C24 Control of the RS and DTR signals by the user is a prime factor for data communication errors 3 2 2 RS 232 cable specification Use a 15 m 49 21 ft or shorter cable conforming to the RS 232 standard as the RS 232 cable Recommended cable e Oki Electric Cable Co Ltd 7 0 127 OP HRV SV O Specify the number of pairs For 13 pairs 7 0 127 13P HRV SV 3 5 PECIFICATION eee alee MELSEC Q 3 3 RS 422 485 Interface Specifications The following shows the RS 422 485 interface specification 3 3 1 RS 422 485 terminal b
56. CH1 and to turn LED off 0 ON No initialization request 1 OFF Initialization requested 0 SD WAIT b0 CIN b4 OH SIO b1 NAK b5 PRO b2 ACK b6 For LED P S b3 NEU b7 and For system b8 to b15 Section 9 6 11 communica Communication error clear request for CH2 and to turn LED off Not allowed Section 11 1 1 tion error 0 ON No initialization request Section 11 1 2 clear 1 OFF Initialization requested SD WAIT b0 NAK b5 SIO b1 ACK b6 PRO b2 NEU b7 P S b3 CH2 ERR b14 CIN b4 CH1 ERR b15 For system b8 to b13 Register read delete instructions 0 No request 1 Register request 2 Read request 3 Delete request Frame No direction 0 No designation Other than 0 Frame No Registration read delete result storage Other than 0 Abnormal completion Number of data bytes registered designation 0 No designation Other than 0 Number of data bytes registered maximum 80 bytes User frame Section 9 4 1 Section 9 4 2 Section 9 4 12 Section 9 4 13 0 Normal completion Not allowed 6 to 45 6H to 2DH 0 No designation Other than 0 Registered data maximum 80 bytes een Modem connection channel designation 2Ex 0 Non 1 CH1 R Notification execution designation 2FH 0 Do not execute 1 Execute E Number of connection retries o ae 30H eet area ae to 5 Number of retries eel Connection retry interval designation 31 90 to 300 Connection retry interval unit s
57. CH1 side communication error Examine the test wiring connection Procedure 5 Ending individual station loopback test Error occurrence in the base unit extension cable CPU module or the Q series C24 1 Perform the following procedures after checking normal completion abnormal completion of the test result Normal completion Perform operation 2 to finish the test Upon error occurrence Remove the cause of the error according to the corrective action specified in the table above and test again 2 Perform the ending procedure for individual station loopback test 1 Follow the procedure in Section 4 7 1 to perform a ROM RAM switch test 2 Perform the following procedure to end the test and start data communication with an external device e Set the switch settings on GX Developer according to the procedure specified in Section 4 5 2 Turn off the power to the station on which the Q series C24 is installed and connect the communication cable with the external device e Turn on the power to the station on which the Q series C24 is installed 4 31 4 31 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 8 Loopback Test A loopback test performs a communication test using the loopback test function of the MC protocol in order to check the connection between the Q series C24 and an external device the communication function of each device and the operation of the communication program of the external device
58. CH2 C N 0000 ST NO 0000 CH1 NAK 0000 CH2 NAK 0000 CH1 ACK 0000 CH2 ACK 0000 CH1 NEU 0001 CH2 NEU 0000 CH2 ERR 0000 CH1 ERR 0001 Start monitor Stop monitor Close 11 2 11 2 11 TR BLESH TIN ae MELSEC Q Displays 1 H W LED Information Right side Left side CH1 information Right side CH2 information Displays the transmission status and the communications error status of the Q series C24 Displays 2011 2024 of the buffer memory b15 to b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO Buffer memory address 2014 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 Information of CH1 side j Ly rN For system le SD WAIT SIO PRO P S C N NAK 1 LED ON error Lo N A 0 LED OFF no error NEU b15 b14 b13 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 elo Joon ove 0 oo For system Buffer memory address 202 Information of CH2 side SD WAIT SIO PRO P S C N NAK ACK NEU CH2 ERR CH1 ERR 2 H W SW Information Parameter The switch information of the Q series C24 is displayed Numbers 1 through 5 correspond to switches 1 through 5 shown in Section 4 5 2 See Section 4 5 2 of the User s Manual Basic 11 3 11 3 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 3 Checking by GX Configurator SC Have the Monitor test others screen displayed For displaying the screen see Section 9 6 10 of the User s
59. CH2 side e Result read by an ONDEMAND instruction is stored Transmission result 0 Normal System Other than 0 Error code 1 S1 2 Transmission data count Set the transmission data count 2 x1 For error codes relating to abnormal completion see Chapter 11 of the User s Manual Basic x2 When setting Word byte units designation by GX Configurator SC set the number of bytes when bytes are designated and set the number of words when words are designated x3 The settings are done by either of the following e User Data set by the user before executing the ONDEMAND instructions e System The programmable controller CPU stores the execution result of the ONDEMAND instructions 10 3 10 3 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q Function 1 Data stored in the device designated in S2 and succeeding devices are sent according to the control data of the device designated in S1 and succeeding devices via the on demand function of the MC protocol of the module designated in Un QCPU Q series C24 _7 Channel to be used is set by b15 to b0 the control data S2 0 t1 2 ee Channel 2 2 Simultaneous execution of dedicated instructions The following table shows the handling for when executing another instruction during execution of the ONDEMAND instruction or executing the ONDEMAND instruction during execution of another instruction in the same channel Availability of In
60. Connection precautions a When connecting the Q series C24 SG and FG signals to the external device connect them according to the specifications of the external device b Connect the shield of the connection cable to the FG terminal on either of the connected devices If normal data communication is not obtained due to external noise even if wiring is made as shown above perform wiring as follows 1 Connect between the FG of both stations with the shield of the connection cable On the external device side however follow the instruction manual of the external device Be sure to use the plate terminals included with the product when connecting the braided shield wire to the QJ71C24N R4 2 Connect the FG of the Q series C24 side to the FG terminal at the power supply module of the station which has the Q series C24 is installed or to the FG terminal of the control panel on which the Q series C24 programmable controller is installed 3 Connect nnA and nnB of each signal in the connection cable as a pair Q series C24 External device s e FG SL FG Ee Shield Correspondence of the RS 422 485 terminal block and signal location 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q c Terminal resistor must be set or connected for the station of both ends on the circuit Match the Q series C24 to the specifications of the external device and connect a terminal resistor packed with the Q ser
61. Dev name Points Start End TransferSB SB 512 0000 oiFF SB 512 000 DIFF TransferSw SW 512 0000 OIFF Sw 512 000 DIFF Random cyclic LB e Random cyclic Lw e Transfer LX 64 1000 103F x 64 1000 103F Transfer2 LY 64 1000 103F 4 y 64 1000 103F Transfer3 amp Transter4 H Transfer5 e Transfer l i App 36 APPENDIXES MELSEC Q 2 Program example for interlocking the remote master station and remote I O station Interlocks should be applied to the programs according to the link status of the remote master station host station and remote I O station other station The following example shows an interlock in the communication program that uses the link status SB47 SB49 of the remote master station and the link status SW70 bit 0 SW74 bit 0 SW78 bit 0 of the remote I O station Station No 1 B47 H KO t To YSB47 Baton pass status of host B49 H KO H raj gt SB49 Data link status of host SW70 0 H KO t T2 SW70 Baton pass status of other station SH74 0 H ko t 13 SW74 Data link status of other station SW78 0 H KO t T4 XSW78 Parameter communication status of other station B20 TO Tl T2 13 T4 B t Wt rae raa t uc NO MI SB20 Network module status NO MI e E EE E e E E O E AR EN R EA ea R S E EE E E E ee E E ge ER AR E ee Ea aE eae haie i Sample programs Refer to Appendix 9 2 and later i n E i No Y a enn Y Set the
62. File register JOO module device E Constant Others n S1 uoco wora e E R IRE Instruction Executing code condition Command G BIDOUT G BIDOUT Un S1 S2 D Command GP BIDOUT H GP BIDOUT Un S1 S2 D Set data Set data Description Set by Data type Start I O signal of the module BIN46 bit i 00 to FE Top two digit when I O signals are expressed in 3 digit S1 Head number of the devices in which control data is stored oat al ead Device name S2 Head number of the devices in which transmission data is stored User D Bit device number to be turned on at completion of execution System The file register per local device and program cannot be used as the set data Control data e Set transmission channel Transmission channel 1 Channel 1 CH1 side 1 2 User 2 Channel 2 CH2 side e Transmission result by a BIDOUT instruction are stored Transmission result 0 Normal System Other than 0 Error code S1 2 Transmission data count Set the transmission data count x1 For error codes relating to abnormal completion see Chapter 11 of the User s Manual Basic x2 When setting Word byte units designation by GX Configurator SC set the number of bytes when bytes are designated and set the number of words when words are designated x3 The settings are done by either of the following e User Data set by the user before executing the BIDOUT instructions
63. Function Q series C24 function version QJ71C24N amca ae R2 R4 Hy Communication using bidirectional protocol Data transmission reception in any format eee Data reception by interrupt programs CO TOTO ASCII data transmission reception by ASCII BIN conversion O o zO Data transmission reception by specifying transparent code Specification of Receive transparent code o J ol lo Specification of Transmission transparent 1st Oe MOL ase Multiple specification of Transmission transparent x to 10th EA Communication using pre defined protocol Execution of the protocol selected from the pre defined protocol library Echo back enable disable setting for RS 422 485 interface Registration of user frame for data communication Registration of changeable data added 05 OB 111 and 17H SB 8S Registration of changeable data added 04x and OAH ern as Registration of changeable data added E5x and EBn pee ft Communication via public network etc modem function Automatic initialization of modem mao Remote password check gt tor DC code control including Xon Xoff control SE oa oR DTR DSR ER DR control Mode switching ce E E TT E E a Bat real eset eco on ao speed enetieslon Speed Pes o Premabeconte CR msinaee a Data communication monitoring time a E E E E e a E a Monitoring testing of initial settings and setting values with utility package Startup from the system monitor 5 oes Addition
64. GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 9 6 Monitor Test Purpose The displayed menu screen is used to perform various operations including the monitoring of the Q series C24 s operating status and setting values and the testing of its output signals The monitor test operations can be performed only via online operation Operating procedure Startup from Intelligent function module utility GX Developer Version 4 or later Online gt Monitor Test gt Select monitor Test module Monitor Test Monitor screen Startup from the system monitor GX Developer Version 6 or later GX Developer gt Diagnostics gt System Monitor Select the Q series C24 by installation status gt Monitor screen Monitor Test screen 2I51x Module information Module type Serial Communications Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name QJ71C24N Setting item Current value Setting value CH1 ERR occurrence CH2 ERR occurrence Turing off ERR LED and initializing the error code by the ERR clear request Designate Clear request for the test CH1 ERR clear request CH2 ERR clear request XZY monitor test Clear request Clear request XZY monitor test Modem function monitor test CH1 Transmission control and others monitor test CH1 MC protocol monitor Modem function monitor test CH1 Trans contral monitor CH1 MC protocol monitor Flash ROM
65. IRet m_actEasylf ReadDeviceBlock2 DO 5 sData if IRet 0 X szMessage Format DO D5 d d d d a sData 0 sData 1 sData 2 sData 3 sData 4 MessageBox szMessage else szMessage Format Read Error x IRet MessageBox szMessage App 32 App 32 APPENDIXES PEE PEE EEES CEES E RENE II Disconnection kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk void CVCDIg OnClose long IRet CString szMessage Disconnection IRet m_actEasylf Close if IRet 0 X MessageBox The disconnection was successful selse szMessage Format Disconnection Error x Ret MessageBox szMessage App 33 MELSEC Q App 33 APPENDIXE 2 MELSEC Q Appendix 8 Example of Clear Process Program for Receive Data When performing data communications with non procedure protocol use the receive data clear request shown in 6 1 4 and display the sequence program example if clearing the receive data from external device If the Q series C24 input output signal is X Y000 to X Y01F The following I O signals X and internal relays M are used in the program XIE X1F 6 i120 C24 ready WDT error C24 normal X23 g mi5 Receive data Receive data clear request clear request pulse M15 l SET M16 Receive data Receive data clear request clear pulse acknowledgement lt Executes the receive data clear request gt MIG M200 M11 M12 M17 X3 X4 KX HO HOA8 K1 KI R
66. Manual Basic 4 LED ON status and communications error status Status signal Description when ON Description when OFF when LED is turned when LED is turned on 1 off 0 ad Related protocol Initial c Non Bidirectional Pre procedure protocol defined Description state M name Overrun or framing oe Waiting for data ee 1 SDWAIT Transmission wait status ae Data transmission start OFF transmission OFF error occurred SIO error status OS area is full x Received data was deleted 13 PRO Character error status Normal OFF Status of parity error or 4 P S Error occurred Normal sum check error sf NAK Abnormal completion Abnormal completion Normal completion status transmission transmission Normal completion Abnormal completion Normal completion status oo ae OF transmission transmission ACK CH2 ERR Access status with the programmable controller CPU Neutral status Waiting to receive command Error occurrence status o CH2 side OFF OFF F Command reception Switch setting error Mode switching error OFF Transmission error Reception error Error occurrence status on On demand error 10 CH1 ERR CH1 side Flash ROM write error OFF Flash ROM write count over limit error x1 C N turns on in the following cases An external device issued a data read request to the programmable controller CPU when write during RUN is set to prohibit in the
67. Module model name QJ71C24 N Setting item Setting value Execution log options Eror logs Details Select input Setting range Error logs All logs Setting item The condition for registering protocol execution logs can be specified Execution log options Error logs Failed protocol execution logs are stored Alllogs The execution status and log of all protocols are stored Setting procedure 1 Select Error logs or All logs for Execution log options 2 Click Close POINT For information on the stored logs refer to Section 8 1 4 8 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE PRE DEFINED PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 8 1 3 Pre defined protocol monitoring test In the Pre defined protocol monitor test window of GX Configurator SC Intelligent function module utility the pre defined protocol execution status and an error code can be confirmed Confirmation procedure 1 Display the Pre defined protocol monitor test window For information on how to display this window refer to Section 9 6 7 2 The current value of each item can be confirmed Monitor test window CH1 Pre defined protocol monitor test Module information Module type Serial Communications Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name QJ71C24N Setting item Current value Setting value 1D Pre defined protocol ready Off Protocol cancellation Not cancelled Execution status Unexecuted Pte defined pr
68. O errr C24 CPU e Perform a self loopback test and check if the CPU can communicate 71041 p e The OS of the Q series C24 detected to System error eRe eror 1 71161 e Number of request points exceeds the e Check and correct the external device range for the command transmit message and restart data e A word device was designated in a bit communications 7140 Request data error units command e If no error is found in the device range e The last device No exceeds the range clear the programmable controller CPU oe device last No Designated head information and retry Refer to Section device No eee number of points 11 1 7 some error e Check and correct the external device transmit message and restart data communications e If no error is found in the device name clear the programmable controller CPU information and retry Refer to Section 11 1 7 Error detected by the CPU e A device that cannot be designated by rs oaan Devige name emor the given command was designated 11 18 11 18 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 71431 Device No error e The head device No is out of range 71444 7145n e The written CPU model name and the CPU monitor name in the monitor request are different Monitor CPU model name error 71461 Written number of monitoring points overrun error e The written number of monitoring points exceeds the designated range 7147H e A nonexistent extens
69. Output instruction execution Sequence program ii Transmission command i Output instruction X OUTPUT One scan e a Output instruction per complete device Q series C24 side Transmission data External device side Calculation example Estimate the time required to process the Output instruction when transmitting 100 bytes of data using the non procedure protocol with the QJ71C24N Unit ms Scan time 10 ms e Data length 10 bits 1 start bit 8 data bits 1 stop bit no parity bit e Communication rate 19200 bps 10 10 19200 X 1000 0 07 x 100 3 0 72 08 ms App 15 App 15 APPENDIXES App 16 Sequence program Reception data read request X3 Input instruction Input instruction complete device DX3 Q series C24 side MELSEC Q b Input instruction Tp Sr 0 09 X Dr T2 Tp 1 Time from the start of execution of the Input instruction to the Sr Dr T2 End processing of the sequence scan at the completion of the Input instruction execution ms Scan time Number of bytes of reception data QJ71C24N R2 R4 T2 7 0 QJ71024 R2 T2 14 91 x1 This stands for the time range of processing Tp Start of the Input Start of the End processing of instruction execution the scan at the completion of y T p P the Input instruction execution END i _ s a E a External d
70. Precautions The following describes the precautions to be taken during non procedure protocol data communications 1 The Q series C24 transmission sequence initialization conditions The initial status indicates the status where transmission has stopped and reception data has been discarded The Q series C24 transmission sequence initialization conditions are as follows 1 When the power is turned on the Reset switch on the CPU panel is operated or the Q series C24 mode is switched 2 When the receive data was cleared 3 When the CD signal was turned off when data communications were performed by setting CD terminal check enable during full duplex communications through the RS 232 interface 2 Generation of framing error in external device When nothing is transmitted from the Q series C24 to the external device through the RS 422 or RS 422 485 interface a framing error may be generated by the noise etc in the external device Send an arbitrary code to identify the head of the send data from the Q series C24 to the external device Before data communication check the Q series C24 interface specifications 3 Data communications with external device computer etc over a multidrop link When the external device programmable controller CPU are connected by a 1 n multidrop link each the Q series C24 receives the data transmitted by the external device With a multidrop link receive data by user frame
71. Precautions 15 3 I O Signals for Handshake with Programmable Controller CPU and Buffer Memory 15 4 Switching the Mode from the Programmable Controller CPU 15 5 Switching the Mode from an External Device 16 USING COMMUNICATION DATA MONITORING FUNCTION 16 1 Communication Data Monitoring Function 16 2 Communication Data Monitoring Function Settings 16 3 Communication Data Monitoring Example 17 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 17 1 Dedicated Instruction List and Available Devices 17 2 Z BUFRCVS 17 3 ZP CSET Programmable Controller CPU Monitoring Register Cancel 17 4 ZP CSET Initial Settings 17 5 G P GETE 17 6 G P PRR 17 7 G P PUTE 17 8 ZP UINI Related Manual 2 Q Corresponding MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual 1 OVERVIEW 1 1 Overview of the MELSEC Communication Protocol 1 2 Features of the MELSEC Communication Protocol 2 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE MELSEC COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL 2 1 Types and Applications of Data Communication Frames 2 2 Accessible Range of Each Data Communication Frames 2 3 How to Read the Control Procedures of the MC Protocol 2 4 Access Timing of the Programmable Controller CPU Side 2 5 Setting Method for Writing to the Programmable Controller CPU during RUN 2 6 Accessing Other Stations 2 7 Precautions on Data Communication 2 8 Time Chart and Communication Time of the Transmission Sequence of the Serial Communication Module 2 9 Transmission Time When Accessing Other S
72. Q 1 Data reception when the receive data storage area is larger than the receive data length The following control is performed Example When the receive area for the CH1 side interface is located at addresses 600H to 7FFH default values and data of 511 words or less is received by the CH1 side interface Complete code INPUT Read data count 100 words 2 Data reception when the receive data storage area is smaller than the receive data length Since the following control is performed data link processing is required in the sequence program 1 Reception using the complete code Example When the receive area for the CH1 side interface is located at addresses 600H to 7FFH default values and data of 534 words is received by the CH1 side interface Complete code 511 words Q series C24 Reception data read request X3 Sequence program Read data count Read data count 511 words 23 words 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL External device MELSEC Q 2 Reception by received data count If a specified receive data count is too large for the receive data storage area Receive buffer memory length address A7H 147n default 512 words minus 1 is used as the receive data count instead Receive data storage area gt Data length received from external device Example When 550 words of data is received through the CH1 interface in three parts
73. QJ71C24N Start 1 0 No 0000 Setting item Input data No for connection within the following value range HObb8 HObd5 Flash ROM connection data H8001 H801f Butfer memory connection data The range of the input for the transmission pointer designation is 1 100 Cycle time units designation Cycle time designation PLC CPU monitoring function designation PLC CPU monitoring transmission measure designation Constant cycle transmission Transmission pointer designation Output count designation Data No for connection designation Number of registered word blacks designation r Flash ROM setting Write to Save fle module Read from modile Load file Do not use function fee Details Cannot execute test Close Make text file 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q Setting items eae ffer memory address Setting item Era Reference section Cycle time units designation 2040H 2140H Cycle time designation PLC CPU monitoring function designation i A i 2051Hto 21511 to Head device No designation 2052H 2152H Chapter 2 of Read point designation 2053H 2153H User s Manual Application No 1 block Monitoring condition designation 2054H 2154H Monitoring condition value i 5 2055H 2155H Condition designation agreement Transmission pointer designation 2056H 2156H transmission Output count designation 2057H 2157H
74. SPEV SB 0 2 X 3P crete MITSUBISHI CABLE INDUSTRIES Ltd SPEV SB MPC 0 2 X 3P and SPEV SB 0 2 X 3P have the same electrical characteristics but different external diameter and internal wire colors 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 3 3 Precautions when transferring data using RS 422 485 circuit The following precautions must be observed when transferring data with an external device through the Q series C24 RS 422 485 interface Take the following into account when the transferring data with the external device 1 Error receive data countermeasures at external device during RS 422 485 connection If the external device may receive erroneous data install a pull up or pull down resistor to the external device as follows Installing a pull up or pull down resistor resistance value criteria approx 4 7 kQ 1 4 W can prevent the reception of erroneous data RDA 4 7kQ 1 4W Terminating RDB ___ resistor 4 7kQ 1 4W Receive data External device When there is a pull up or pull down resistor at the external device erroneous data is not received The following describes the case when a pull up or pull down resistor is not installed to the external device When no station is sending the send line becomes high impedance and noise etc may cause the send line to change and the external device to receive erroneous data In this case there is probably a parity error
75. Setting of transmission data gt M10 X101E H 1 rov K4 Trov H1234 Trov H56AB RENTO ut KI Kt HO H400 DO K3 M100 M101 H if PLs M101 SET lt Transmission user frame designation command gt M11 X101E vov HO HOV Hl HOV H5 Trov H3F2 Trov H3F3 roy H3001 HOV H8000 vov H41B L72 RENTO JI KI Kt HO HOB DS K8 lt Transmission request gt M102 M103 f SE M103 1H se lt Processing for normal completion gt X1000 H sE RS lt Processing for abnormal completion gt X1001 se PLs lt Abnormal completion Read of data transmission result gt M12 XIOIE Z REMFR JI KI KI HO H257 D20 KI M104 M105 al 05 Kt oer SET App 49 RST MIO D0 D1 D2 M100 M11 H200 M201 M300 Y1000 M301 M12 M104 N202 N203 Y1000 J Changes the transmission command into pulses Sets the transmission data count Sets the transmission data Transfers the setting value to the J communication area of the buffer memory Transmission user frame designation command 4 Abnormal completion of REMTO instruction J Sets the CR LF output Sets the output head pointer J Sets the output count J First output frame No designation J Second output frame No designation J Third output frame No designation J Fourth output frame No designation J Fifth output frame No designation Transfers the setting values t
76. Simultaneous transmission priority non priority designation e Retransmission time transmission method designation e Simultaneously transmission data valid invalid designation e No reception monitoring time timer 0 designation App 51 App 51 APPENDIXE z MELSEC Q Appendix 9 9 When registering user frame The following program example registers a user frame to the flash ROM of the Q series C24 using the REMFR REMTO instruction and I O signals Refer to Section 9 4 of the User s Manual Application for the registration of the user frame It is recommended to use GX Configurator SC when registering a user frame to the flash ROM of the Q series C24 Refer to Chapter 8 1 Program conditions The following program registers a user frame to the flash ROM of the QJ71C24N when the registration command X1028 turns ON a Devices used e Registration COMMANG ecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenreeeeeaeeeeeeateeas X1028 e Registration command pulse Signal ccceeeeeeeteeneeeees M10 e Registration command 2 ecceeeeeeeneeneeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeateeas M11 Registration fag nnise M12 e Registration result acquisition command cceeeeeeeeeee M13 e Completion device for REMFR REMTO instruction M100 to 105 e Normal abnormal completion flag for REMFR REMTO SUGUN aeeiiaii iaaa M200 to 203 e Registration instruction sseeseeeeseeeeeeererreerersrsrsrsnsrnsnses DO Frame Nocrsoneneror
77. THE BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL M50 1 Starts the local station programmable controller MELSEC Q The setting values for GX Developer are stored in the Q series C24 2 Inputs the user data transmission instruction signal 3 Executes the BIDOUT instruction after storing the transmission data and the control data for the BIDOUT instruction in the device Data is sent when the BIDOUT instruction is executed 4 A response message for the data transmission for normal completion ACK message for abnormal completion NAK message is received 5 When the response is received the Q series C24 transmission processing completes and the device that has completed the BIDOUT instruction turns ON When the BIDOUT instruction ends abnormally due to the reception of an NAK message the complete device 1 abnormal completion signal turns ON and the error code is stored in the control data completion status S1 1 Program example When Q series C24 I O signals are from X Y00 to X Y1F nov tion Mov MO es Bipour Uo bo M Nov ABCDEFG x20 H Pris HOAOD KI KO K5 D11 6 M w Toon SET D1 SET x21 f RST RST M50 J J Transmission command is converted to pulse Transmission data is stored Designate the number of the interface CHT that will send the data Clear the transmission result storage device t
78. This LED can be made valid also when GX Developer connection OH is specified in communication protocol setting 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 4 External Wiring This section explains wiring between the Q series C24 and external device As the wiring precautions external wiring which is resistant to the effects of external noise is a prerequisite for reliable system operation and full use of the Q series C24 function 1 Ground the shield at only one point 2 When connecting with an external device using an RS 232 line use a connector shell as specified in Section 3 2 1 on the Q series C24 end 3 When connecting with an external device using an RS 422 485 cable be sure to note the following a QJ71C24N and QJ71C24 1 Use the RS 422 485 cable recommended in section 3 3 2 2 The RS 422 485 interface terminal block uses M3 terminal screws Use suitable crimp on terminals for the terminals b QJ71C24N R4 1 Use the RS 422 485 cable recommended in section 3 3 2 Be sure to strip the outer insulation layer by 7 mm before connecting the cable to the plug in socket block 2 When connecting the braided shield wire inside the RS 422 485 cable use the plate terminals included with the product The braided shield wire can be connected without the plate terminal Four plate terminals are included to connect the FG terminals of both stations see section 4 4 2 6 3 When connecting the plug i
79. Turn off the ERR LEDs on the front face of the module olololo Section 9 6 11 3 16 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q Function Protocol Explanation Remarks mc Non Bi Pa page Can be used Non procedure protocol only via Ms p Clear the currently received data Section 9 7 y receive data clear online operation Abbreviations used in the Protocol column MC MC protocol Non Non procedure protocol Bi Bidirectional protocol Pd Pre defined protocol PECIFICATION eS A ae MELSEC Q 3 7 List of GX Developer Setting Items for Serial Communication Modules The following table lists the parameters that are set using the GX Developer Parameter setting item Parameter description Set data Performs I O assignment vag Or the Q series C24 and I O assignment setting i i Section 4 5 1 enables the switch settings listed below Start X Y CH1 Transmission setting Switch 1 CH1 Communication rate setting Switch 2 CH1 Communication protocol setting Switch setting CH2 Transmission setting Section 4 5 2 Switch 3 7 F Ls Interrupt pointer No of units Interrupt pointer setting reception date with interrupt Section 4 5 3 Intelligent Start I O No programs module side Start SI No Sets the remote password Password settings Section 3 3 3 of Remote password i and the Q series C24 that User s Manual m settings ge ye performs the check odule settings IstatxXY sd XY Application Per
80. User s Manual Basic MODEL QJ71C24 U KI E MODEL 13JL86 SH NA 080006 0 0906 MEE afa MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE TOKYO BUILDING 2 7 3 MARUNOUCHI CHIYODA KU TOKYO 100 8310 JAPAN NAGOYA WORKS 1 14 YADA MINAMI 5 CHOME HIGASHI KU NAGOYA JAPAN When exported from Japan this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry for service transaction permission Specifications subject to change without notice
81. When input output signals of the Q series C24 are from X Y00 to X Y1F MOV KI MOV KO MOV K2 MOV H1234 wOV H5678 RST RST N51 Fer ONDEMAND uo bo D10 450 D10 D11 4100 M101 M51 M100 M101 M51 On demand transmission command pulse Set the transmission channel to CH1 Set the send data count to 2 words Set the transmission data to D10 to D11 Reset the normal completion flag Reset the abnormal completion flag Set the transmission ready flag On demand transmission execution Normal completion Abnormal completion Reset the transmission ready flag 1 The status of communication via dedicated instructions can be read by an SPBUSY instruction 2 Designate the storage capacity of transmission data stored in D10 to D11 in the program example above and data length stored in D2 in the program example above within the range of the buffer memory the user has assigned for an on demand function 10 6 10 6 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTION i SSE MELSEC Q 10 3 G P OUTPUT Data can be sent in any user defined message format using the non procedure protocol Applicable device Set Internal device ae direct device Intelligent function A Index register data Pa ee user File register ae module device 7 Constant Others n Word Bt Wor umep Instruction Executing code condition Command G OUTPUT apail eom e e a o H Command Set data Setdata data Des
82. a dedicated instruction Q Function version B O Programmable controller CPU information clear Transmission of the programmable controller CPU monitoring information through combined use of the modem function Communication Automation initialization of modem Callback Remote password check Non procedure and non reception monitoring time format designation Function version B or later whose first 5 digits of the serial No are 08032 Function version B Function version B or later whose first 5 digits of the serial No are 03043 Function version B x Function version A or later whose first 5 digits of the serial No are 02092 Version 7 or later Version 6 or later Version 2 11M or later SWOD5C QSCU E 20C or later Version 1 0 or later Versions prior to SWOD5C QSCU E 40E are not usable SWOD5C QSCU E 20C or later Version 2 or later Transmission control start end free area x Version 2 or later 05H OBH 11H 17H 04H OAH E5x EBH O Function version B or later whose first 5 digits of the serial No are 06062 Function version B x SWOD5C QSCU 20C or later Version 2 or later Version 2 06G or later Reception according to user frames reception according to format 1 Function version B SWOD5C QSCU E 20C or later Multiple specification of transparent codes for transmission Function version B SWOD5C QSCU E 20C
83. after switching designation Transfers the set values to the mode switching designation area Sets the CH1 change command REMTO instruction abnormally completed Sets the CH1 mode switching request Resets the CH1 mode switching request CH1 mode switching completed Transfers the mode switching error status Starts the change processing of CH2 Reexamines the modifications REMFR instruction abnormally completed Sets the switching mode No designation Sets the transmission specifications after switching designation Transfers the set values to the mode switching designation area Sets the CH2 change command REMTO instruction abnormally completed Sets the CH2 mode switching request Resets the CH2 mode switching request CH2 mode switching completed Transfers the mode switching error status App 59 APPENDIXES oS D z 5 x 4 gt App 60 RST SET RST SET SET M300 M301 M300 M204 M205 Resets the changing flag Sets the change completion flag Reexamines the modifications REMFR instruction abnormally completed MELSEC Q App 60 APPENDIXE 2 MELSEC Q Appendix 10 Setting Value Recording Sheet The following sheet is for recording parameter setting values set by GX Developer Use as many copies as needed In order to review the setting values of the utility package GX Configurator SC pr
84. after the header byte set for each protocol and format is received the Q series C24 performs receive processing e Set or shorten the monitoring time and retransmit the message from the external device and determine the trouble from the contents of the time out error e Error detection by watchdog timers timer 0 to timer 2 is possible in the following cases e When part of a message is skipped e When transmission from an external device is interrupted e When a link error was generated while accessing another station over a CC Link IE controller network MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 See Chapter 6 of User s Manual Application for a detailed description of the monitoring time Check the path of the programmable controller CPU to be accessed and set the path again 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 3 4 Transmission request does not make the SD LED blink Symptom Corrective action Bidirectional Non procedure Pre defined e Due to the OFF status of e While the CS signal is OFF the Q series C24 does the CS signal the Q series not transmit data to the external device Although a C24 cannot transmit data It must be ON when the external device is ready to transmission request to the external device receive data was made SD does e Due to transmission e Wait until the external device is ready to receive data not blink control DTR or DC e When the waiting time is too long check the external control the
85. and the QnACPUs of other stations can be performed on the external station side Also execution programs can be changed replaced from the external device side 3 Remote control of the programmable controller CPU This function executes remote RUN STOP PAUSE latch clear reset operations Remote operations of the programmable controller CPU can be performed from the external device side using the programmable controller CPU remote control function 5 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE MELSEC COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 4 Monitoring the programmable controller CPU This function monitors the operating status of the programmable controller CPU and the data in the device memory The programmable controller CPU status and the device memory data can be sent to the external device at fixed intervals when an error occurs in the machine equipment or when certain conditions are satisfied This function reduces the data read processing load on the external device side 5 Sending data from the programmable controller CPU to the external device A function for requesting data transmission from the programmable controller CPU to the external device is called the on demand function Urgent data that must be forwarded to the external device can be sent as on demand data to the external device by starting up from the programmable controller CPU 5 1 2 Message format and control procedure for data communication The data communication functions
86. before the processing of the current reception is completed Communication via modem Since communication via modem may be disrupted is disrupted due to low line quality or instantaneous interruption create a sequence program for reconnecting the line in case of unexpected line disruption If this symptom occurs frequently reduce the communication speed of the modem and retry the communication The data sent from the Q series C24 are received e Disable the echo back in the Echo back back on the RS 422 485 enable disable setting before communication interface CH2 side x1 The following explains how to take corrective actions when a normal exit response message cannot be received upon sending of a command message a When a response message of abnormal end is received 1 When an external device sent a command message and received an abnormal end response message take corrective action with the error according to the error code in the response message see Section 11 2 11 49 11 49 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 50 MELSEC Q 2 When the following problem occurs at the time of access to other station CPU clear the programmable controller CPU information and retry Refer to Section 11 1 7 e Accessible device range is narrowed Error code 7140 Some of commands and or devices cannot be used Error code 7142H 714Dn When response messages cannot be received Change the setting value for the response mo
87. ber of words f ived dat S 3 1 or more User receive data that can be stored in D1 1 The command of G INPUT cannot be converted into pulse 2 G INPUT should be executed while the read request of the input output signal is turned on 10 11 10 11 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q x1 For error codes relating to abnormal completion see Chapter 11 of the User s Manual Basic x2 When setting Word byte units designation by GX Configurator SC set the number of bytes when bytes are designated and set the number of words when words are designated 3 The settings are done by either of the following e User Data set by the user before executing the INPUT instructions e System The programmable controller CPU stores the execution result of the INPUT instructions Function 1 The function stores in the device designated in D1 and succeeding devices the data received with the non procedure protocol of the module designated in Un according to the control data of the device designated in S and succeeding devices 2 When the number of data actually received exceeds the allowable receive data count specified by S 3 only the receive data within the allowable receive data count is stored and the remaining receive data is discarded The dedicated instructions are completed normally In this case the allowable receive data count is stored in the receive data count S 2 3 Simultaneous execution of de
88. by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ 4 Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation of damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi loss in opportunity lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products replacement by the user maintenance of on site equipment start up test run and other tasks 5 Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice 6 Product application 1 In using the Mitsubishi MELSEC programmable controller the usage conditions shall be that the application will not lead to a major accident even if any problem or fault should occur in the programmable controller device and that backup and fail safe functions are systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or fault 2 The Mitsubishi programmable controller has been designed and manufactured for applications in general industries etc Thus applications in which the public could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and other power plants operated by
89. checking operation of each interface of the modules 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q d Station number setting switch 5 common for both CH1 and CH2 sides e This setting is for communication using the MC protocol When several the Q series C24s are connected on the same line with multidrop connection set the station number designated in the data items of the transmission frame in each external device to 0 to 31 OH to 1FH This number designates which external device is to be communicated with the Q series C24 e Set the station number to 0 when the system configuration of the external device and the programmable controller CPU is 1 1 Q series C24 eee L Station 0 Station 1 Station 2 Station 31 If the communication of data with external device is to be started check the specifications of the functions to be used and then make the settings and connect the cables Make the following switch settings from the GX Developer if there is to be no communication if the cables are not to be connected at the interface Communication protocol setting Set any of OH to 7h or 9H e Transmission setting communication rate setting Set all to OFF 2 The setting and data flow in linked operation a Set the related switches as follows when two Q series C24 interfaces are in linked operation Switch number Setting value Operation setting b0 OFF Suite Trans
90. code data is added to the end of the message and sent from the external device When the Q series C24 receives the receive complete code data changed by the user it stores the receive data up to the receive complete code to the buffer memory receive area and turned on the reception data read request X3 X4 to the programmable controller CPU Receive complete code data External device Q series C24 Reception data request X3 XA 3 When receive complete code not designated FFFFH designated Reading by received data count is enabled See 2 for a description of reading by received data count 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 2 Reception by received data count For fixed length reception a This method is used to receive messages of the same length size from the external device every time b When the Q series C24 receives data of the received data count preset in GX Configurator SC by the user it sends a reception data read request to the sequence program When the sequence program receives the read request from the Q series C24 it reads data up to the received data count received from the external device c The received data count default value is set to 511 words However it can be changed within the size of the receive data storage area depending on the data contents exchanged with the external device 1 When the receive complete code and received data count ar
91. communication modules do not interact Linked operation MELSEC communication protocol MC protocol Message send function Printer function The operation mode of each of the two interfaces for a serial communication module that are connected to external devices and linked to one another in order to send receive data to from the external devices The two interfaces communicate data using the identical data communication function MC protocol identical format or non procedure protocol and the identical transmission specifications Linked operation using the bidirectional or pre defined protocol is not allowed A communication procedure for the Q series serial communication modules or the Ethernet interface modules and a name of communication method for accessing to the programmable controller CPU from an opposite device This is called the MC protocol in this manual There are two communication methods one uses ASCII code data and the other uses binary code data Details are explained in the Reference Manual This function registers character data messages to be sent to external devices mainly printers in the serial communication module as an user frame in advance and sends the registered data for multiple user frames using the non procedure protocol sent by an instruction from the programmable controller CPU Multidrop connection A name of the connection when multiple external devices or other serial communicatio
92. connection methods for each type of interface To learn about processing required prior to operation of the serial communication module e Section 4 5 explains the parameter settings with GX Developer in order to use the serial communication module e Section 4 6 and Chapter 9 describe the settings from GX Configurator SC to perform the initial setting of the serial communication module To change an initial value follow the procedure described in Chapter 9 d To check for failure in the serial communication module e Section 4 7 describes the test of the individual serial communication module e To learn how to check for a connection error with the external devices e Section 4 8 describes how to perform the individual module test and the loopback test using MC protocol based communication Details of the loopback test command are described in the reference manual 3 To learn about data communication functions and detailed explanations a To learn about the communication functions Section 3 4 describes an overview of the serial communication module functions b To learn about detailed explanations of the communication functions The basic communication methods are described in Chapters 5 to 7 e Special functions are described in the User s Manual Application 4 To learn about data communication functions and programming a To learn how to read data from and written to the programmable controller CPU e Data is r
93. control designation Chapter 7 of DC1 DC3 Xon Xoff code designation oia User s Manual Application DC2 DC4 code designation Communication system designation Section 3 2 of CD terminal check designation User s Manual Basic Half duplex communications control designation Simultaneous transmission priority non priority designation Chapter 8 of Half duplex communications control designation ISA User s Manual Application H Retransmission time transmission method designation No reception monitoring time timer 0 designation Chapter 6 of Response monitoring time timer 1 designation ow 13D P User s Manual Application Transmission monitoring time timer 2 designation en 13E G User s Manual Application RTS RS designation Section 3 2 1 of DTR ER designation User s Manual Basic User s Manual Application e User s Manual Application Chapters 6 and 7 of User s Manual Basic ca i 20304 to 2130 to Chapter 12 of Transmission transparent code designation 2nd to 10th TS 2038H 2138H User s Manual Application Receive transparent code designation i Chapter 13 of ASCII BIN conversion designation 121H 1C1H St User s Manual Application Sat A Chapter 4 of Receive interrupt issued designation 2010H 2110H ae User s Manual Application f F Section 3 3 4 of Echo back enable disable setting for RS 422 485 I F 102H User s Manual Basic 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC
94. conversion O o o o c Communication using the bidirectional protocol O Available X Not available Function System configuration Reference section tees net aan Data Data transmission receiving o pop TT trina Chapter 7 Reading received data using interrupt programs ee ah ee I x Ea ery Riggs 4 Sending receiving ASCII data using ASCII BIN conversion Pere a ieee Chapter13 13 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q d Communication using the pre defined protocol O Available X Not available System configuration Ea ia oa 7 Chapter 8 Data transmission reception x x is manua apter Operating In general if data communication is performed using a system configuration of other than 1 1 connection mode the following points should be well noted e Avoid simultaneous transmission Discard data received other than that addressed to the local station 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 2 3 For Use in Multiple CPU System This section explains the use of the Q series C24 in a multiple CPU system 1 When making access from the external device to the non control CPU of the Q series C24 using either of the following functions use the Q series C24 of function version B When the Q series C24 of function version A is used only the control CPU can be accessed Access to the non control CPU will result in an error e Communication using
95. data being transmitted received the expected from the external device packet When proper data are being transmitted from the external device take action according to Section 11 3 12 or 11 3 13 The Q series C24 has If data could be received before protocol execution cleared the data received disable the Clear OS area receive data area before before the protocol protocol execution setting in Protocol detailed setting of execution In Protocol GX Configurator SC detailed setting of GX Configurator SC Pre defined protocol support function Clear OS area receive data area before protocol execution is enabled r e Set monitoring time or shorten the specified time and The Q series C24 data a then transmit data from the external device to find a cause communications from the timeout error monitoring time is set to A Part of the messages is not read Infinite wait or the monitoring time is too long e Transmission from the external device is interrupted e Perform cancel processing to complete the CPRTCL instruction execution Bidirectional procedure Pre defined 11 41 11 TROUBLESHOOTIN See MELSEC Q 11 3 7 Communication error NAK Symptom Corrective action See section that describes Bidirectional procedure Pre defined the communication error signal C N P S PRO SIO that are turned on simultaneously when the NAK signal is turned on e Communicat
96. defined the linked mode noise may enter and the data may be destroyed and Data cannot be decoded or Communications error cause may occur 11 43 11 43 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 3 10 Communication error PRO Symptom Corrective action Bidirectional procedure Pre defined Communications were Check the Q series C24 communication protocol performed with a control setting and the message from the external device procedure different from the and match the settings or correct the message and Q series C24 communication restart data communications protocol setting Use the communication monitoring function to check Some of the data are the message from the external device different from the control procedure e Designated command does not exist The device No designation is not the character count corresponding to the command The characters in the e Check and correct the external device message and message include a data other restart data communications than the A to Z 0 to 9 e Use the communication monitoring function to check i and control data the message from the external device e Only the data 0 to 9 and A to F can be handled as character area data during communications e Communication error using an MC protocol ASCII mode Therefore signal PRO turned on when transmitting a character string as data convert the ASCII code of each character string to 2 byte
97. device for REMFR instruction e0ee M100 to 105 e Normal abnormal completion flag for REMFR instruction M200 to 203 Normal abnormal completion of receive cccccccseceeeteeees M300 M301 e Received data COUN cccecceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeteeeeseaeessaees DO e Received data when 5 word data are received D1 to D5 e Data reception reSult e ccccccceeecceeeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeneees D8000 b meroon function module switch settings Refer to Section 4 5 2 Switch No bit 07CC01 Enabled b8 to b15 L ocen sting reaps c Buffer memory settings used in this example Decimal Hexadecimal Setting Name value __ 96H Word byte units designation 164 pen Received data count designation O1FFH O e a O App 41 App 41 APPENDIXES 2 Program example MELSEC Q lt Receive read request gt X1003 _ gt A iis M10 J Changes the receive read request signal into pulses lt Read of received data count gt M10 X101E ee Reads the received data count H Z REMFR J1 KI KI HO H600 DO KI M100 J from the communication area of the buffer memory to D1 M100 M101 SF PLS M11 J Received data acquisition command M101 S K M200 J Abnormal completion of REMFR instruction lt Read of received data gt MI XIOIE Reads cate as many as te Spa received data count from the m e
98. device is registered in the module and used for sending and receiving data with the functions listed below The contents of an user frame data should conform to the specifications of the opposite device sertr re The data array of the head and tail sections of a message transmission control code C24 station number sum check fixed data etc to be sent and received is registered in the serial communication module before use MC protocol on demand function e Data communication function using the non procedure protocol Details are explained in Chapter 9 of the User s Manual Applications Product Configuration The following lists the product configuration of the Q series serial communication modules Model Item name Quantit QJ71C24N serial communication module or QJ71C24 serial communication module Terminal resistor 3309 W for RS 422 communication Terminal resistor 11002 W _ for RS 485 communication QJ71C24N R2 serial communication module or QU71C24 R2 serial communication module QJ71C24N or QJ71C024 QJ71C24N R4 serial communication module RS 422 485 plug in connector socket block Terminal resistor 3300 W _ for RS 422 communication Terminal resistor 110 W _ for RS 485 communication Plate terminal for connecting a braided shield cable SW2D5C QSCU E GX Configurator SC Version 2 1 license product CD ROM SW2D5C QSCU EA GX Configurator SC Version 2 Multiple license product CD
99. e System The programmable controller CPU stores the execution result of the BIDOUT instructions 10 15 10 15 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q Function 1 The function sends data stored in the device designated in S2 and succeeding devices according to the control data of the device designated in S1 and succeeding devices via the bidirectional protocol of the module designated in Un 2 Simultaneous execution of dedicated instructions The following table shows the handling for when executing another instruction during execution of the BIDOUT instruction or executing the BIDOUT instruction during execution of another instruction in the same channel Availability of Instruction 1 simultaneous Handling of simultaneous execution execution e The next instruction will be ignored until the active instruction has been completed However simultaneous execution is available when channels to be used are not the same e Dedicated instructions simultaneous execution error 7FFOH occurs in the dedicated instruction attempted later However simultaneous execution is available when channels to be used are not the same AO O occurs in the dedicated instruction attempted later O Available X Not available 1 Since the dedicated instructions shown below use a different communication protocol from that for the BIDOUT instruction they are not used in the same channel ONDEMAND OUTPUT PRR INPUT CPRTCL If the ded
100. e The OS of the Q series C24 detected some error Simultaneous e The Q series C24 and an external 7F31H pect device started transmitting transmission error simultaneously 7F32u e The OS of the Q series C24 detected some error e No reception watchdog timer timer 0 7F40n time out occurred Time out error y e Response watchdog timer timer 1 7F414 F time out occurred e Transmit watchdog timer timer 2 time 7F42u fesse out occurred transmission 7F50n to 7F544 e The OS of the Q series C24 detected 7 System error 1 7F60H some error to 7F66H e Decrease the data transmission rate and restart data communications e The Q series C24 received the next s Gheck whether a temporary stop h s 7F67 Overrun error data before it completed receive Soc rred inthe station in which the Q P r cessi a ofthe aie data series C24 is installed For the QOPU P 9 p i this can be checked using special register SD1005 If a temporary stop has occurred remove its cause 11 26 11 26 O pn z e Process by agreement with the external device e When necessary change the simultaneous transmission data valid invalid designation setting by GX Configurator SC address 9Bx 13B1 1 e Check if data was dropped from the receive data e Check if DTR control etc interrupted reception e Check the status of the message transmission destination and restart data communications as required e Check if DTR control etc
101. ee RER el N M i Heo D o Wo2 J communication area of the buffer 102 4103 memory to D1 J 1h SET M300 F Normal reception completion M103 SET M201 F Abnormal completion of REMFR instruction SET Y1001 Turns ON the receive read completion signal lt Receive error detection gt Fl ee a EA E E AE E E AE E E APES E E FAE ER EEA E ER EPA E ER EETA E L E PAE E E E E ES T E 1 W301 J Abnormal reception completion M12 J Reception result acquisition command lt When receive error detected Read of data reception result gt M12 X101E aye Reads the data reception result Z REMFR JI Kl Kl HO H258 D8000 KI M104 l l of the buffer memory to D8000 M104 M105 ay SET M202 J Normal completion of REMFR instruction M105 LSET M203 J Abnormal completion of REMFR r L instruction i SET Y1001 F Turns ON the receive read r 1 Loo completion signal X1003 l X1004 f RST yi001_ J Turns OFF the receive read a I completion signal When data reception is executed by the bidirectional protocol the area enclosed by the dotted line shown above must be removed Set the intelligent function module switches as indicated below Refer to Section 4 5 2 Switch No Setting value Switch 1 07COH Switch 2 0007H App 42 App 42 APPENDIXES MELSEC Q Appendix 9 5 When sending data using nonprocedural or bidirectional protocol App 43 The following program example sends data under
102. execution result of the buffer memory to D8 LED ON status acquisition command Abnormal completion of REMFR instruction Reads the LED ON status of the buffer memory to D9 Normal completion of REMFR instruction Abnormal completion of REMFR instruction Turns OFF the transmission request signal App 40 APPENDIXE MELSEC Q Appendix 9 4 When receiving data using nonprocedural or bidirectional protocol The following program example receives data under the nonprocedural protocol or bidirectional protocol using the REMFR instruction and I O signals Refer to Chapter 6 for the communication using the nonprocedural protocol Refer to Chapter 7 for the communication using the bidirectional protocol Refer to Chapter 11 of the User s Manual Application for data communication using the user frames 1 Program conditions The following program receives data from the external device by communication using the nonprocedural protocol then turns ON the reception data request X1003 and reads the received data from the QJ71C24N buffer memory to the programmable controller CPU a Devices used Error code read signal cecccesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeneeeeeeteeas X1023 e Receive read request signal ececeeeseeeseeeeeeeeteteeeteeeeaes M10 e Received data acquisition command ccscceeeteeees M11 e Receive result acquisition COMMANG cceeetereeteees M12 e Completion
103. external device transmit message and restart data communications 11 22 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Error code Signal Hexa Error Description ic decimal e Number of requested points exceeds Emor counterror the range for the command e Protocol setting data were written to the Q series C24 that does not support the pre defined protocol communication Protocol setting data write error e Anonexistent device was designated e Device that cannot be specified by the corresponding command was designated e The head device No is out of range Device error e A response message was not returned within the response monitoring time timer 1 monitoring time Timer 1 time out error 7E46x e The next request was received before a response message was returned for the preceding request Continuous request error e The OS of the Q series C24 detected System error some error Error during data transmission e Mode switching was executed during data transmission systemeror e The OS of the Q series C24 detected System error some error Device point count error 7E4En 7E4Fu e Access point count is incorrect User frame No designation error e A user frame No outside the range was designated e An unwritten user frame No was designated Unwritten user frame error User frame overwrite error e Awritten frame No overwrite request was issued e A nonexistent command was designated in a
104. external device or cable condition device cannot receive data 11 39 11 39 11 TROUBLESHOOTIN Saeed MELSEC Q 11 3 5 Read request signal does not turn ON even though the external device transmitted a message and the RD LED was blinking Symptom Corrective action Bidirectional procedure e Check if the communication protocol is set correctly e Check if the mode was switched without using the buffer memory mode switching area Communication protocol is set incorrect The communication protocol setting contents and the communication protocol in the current operation can be checked at communication protocol status address 250H 260h When Check CD e Since messages are skipped when the CD terminal is terminal was set the CD turned OFF when Check CD terminal is set change the terminal was turned off wiring so that the CD terminal remains on all the time e Check if a message is transmitted without transmitting DC1 11H after the external device transmits DC3 When DC control is 13H during DC1 DC3 external control selected the necessary e Check if the next message is transmitted without adding DC codes are not DC2 12H after the external device transmits DC4 transmitted 14H during DC2 DC4 external control e Use the communication monitoring function to check the message from the external device The end code was not e Check if the end code set at the Q series C24 and the end received or f
105. file Make text file Stop monitor Monitor Test items Buffer a address RTS RS OOOO O O RS DSR DR RS 232 control DTR ER Section 4 4 1 of 254H 264H signal status User s Manual Basic CS o RI CI Communication protocol status l aN Section 4 5 2 of oe 253H 263H User s Manual Basic status Stop bit Sum check code Write during RUM Setting modification 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q Item Purr memory address Reference section i cm cH CH2 Transmission DO Section 4 5 2 of Transmission speed 253H 263H status User s Manual Basic DTR DSR ER DR DC control designation Chane aoi apter 7 o DC1 DC3 Xon Xoff code designation P ee User s Manual Application DC2 DC4 code designation Communication system designation Section 4 5 2 of CD terminal check designation User s Manual Basic Half duplex communications control designation 9 Simultaneous transmission priority non priority designation Chapter 8 of Half duplex communications control designation oA IA User s Manual Application H H Retransmission time transmission method designation No reception monitoring time timer 0 designation units byte Chastre apter 6 o Response monitoring time timer 1 designation units 100 ms E User s Manual Application Transmission monitoring time timer 2 designation units 100 ms SAPP i CH DH peman e Word byte units designation 96H 136H en User s Ma
106. in the CPRTCL instruction s control data execution count result and eliminate the cause of the cancellation If necessary clear the error information by error clear request YE YF To prevent concurrent execution of the CPRTCL instruction set the CPU to STOP before writing the protocol setting data Check the data length of the packet sent from the device Divide the packet data into several parts and send them separately Correct the data sent from the device If the protocol was edited in GX Configurator SC Pre defined protocol support function check the packet format of the external device to see if the number of digits is set correctly 11 21 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Error code Hexa Description decimal e When data are received by the protocol including a packet that contains a conversion variable variable number of data and variable number of digits the corresponding data is 0 bytes 0 digits or exceeds the maximum number of digits Invalid number of digits error e In the data received from the external device the Length value does not match the data length of the conversion variable s Data length error e When the protocol used for data reception includes a packet that contains a conversion variable a value of the data for the conversion variable exceeds the range allowed for the Q series C24N Value range error Data length setting error data quantity setting error The valu
107. instruction when a function that corresponds to the input signal is used 2 The device does turn on off by execution of a dedicated instruction when a function that corresponds to the input signal is used from ON to OFF Data read completed x3 The mode switching X6 XD turns ON when the following function is executed e Mode switching transmission sequence initialization reception data clear by buffer memory user frame use enable disable designation UINI instruction programmable controller CPU information clear While the mode switching X6 XD is ON do not issue a communication request to the target interface The communication processing of the Q series C24 is stopped while the mode switching X6 XD is ON 4 The Q series C24 ready indicates whether or not it is possible to access the Q series C24 from the programmable controller CPU Use it as an interlock signal for a sequence program It turns on about one second after turning the power ON and reset operation 5 Restart the programmable controller CPU when the watchdog timer error is turned on reset the power and the CPU module x6 e X10 to X16 For system QJ71C24N R4 cannot be used Related to modem function signal e Y10 to Y16 Use prohibited x7 Pre defined protocol ready X1D is a signal that turns on when pre defined protocol communication becomes ready IMPORTANT 1 Of the input output signals to the programmable controller C
108. invalid b0 98x 13BH of communication 0 Valid 1 Invalid control Transmission data valid invalid b8 0 Valid 1 Invalid 156 316 No reception monitoring time timer 0 designation 9CH 13CH OH Wait infinitely r 28H to FAOH Monitoring time unit byte For designation Peay F 7 F 347 lof data Response monitoring lime timer 1 designation OH Wait infinitely 13Dx communication Bae ere ti 1H to BB8H Monitoring time unit 100 ms ime monitoring 158 318 Transmission monitoring time timer 2 designation 9Ex 13EH OH Wait infinitely 1H to BB8H Monitoring time unit 100 ms 160 For deianation Buffer memory head address designation AOH a 9 400H to 1AFFH 2600H to 3FFFH of on demand 161 321 function A1H 1411 control Application Section 9 4 5 Chapter 6 of User s Manual Application Section 9 4 6 Reference Data length designation Manual 0000H to 3400H 162 322 For dasianation Transmission buffer memory head address designation A2x 142H gr 7 400H to 1AFFH 2600H to 3FFFH of transmission Transmission buffer memory length designation 0001H to 1A00H A3H 143H 164 324 A4H 144H For data Receive complete code designation 165 325 reception i i i A5x 1451 FFFFH No designation for receive complete code OH to FFH Receive complete code 166 326 Receive buffer memory head address designation A6H 146H For designation 400H to 1AFFH
109. memory and check the error contents and change the switch setting to the correct setting Read the error code from the buffer memory and check the error contents and correct the designation contents Read the error code from the buffer memory and check the error contents and correct the designation contents Read the error code from the buffer memory and take the corrective action corresponding to the error contents Bidirectional MELSEC Q Non procedure The Q series C24 detected Read the error code from the buffer memory an error while receiving and take the corrective action corresponding ERR LED turned data on e When the ERR LED is turned on an error code is stored in the following buffer memory to the error contents Error code storage buffer memory sana T te Name Switch setting error and mode switching error status Data reception result Modern function error code PER Programmable controller CPU monitoring function execution Monitoring device error 22054 23054 result Pre defined protocol function n 40424 40524 Pre defined protocol function error code error See Section 11 2 for a detailed description of the error codes Switch setti witch setting error 2034 Mode switching error e When the pre The communication e Set the communication protocol mode to defined protocol is executed the ERR LED turns on protocol mode is set to other than Pre defined protocol mod
110. module functions the SH 080007 settings for use of special functions and data communication method for use with external devices 13JL87 sold separately Q Corresponding MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual This manual explains how the external devices read and write programmable controller CPU data SH 080008 through communication with the MC protocol using the serial communication module Ethernet module 13JF89 sold separately GX Configurator SC Version 2 Operating Manual Protocol FB support function This manual explains the function and usage of the protocol FB support function that supports the SH 080393E creation of the data communication program of the module and set up of each parameter 13JU46 sold separately GX Configurator SC Version 2 Operating Manual Pre defined protocol support function This manual explains the pre defined protocol support function and usage and the protocol setting SH 080850ENG method 13JU66 sold separately Compliance with the EMC and Low Voltage Directives 1 For programmable controller system To configure a system meeting the requirements of the EMC and Low Voltage Directives when incorporating the Mitsubishi programmable controller EMC and Low Voltage Directives compliant into other machinery or equipment refer to Chapter 9 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES of the QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection The CE mark indicating compliance w
111. module is of function version B e Unit access Module access Displays access permissions when the Q series C24 ready X1E is turned on and the watchdog timer error X1F is turned off e Status of I O Address Verify Displays whether or not the module for which the user set the parameters matches the module installed e Remote password setting status Displays the setting status of the remote password Present Error Displays the error code of the latest error occurrence e Error Display Displays the error codes for any errors that have occurred in any of the functions being used Error details corrective action Displays the error details and corrective action for the error code selected in Error Display Error details and corrective actions are displayed when GX Developer Version 8 17T or later used 2 Checking using the hardware information screen of the GX Developer diagnostic functions Startup procedure GX Developer gt Diagnostics gt System monitor gt Module s Detailed Information H W Information H Information r Module Display format Module Name QJ71C24N Product information 051020000000000 B G HER C DEC HAW LED Information HAW SW Information Isen vine teen aie rten vaime tren 18D WAIT 0000 25D WAIT 0000 1 CONFIG o7co CH1 SIO 0001 CH2 S10 0000 CH1 MODE 0001 CH1 PRO 0000 CH2 PRO 0000 2 CONFIG o7co CH1 P S 0000 CH2 P S 0000 CH2 MODE 0006 CH1 C N 0000
112. next instruction will be ignored until the active instruction has been completed However simultaneous execution is available when channels to be used are not the same e Dedicated instructions simultaneous execution error 7FFOn occurs in the dedicated instruction attempted later However simultaneous execution is available when channels to be used are not the same UINI e Dedicated instructions simultaneous execution error 7FFOH occurs in the dedicated instruction attempted later Available X Not available 1 Since the dedicated instructions shown below use a different communication protocol from that for the BIDIN instruction they are not used in the same channel e ONDEMAND OUTPUT PRR INPUT CPRTCL If the dedicated instructions shown above are used in the same channel with the BIDIN instruction the communication protocol setting error 7FF2H occurs 10 19 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTION 0 C STRUCTIONS MELSEC Q 3 Whether a BIDIN instruction was completed normally can be checked by the completion device D2 or status display device at completion D2 1 a Completion device Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the BIDIN instruction is completed normally and turns off at the next END processing b Status display device at completion Does not change when left off Operation during execution of a BIDIN instruction END END END END Sequence processing processing processing process
113. of the interrupt pointer Ixx for use in the sequence program 2 Interrupt pointer No of units on the PLC side Set the number of units 2 of interrupt pointers I for use in the sequence program 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 3 Start I O No on the intelligent module unit side Set the start I O No for the Q series C24 4 Start SI No on intelligent module unit side 1 Assign control numbers SI on the Q series C24 side to the interrupt pointers Ixx used in the sequence program 2 Set the start SI No 0 of the interrupt control numbers 3 The interfaces for data reception corresponding to the interrupt control numbers are as follows SI No 0 for interface on the CH1 side SI No 1 for interface on the CH2 side 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 6 Settings with the Utility Package GX Configurator SC The settings defined with GX Configurator SC for operation of the Q series C24 are described in Chapter 8 The following concerns the data set from GX Configurator SC 1 Data set in the Q series C24 for the use of specific functions 2 Data set in the programmable controller CPU to communicate information between the Q series C24 and the programmable controller CPU of the mounting station This section explains the Auto refresh settings of the data mentioned in 2 above Setting purpose The auto refresh settings are defined to automatically store
114. of unused memory in the OS area allocated for receive data storage if DTR DSR control is being performed Read the receive data from the sequence program as the receive data is stored in the OS area when the DTR signal is OFF If DTR DSR control is not implements the DTR signal is always ON e If an MC protocol or bidirectional protocol is performing data communication the Q series C24 turns ON when communications is enabled 5 DSR signal 6 e During DTR DSR control if this signal is OFF the Q series C24 does not send data to the external device Be sure that this signal is always turned ON when the external device is ready to receive If DTR DSR control is not implemented the DSR signal status is ignored 6 RS signal 7 e The Q series C24 turns ON OFF the RS signal as shown below e When the communication system is full duplex communications if the Q series C24 ready X1E is ON the Q series C24 turns ON the RS signal e When the communication system is half duplex communications when the Q series C24 sends data to an external device it turns ON the RS signal e The RS signal is not turned OFF even when the receive data cannot be stored in the Q series C24 7 CS signal 8 The Q series C24 does not send data to an external device when this signal is OFF e Be sure that this signal is always turned ON when the external device is ready to receive 8 Rl signal 9 e The RI signal is used when the modem status is m
115. operation offline operation YES offline operation Start the Flash ROM setting Select a target intelligent function module screen See Section 9 3 1 screen Is the original data saved in a file Read the data from the file Load file Display the system setting sub screen Select in the Flash ROM setting screen for changing the setting values See Section 9 4 Click on each of the setting items f Change the setting values in the corresponding corresponding to the setting values system setting sub screens you wish to change For each item See Sections 9 4 1 to 9 4 11 enter or select the new setting value Have you changed all the applicable setting values In the Flash ROM setting screen click on the button Then in the file designation dialog box designate the file name under which the data will be saved All of the new setting values will be saved in the file x1 eeaeee aA This operation is allowed only in the Flash ROM setting screen See Section 9 3 3 x1 Save the new system setting values in a file for backup Close the Flash ROM setting screen Close 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC 1 Online operation 4 Start the Monitor Test screen Is the original data saved YES Is the data saved in a file MELSEC Q Select a target
116. or later Switching the GX Developer connection mode by switching the mode UINI instruction Specification of station No 65 to 120 by MC protocol QnA compatible 4C 3C frame only Access to link direct device LW10000 or higher using MC protocol QnA compatible 4C 3C frame only Access to extended data register D65536 or higher or extended link register W10000 or higher using MC protocol QnA compatible 4C 3C 2C frame only Function version B or later whose first 5 digits of the serial No are 06062 Function version B or later whose first 5 digits of the serial No are 09043 Function version B or later whose first 5 digits of the serial No are 09043 x Universal model QCPU of function version B or later whose first 5 digits of the serial No are 09042 Universal model QCPU of function version B or later whose first 5 digits of the serial No are 09042 Universal model QCPU of function version B or later whose first 5 digits of the serial No are 09042 Q 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q Function version of the Q series C24 Version of related product QJ71C24N R2 R4 QJ71C24 R2 CPU module GX Developer GX Configurator SC Can be set in buffer memory Function version B or later first 5 digits of the serial No are Echo back enable disable setting for RS 422 485 10122 or greater interface System registration The QJ71C24N R4 only to flash ROM
117. or less QCPU Q Mode User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 7000H or more Section 11 2 of the User s Manual Basic 10 13 10 13 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTION 2 A MELSEC Q Program example The following example shows a program that stores data received via the non procedure protocol in D10 and later When the input output signals of the Q series C24 are from X Y00 to X Y1F x3 r s S DO x ba Designate the receive channel Clear the reception result and receive data count storage device to 0 4 D rove 0 D1 K2 bo wove 10 D3 Designate the allowable receive data count Lt With normal completion the receive data within the 1g INPUT UO po D10 MO J allowable receive data count user designated is read from the receive data storage area in the buffer H j Mov D2 z0 y memory e Once the INPUT instruction is executed the user designated read completion signal MO turns ON emov D10 D110 KOZO for 1 scan e The reading of receive data and switching of the tt set m00 J ON OFF status are performed by the i programmable controller CPU oa RST M100 The abnormal completion flag is reset by an external command 10 14 10 14 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTION S SASE MELSEC Q 10 5 G P BIDOUT Data can be sent using the bidirectional protocol Applicable device Set Internal device Link direct device Intelligent function Index register data wees user
118. programmable controller CPU information is information about the access target CPU type used in MC protocol communications When the programmable controller CPU monitoring function is active this function sends the monitoring information of the programmable controller CPU to the external device through the modem Chapter 6 Section 10 8 of User s Manual Basic Section 11 1 7 of User s Manual Basic Chapter 2 of User s Manual Application Automatic initialization for modem Callback Initializes the modem automatically when Q Series C24 starts up After line connection from the GX Developer access to the QCPU from the GX Developer is made possible through line reconnection from the Q Series C24 callback Transmission costs after line connection from the Q Series C24 side are borne by the Q Series C24 side Chapter 3 of the User s Manual Application Remote password check This function allows data communication after the external device completes the unlock processing of the remote password set at a QCPU It is executed when the QCPU is accessed from a remote location using the modem function of the Q series C24 in the following forms of data communication Communication using the MC protocol Communication using GX Developer Chapter 3 of User s Manual Application Section 3 18 of Reference Manual Addition of non reception monitoring time format in non procedure protocol This funct
119. receive 5 complete code as needed s2 Turns ON the reception data read completion Y1 x1 When unit is in bytes 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 6 2 Sending Data to the External Device This section explains data transmission from the programmable controller CPU to the external device 6 2 1 Transmission methods The following shows how to send data in any format using the non procedure protocol Programmable controller CPU Transmission data 02H 41H 42H 43H 44H 45H 46H 47H 48H 03H Q series C24 Transmission area buffer memory oan 10 data count 004 OA A i STX Transmission 414 1 02x data Got gt B 43x 42 1 2 E D OUTPUT instruction 451 1 44x G F 47n 46x ETX H 03x 48x External device Contents CH1 CH2 Control timing Transmission instruction OUTPUT instruction completion device OUTPUT instruction 1 Transmission data is stored in the device designated with the OUTPUT instruction 2 Control data is stored in the device designated with the OUTPUT instruction 3 When the OUTPUT instruction is executed the Q series C24 sends the amount of data designated by the transmission data count from the transmission data area to the external device in ascending order of the transmission
120. receive data clearing is being performed with the TO instruction 1 is written to Receive data clear request address A8u 2 Receive data clear processing is performed for the Q Series C24 s OS area See Section 6 1 2 3 When receive data clear processing is completed receive data clear request address A8H becomes 0 The following page shows an example of a program to clear receive data with the FROM TO instruction Create a program that contains the contacts user flags etc indicating the following statuses in the TO instruction e Contacts indicating that the reception data read request X3 XA and reception abnormal detection X4 XB are OFF e Contact indicating that no dedicated instruction OUTPUT PRR INPUT is currently being executed e Contact indicating that reception data clear processing is not currently being performed x1 When the function version A Q Series C24 is used resume data communications a further 100 ms after the receive data clear request address A8H 148nH changes from a 1 to a 0 Q series C24 Receive data clear request address A81 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 4 Send request i execution disabled 2 Dedicated instruction for sending execution disabled too eee Receive data clear processing 3 Programmable controller CPU Program 1 TO instructio
121. registered and used Not allowed Area that cannot be registered D oO a IMPORTANT Do not write data in the System area of the buffer memory If data is written to any of the system areas the programmable controller system may malfunction Some of the user areas are partially system areas Care must be taken when performing read write to the buffer memory 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 1 Use the FROM TO instructions or other applicable commands to access the buffer memory shown in this section when a program for a QnA series serial communication module is utilized for the Q series C24 see Section 2 in Appendix In QCPU the access to the buffer memory of an intelligent function module is executed with a dedicated instruction It is not necessary to access directly using the FROM TO instructions or other instructions from the sequence program except when accessing the buffer memory as shown in the programming on each function reference page 2 When a program for a QnA series serial communication module is utilized for the Q series C24 it is recommended to replace the instructions with the dedicated instructions shown on the corresponding function reference page of each manual for the Q series C24 3 To use the dedicated instructions change the following initial settings default values for data communications by registration operation from GX Configurator SC or by the CSET instruction for the sequence program
122. registration No 800CH For registration No 800D For registration No 800EH 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q Decimal Hex Application Name value Registration section Me non Bi Pa 7486 to 7526 1D3EH o 1D66x For registration No 800FH 7527 to 7567 For registration No 8010H 7568 to 7608 1D90H i 4DB8x For registration No 8011H 7609 to 7649 2 For registration No 80124 The user registration area has the following combined uses with For registration No 80134 data written by the user according to the purpose of use by the F TO instruction etc 1E0Bn to 1E33x For registration No 8014H See each explanation item concerning the configuration of each For registration No 8015H area the data written etc 7773 to 7813 1 If data communications is being carried out by user 1E5Du to 1E85n For registration No 8016H P registration frame 7814to 7854 For user ns peta saa Not aloweg Refer to left 1E861 to 1EAEX I registration For registration No 8017H e User registration frame User s Manual Application lot allowe description cer For registration No 8018H Chapter 9 a 2 a 3 2 If data communications is being carried out by the modem 1ED8H to 1F00x For registration No 8019H function 7937 to 7977 e Initialization Data User s Manual Application Section 1F01H E 1F29H For registration No 801AH 3 4 3 App 7978 to 8018 7 r i SUA
123. respective power companies and applications in which a special quality assurance system is required such as for Railway companies or Public service purposes shall be excluded from the programmable controller applications In addition applications in which human life or property that could be greatly affected such as in aircraft medical applications incineration and fuel devices manned transportation equipment for recreation and amusement and safety devices shall also be excluded from the programmable controller range of applications However in certain cases some applications may be possible providing the user consults their local Mitsubishi representative outlining the special requirements of the project and providing that all parties concerned agree to the special circumstances solely at the users discretion Microsoft Windows Windows NT and Windows Vista are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries Pentium is a trademark of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation Other company names and product names used in this document are trademarks or registered trademarks of respective companies VS VIEW Copyright c 2001 ComponentOne LLC VS FlexGrid Pro Copyright c 2000 VideoSoft Corporation SPREAD Copyright c 1996 FarPoint Technologies Inc SH NA 080006 O0 Q Corresponding Serial Communication Module
124. select test function R ffer memory address ma cH Accumulated count of unlock process normal completion 22FBH Accumulated count of unlock process abnormal completion 22FCH Accumulated count of lock process based on circuit disconnection 22FFH Section 3 3 of User s Manual Application Operation procedure Step 1 Display the Modem function monitor test screen Step 2 Click the setting value area of the item to be cleared to 0 Step 3 Click the Execute test The counter value of the selected item becomes 0 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 9 6 3 Transmission control and others monitor test Purpose Monitor the RS 232 signal status and the various setting values for data communication Operating procedure Monitor screen gt CHO Transmission control monitor test Monitor Test screen CH1 Transmission control and others monitor test Module information Module type Serial Communications Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name QJ71C24N Setting item Current value Setting value ON OFF co CS CTS RI CI Communication protocol status GX Developer connection For GX Developer connection the following transmission status is invalid Transmission status Independent Operation setting Flash ROM setting Details Write to Save fil Current value Monitoring module nR display Cannot execute test Read from module Load
125. setting r Details Write to Save fil Current value Monitoring module KS display Cannot execute test Readfom Load file Make text file Start monitor Stop monitor Evecute test Close Monitor Test items The following selection menus for monitor test operation will be displayed Reference section containing Function i explanation ERR occurrence ERR clear request Communication error information error code information X Y monitor test Section 9 6 1 ransmission control and others monitor test Section 9 6 3 Bidirectional monitor Section 9 6 6 Section 9 6 11 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 9 6 1 X Y monitor test Purpose Perform the monitoring of I O signals and testing of output signals Operating procedure Monitor screen X Y monitor test Monitor Test screen Pair Module information Module type Serial Communications Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name QJ71C24N Setting item Current value Setting value X00 CH1 Transmission normal completion Transmission abnormal completion X02 Transmission processing in progress Off x03 Reception data read request Off x04 Reception abnormal detection Off X06 Mode switching Off MOE ERR occurrence Off 1A Global signal Off X07 CH2 Transmission normal completion Off x08 Transmission abnormal completion Off x09 Transmission processing in progress Off
126. station GX Configurator SC can not be used Checking the required utility While the start I O is displayed on the Intelligent function module utility setting screen x may be displayed for the model name This means that the required utility has not been installed or the utility cannot be started from GX Developer Check the required utility selecting Tools Intelligent function utility Utility list in GX Developer 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 9 3 3 Common utility package operations This section explains how to perform the common operations in the data setting auto refresh setting and monitor test screens 1 Control keys Special keys that can be used for operation of the utility package and their applications are shown in the table below Application Esc Cancels the current entry in a cell Closes the window Used in combination with the mouse operation to select multiple cells for test execution Delete Deletes the character where the cursor is positioned When a cell is selected clears all of the setting contents in the cell Back space Page up Moves the cursor one page up age P Completes the entry in the cell Deletes the character where the cursor is positioned 2 Operation Command Buttons Current value displa Displays the current value of the item selected Make text file Creates a file containing the screen data in text file format Start monitor Star
127. subcommand User frame access e Byte count exceeding the number of data error bytes that can be requested was designated e Flash ROM write allow prohibit designation from GX Configurator SC is set to OFF e At the switch setting on GX Developer modification allowed switch was set to OFF Modification allowed error e There is an error in the user frame variable data system enor e The OS of the Q series C24 detected System error some error 11 23 User frame data error 7E56x MELSEC Q Non Pre MC Proce i defined dure Corrective action Bidire ctional Check and correct the external device transmit message and restart data communications To use the pre defined protocol function use a supported Q series C24N Use the QJ71C24N R2 4 whose first 5 digits of serial No is 10122 or higher Check and correct the external device transmit message and restart data communications Make the timer 1 monitoring time longer When accessing another station s CPU check if the routing parameters match e The OS of the Q series C24 detected System error 1 some error e Do not issue continuous requests from the external device e Set the timer 1 monitoring time to the external device time out time e Make arrangements between the target device and programmable controller CPU so that mode switching is not executed during data transmission Check and correct the external device transm
128. table should be set to OFF for the interfaces for which Yes Even Vertical parity Valid only when parity bit is set to Yes GX Developer connection is set in the communication protocol setting The Q series C24 operates with the values set in GX Developer See below Transmission setting Setting description for GX Developer Operation setting Data bit Parity bit Independent Evenfodd party dd O 1 Operation setting e This sets whether to use each of the two Q series C24 interfaces for independent data communication or to use the two for linked data communication The setting and data flow for linked operation is explained in 2 2 Data bit setting e This sets the bit length for one character in data communicated with an external device according to the specifications of the external device When data communication is performed using format 5 of the MC protocol for binary code communication it is necessary to set it to 8 bits when processing the sum check code with the bidirectional protocol e If 7 bits are set the data is communicated by ignoring the most significant bit 8th bit 3 Parity bit setting e This sets whether or not a parity bit vertical parity is added for one byte of transmission receive data according to the specifications of the external device e The addition of the parity bit to the transmission data and the checking of the parity bit of receive data a
129. that allow the Q series C24 to perform data communication with external devices See Section 3 3 3 of the User s Manual Application for how to perform the remote password setting 4 5 1 I O assignment settings Setting purpose The I O assignment settings perform the settings for the types of modules to be mounted on a base unit the range of input output signals and switches of the Q series C24 Startup procedure PLC parameters gt I O assignment For screen display see the GX Developer Operating Manual Setting screen Q parameter setting x PLC name PLC system PLC tile PLC RAS Device Program Boot file SFC 1 0 assignment 1 0 Assignment 0 Switch setting 1 QU71C24N 32paints v 0000 2 Detailed setting 3 4 5 6 7 6 6 v xl Assigning the 0 address is not necessary as the CPU does it automatically Leaving this setting blank will not cause an error to occur Base setting Base mode Base model name Power model name Extension cable Slots G Auto a C Detail z z z 8 Slot Default 12 Slot Default z z t RE aoran Import Multiple CPU Parameter Read PLC data Acknowledge XY assignment Multiple CPU settings Defaut Check End Cancel Display description Item name Type Select intelli Model name Enter the module model name to be mount
130. that temporarily stores the data to be received while a request for the reading of the receive data is being made to the programmable controller CPU The user cannot read the receive data in the OS area When the sequence program finishes reading the receive data in the buffer memory in response to the read request the receive data in the OS area and any succeeding receive data is stored successively in the receive area of the buffer memory when the next read request is issued Also when the OS area s free space which stores the receive data is reduced to 64 bytes default value or less a request to discontinue data reception from the external device is issued by the following transmission control the RS signal does not turn OFF When DTR control is set the DTR signal turns OFF e When DC1 DC3 control is set DC3 is sent When there is no more free space in the OS area to store receive data an SIO error occurs and the SIO information bit in the LED ON status and communication error status address 201H 202n in the buffer memory turns ON In that case succeeding receive data is discarded until a free space becomes available in the OS area For more details on the transmission control see Chapter 7 of the User s Manual Application 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL External device 100 words Q series C24 Reception data read request X3 Sequence program External device MELSEC
131. the nonprocedural protocol or bidirectional protocol using the REMFR REMTO instruction and I O signals Refer to Chapter 6 for the communication using the nonprocedural protocol and to Chapter 7 for the communication using the bidirectional protocol 1 Program conditions The following program sends data from the CH1 side when the transmission signal X1024 turns ON a Devices used e Transmission command cccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeseneeteaees X1024 e Transmission command pulse Signal M10 e Transmission result acquisition command 0 eee M11 e Completion device for REMFR REMTO instruction M100 to 103 e Normal abnormal completion flag for REMFR REMTO INSUHUCTON 2 eeaeee tent lame Pete eel etal M200 to 202 Normal abnormal completion of transmission c0008 M300 M301 e Transmission data count ccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeseeeesaees D10 e Transmission data 5 Words esceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeneeenteeas D11 to D15 e Data transmission result cccccceeeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeessaees D20 b Intelligent function module switch E Refer to Section 4 5 2 Switch No Bit o Setting Position Designated value value Operation setting Independent Data bit 07COH Write during RUN Enabled Setting modifications Enabled b8 to b15 Communication rate setting 19200bps Non procedure protocol 00061 Communication protocol setting or o
132. the processing results in GX Configurator SC perform Read from module Items subject to this operation in the Monitor screen Setting item Current value Setting value System setting can be made default with the following procedure Execute test System setting default Make Flash ROM write allow prohibit designation Allow Execute test System setting write System setting default Default request Default request ks Flash ROM write allow prohibit designation Allow Allow System setting write Write request Write request 9 4 13 Flash ROM write allow prohibit setting This section explains the settings to allow or prohibit writing to the flash ROM Startup procedure Online gt Monitor Test gt Select monitor Test module gt Monitor Test gt Monitor screen Operating procedure Procedure 1 In the Monitor screen select Flash ROM write allow prohibit and set Allowed or Prohibited Procedure 2 Click on Execute test Flash ROM write allow prohibit will be set to Allowed or Prohibited accordingly 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 9 5 Auto Refresh Setting The Auto Refresh Settings are used to automatically store the error information and status information currently stored in the Q series C24 s buffer memory in the device specified by the programmable controller CPU For details see Section 4 6 9 UTILITY PACKAGE
133. to the module or cable e Be careful not to let foreign matters such as sawdust or wire chips get inside the module They may cause fires failure or malfunction e The top surface of the module is covered with protective film to prevent foreign objects such as cable offcuts from entering the module when wiring Do not remove this film until the wiring is complete Before operating the system be sure to remove the film to provide adequate heat ventilation Startup Maintenance Instructions A CAUTION e Do not disassemble or modify each module Doing so could cause failure malfunction injury or fire e Before mounting dismounting the module be sure to shut off all phases of external power supply used by the system Failure to do so may cause module failure or malfunctions e Do not install remove the module to from the base unit or the terminal block to from the module more than 50 times after the first use of the product IEC 61131 2 compliant Failure to do so may cause malfunction e Do not touch the connector while the power is on Doing so may cause malfunction e Before cleaning up and retightening terminal screws and module fixing screws be sure to shut off all phases of external power supply used by the system Not doing so may cause failure or malfunction of the module If the screws are loose it may cause the module to fallout short circuits or malfunction If the screws are tightened too much it may cause damages
134. to the screws and or the module resulting in the module falling out short circuits or malfunction e Always make sure to touch the grounded metal to discharge the electricity charged in the body etc before touching the module Failure to do so may cause a failure or malfunctions of the module Operation Instructions A CAUTION e When performing the control of the programmable controller in operation especially changing data program and operation status status control by connecting a personal computer etc to the intelligent function module read this manual carefully and confirm if the overall safety is maintained Failure to perform correct operation s to change data program or the status may result in system malfunction machine damage or an accident Disposal Instructions A CAUTION e When disposing of this product treat it as industrial waste REVISIONS x The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Print Date_ Manual Number Dec 1999 SH NA 080006 A First edition Oct 2000 SH NA 080006 B Jun 2001 SH NA 080006 C Feb 2002 SH NA 080006 D Oct 2002 SH NA 080006 E Add the contents of the function version B Correction Contents Entire manual change MELSECNET 10H to MELSECNET H About Manuals About The Generic Terms and Abbreviations Product Configuration Section 1 2 1 2 8 1 3 POINT Section 2 2 2 3 2 5 2 6 Section 3
135. transmission data ceeeee 7 16 7 2 3 Sequence program for data transmission cccccceeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeesaeeseneessaeeesaeeesieeeseaeeass 7 19 7 2 4 How to detect transmission errors cecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseesaeeseeseeseesieesieesieetieesieesieeanesieee 7 22 7 3 Processing when Simultaneous Transmission Performed During Full Duplex Communications 7 24 7 3 1 Processing when simultaneous transmissions OCCUF ccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeneeeaeeeneeeneeeaes 7 24 7 3 2 Communication data processing when simultaneous transmissions OCCUL cecceeeeeeeeeeees 7 25 7 4 Data Communications Precautions ccecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeseaeeeaeseaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeereeaeeeatenas 7 27 8 1 Function of the Pre Defined Protocol cceecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeneeeeesaeeeaeeeaeesaeeeaeesaeesaeesaeesaeeeaeeseeeeeeatenas 8 3 8 1 1 Data communication Procedure ecccccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaceeceneeseaeeecaeeeeaeeeeaeeseaeeseaeeeeeeeseatenseeeaes 8 3 8 1 2 Pre defined protocol system Setting eee eececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeseeseeseesieeseeseesieesieesieesieesieesieesieee 8 5 8 1 3 Pre defined protocol Monitor test cccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeaeeceaeeseaeeeeaeeesaaeeseaeeesaeesceeseeeeenseetans 8 6 8 1 4 Protocol executioin log storage FUNCTION eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeteeeteeeeeeaeesaeeseesieeseesieesieesieesieeneesieee 8 7
136. values for data communication for actual data communication and for storing communication status and communication error information 3 Data read write to the user area should be performed following the instructions in the corresponding detailed reference page b System area This area is used by the Q series C24 system 2 List of buffer memory assignments A buffer memory is configured with 16 bits per address Name default value etc of each address of the buffer memory is shown in the lists on the following pages 1 Abbreviations in the Protocol column MC MC protocol Non Non procedure protocol Bi Bidirectional protocol Pd Pre defined protocol Meaning of symbols shown in the Protocol column The following symbols are assigned to protocols related to the setting values of a corresponding area and to areas used for controlled with user settings and indicate what kind of access is allowed to the area in question RW Area where it is possible to read write from to the programmable controller CPU and an external device R Area where only reading is possible from the programmable controller CPU and an external device System area used by the system or area not used by the corresponding protocol Meaning of symbols shown in the Registration column Indicates whether or not it is possible to use a value in the corresponding area by registering it to the flash ROM of the Q series C24 Allowed Area that can be
137. when the CH1 interface receive area consists of addresses 600H to 7FFH default value 1st data 2nd data 3rd data 511 words 39 words 472 words 78 words 117 words 433 words Q series C24 Reception data read request X3 Sequence program Read data 1st 39 words and 2nd 472 words Read data 1st 511 words 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 6 1 3 Sequence program for data reception This section explains the sequence program for data reception For details on the INPUT instruction for data reception see Chapter 10 X3 Read request CH1 side Create control data from DO Abnormal X4 detection G INPUT Un DO D10 MO MO M1 Processing for normal completion receive data is stored M1 Processing for abnormal completion Reading and discarding received data resent request etc CH1 side Q series C24 ready X1E 1 Reception data read request X3 ON during abnormal reception detection ON during abnormal reception detection Reception abnormal detection X4 INPUT instruction INPUT instruction complete MO device Mo INPUT instruction complete M1 device 1 Normal completion abnormal completion Received data count address 6001 m Received data address 6014 to Receive data 1 Receive data 2 Data reception Data recep
138. with the INPUT instruction 3 When the INPUT instruction is executed receive data is read from the reception data storage area of the buffer memory 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 1 Data reception by receive complete code for variable length reception a This method is used to send data by adding the receive complete code set in the Q series C24 at the complete of the message to be sent from the external device When the Q series C24 receives the receive complete code data preset in GX Configurator SC by the user it sends a receive data read request to the sequence program The read request from the Q series C24 allows the sequence program to read the receive data up to the receive complete code received from the external device c The receive complete code can be changed to match the specifications of the external device An arbitrary 1 character 1 byte code within the 00H to FFH range can be designated d The Q series C24 issues a receive data read request to the programmable controller CPU as follows according to the set value of the receive end code 1 When receive complete code not changed Default value ODOAn CR LF is added to the end of the message and sent from the external device If LF is received within the time set in the no reception monitoring time timer 0 after CR is received the Q series C24 stores the receive data up to CR LF to the buffer memory
139. 02 G P IONDEMAND icicle EE AEE ech atcuel tad acesatete char actareuel tas ERE 10 3 10 8 G P OW TL PUT iaccsctcs feet ckecevebeks EEEE ceeaheh biel bd aeeshed iaekeletarenthet ited ti ceeded laced etiad 10 7 10 4 G INPUT enon nee ne iain een a a ain ean eae 10 11 10 5G P BIDQUT natin ete vie ene ee ive ea ne ee eed eee 10 15 10 6 G P BIDIN aii teetie ne Mare te arte ee Wee ie Wate on eee os eae en eee 10 18 10 7 G P SPBUSY ins ah eee ele ees ee ee R ee ee eee 10 21 10 8 ZP CSET Receive data Clear ccecceeceesceesdeeseeeeceecenecceecneeeceeceneadeeseeeaneeceeeadqeneeenseseneensndeeenneatee 10 23 11 1 Checking the Status of the Serial Communication Module ccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeas 11 1 11 1 1 Checking the LED ON status communications error status and switch setting status of the serial communication module cceccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeaeeceaeeeeaeeseaeeesceeteaeesseeseneeess 11 1 11 1 2 Initializing error information of the serial communication module ececeeeeeeeeetetteeteeeteees 11 6 11 1 3 Reading the RS 232 control signal Status eeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeteeseeseeseeseesieesieesieetieetaees 11 10 11 1 4 Reading the data communication status Transmission sequence status eceeeeeeeeee 11 11 11 1 5 Reading the switch Setting Status 0 ceceeceseeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeseeeseesaeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseaeseaesenseaeeeaes 11 12 11 1 6 How to read the c
140. 02H when an error occurs The CHU side LED on status and communication error status can be confirmed by GX Developer s System monitor or GX Configurator SC Refer to Section 11 1 1 For errors without a corresponding signal name entered to errors generated with the MC protocol communication NAK comes on 11 2 1 Error code table The following shows the error codes error details and corrective actions for the errors that may occur during communication using MC protocol excluding A compatible 1C frame non procedure protocol bidirectional protocol or pre defined protocol in the table is the error code when the target CPU is nota Q QnACPU ss Protocol Error code Signal Hexa Description stone Corrective action Ne po Bidire Pre decimal roce tional defined e See Troubleshooting of the QCPU Q Error detected by the CPU mode maintenance and inspection O user s manual and take corrective action e See Appendix of the QCPU Q mode maintenance and inspection user s manual details and take corrective action e If this error occurs during CPRTCL instruction execution identify the CPU error and correct the CPU device No that is specified in the Non conversion or Conversion variable data storage area 71014 EEE siemeiror e The OS of the Q series C24 detected 1 7102 y some error Programmable e Make the watchdog timer timer 1 time 7103 RATAN Aeneas e Cannot communicate with the Q series longer
141. 1 3 7 Communication error NAK ccecccceeceeeeceeeeceeceneeceaeeeeaeeceaaeeseaeeseaeeseaeeeeaceeseaeeseaeesseeesineeaneeteas 11 42 11 3 8 Communication error C N ccccceccceeeceeeeceeeeceeceneeeeneeeeaeeecaceeseaeeseaeeseaeeseaeeseaeeseaeessaeeesieeeiseesaas 11 42 11 3 9 Communication error P S oo cecccceccceeececeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeecececaneesaneeeeaeeceaeeecaeeseaeeeseneeseaeesseetsaeeeeiseesaas 11 43 11 3 10 Communication error PRO ceccceeeseeeneceeeeeeceeeececeeceneeceaeeeeaeescacecaeeeeaeeesaaesseaeeeseessieeeseneetans 11 44 11 3 11 Communication error SIO ee ceecceceecceeneceeeeeceeeeeeceeeeaeeceaeeccaeeecaeessaeeseesaeeseaeesceeseaeeesineenans 11 45 11 3 12 Communication error CH1 ERR or CH2 ERR ecccccecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteaeeteeeeseee 11 46 11 3 13 Communication is intermittent ccccceecceeeeececeeeeceeeeneeeeaeeeeaeeecaeeeeaneesaeescaeeseeeeeeeeeetieeenseeeaes 11 49 11 3 14 Undecodable data are transmitted or received ccceecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteneeteaeeteneees 11 51 11 3 15 Whether the communication error is caused on the Q series C24 or external device is unclear eee EE EE Mudd ivi Movil hae ailing vb RN vce wale denials 11 52 11 3 16 Communication is not available via the modem cccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeteneeteneees 11 53 11 3 17 Communication is not available with the ISDN sub address ccccesecee
142. 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Error code Hexa decimal Protocol unregistered error Transmission monitoring timeout error Receive wait timeout error CPU response monitoring timeout error CPU response monitoring timeout error Protocol cancel request error Packet size error Too few digits error 11 21 Description e The protocol No specified in control data for the CPRTCL instruction is not registered to the Q series C24N e The CPRTCL instruction was executed with no protocol setting data written e Transmission monitoring time has timed out Although the transmission was retried the specified number of times it did not succeed Receive wait time has timed out CPU response monitoring time has timed out during transmission Data to be sent to the device could not be acquired from the CPU within the set time CPU response monitoring time has timed out during reception Data received from the device could not be stored into the CPU within the set time A cancel request was accepted during protocol execution and the CPRTCL instruction failed The CPRTCL instruction failed because protocol setting data were written during CPRTCL instruction execution A packet of more than 2048 bytes was received When data are received by the protocol including a packet that contains a conversion variable variable number of data the number of digits corresponding to the variable is insufficient I
143. 19 is ON App 46 App 46 APPENDIXES MELSEC Q Appendix 9 7 When sending data using user frames The following program example sends data by the user frames using the REMFR REMTO instruction and I O signals Refer to Section 11 4 of the User s Manual Application for the transmission using the user frames 1 Program conditions The following program sends data using the user frames from the CH1 side when the transmission signal X1026 turns ON a Devices used b e Transmission command cccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeteeeeteeetsaees X1026 e Transmission command pulse Signal cceeeeeeeeeeeeees M10 e Transmission user frame designation command M11 e Transmission result acquisition command 0ceeee M12 e Completion device for REMFR REMTO instruction M100 to 105 e Normal abnormal completion flag for REMFR REMTO INStrUCHIONs in eid a deli M200 to 203 e Normal abnormal completion of transmission cc008 M300 M301 e Transmission data count ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeesnees DO Transmission datana n e R D1 D2 e CRILF output designation ee eeeeseeeeeeeeeneeeneeeneeeneeenteeas D5 Output head pointer designation ccccecceeeeeeeteeeeees D6 e Output count designation ec ceceeeeeeeneeeeeteeeeeeeteeeeeeeees D7 e Output frame No designation eeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees D8 to D12 e Dat
144. 2 5 2 6 Section 3 5 3 6 3 9 Section 4 1 Chapter 8 screen change Section 8 6 9 8 6 10 Section 10 1 10 2 Appendix 1 1 Addition Appendix 9 12 Feb 2005 SH NA 080006 I l Correction Section 2 1 1 Section 3 1 Section 4 5 2 1 Chapter 9 Simultaneous execution of dedicated instructions Section 10 2 1 Aug 2005 SH NA 080006 J l Correction CAUTIONS Section 3 3 1 3 3 3 Section 8 2 2 i ppendix 5 Appendix 7 1 7 2 Feb 2006 SH NA 080006 K Correction Section 2 6 Section 3 9 Section 8 2 1 8 3 3 Section 9 1 Appendix 5 Mar 2006 SH NA 080006 L l Correction SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Section 1 3 Section 2 6 Section 3 2 1 3 8 3 9 Section 8 6 9 Section 10 2 1 10 3 11 Appendix 1 Addition Section 10 1 7 Jan 2008 SH NA 080006 M Change ofa term PLC was changed to programmable controller Correction About The Generic Terms and Abbreviations Section 1 2 1 3 Section 2 1 2 5 2 7 Section 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 3 1 3 9 Section 4 1 4 3 4 4 4 5 2 4 6 4 9 2 Section 5 1 4 5 2 Section 6 1 6 Chapter 8 Section 9 2 to 9 8 Section 10 1 1 10 1 6 10 2 1 10 2 3 10 3 3 10 3 4 10 3 8 10 3 11 10 3 19 Appendix 1 1 Appendix 2 1 Appendix 3 Appendix 5 Appendix 7 1 Addition Section 2 5 Appendix 1 3 x The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Print Date_ Manual Number May 2008 SH NA 08000
145. 21051 8454 21061 8455 21071 8456 21081 8457 21091 8458 210Ax 2203 8708 2204n 8709 8965 2205n 23051 8710 8966 2206n 23061 2100H 2303 8964 2304n IFICATIONS aes For designation of programmable aa controller CPU devices No 2 2 See 1 for the details of each area Transmission pointer designation for condition agreement transmission and non procedure data transmission 0 No designation 1 to 100 Output head point send from nth Send the user frames designated in the following transmission frame No designation areas from the designated pointer position address CH1 side BAH to 11DH CH2 side 15AH to 1BDH Output count designation for condition agreement For designation Programmable of programmable controller CPU controller CPU monitoring function abnormal monitoring neon transmission and non procedure data transmission designation 0 No designation 1 to 100 Output count designate the number of frame transmissions Data No for connection designation for condition agreement transmission and notification 0 No designation OBB8u to OBD5n 8001H to 801FH Data No for connection Use prohibited Use Prohibited Data No for callback designation 1 OBB8u to OBD5n 8001H to 801FH Data number for callback Data No for callback designation 2 Data No for callback designation 3 a No for callback designation 5 a No f
146. 21121 64 to 4 095 transmission control start free area ee eee 8211 8467 Eor transmission Transmission control end free area designation 263 Application 2013H 21131 263 to 4096 transmission control end free area Allowed control designation Non procedure and non reception monitoring time format Chapter 6 of 8212 8468 designation 3 2014n 2114n User s Manual H H a p 0 Format 0 1 Format 1 Application 8213 to 8469 to 8215 8471 2015H 2115H Use prohibited System area to to Communication data monitoring designation 0000H No monitor stopped monitor designation 8216 8472 00011 Monitor start designation 20181 21181 00024 Monitoring Q series C24 is a set 10021 Monitoring stopped Q series C24 is set 100FH Monitor setting error Q series C24 is a set Data optional designation 8217 8473 Communication 9 a Fs ae nation b0 Chapter 16 of 2019H 21191 data monitoring P 9 Allowed User s Manual Timer 0 errors at occurrence stop designation b2 Applicati For system b1 b3 to b15 Application 8218 8474 Monitor buffer head address designation 201An 211An 400H to 1AFDH 2600H to 3FFDx 8219 8475 Monitor buffer size designation op00H 201Bx 211By 0003H to 1A00n O i iii ee User frame receive format designation 1st to 4th 0 Format 0 1 Format 1 Section 9 4 7 Chapter 11 of User s Manual Exclusive format 1 received data count 1st to
147. 24 and the external device See Section 4 5 2 in this manual m A setting that automatically refreshes the Perform auto refresh setting status of the Q series C24 and error data to with GX Configurator SC the GX Configurator SC device See Sections 4 6 and 9 3 in this manual It is possible to change setting values for various functions including special functions See the explanation for each function in the applicable sections and manuals See Chapter 9 Configure details of the pre defined protocol communication In GX Configurator SC configure or change the settings y e Transmission and reception for the data communication system Transmission and receive data See the explanation for each function in the applicable sections and manuals Communication using Communication using Communication using Communication using Communication using non procedure protocol bidirectional protocol MC protocol special functions Pre defined protocol see Chapter 6 see Chapter 7 see the Reference see the User s see Chapter 8 Manual Manual Application 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 3 Part Names and Functions Part names of Q series C24 are shown below
148. 24H to User s Manual Application Exclusive format 1 received data count 1st to 4th 2027H 2127H 2 CRILF output designation Transmission user F i 7 Output head pointer designation frame designation Output count designation Chapters 6 of Timeout at No protocol 2014H 2114H A User s Manual Application 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 9 4 8 Bidirectional system setting Purpose For data transmission using the bidirectional protocol register system setting values Operating procedure e Online operation Monitor screen gt CHO Bidirectional system setting e Offline operation Flash ROM setting screen gt CHO Bidirectional system setting Setting screen CH1 Bidirectional system setting 15 x Module information I Module type Serial Communications Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name QJ71C24N Setting item Setting value Simultaneously transmission data valid invalid designation Send receive valid hd f Flash ROM setting r Details wie Save file Weeks Select input Readfrom sad file aa __ module Send receive valid Send valid receive invalid Send invalid receive valid Send receive invalid Make text file Execute test Close Setting item el memory address rere Section 7 3 of Simultaneously transmission data valid invalid designation 13BH User s Manual Basic 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configu
149. 2600H to 3FFFH of reception area A7H 147H 0001H to 1A00H Receive data clear request o A8H 148H reception 0 No request 1 Requested 169 329 First frame No designation 1st A9H 149H Allowed Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Section 9 4 5 Section 9 4 7 Section 9 7 Not allowed Other than 0 Designated Section 9 4 6 0 No designation 170 330 First frame No designation 2nd ne eae a ka 173 ADH o 334 to For designation of on demand user frame For designation of receive user 0 No designation Last frame No designation 1st 0 No designation Last frame No designation 2nd 0 No designation Other than 0 Designated Other than 0 Designated Other than 0 Designated User frame use enable disable designation 0 Do not use 1 Use 2 Data communication possible Q series C24 set First frame No designation 1st 1st to 4th Ou No designation 1H or more Head frame No Chapters 9 and 10 of User s Manual Allowed Application Section 9 4 7 Chapters 9 and 11 of User s Manual Application 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q Address a Initial Protocol A Reference Decimal Hex Application Name value Registration secioni Mc Non Bi Pa OH No aaa HO or more Last frame No 2 of receive user hed Allowed frame 9 eee 1 or more Output frame No designation User frame User frame being transmitted 182 B6H Rea being 0 Not send Not allo
150. 3 18 3 8 List of Input Output Signals for the Programmable Controller CPU eeeeeceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeneeeeeeaeeas 3 19 3 9 List of Applications and Assignments of the Buffer Memory c ceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeenaeeeaeeeas 3 22 A 8 A 8 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION 4 1 to 4 35 4 1 Handling ProcautionS arare naa Ra a E A E A R E A AA 4 1 4 2 Settings and Procedures Prior to Operation ssessessesresreereinesnernernsrneenennetnsnndtnenactnnindenetactnanneeneacenennann 4 2 4 3 Part Names and Functions sesen a a a a 4 3 44 External Wining ic ieccceccectsceeedes iden iain e iaa a aa aaria 4 5 4 4 1 Connecting the RS 232 interface full duplex communications 0 2 0 eeceee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeaeees 4 6 4 4 2 Connecting the RS 422 485 interface occ eeceeceesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeesaeeeaeesaeesaeesaeeeaneatenas 4 9 4 5 Settings tor GX Devlope eraa hinchada aha hs ihe aaa dit 4 14 4 5 1 O assignment SOUINGS oeaan a aa PA tecta sdb daa ndl eal AA 4 14 4 5 2 Switch settings for I O and intelligent functional module 00 ee ee eee eteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeateas 4 15 4 5 3 The Intelligent function module interrupt pointer Setting 2 0 0 eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeeeeatens 4 22 4 6 Settings with the Utility Package GX Configurator SC 0 0 eeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeseeseeseeseesieesieeeees 4 24 AT Individual Station VeSt 2 eerie 8 ies load ete dead edn eile
151. 36 91621 XPV MONO EST a aa a aa aea a aa a a aaia i 9 37 9 6 2 Modem function monitor test ccecccececceeeceeeeeeeeceeeeeaeeecaneecaeeceaeeseaeeecaeeeseaeeseaeetsaeeeseesieeeseeeesaes 9 38 9 6 3 Transmission control and others monitor test ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeseeeseeseesieesieesieetneeeee 9 41 9 6 4 MC Protocol Montor aa aa a ee a a ea ee ke 9 43 9 6 5 Non procedure monitor test cccccescccescceeeceeseneeceneeeeaeeceaneseeneesneeseaeeesaeeeeaneeseneeeeaeeeeaneseeseuseesaes 9 45 9O e Bdr cona ON tle a hate de es ate ee te ea ee oe re doe ae 9 47 9 6 7 Pre defined protocol monitor test ccccceccceeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeaeeceaeeseaneeseneeteaeeseeessnesnneeeaes 9 48 9 6 8 PLC CPU monitoring monitor es c ccd cegecccestencddiicdaadenscgcadcedi R OE 9 49 9 6 9 Transmission user frame No designation monitor ce eee eeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeteeeeeaeteeeeeaetenetaes 9 51 9 6 10 Momitor test Others cecccceecceeesceeeeceeesceeceneeeeneeeaeeceaeeceanecseneesaeeseaeeesacessaneesaeeseaeeeeeeseessineeeaes 9 52 9 6 11 Display LED off and communication error information error code initialization cee 9 54 9 7 Non Procedure Protocol Receive Data Clear eeccececceeeeeneeeneeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeseaeeeaeseaeseaeecaeeeaeeeaeeeeentesas 9 56 10 1 Dedicated Instruction List and Available Devices 0 ec eceeceeeceeeneeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeneteneseneseneeeneteneeenteats 10 1 1
152. 4th Application 0 or more Exclusive format 1 received data count Transmission transparent code designation 2nd to 4th 8240 to 8496 to 0000H No designation e For designation Other than 0000 Designated below Section 9 4 5 Chapter 12 of 20304 2130H of transparent Transparent code b0 to b7 Allowed User s Manual to to code 00H to FFH Transparent code For designation of user frame Allowed receiving method Applicati 2030P 2138H Additional code b8 to b15 Application 00H to FFH Additional code 8249 to 8505 to 8255 8511 2039 2139H Use prohibited System area PECIFICATION ses ee al MELSEC Q a Appl Name miia Protocol Protocol Registration Reference pplication value g section Cycle time units designation 0 100 ms 1s 2 min Cycle time designation OH No designation 1H to FFFFH Programmable controller CPU monitoring cycle time Programmable controller CPU monitoring function designation 0 Do not use the function 1 Fixed cycle transmission 2 Condition agreement transmission Programmable controller CPU monitoring transmission measure Chapter 2 of Allowed User s Manual Application 8257 8513 designation 0 Data transmission device data and CPU status data 1 Notification Transmission pointer designation For fixed cycle transmission and data transmission 0 No designation 1 to 100 Output head point send from the nth Send the user frames designa
153. 6 N June 2009 SH NA 080006 O0 Correction SAFETY PRECAUTIONS About Manuals Compliance with the EMC and Low Voltage Directives About The Generic Terms and Abbreviations Section 1 2 1 3 Section 2 1 to 2 3 2 8 Section 4 1 4 5 2 Section 5 1 1 Section 8 2 1 8 3 2 8 3 3 Section 9 8 Section 10 1 1 10 2 1 10 3 3 10 3 6 Appendix 1 1 2 1 3 Addition Section 2 7 Correction About Manuals Manual s Use and Structure About The Generic Terms and Abbreviations Definitions and Descriptions of Terminology Sections 1 2 1 3 2 1 2 2 2 4 to 2 6 2 8 3 1 3 2 1 3 3 4 3 4 to 3 6 3 8 3 9 4 1 to 4 3 4 4 2 4 5 2 4 5 3 4 6 4 7 4 7 1 5 1 4 5 1 5 6 1 2 6 1 4 6 2 2 7 1 2 and 7 2 2 Chapter 9 Sections 9 1 9 2 1 9 2 2 9 3 1 9 4 9 4 5 9 6 1 9 6 3 10 2 to 10 8 11 1 1 11 1 2 11 1 5 11 1 6 11 2 1 11 3 11 3 1 to 11 3 3 and 11 3 5 to 11 3 22 Appendixes 1 1 2 1 3 9 6 and 10 Partial addition Section 3 3 4 Chapter 8 Sections 9 4 9 9 6 7 11 3 4 and 11 3 6 Section number change Chapters 8 to 10 9 to 11 Sections 9 6 7 to 9 6 10 9 6 8 to 9 6 11 Sections 9 4 9 to 9 4 11 9 4 10 to 9 4 12 Section 11 3 4 11 3 5 Sections 11 3 5 to 11 3 20 11 3 7 to 11 3 22 Japanese Manual Version SH 080001 T This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be
154. 681 41291 4829 Checking protocol execution log 16682 18474 412An 482AH 16683 18475 412Bu 482Bx 16684 18476 412Cx 482CH 16685 18477 412Dx 482Dx 16686 18478 412En 482En 16687 18479 412FH 482FH Application 16680 4128x Execution log 1 Protocol name 0 No protocol executed Other than 0 Protocol name Up to 32 bytes in ASCII codes are stored Communication type Protocol unexecuted Send only Receive only Send and receive Functional protocol Unregistered protocol Execution status 0 Unexecuted 1 Waiting for transmission 2 Sending 3 Waiting for reception 4 Receiving 5 Completed Execution result 0 Normal Other than 0 error code Error Matched packet No 0 Error occurred or Communication type of the executed protocol is Send only 1 to 16 Matched packet No Number of retries 0 No retry 1 to 10 Number of retries System area Use prohibited 0 No log Upper 8 bits Month Lower 8 bits Last 2 digits of year b15 to b8 b7 to bo Month 01H to 12H Year 00H to 99h last 2 digits 0 No log Upper 8 bits Hour to bO Day 01H to 31H Upper 8 bits Second Lower 8 bits Minute b15 Second 00H to 59 b8 b7 bO Minute 00x to 59x 0 No log Lower 8 bits First 2 digits of year Lower 8 bits Day of week b15 to b8 b7 to bo Year 00H to 99h first 2 digits Day of week 00H to 06
155. 8617 Designation of data No for connection 2158H 2161H 216AH 2173H 217CH 2185H 218EH 2197H 21A0H 21A9H for conditional transmission and notification 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION This chapter explains the settings and procedures required before starting a system that uses the Q series C24 1 When using the Q series C24 please read the safety precautions at the beginning of this manual 2 The installation and setup methods of the Q series C24 are the same as those for CPU modules 3 For module installation and setup see the user s manual for the programmable controller CPU used 4 1 Handling Precautions 4 The following explains the precautions for handling the Q series C24 1 Do not drop the module or subject it to heavy impact since it is made of resin 2 Tighten the screws such as module fixing screws within the following ranges Tightening torque range RS 422 485 terminal block terminal screw 0 42 to 0 58N m M3 screw RS 422 485 plug in connector socket terminal screw for QJ71C24N R4 M2 0 20 to0 25N m screw Screw hole depth L 3 2mm or less RS 232 cable connector screw M2 6 screw 0 20 to 0 39 N m Internal length from the surface Module fixing screw normally not required 0 36 to 0 48 N m M3 screw 1 x1 The module can be easily fixed o
156. 90 to 300 s EDs Modern There is an error in the initialization connection time ERR in the range of 1 to 60 s initialization retries function out designation There is an error in the designation of the data number 7FD5x ae ee for initialization Recheck the pager receiver designation 7FD6x the range of 1 to 5 initialization or 0 Section 3 4 5 There is an error in the data for connection designated 7FD7u by the data number for connection Recheck thedialing numberoftihe Section a44 external line 7FD8x The OS of the Q series C24 detected some error K 1 There is an error in the designation of the GX Set 0 to 1 to the GX Developer Sccion E ection Developer connection connection designation Recheck th iting time for th There is an error in the data for connection designated F Sa a nee P notification message part of the message Section 3 4 4 transmission by the data number for connection e Recheck the telephone number in the data for connection Check if the destination is ready for a Section 3 3 6 connection Section 3 4 3 Recheck the set value of the Section 3 4 4 connection time out Hn RR Hn A connection time out error occurred Modern function error Recheck the initialization command Check if there is any problem with the modem TA by seeing the operation manual of the modem TA Connect the modem TA to the Q series C24 Check the connection cable by seeing the operation man
157. A occccercinnanionetaianiaiaiai ia X1031 Changing fag i ei ecccenee dele eecdeegedeleeaedeiean ole dacdeeeedeunenes M300 e Change Completion flag eccecceseeeeeeeeeeeneeeneeeneeeeeeeneeeas M301 e CH1 change command pulse signal cccceeeeeeeees M10 e CH1 change COMMANG cceecceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeteeeteeeeseneeeeaees M11 e CH1 mode switching Completion 0 0 0 eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeees M12 e CH1 receive processing eeeeeeeeeetseeeeeeteeeteeeteeetseeteeetaaes M13 CH1 send processing srcenreronriiaiiiiaiaiiiiidiiiiaciiitaiiii M14 e CH2 change command pulse signal 2 ccecceeeeeeeees M20 e CH2 change COMMANG c cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteteeeeeeeeseeeteaees M21 e CH2 mode switching Completion eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees M22 CH2 receive ProCeSSing eere ereen aii M23 CH2 Send processing ariere e iea aaa EEEE M24 e REMFR REMTO instruction completion device M100 to 107 e REMFR REMTO instruction abnormal completion flag M200 to 205 e Switching mode No designation eeceeeeeeeeeeteeneeeneeees DO D10 e Transmission specifications after switching designation D1 D11 e Switch setting error and mode switching error status D2 D12 Buffer memory settings used in this example Description Set value ae MC protocol Switching mode No designation mea 1 0001H A settin A Independent eS
158. AJ71UC24 A1SJ71UC24 R2 A1SJ71UC24 R4 A1SJ71UC24 PRF A18J71024 R2 A1SJ71C24 R4 A1SJ71024 PRF A2CCPUC24 A2CCPUC24 PRF A series computer link modules UC24 Computer link module Generic term for the module below AJ71QC24 AJ71QC24 R2 AJ71QC24 R4 A1SJ71QC24 A1SJ71QC24 R2 Serial communication module QnA series AJ71QC24N AJ71QC24N R2 AJ71QC24N R4 A1SJ71QC24N1 A1SJ71QC24N1 R2 A1SJ71QC24N A1SJ71QC24N R2 Q series QJ71C24N QJ71C24N R2 QJ71C24N R4 QJ71C24 QJ71C24 R2 C Controller module Generic term for Q06CCPU V Q06CCPU V B Q12DCCPU V type C Controller module Other generic terms and abbreviations This manual uses the following generic terms and abbreviations to explain the data communication devices for the serial communication module The names model names are provided when it is necessary to explicitly identify the model being discussed Abbreviation for G BIDIN or GP BIDIN Abbreviation for G BIDOUT or GP BIDOUT Generic term for memory of the intelligent function modules special function modules used for storing data sent to or received from the programmable controller CPU setting values monitor values etc Abbreviation for Z1BUFRCVS Generic term for one of the external devices with which data can be sent received using the MC protocol or the bidirectional protocol Abbreviation for G CPRTCL or GP CPRTCL Abbreviation for ZP CSET Data communication function Generic term
159. Ax 0000H to FEFFH Wait time unit s 10 Allowed 8203 ey 200pm _ 059 Prohibited 8204 Remote password mismatch notification count designation 200CH OH No designation Section 5 1 5 For remote 1H to FFFFH Notification times Section 9 4 4 password Remote password mismatch notification accumulated count RW Allowed Chapter 3 of 8205 function designation User s Manual eo 1 Application 200Dx OH No designation 1H to FFFFH Cumulative times of notification 8199 Auto modem initialization designation 2007H 0 Do not auto initialize 1 Auto initialize Allowed 8200 Moden initialization time DR DSR signal valid invalid designation owe Section 9 4 4 2008h For designation 0 Do not ignore DR signal 1 Ignore DR signal RW PECIFICATION eS A ae MELSEC Q ware Initial R Reference Decimal Hex Application Name value Registration section MG Non Bi Pa 8206 For designation Circuit disconnect wait time programmable controller CPU watch oe oe apter 3 o 200En of modem use B A RW Allowed User s Manual function 3 00001 to FFFFH Wait time unit s Application 8456 to 8463 8207 2108 Use prohibited System area 200FH tg 210FH Receive interrupt issued designation Chapter 4 of 8208 8464 Interrupt g g RW Allowed User s Manual 20101 21101 designation 0 Do not issue interrupt 1 Issue interrupt Application 8209 8465 men 8210 8466 Transmission control start free area designation 64 Chapter 7 of 2012H
160. C CPU or y eee __ Set the programmable controller CPU monitoring function Section 9 4 10 monitoring system setting CHn Transmission user frame No designation Set the user frame number to be transmitted etc Section 9 4 11 system setting CHnh Bidirectional system setting Reset the setti lues in the buff to thei System setting default Seger E ene eu gare EA R mene O O O O Section 9 4 12 default values Write the setti lues in the buffe to the flash System setting write Met cui ex iene beg ners neler anon Section 9 4 12 ROM Flash ROM write allow prohibit Set whether to allow or prohibit writing to the flash ROM ase ape pen Section 9 4 13 designation X Y monitoritest Perform the monitoring testing of I O signals to from the Section 9 6 1 programmable controller CPU Modem function monitor test Monitor the execution status of the modem function eae ea a Section 9 6 2 CHn Transmission control Monitor the status of interface control signals values set ction 9 6 3 aie ea others monitor test _ from the GX Developer etc ae CHn MC ICHn MC protocol monitor monitor ction 9 6 4 CHn Non procedure O Secti monitor test Monitor the data communication result I O signal status CHn Bidirectional monitor jand setting values in the buffer memory be enh a Section 9 6 6 ao J e eee monitor test grin PEC GRUA Monitor the setting values and operating status of the Paora eue honea eae OS aa CHn User frame No desi
161. COMMUNICATION USING THE BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 1 The position and size of the receive area in the buffer memory can be changed with GX Configurator SC in accordance with the specifications of the external device and the received data length See Sections 9 4 5 and 9 4 8 a When changing the position and size of the receive area in the buffer memory with GX Configurator SC specify as follows Receive buffer memory head address designation Designate the starting address for the area to be used as the receive area in the user definable area address 400H to 1AFFH 2600H to 3FFFH Receive buffer memory length designation Designate by addresses the length of the area 0001H to 1A00n to be used as the receive area in the user definable area address 400H to 1AFFu 2600H to 3FFFH When changing the position and size of the receive area in the buffer memory if any of the functions below are used concurrently make sure that the addresses of the receive area do not overlap with the buffer memory addresses assigned for storing transmission receive data with the functions MC protocol buffer memory read write function MC protocol on demand function Non procedure protocol transmission receive function Bidirectional protocol transmission receive function Pre defined protocol function Transmission reception data storage area Communication data monitoring function 2 When sending data to the Q series C24 from the ex
162. COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 6 1 5 How to detect reception errors This section explains how to detect errors that may occur when receiving data from the external device The following items are considered as the primary causes of errors that may occur during data reception Cause of reception error Reference section A transmission error occurred due to noise ce A timeout for the no reception monitoring timer 0 occurred User s Manual Chapter 6 Received data that could not be converted using the ASCII BIN conversion Application Chapter 13 Received data larger than the size that could be stored in the OS area of the Q series C24 Section 6 1 2 1 Confirmation using the sequence program a Detecting the occurrence of a reception error 1 The following device and input signals turn ON e INPUT instruction complete device 1 e Reception abnormal detection X4 XB ERR occurrence XE XF 2 The reception error code can be checked using the INPUT instruction control data S1 1 Or it can be checked by reading the data reception result address 258H 268 For details on how to check the error code contents and take corrective actions see Chapter 11 b How to turn off the ERR LED and clear the error code see Section 11 1 2 1 To turn off only the ERR LED write 1 to the Communication error clear request and to turn LED off addresses OH 1h 2 To turn off the ERR LED and clea
163. CPU 10 20 10 20 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTION i SSE MELSEC Q 10 7 G P SPBUSY This instruction reads the status of data transmission and reception executed with dedicated instructions Applicable device Set Internal device e direct device Intelligent function i Index register data wes user File register e module device 7 Constant Others n 0 2 o oe uoco wora Instruction Executing code condition Comand G SPBUSY G SPBUSY GP SPBUSY T GP SPBUSY Set data Setdata data Description Set by Data type Start I O signal of the module User BIN16 bit 00 to FE Top two digit when I O signals are expressed in 3 digit Head number of devices in which the read communication status is D torsd System Device name Function 1 The function reads the execution status of a dedicated instruction directed to a module designated by the start I O signal and stores it in the device designated by D or later 2 The execution status is stored in D in the form of 1 at the corresponding bit when the processing of each instruction is started and 0 when the processing is completed The processing of each instruction is completed when the completion flag of each instruction is turned from on to off b15 to b6b5b4b3b2b1b0 D 0 bone Stores the execution status of ONDEMAND OUTPUT PRR and BIDOUT instructions directed to channel 1 Stores the
164. CPU Function QCPU QnACPU Q2AS H Q4AR Multiple block batch read write All allowed 9707B or later products gt All allowed This function is added to modules showing 9707B or later in the package indication and the DATE column of the rating plate 3 Access to other stations cannot be performed via data link system MELSECNET II MELSECNET B 4 Transmission is only possible using the printer function x5 When the Q series C24 is used it is possible to read write a maximum of 960 words in case of QC24 N it is possible to read write a maximum of 480 words x6 230400 bps can be used via CH1 of QU71C24N R2 R4 only The maximum transmission speed of QJ71C24 R2 is 115200 bps x7 Accessible to link direct device LW10000 or higher 8 Accessible to extended data register D65536 or higher and extended link register W10000 or higher x9 Available for only the CH2 side of the QJ71C24N R4 App 8 App 8 APPENDIXES MELSEC Q Appendix 2 2 Using Programs Designed for the QC24 N and Installing the Q Series C24 into Existing Systems This section explains how to use programs designed for serial communication modules in the QnA series and the installation of the Q series C24 into an existing system When using the Q series C24 make sure to set the operation mode station number and transmission specifications with the following parameter setting screen of GX Developer e Intelligent function module switch setting s
165. Chapter 6 of User s Manual Application for a detailed description of the monitoring time 11 40 11 40 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 3 6 The CPRTCL instruction execution is not completed although the RD LED blinked Symptom e When the CPRTCL instruction was executed for the protocol with Communication type set to Receive only or Send and receive RD blinked but the instruction execution was not completed 11 41 Corrective action e Incorrect protocol No is Check the protocol No specified in the control data for the specified in the control CPRTCL instruction for an error data The CD terminal is OFF If the CD terminal is OFF with CD terminal check when CD terminal check enabled set messages will not be read Change the enabled is set wiring so that the terminal status is always ON The user edited protocol Check the packet format of the external device and setting in GX correct the protocol setting Configurator SC Pre 1 Check for an error in the element type or element order defined protocol support in the packet setting function is inconsistent 2 Check for an error in each element setting item Code with the packet format of type Data length Data flow Calculating range etc the external device e Using the circuit trace the communication data monitoring function of GX Configurator SC Pre defined protocol The Q series C24 has not support function check for the
166. Clear request Buffer memory address 80H 0000H x Clear processing 1 The transmission sequence status address 255H 265n is also initialized 11 16 11 TROUBLESHOOTING command M100 IH H100 UO G128 HO 4 ty MOV H4043 Clear request SET MELSEC Q Executing the programmable controller CPU information clear request a Executing from GX Developer 1 On the Device test screen set 4C43nH to buffer memory address 80H 2 On the Buffer Memory Batch monitor screen check that the value in buffer memory address 80h is 0000p b Executing from GX Configurator SC 1 Select Requested for the PLC CPU information clear request on the monitor test others screen and click Execute test 2 Confirm that the present value for the PLC CPU information clear request is No request c Executing from sequence program In the following program turning on the clear request command clears the programmable controller CPU information of the Q series C24 that is mounted in the position corresponding to I O signal X Y00 to X Y1F m J Programmable controller CPU information clear request Turns ON the interlock signal for communication stop during clear processing 4 J J After completing clear processing turns OFF the interlock signal for communication A FTN oe Aa ee eee BO en poo re ee 1 stop i Data communication processing i A Interlock signal for communication stop
167. Configurator SC that can use the added changed functions refer to Section 2 8 See Appendix 1 1 concerning a comparison of functions in the different Q series C24 function versions QU71C24N R2 R4 QJ71C24 CR2 Outline of function This function allows access to the programmable controller from a PC with GX Developer and a GOT connected to two different interfaces of the Q series C24 at the same time This function allows the control of the on or off state of the RS and DTR signals with the programmable controller program This function allows data communication with an external device at a transmission speed of 230 400 bps Data transmission reception at low speed This function allows data communication with an external device at a transmission speed of 50 bps Reference section Section 1 2 of User s Manual Section 3 2 1 REMARKS of User s Manual Basic Chapter 4 of User s Manual Basic Clearing reception data by a dedicated instruction Programmable controller CPU information clear Transmission of the programmable controller CPU monitoring information through combined use of the modem function This function allows clearing reception data using the CSET instruction during data communication using the non procedure protocol It is possible to clear the data even when data is being transmitted This function clears the programmable controller CPU information of the Q series C24 The
168. D Pre defined protocol ready OH Execution status Unexecuted i o f a ii Normal Other than 0000 Error eee paaa o Flash ROM setting Details Write to Current value Monitoring module Save file display Cannot execute test Read from module Load file Make text file Stop monitor Monitor Test items Item Butfer memory address Reference section X1D Pre defined protocol ready aa aa Operating Manual Pre defined protocol support Protocol cancellation 4040H 4050H function Section 8 1 3 and 8 1 4 of Execution status 4041H 4051H User s Manual Basic A Section 11 2 1 of Pre defined protocol function error code 4042H 4052H User s Manual Basic Section 8 1 3 and 8 1 4 Execution log options 40E2H 40F2H f User s Manual Basic f Section 3 9 and 8 1 3 of Number of protocol executions 4043H 4053H i User s Manual Basic 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 9 6 8 PLC CPU monitoring monitor Purpose Monitor the operating status and setting values of the programmable controller CPU monitoring function Operating procedure Monitor screen gt CHO Monitoring monitor Monitor screen 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q Monitor items EN ffer uk a address Operation status 2204H 2304H PLC CPU monitoring Execution result function Number of transmission 2051H to 2151H to Head device No designa
169. DA TR sp L S RxD RDB P 2 ON 2 OFF 6 DTR 4 4 RTS RX hg SDA 3 3 OFF 3 OFF Agi Spp SG CTS 6 ah 4 ON 4 OFF 3 DSRA DSR DTR RTS hg R ae 6 pen 5 OFF 5 OFF DSRB 5 8 6 ON 6 OFF 7____ _ DTRA CS CD CTS 20 DTRB are SG 7 OFF 7 OFF sg o4 ai 8 ON RTSB CTSA CTSB SG x e The CD terminal check setting should be set to No check according to the explanation in Section 3 2 1 1 DC code control or DTR DSR control becomes possible for transmission control Connection example 2 KS 1 KS 10P Q series C24 side RS232 signal co U 1 FG swt 2 2 RD RD 1 ON so 3 3 sD ae 4 4 DTR cs SIGE se 5 RS 4 OFF DSR 6 ER z 5 ON RS SG cs l 8 cD e ON ar 12 a 7 ON 8 ON x e The CD terminal check setting should be set to No check according to the explanation in Section 3 2 1 1 DC code control or DTR DSR control becomes possible for transmission control App 22 RS485 signal External device side sw2 FG 1 FG Lon eh hs aR d js _ ial DATA ee tpt SDB or F DSRA Mo DSRB Sr A DTRA A 2 DTRB sc RTSA RTSB CTSA L CTSB SG App 22 APPENDIXES Connection example 3 MELSEC Q
170. DANGER e Do not write data into the system area of the buffer memory of intelligent function modules Also do not use any use prohibited signals as an output signal to an intelligent function module from the programmable controller CPU Writing data into the system area or outputting a signal for use prohibited may cause a programmable controller system malfunction A CAUTION e Do not bunch the control wires or communication cables with the main circuit or power wires or install them close to each other They should be installed 100mm 3 9inch or more from each other Not doing so could result in noise that may cause malfunction e When using the module while values such as buffer memory set values are registered in the Flash ROM do not turn off the power supply for the module loading station nor reset the programmable controller CPU If the power supply for the module loading station is turned off or the programmable controller CPU is reset while any values are registered the data contents in the Flash ROM become inconsistent and as a result the values must be set again in the buffer memory etc and reregistered to the Flash ROM Also this may cause failure and malfunction of the module Installation Instructions A CAUTION e Use the programmable controller in an environment that meets the general specifications contained in the user s manual of the CPU module to use Using this programmable controlle
171. DEFG123 is sent Q series C24 Transmission area buffer memory Transmission data response message Transmission 5 Ps SSF a l data count 00x 05x Data nee B i A length designation 42 414 Di C H L 44n i 43x 41n 00 Transmission F E data designation as i ee 34H i 47x Receive data response message 3 2 33x i 32x External device Normal completion 7 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 7 2 3 Sequence program for data transmission A sequence program for data transmission is explained below For details on the BIDOUT instruction for data transmission see Chapter 10 Transmission In case of the CH1 side instruction Create transmission data from D11 Create control data from DO G BIDOUT Un DO D11 MO 1p Processing for normal completion M1 Processing for abnormal completion retransmission etc Q series C24 ready X1E 1 Transmission instruction 2 3 BIDOUT BIDOUT instruction BIDOUT instruction complete device ON when transmission BIDOUT instruction complete device 1 abnormal completion Normal completion abnormal completion Transmission data count address 4001 Transmission data address 4014 to Transmission data Data transmission Receiving response 7 DATA COMMUNICATION USING
172. Data lt 2 _ ERR NAK Response Selected from pre defined protocol ibay _ Editable protocol E Protocol ine C Send packet line I Receive packet lne To the next page 8 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE PRE DEFINED PROTOCOL MELSEC Q From the previous page J Step 3 Write the protocol setting data to the flash ROM Module write Module selection 1 0 address Model QJ71C24N Close Please save in the protocol setting file pcf because the data to be written i to module does not include the following information Select a target module and write the protocol setting Non written data data to the flash ROM manufacturer packet name protocol detailed setting type version explanation packet setting element name J Step 4 Execute the protocol with a dedicated instruction t 1H MOV KO D300 Set values are in the CPRTCL Pre defined Send data storage area execution protocol command ready Wv Ky me J Protocol No 1 s specified With a dedicated instruction CPRTCL ____Tep cpere uo K2 KI D10 wo Protocol is executed execute the protocol that was written to the flash ROM NO rji Tf mae SET N101 Normal completion flag ON Hi 1 SET N102 Error completion flag ON uov D10 D100 Error code is stored l Step 5 Confirm the protocol execution in the protocol execution log Protocol execution log Object module 120 Addr
173. Data No for connection 3 2058H 2158H designation POR 20594 to 2159 to No 2 to 10 block monitoring device 20A9H 21A9H Condit Transmission pointer designation 20E6H 21E6H ondition Output count designation 20E7H 21E7H agreement BEE Data No for connection transmission 20E8uH 21E8H designation 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 9 4 11 Transmission user frame No designation system setting Purpose Register the output frame number to transmit data with the non procedure protocol using the user frame Operating procedure e Online operation Monitor screen gt CHO Output frame system setting e Offline operation Flash ROM setting screen gt CHO Output frame system setting Setting screen MEE r Module information Module type Serial Communications Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name QJ71C24N Setting value Setting item Input within the following value range for the non procedure protocol H0001 H03e7 Default frame HO3e8 HO4af Flash ROM registered user frame H8000 Transmit area of buffer memory H8001 H801F Buffer memory registered user frame When bit 14 is turned ON 1 for the non procedure protocol only the output frame No designation can be transmitted without ASCII BIN conversion and addition of additional code Input by the following value range for the modem initialization HO7d0 HO7db OS registered initializatio
174. Data bit oF Parity bit Even odd parity Odd ON Stop bit ON OFF ON ON S Transmission W fear after switching Sati T designation l Communication rate setting 9600bps cs to 14 ae OFF __Forsystem Transmission specifications po after switching designation Switch setting error and mode switching error status Make Cao Cao set in this area App 58 APPENDIXES 2 Program examples lt Change command gt X1031 M300 7 ttt SET PLS lt Change processing of CH1 gt M10 7 Mov KI Mov H8580 L S7 RETO ds KI K1 HO H90 DO K2 M100 M101 1 f SET M101 SET M11 M13 M14 X1003 X1004 Z i WF ae T SET RST X1006 RST X100E PLS M12 Z REMFR ds KI KI HO H203 D2 K1 M102 M103 H i D2 KO PLS D2 KO RST SET M103 1 f SET lt Change processing of CH2 gt M20 MoV KI MOV H85B0 L S7 RETO J1 KI K1 HO H130 D10 K2 M104 M105 SET M105 SET M21 M23 M24 X1004 X100B WF AF WF T SET RST X100D RST X100F PLS M22 Z REMFR yl KI KI HO H203 D12 K1 App 59 M300 DO D M200 Y1002 M300 M201 M202 M203 1009 M21 1009 MELSEC Q Sets the changing flag Starts the change processing of CH1 Sets the switching mode No designation Sets the transmission specifications
175. Data written to the communication error clear request and to turn LED off address 0H 1h is cleared after initialization processing If errors persist even after completion of the initialization processing the corresponding communication error information is stored again and the corresponding bit in the LED ON status and communication error status address 201H 202n turns on 1 11 7 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q c Examples of programs that initialize displayed LED and communication error information The following shows examples of a program that reads error codes when errors described in 1 above occur in an interface on the CH1 side and initializes the displayed LED and communication error information Incorporate the necessary part of the program Input output signals X Y00 to X Y1F of the Q series C24 1 When data is communicated using the MC protocol FROMP Turn off clear f ror FROMP HO HO HO HO H201 H203 H256 HO DO DI D2 HOFF K1 Y0E Reads LED and communication error information from address 2011 Reads switch setting error description from address 203 Reads data transmission reception results from address 256 to 258n Requests initialization of error information on the CH1 side and clearing of error codes in the buffer memory Requests initialization of error information on the CH1 side and clearing of error codes in t
176. Developer and or the GOT is connected directly to the Q series C24 switching settings using GX Developer need not be made to perform access to the QCPU monitoring and other operations They can also be performed when the communication protocol is set to 0 by making switch settings using GX Developer 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 9 Functions supporting multiple CPU systems Details are explained in the Reference Manual a When accessing QCPUs in a multiple CPU system using the MC protocol or through GX Developer it is possible to perform data communication such as reading writing device data by specifying the QCPU to be accessed When using the Q series C24 in a multiple CPU system a QCPU controlling the Q series C24 hereinafter referred to as the control CPU should be specified using GX Developer It is also possible to mount a Q series C24 of function version A ina multiple CPU system and access to the only control CPU CPU No 1 Q series C24 Peripheral device control CPU 1 2 3 4 L C24 Q series C24 Setting from non control CPUs 1 GX Developer 2 4 1 2 External device Communication through GX Developer Communication using MC protocol CPU No 1 CPU No 2 3 CPU No 4 Module controlled by CPU No 3 CPU No 1 Module controlled by CPU No 2 b When a Q series C24 CPU of function version B is used in a multiple CPU syste
177. E Initialization connection timeout designation 32h 1 to 60 Timeout unit s Eao Number of initialization retries Se 33H Se to 5 Number of retries For Data No for initialization designation designation O4 Send initialization data designated by the A modem designated area of the user frame for unction 1 transmission 7DOH to 801FH Data No for initialization Data No for connection designation an OH No designation BB8u to 801FH Data No for connection kA GX Developer connection designation 36H 0 Do not connect 1 Connect EJ No communication interval time designation 0 Wait infinitely 37h 1 to 120 No communication interval Waiting time for line disconnection unit min RS CS control yes no designation 38H O No control 1 Controlled 39H to 7FH BERA 3 24 3 24 Section 9 4 2 Section 9 4 3 Section 9 4 4 Allowed Chapter 3 of User s Manual Application PECIFICATION eS A ae MELSEC Q Address F Initial Protocol Reference Decimal Hex Application Name valde Registration ection mc Non Bi Pa erates Programmable controller CPU information clear request controller CPU 00004 No request 0 RW _ Not allowed Section 11 1 7 information 4C43xH Requested clear 128 80H 129 to 143 81H to 8FH Use prohibited System area Switching mode no designation 0001H to 0009H 0OFFH 0000 No designation 00061 Non procedure protocol 00014 MC p
178. ENDIXE MELSEC Q Appendix 7 2 Usage Procedure of MX Component This section explains the procedure for creating programs and sample programs using MX Component 1 Procedure for creating programs The procedure for creating programs is outlined below The usage procedure below uses Visual Basic as an example a 1 Perform the communication settings from a IBM Target seting ist view Connection tes ean Ee uae o PC AT compatible personal computer to the programmable controller by following the wizard Some types of controls are set only by programs ae without using the wizard Ee The wizard allows the user to perform the settings a ie required for the communication such as logical station number connected module type and programmable controller to be connected Control DTR or RTS Control z 2 Paste the ACT control icon onto the form and assign the logical station number set in step 1 to the property of the pasted control 1 Pri te Sub Butt 1 Click ByVal di As Syst Mo sh A 7 ose ee a 3 Use the functions provided by the software to write a eee program that reads the device data rtn dxdctEasyIF1 Open rtn AxdctEasyIF1 GetDevice DO iData Labeli Text iData End Sub Form1 BAE Completed App 27 App 27 APPENDIXE 2 MELSEC Q 2 Sample program The following sample program reads DO to D4 five points of the t
179. ENDIXES MELSEC Q Appendix 7 Communication Support Tool MX Component MX Component is an ActiveX control library that supports any types of communication paths between IBM PC AT compatible personal computers and programmable controllers It allows the users to establish communication using simple processing only without having to know about the different communication protocols used in the individual communication It also supports various programming languages allowing for a wide range of application development This section provides the overview of the functions provided by MX Component and explains the procedure up to creation of applications x See Operating Manual and Programming Manual of MX Component for the details Appendix 7 1 Overview of MX Component This section provides the overview of MX Component Different communication paths operating systems programming languages and functions are supported depending on the version of MX Component used 1 Support for a wide range of communication paths to programmable controllers MX Component supports a wide range of communication paths to programmable controllers It is possible to construct systems according to the needs of the users lt Example of communication using MX Component gt Ethernet communication L Gateway function communication Modem communication 2 Dramatic improvement of application development efficiency MX Component provides wizard style c
180. K1 D1 Sets the clear request poa Transfers the setting value to the Z RENTO u1 KI KI HO Hoag DI KI M100 receive data clear request area of the buffer memory SET M17 Sets the receive clearing flag M100 M101 E I LSET M20 Sets the completion check flag PLS 421 Receive clear processing execution status acquisition command y FSET 4200 Abnormal completion of REMTO instruction lt Read of receive clear status gt M20 X101E ce Reads data of the receive data clear H HHZ REMFR J K1 K1 HO HOAS DO K1 M102 request area of the buffer memory to DO M102 M103 PLS M22 Receive clear processing execution status judgment command e FSET H201 Abnormal completion of REMFR instruction M22 B Resets the receive clear acceptance i DO Ko J RST M16 flag RST M17 Resets the receive clearing flag RST M20 Resets the completion check flag o oo a a l Sets the communication SET M18 A disable flag l 1 le i i i i H M i i i 1 i Receive clear processing execution Lo D0 Ko RES 21 status acquisition command MaMe e a ee ee Hooo k a T100 Timer start I l T100 Resets the communication 4 l YY Rs M18 disable flag ji EAE SRE EEE E E EE EEEE E ET A E A E E A E E E E E EEE E s E M16 m7 D Mis i ae 4 H M19 Outputs the communication enable Liai flag 1 x1 When using the Q series C24 of function version A add the areas enclosed by the dotted lines to the sequence program Make communication when M
181. LSEC Q GX Developer Intelligent function module switch setting setting values recording check sheet 1 Transmission setting Enter 0 or 1 in the bit position field b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bl bO BERRAR Ld I ene side Always set to OFF on Operation setting Independent Linked CH1 side Data bit 8 Do not include parity bit Parity bit Yes Vertical parity y Valid only when parity b3 Odd even parity Even pg bit is set to Yes Stop bit Sum check code be Write during RUN Prohibit b7 Setting moaification _ Prohibit 2 Communication rate setting Enter check marks in the CH1 and CH2 fields Communication speed unit bps o ee 50 e a A o 300 LR e a O E pt Oooo T T a 7 w k pa 80 ee ee ee es ee Oooo T S a S 7OM k a t9200 pO 8800 pa 88400 C Ge pO 52 00 Pe 30400 3 Communication protocol setting Enter check marks in the CH1 and CH2 fields pK Developerconnection MC protocol Individual station recovery test App 62 App 62 APPENDIXES MELSEC Q MEMO App 63 App 63 INDEX A Applicable modules ccccceeeseeeeees 2 1 ASCll code table cceeeeeeeee App 18 Auto refresh nieh 4 24 B BIDING ein REER 10 18 Bidirectional protocol ccceeeeeeeees 7 1 BIDOUT ninkin a a 10 15 C CIN ana a te eine ie 11 42 CH1 ERR CH2 ERR cccceeeeeees 11 46 Checking the function versio
182. M set switch shown left of the given interface to ON and restart the Q series C24 e Check the read write request data and designate the correct data 1 e Increase the transmission time by performing handshake with the external device etc e Perform handshake with the request source external device O e Check and correct the external device transmit message and restart data communications When data are converted between ASCII and binary always transmit data in units of even bytes Confirm the message sent from the external device correct it and restart the communication If GX Configurator SC Pre defined protocol support function was used for protocol editing check the sender s packet format to see if an incorrect value is set for Conversion Sign character Number of decimals Delimiter or number of digits of the conversion variable If GX Configurator SC Pre defined protocol support function was used for protocol editing check the sender s packet format to see if an incorrect value is set for Code type or Data length of the check code Check and correct the external device transmit message and restart data communications Check and correct the external device transmit message and restart data communications Non oe MC Proce Bidire ctional dure Pre defined 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Non en Corrective action MC Proce Bidire ctional dure Check and correct
183. M of the Q series C24 Refer to Chapter 8 1 Program conditions The following program reads data from or writes data to the QJ71C24N buffer memory CH1 side word byte units designation area when the read write command X1020 X1021 turns ON a Devices used Read write COMMANGC ccccccccsssessseeeeeeecesessseeeeeseeeessesneees X1020 X1021 e Read write command pulse Signal s cceeeeeeees M10 M11 e Completion device for REMFR REMTO instruction M100 to 103 Normal abnormal completion flag for REMFR REMTO WSU CUOM nainen sade ccsaeadsGvvandie a i M200 to 203 e Read from word byte units designation area cee DO e Write to word byte units designation area D1 2 Program examples a Read from buffer memory lt Read command gt aE PLS 410 Changes the read command 1 S into pulses M10 X101E Reads the word byte units H H REWFR U1 KI KI Ho H96 DO KI M100 designation area data of the buffer memory to DO M100 M101 SET M200 J Normal completion of REMEFR instruction W101 J 1 SET M201 Abnormal completion of REMEFR instruction b Write to buffer memory lt Write command gt M02 PLS NIT 1 Changes the write command into pulses i MOIE nov H mT Sets the word byte units l i designation to byte Bea Transfers the setting value to Z REMTO Ji K1 K1 HO H96 D1 K1 M102 the word byte units designation W102 103 area o
184. MC protocol e Communication using GX Developer External device 5 Multiple CPU system n using GX Developer Communication using MC protocol Q series C24 of function version B 2 If the other stations to be accessed belong to the multiple CPU system the modules used for routing and QCPUs at the local station all the relay stations and the accessed station should be modules of function version B or later This has to hold in all cases of accessing the non control CPU of the module used for routing and the accessed station 1 Example It is possible to access other stations regardless of whether the control CPU of the module to be routed through is the same or different External device if ee through GX Developer Communication using MC protocol Cc Link IE controller network Relay station 1 CPU No 1 2 CPU No 2 1 3 CPU No 3 4 CPU No 4 1 Module used for routing controlled CC Link IE controller network BOPA DO Station to be accessed ial nr ee Q series C24 controlled by CPU No 1 2 Module used for routing controlled 1 2 3 4 2 by CPU No 2 The modules used for the routing are CC Link IE controller network modules Local station Peripheral device Setting from GX Developer
185. NG THE DATA COMMUNICATIONS MONITORING TIMES 6 1 No reception Monitoring Time timer 0 Setting 6 2 Response Monitoring Time timer 1 Setting 6 3 Transmission Monitoring Time timer 2 Setting 6 4 Message Wait Time Setting 7 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING DC CODE TRANSMISSION CONTROL 7 1 Control Contents of DTR DSR ER DR Signal Control 7 2 Control Contents of DC Code Control 7 3 Precautions when Using the Transmission Control Functions 8 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING HALF DUPLEX COMMUNICATIONS 8 1 Half duplex Communications 8 2 Data Transmission and Reception Timing 8 3 Changing the Communication System 8 4 Connector Connections for Half duplex Communications 8 5 Half duplex Communications Precautions 9 CONTENTS AND REGISTRATION OF THE USER FRAMES FOR DATA COMMUNICATION 9 1 User Frame Types and Contents During Communication 9 2 Transmission Reception Processing Using User Frame Register Data 9 3 Precautions when Registering Reading Deleting and Using User Frames 9 4 Register Read Delete User Frames 10 ON DEMAND DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING USER FRAMES 10 1 User Frame Data Communications Function 10 2 User Frame Types and Registration 10 3 User Frame On Demand Data Transmission and Buffer Memory Used 10 4 On Demand Function Control Procedure During User Frame Use 10 5 Example of an On Demand Data Transmission Program Using User Frames 11 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING USER FRAMES 11 1 Overview of Data Communication
186. No on the raging plate and the front of the module indicates the management information on the product The serial No in the Product Information List of GX Developer indicates the functional information on the product which is updated when a new function is added 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 3 Checking the software version of GX Configurator SC To check the software version of GX Configurator SC select Help and then Product information from GX Developer Product information PLC programming software p GX Developer Version 7 018 SW7D5C GPPW E COPYRIGHT C 2001 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION ALL RIGHTS RESERVED This Product is licensed to Name MITSUBISHI Company MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION List of version information on Add in software GX Configurator SC Version1 10L SWOD5C QSCU E a m Software version COPYRIGHT C 1999 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION ALL RIGHTS RESERVED al Warning This product is protected by copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program or any of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum ext ossible under the law The version indication for the GX Configurator SC has been changed as shown below from the SWOD5C QSCU E 40E upgrade product Previous product Upgrade and subsequent versions SWODS5C QSCU E 40E GX Configurator SC Version 1 10L
187. No 1 is specified o Frame ID No 4 Station No Network No Self station No J Command Sub command 4 Device code Head device 4 Sum check code 4 station No Number of device Points C Cy a a s Poe 6 Gy 3 H L H L H L H LJH L o ojo 4 0 1 0 0 0 141 x 0 0 0 0 4 OJ0 0 0 5 051 46n 38s 30s 35 30x 37 30n 33 30s 33s L45 30r 30s 30 30s 30r 30n 34n 30n 31 30H 3O 3O 31 58x Ax BOny 30H BOn 3On 34n y 30x BOs 3O y 3O 35n 33x 36n I Requested module x z 8 w o Command massage of the QnA compatible 4C frame format 1 e When using the Q series C24 in a multiple CPU system it is necessary to specify the QCPU that controls the Q series C24 hereinafter referred to as the control CPU using GX Developer e Itis also possible to mount a Q series C24 of function version A in a multiple CPU system In this case it is only possible to access the control CPU CPU No 1 e Itis only possible to access the control CPU if data is communicated by means of frames other than the QnA compatible 4C frame When the Q series C24 is mounted on the extension base unit of the redundant system the access target control system CPU or standby system CPU and system A CPU or system B CPU that can be specified varies depending on each command For details refer to QNPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System
188. ON DSR signal ON 11 10 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 1 4 Reading the data communication status Transmission sequence status 11 11 This section explains how to read the current status of the data communication using the MC protocol stored in the buffer memory When GX Configurator SC is used check the status using the MC protocol monitor screen see Section 9 6 4 When a transmission problem occurs read operation is executed to check the status of the data communication using the MC protocol 1 Transmission sequence status address 2551 2651 The status of data communication using MC protocol is stored as a numerical value as shown below b15 to bO Buffer memory address 255w 0to9 Information on the CH1 side 2651 0to9 Information on the CH2 side The following shows the correspondence between the numerical values in the transmission sequence status storage area and the data communication status Request from an external device External device Q series C24 k 6 1 6 is repeated afterward Stored 0 1 iig 4 a value 2 Values 7 to 9 are stored when mode switching or initialization of transmission sequence is performed REMARKS When the target interface is not set to use the MC protocol 0 is stored in the transmission sequence status address 255H 265 2 Example of a program that reads from transmission sequence DO
189. ON USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL Q series C24 ready X1E 1 Transmission instruction OUTPUT instruction OUTPUT OUTPUT instruction complete device r 1 ON when transmission OUTPUT instruction complete device 1 normal completion abnormal completion abnormal completion le gt 1 scan Transmission data count designation address 400x Transmission data designation address 4014 to n Transmission data k 1 Starts the local station programmable controller CPU The setting values for GX Developer are stored in the Q series C24 2 Inputs the user data transmission command signal 3 Executes the OUTPUT instruction after storing the transmission data and the control data for the OUTPUT instruction in the device Data is sent when the OUTPUT instruction is executed 4 When the Q series C24 transmission processing completes the completion device for the OUTPUT instruction turns ON When the completion device 1 abnormal completion signal turns ON the error code is stored in the control data completion status S1 1 Transmitting data 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q Program example When Q series C24 I O signals are from X Y00 to X Y1F X20 PLS N50 J The transmission command is converted into pulse wov ABCDEFG D11 Transmission data is stored pS iv HOAOD D15 Designate the number of t
190. OUT instruction BIDOUT Data such as control data and transmission data are stored in the device designated with the BIDOUT instruction and then the BIDOUT instruction is executed The transmission data count and transmission data are written into the transmission area of the buffer memory The Q series C24 sends data by adding the control code ENQ at the beginning of the data When Sum check is designated with GX Developer the Q series C24 adds the sum check code calculated by internal processing to the end of the message and then transmits the message When No sum check is designated with GX Developer no sum check code is sent A response for the data transmission for normal completion ACK message for abnormal completion NAK message is received The execution of the BIDOUT instruction completes with the transmission processing completion of the Q series C24 7 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 7 2 2 Arrangement and contents of the transmission area and the transmission data CH1 side This section explains the arrangement and contents of the transmission area and the transmission data for performing data transmission using the bidirectional protocol For details on the contents of transmission data see Section 7 1 2 3 1 Transmission area The transmission area is a memory area for storing the data and the data count that are transmitted from the programmable contr
191. PENDIXE MELSEC Q 2 List of added setting items for GX Configurator SC The following table lists the setting items added to the GX Configurator SC due to a software version upgrade Software version Screen Additional setting item QSCU E Rererenge 40E section 2 20W 11M 06G 00A 10L 30D ise 20C Accumulated count of unlock process normal x completion Accumulated count of unlock process abnormal x completion Accumulated count of lock process based on circuit Modem function disconnect monitor test Callback permit accumulated count BoB RES Callback denial accumulated count OTO Auto callback connection permit accumulated count O O Auto callback connection denial accumulated count QPRO Oe Peo x Section Accumulated count of callback receive procedure 9 4 4 cancel O O O O O A Section Circuit disconnect wait time PLC CPU watch use x x OJo olofo Remote password mismatch notification count x designation Remote password mismatch notification accumulated Modem function count designation 5 system setting Auto modem initialization designation Rem Res rea Callback function designation olo E i Callback denial notification accumulated count x x designation Data No forcalback designation t010 O o lololol a Transmission control and other RS 232 control signal status CS CTS x x x monitoring tests RTS RS designation Oe DTR ER designation Transmission contolendttee area O
192. PU the signals marked with Use prohibited must not be output ON If any of the Use prohibited signals is output the programmable controller system may malfunction 2 When the modem function is not used or the QJ71C24N R4 is used X10 to X16 are used for the system and Y10 to Y16 cannot be used PECIFICATION eae MELSEC Q 1 The input output signals shown in this section are the signals used when a QnA series serial communication module program is utilized for the Q series C24 see Section 2 in Appendix In the QCPU the on off of input output signals to intelligent function modules is executed with a dedicated instruction It is not necessary to turn the signals on off by the sequence program except for the input output signals shown in the programming of each function reference page When a program for a QnA series serial communication module is also utilized for the Q series C24 it is recommended to replace the instructions with the dedicated instructions shown on the corresponding function reference page of each manual for the Q series C24 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 9 List of Applications and Assignments of the Buffer Memory This section describes the buffer memory 1 Configuration of the buffer memory A buffer memory consists of a user area and a system area as shown below a User area 1 This is the area where users write read data 2 The user area consists of areas for storing setting
193. PU system When using the Q series C24 in a multiple CPU system refer to the QCPU User s Manual Multiple CPU System first a Compatible Q series C24 If using the Q series C24 on a multiple CPU system use function version B of the Q series C24 b Intelligent function module parameters Write intelligent function module parameters to only the control CPU of the Q series C24 3 Supported software packages a Software setting amp monitor tools 1 for the programmable controller Relation between the system containing the Q series C24 and software package is shown in the following table GX Developer is necessary when using the Q series C24 GX Developer GX Configurator SC Single CPU system Version 7 or later Version 1 10L or later Q00J Q00 Q01CPU Versions prior to SWOD5C Multiple CPU system Version 8 or later QSCU E 40E are not usable Q02 Q02H Q06H Single CPU system Version 4 or later SWOD5C QSCU E 00A or later Q12H Q25HCPU Multiple CPU system Version 6 or later SWOD5C QSCU E 20C or later Q02PH QO06PHCPU gt ngle CPU system Version 8 68W or later Version 1 13P or later ee eee Versions prior to SWOD5C Q12PH Q25PHCPU Single CPU systeM_ Version 7 101 or later QSCU E 40E are not usable Multiple CPU system Q12PRH Q25PRHCPU Redundant system Version 8 45X or later Version 1 14Q or later Q0OUIQOOU QOIUCP Single ORU System Version 8 76E or later Version 2 17T or later U Multiple CPU system Q02U Q03UD Q04UDH Singl
194. Prohibited 1 Allowed Setting modification b7 0 Prohibited 1 Allowed F firmati Communication rate b8 to b11 50 bps to 230400 bps or confirmation Eor system b12 to b15 AILO of transmission a Communication protocol status current control status 0 GX Developer connection 5 MC protocol format 5 Section 4 5 2 594 610 1 MC protocol format 1 6 Non procedure protocol Not allowed Section 9 63 252h 2621 2 MC protocol format 2 7 Bidirectional protocol Section 11 4 6 3 MC protocol format 3 8 For linked operation es 4 MC protocol format 4 9 Pre defined protocol Transmission status current Operation setting b0 Independent 1 link Data bit b1 7 bit 1 8 bit Parity bit b2 No 1 Yes 595 611 Odd even parity b3 Odd 1 Even 253x 2631 Stop bit b4 1 bit 1 2 bit Sum check code b5 No 1 Yes Write during RUN b6 Prohibited 1 Allowed Setting modification b7 Prohibited 1 Allowed Communication rate b8 to b11 50 bps to 230400 bps For system b12 to b15 All O PECIFICATION see AC he MELSEC Q Address a oes ra conan Aee MC Non Bi Pd Transmission sequence status For confirmation of MC protocol 597 613 2554 265 communication status 0 Waiting for receiving command 1 Receiving command Not allowed 598 614 2561H 2661 599 615 2574 267 600 616 2584H 2681 2 Command reception complete 601 617 259H 2691H 3 Waiting to access pro
195. Q 4 Transmission invalid reception invalid 2 1 Sum check code Arbitrary data External device Ignores the receive data of 1 1 Generates a simultaneous transmission error Ignores the receive data of 2 1 Q series C24 Sum check code Arbitrary data Time check timer 1 response monitoring time shown in the illustration is described in Section 6 2 of User s Manual Application POINT When the transmission control see Chapter 9 of User s Manual Application is performed and the simultaneous transmission data valid invalid designation sets that the receive data is valid and transmission data is valid the Q series C24 performs message transmission and message reception processing as described below During message transmission processing time check by timer 1 response monitoring time is performed 1 Message transmission 1 1 in the illustration If the Q series C24 receives a terminate transmission request DC3 received DSR signal OFF from the external device during message transmission it terminates data transmission e When the Q series C24 receives the ready to send signal DC1 received DSR signal ON it restarts data transmission 2 Message reception If the Q series C24 cannot send a response message to the external device in response to message reception because the external device issued a terminate transmission request DC3 received DSR signal OFF it tran
196. Q 9 4 6 MC protocol system setting Purpose For data transmission using the MC protocol register system setting values Operating procedure e Online operation Monitor screen gt CHO MC protocol system setting e Offline operation Flash ROM setting screen gt CHO MC protocol system setting Setting screen Pee Module information Module type Serial Communications Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name 0J71C24N Setting item Setting value 5 On demand function designation 0400 Buffer memory head address designation Data length designation 0000 nput following four items within the following range O Not designated HO001 H03e Default frame HO3e8 HO04af Flash ROM user frame H8001 H801f Buffer memory user frame On demand user frame designation 0000 First frame No designation 1st First frame No designation 2nd 0000 Last frame No designation 1st 0000 Last frame No designation 2nd 0000 Message wait time designation 0000 0 No wait time z Flash ROM setting m Details Wie to Save file module Sa Hexadecimal input Read fr modile esi 0400 3FFF Make text file Execute test Close Setting items Buffer memory head address designation rar Data length designation Fa a hare ato 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 9 4 7 Non procedure system setting Purpose For data transmission using the non procedur
197. Q Corresponding Serial Communication Module MITSUBISHI Basic QJ71C24N QJ71C24N R2 QJ71C24N R4 Mitsubishi QJ71C24 Programmable Controller QJ71C24 R2 MELSEC Q GX Configurator SC SW2D5C QSCU E e SAFETY PRECAUTIONS e Always read these instructions before using this equipment Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly The instructions given in this manual are concerned with this product For the safety instructions of the programmable controller system please read the user s manual of the CPU module to use In this manual the safety instructions are ranked as DANGER and CAUTION a Nn Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions ro DANGER resulting in death or severe injury l l Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions i DX CAUTION resulting in medium or slight personal injury or physical damage N A Note that the CAUTION level may lead to a serious consequence according to the circumstances Always follow the instructions of both levels because they are important to personal safety Please save this manual to make it accessible when required and always forward it to the end user Design Instructions lt gt DANGER e For the operation status of each station at communication error in each s
198. Q series C24 waiting for data transmission e When transmission cannot be started e When a transmission pause request is received during data transmission DSR signal is off reception by DC3 SD WAIT turns off when transmission becomes possible and data transmission is started resumed 11 5 11 TROUBLESHOOTIN See MELSEC Q 11 1 2 Initializing error information of the serial communication module This section explains the ERR LED ON factors and the error code initialization clear for the Q series C24 1 ERR LED ON factors When any of the following errors occurs its error code is stored in the buffer memory corresponding to the interface CH where the error occurred and the ERR LED turns on Applicable protocol procedure protocol defined a Mode Mode switching error error error status ee eae E a a IMC protocol transmission error_ 025An 026An MC protocol transmission errorcode o x x x Programmable controller CPU monitoring Monitoring device error 2205 2305 function execution result Pre defined protocol function s rra 4042 4052 Pre defined protocol function error code x x x O 2 Turning off the ERR LED and initializing the error codes by GX Configurator SC Refer to Section 9 6 11 a When turning off the ERR LED and initializing the error codes By making the CHO ERR clear request on the Monitor Test screen the ERR LED of the Q series C24 turns off and the stored error codes
199. R2 QJ71C24N R4 RUNO COERR RUNO DOERR RUNO CERR NEUO INEU NEU ONEU NEUO INEU cH SD goso cn2 cH SD oso cH2 cHi SD sD cH2 C RDO orp H C RO ORD H C RDO ORD Display contents Normal operation display On flashing Normal Faulty or reset Compatible protocol Error display 1 Error has occurred Normal Non procedural Bidirectional Valid Neutral status on the CH1 side display 2 Waiting for MC command message to be received MC command message being received Invalid Off Transmission status display Data being transmitted Data not transmitted Reception status display Neutral status on the CH2 side display 2 Data being received Waiting for MC command message to be received Data not received MC command message being received Valid MELSEC Q Invalid Off Transmission status display Reception status display x1 This LED comes on when an error occurs at Q series C24 hardware or during data communication Data being transmitted Data being received MC command message not transmitted MC command message not received 2 This LED displays the data communication status via MC protocol see chapter 11 On Waiting for the command message to be received from the external device Off Processing the command message received from the external device 3
200. R2 R4 PRF AJ71C24 S8 Appendix 2 1 Functional Comparison with the Q series C24 and the QnA A Series Modules The following shows a functional comparison between the Q series C24 and the QnA A series modules The symbol in the model name columns indicates that the corresponding functions are compatible between the applicable models for more information see the manual for each module a Indicates functions that have been added to or modified from the QnA A series modules Communication using MC protocol oem fe Communication ___O 8 O Communication in QnA compatible 2C frame withasciicods O 8 o x x Communication Communication in QnA compatible 4C frame RS O 7 8 with binary code Read write of QCPU device memory Excluding multiple block batch read write O 2 7 Multiple block batch read write 5 8 O 3 Transmission from the programmable controller CPU ordenano controller CPU and external devices Communication using non procedure protocol Communication using bidirectional protocol E Jip p O x App 7 App 7 APPENDIXE z MELSEC Q r E aes Non procedure protocol Interrupt processing at data reception ERRET Bidirectional protocol Communication via public lines using modem function Communication using the programmable controller CPU monitoring eee ee ee Auto refresh directed to the Auto refresh directed to the programma
201. ROM 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 1 OVERVIEW This manual describes the specifications for the QJ71C24N QJ71C24N R2 QJ71C24N R4 QJ71C24 QJ71C24 R2 serial communication module hereinafter referred to as Q series C24 as well as the procedures prior to starting the operation maintenance inspection data communication methods for use with external devices and troubleshooting When applying the following program examples to the actual system make sure to examine the applicability and confirm that it will not cause system control problems 1 1 Overview of the Serial Communication Module The Q series C24 is a module that connects the Q series programmable controller CPU and an external device using an RS 232 or RS 422 485 line for serial communication in order to achieve the data communication described below By using a modem terminal adapter a public line analog digital can be used for data communication with a remote location Programmable controller data collection change from the external devices See the MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual Programmable controller monitoring and control from the external devices See Chapter 2 of the User s Manual Application Data receiving and sending in any formats that conform to the external device specifications See Section 1 2 2 3 and 4 Collection of measured data from a measuring device See Section 1 2 2 and 4 Operation of a programmab
202. ROM setting Module type Module model Name gt b Auto refresh setting screen Start I O No Module type Module model name Auto refresh c Select monitor test module screen Online gt Monitor Test x1 Enter the start I O No in hexadecimal 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC 2 Intelligent function module utility C MEL Intelligent Function module parameter Online To Ctrl O Open parameters Close parameters Save parameters Delete parameters Ceres lity C MELSEC GPPW Online Tools Help Monitor Test Read from PLC 1 Write to PLC ditt A L4 1 t function Module utility C Tools Help Flash ROM setting attit ion Module utility C MELS Help Code table Product information Command buttons nitial setting Cannot be selected Auto refresh Delete MELSEC Q Starts the auto refresh setting screen Deletes the initial setting and auto refresh setting of the selected module Menu bar a File menu Close this screen Intelligent function module parameters of the project opened by GX Developer are handled Reads a parameter file Closes the parameter file If any data are modified Open parameters Close parameters Save parameters Delete parameters Exit b Online menu Monitor Test Read from PLC Write to PLC c Tool items Flash ROM setting
203. Read from PLC Write to PLC 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q lt Flash ROM data gt a This means the data set in Flash ROM setting and they can be stored in any directory separately from projects of GX Developer b Steps 4 and 5 in Figure 9 1 are performed as follows 4 This operation can be executed from the Flash ROM setting screen or Monitor Test screen of the utility Flash ROM setting screen gt Load file Save file Monitor Test screen gt Load file Save file 5 This operation can be executed from the Monitor Test screen of the utility Monitor Test screen Read from module Write to module lt Make text file gt a Clicking Make text file Jon the Auto refresh setting or Monitor Test screen creates a text file This feature is useful for documentation of users GX Developer GX Configurator SC Personal computer QJ71C24N QJ71C24N RUN af Soe RD RD A Intelligent function module parameters B Flash ROM data C Data created by Make text file and saved 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 9 4 System Registration to Flash ROM Purpose Display the menu screen for flash ROM registration which is used to change the initial values set in the Q series C24 s buffer memory Operating procedure e Online operation Startup from Intelligent function module utility GX Developer Version 4 or
204. SCII code exist for each C icati ith Communication with QnA compatible 4C frame binary code Batch read write in bit word units Read write of device Monitoring of device memory _ l memory Batch read write of multiple blocks Communication using Read write by extension designation Chapter 5 MC protocol 1 Accessing other stations via network system Reference Manual Reading writing from to the buffer memory of the Q series C24 Reading writing from to the buffer memory of intelligent function modules Reading writing from to sequence program files Monitoring the programmable controller CPUs programmable controller CPU monitoring function Status control of the programmable controller CPUs remote RUN STOP etc Turning on off input signals of the Q series C24 from an external device global function Data transmission from a programmable controller CPU to an external device on demand function Data transmission reception in any format Data transmission reception using user frames Communication using Data reception by interrupt programs non procedure protocol Monitoring the programmable controller CPUs programmable controller CPU User s Manual 2 monitoring function Application ASCII data transmission reception by ASCII BIN conversion Data transmission reception by specifying transparent code Data transmission reception in any format Data reception by interrupt programs ASCII data transmission reception by ASCII BIN conversion Data tr
205. SING THE BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 7 2 4 How to detect transmission errors This section explains how to detect errors that may occur when sending data to the external device The following items are considered as the primary causes of errors that may occur during data transmission Cause of transmission error Reference section A transmission error occurred because of noise fot ogee A timeout occurred for the no reception monitoring time timer 0 Section 6 1 A timeout occurred for the response monitoring time timer 1 User s Manual Section 6 2 A timeout occurred for the transmission monitoring time timer 2 Application Section 6 3 Data that could not be converted with the ASCII BIN conversion was detected Chapter 13 Designated the transmission data count that exceeded the transmission area size Section 7 2 2 Simultaneous transmissions occurred Section 7 3 1 Confirmation using the sequence program a Detecting a transmission error 1 The following device and input signal turn ON BIDOUT instruction complete device 1 e ERR occurrence XE XF 2 The transmission error code can be checked using the BIDOUT instruction control data S1 1 Or it can be checked by reading the data transmission result address 257H 267h For details on how to check the error code contents and corrective actions see Chapter 11 b How to turn off the ERR LED and clear the error code see Section 11 1 2
206. Section 9 3 3 1 To write all the new setting values to the flash ROM at once click on the Write to module button after all the applicable setting values have been changed All the setting values will be written to the Q series C24 s flash ROM Reset the CPU The Monitor screen or each sub screen See Section 9 3 3 2 Save the new system setting values in a file for backup Select in the Monitor screen See Section 9 4 13 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 9 3 2 Starting the Intelligent function module utility Operating procedure Intelligent function module utility is started from GX Developer Tools gt Intelligent function utility Start Setting screen Intelligent function module utility C MELSEC GPPW Intelligent Function module parameter Online Tools Help r Select a target intelligent function module Start 1 0 No Module type 0000 Serial Communications Module fad Module model name QJ71C24 N N R4 b Parameter setting module Intelligent function module parameter Start 1 0 No Module model name Initial setting Auto refresh lt OOOO GJ71024 N N R4 Available M er Initial setting Auto refresh Delete Exit Explanation of items 1 Activation of other screens Following screens can be displayed from the intelligent function module utility screen a Flash ROM setting screen Tools gt Flash
207. THE MELSEC COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL MELSEC Q b Modem function monitor test by GX Configurator SC It is possible to monitor the setting values for the remote password and the number of occurrences up to the present such as the designation of the number of times before notifying an unmatched remote password and the current number of occurrences It is possible to set each monitor value to 0 Monitored items in the modem function monitor test screen Buffer memory address Remote password mismatch notification count designation 8204 200CH Remote password mismatch notification accumulated count designation 8205 200DH Accumulated count of unlock process normal completion 8955 22FBH Accumulated count of unlock process abnormal completion 8956 22FCH Accumulated count of lock process based on circuit disconnection 8959 22FFH 5 2 Utilizing the MX Component If the external device is a PC running one of the basic operation systems below it is possible to create a communication program for the external device without considering the detailed MC protocol transmission reception procedures using one of the following separately sold communication support tools See Appendix 7 for the overview of MX Component Supported basic operation systems e Microsoft Windows 95 Operating System Microsoft Windows 98 Operating System Microsoft Windows NT Workstation Operating System Version 4 0 Mi
208. TY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC The GX Configurator SC is a tool that supports the production of necessary sequence programs with initial setting monitoring and testing and data communication processing of the Q series C24 The GX Configurator SC is composed of the following utilities e Intelligent function module utility e Protocol FB support function e Pre defined protocol support function 1 Intelligent function utility utility package see this chapter The utility package facilitates the initial settings and monitoring of the Q series C24 by using dedicated screens without having to consider the I O signals or buffer memory The utility package can also be used together with the GX Simulator SWnD5L LLT E Intelligent function module utility C MELSEC GPP Intelligent function module parameter Online Tools Help 2 0 x Select a target intelligent function module Start 1 0 No Module type 0000 Serial Communications Module Module model name QJ71C24 N N R4 Parameter setting module Intelligent function module parameter Start 1 0 No Module model name Initial setting Auto refresh A 000 J71C24 N N R4 Unavailable WET Initial setting Auto refresh Delete Exit 2 Protocol FB support function The protocol FB support function automatically generates the FB function block for communication that supports data communication processing and traces the network that monitor
209. UDH Q26UDH Q03UDE 4096 2048 Q04UDEH Q06UDEH Q10UDEH Q13UDEH Q20UDEH Q26UDEHCPU MELSECNET H remote O staton 512 258 For example if multiple intelligent function modules are installed to the MELSECNET H remote I O station configure the settings in GX Configurator so that the number of parameter settings for all the intelligent function modules does not exceed the limit of the MELSECNET H remote I O station Calculate the total number of parameter settings separately for the initial setting and for the auto refresh setting The number of parameters that can be set for one module in GX Configurator SC is as shown below Target Module Initial setting Auto refresh setting QJ71C24N 0 Not used 48 Max J71C24N R2 0 Not used 49 Max QJ71C24N R4 0 Not used 48 Max J71024 0 Not used 48 Max QJ71C24 R2 0 Not used 49 Max 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q Example Counting the number of parameter settings in Auto refresh setting Auto refresh setting Mm Ei r Module information Module type Serial Communications Module Module model name QJ71C24 N N R4 Start 1 0 No 3 al Setting item EEA ipes Merien iee g direction word count Flash ROM access register read delete 1 1 gt bo result CH1 LED ON status communications error 1 1 gt D1 status CH2 LED ON status communications error 1 1 gt D2 status Switch setting error mode switchi
210. W Not allowed re delved 5000 to SFFFH defined protocol protocol function support function 24576 to 32767 aa 1 The following a and b show assignments of block monitoring device areas No 1 to No 10 for the programmable controller CPU monitoring function CH1 side 8272 to 8361 2050H to 20A9H CH2 side 8528 to 8617 2150H to 21A9n 2 In the pre defined protocol mode the area can be used as a user setting area the send and receive data storage areas 3 For the QJ71C24 R2 the initial value of OH is set for both CH1 and CH2 Use prohibited System area PECIFICATION aS eA ah MELSEC Q a CH1 side buffer memory address decimal hexadecimal N th block monitoring device 5 6 8272 8281 8290 8299 8308 8317 8326 8335 8344 8353 2050H 2059H 2062H 206BH 2074H 207DH 2086H 208FH 2098H 20A1H Monitoring device designation 8273to 8282to 8291to 8300to 8309t0 8318to 8327to 8336to 8345to 8354to 8274 8283 8292 8301 8310 8319 8328 8337 8346 8355 2051 to 205Anto 2063xto 206CHto 2075xto 207EHto 2087Hto 2090Hto 2099Hto 20A2H to 2052 205Bx 20641 206Dx 20761 207FH 2088x 20914 209An 20A3H Head device No designation 8275 8284 8293 8302 8311 8320 8329 8338 8347 8356 Designation of number of points read 2053x 205Cx 20651 206EH 20771 20804 20891 2092H 209B1 20441 9S 902 On OF NUMer oF
211. a e e r e SA we a a CPRTCL Instruction processing time varies by external device and or protocol b For Universal model QCPU Processing time unit ms Instruction execution condition Instruction Transmission Transmission receive Other than QO2UCPU QO02UCPU 1 Others speed registered data count 19200 bps 40 bytes Send in form 3 Data size 8 40 bytes Stop bit 1 40 ae Parity none 8 bytes X 5 frames INPUT 40 bytes after 40 bytes have been received Boovr hows Bon we hws pue tg tg S bytes O C r T e T E PBUSY CSET sf buffer 22 UFRCVS 0 4 19200 bps 40bytes UINI 415 2 416 8 CPRTCL Instruction processing time varies by external device and or protocol App 17 App 17 APPENDIXE z MELSEC Q Appendix 4 ASCIl Code Table The ASCll code table is shown below 7 bit code The codes 00H to 1FH marked are used as Q series C24 control codes DC codes 11H to 14H can be changed by the user ee r e a4 fs 8 7 _ 010 0 111 wo s gt a ajo aoe eno x m on oo tor no m 0 p 1 q 2 r 3 s 4 t 5 u 6 v 7 w 8 x 9 y Z oOzzr xj roeaem mMmvo0cu SE P Q R S T U V Ww X Y Z T mo ower oono R OUN gt O o 5 3 App 18 App 18 APPENDIXE z MELSEC Q Appendix 5 External Dimensions 1 QJ71C24N QJ71C24 The external dimensions of the QJ71C24 are almost t
212. a to the programmable controller CPU OOH is stored in the higher byte of the final data storage position in the receive data storage area 7 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 7 1 4 How to detect reception errors This section explains how to detect errors that may occur when receiving data from the external device The following items are considered as the primary causes of errors that may occur during data reception Cause of reception error Reference section A transmission error occurred because of noise wee A timeout occurred for the no reception monitoring time timer 0 Section 6 1 7 eS 7 User s Manual 7 A timeout occurred for the transmission monitoring time timer 2 Application Section 6 3 icati Data that could not be converted with the ASCII BIN conversion was detected Chapter 13 Received the data length that was too long to store in the receiving area Section 7 1 2 Simultaneous transmissions occurred Section 7 3 1 Confirmation using the sequence program a Detecting the occurrence of a reception error 1 ERR occurrence is on 2 The receive error code is confirmed and read in data reception result address 258H 268n For details on how to check the error code contents and corrective actions see Chapter 11 b How to turn off the ERR LED and clear the error code see Section 11 1 2 1 To turn off only the ERR LED write a 1 to the Communication error clea
213. a transmission result cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeessaees D20 Intelligent function module switch settings Refer to Section 4 5 2 Switch No Bit Description Setting Position Designated value value OFF Operation setting Independent ificati b8 to b15 App 47 Even odd parity Odd Stopbt tit oca Sumcheckcods No Write during RUN Enabled App 47 APPENDIXE MELSEC Q c Buffer memory settings used in this example eg Decimal Hexadecimal Setting Name ena 150 or H Word byte units designation Byte units units 162 A2H Transmission buffer memory head address designation 04001 163 A3H 183 B7H CRILF output designation 184 B8H Output head pointer designation Output count designation 186 BAH First output frame No designation Second output frame No designation Third output frame No designation 189 BDH Fourth output frame No designation 8000H 190 BEH Fifth output frame No designation 041BH 6912 1B00n For registration Registered data byte count designation 6913 1B01H No 8001 User frame storage 012Dx App 48 App 48 APPENDIX ES 2 Program example MELSEC Q The user frames No 3F2H 3F3H 41BH and 8001H are assumed to have been registered in advance lt Transmission command gt K1026 X1000 X1001 1000 i PLS lt
214. acturer Recommended Contact product Funato cho 7 16 Nakagawa ku Tel 052 361 2290 EL Engineering Ltd EL LINE II Nagoya 454 0805 Fax 052 363 1050 KS 1 Shibuya Property West Bldg 12F System Sacom Co Ltd KS 10P Higashi 1 32 12 Shibuya ku KS 485 Tokyo 150 0011 x The recommended products have been verified and satisfy our criteria When using any of these products use it so that it conforms to the recommended product s specifications standards Tel 03 3797 0211 Fax 03 3797 0231 1 Combination between available converters and interfaces Q series C24 side System configuration External device y Description No of ee gt Available converter j connection interface with external devices interface connection example EL LINE II Connection example 1 KS 1 KS 10P KS 485 Connection example 3 RS 422 485 KS 485 Connection example 4 Connection example 2 App 21 App 21 APPENDIXES 2 Connection example Connection example 1 MELSEC Q EL LINE II l Q series C24 side RS232 signal RS422 signal External device side cD f 1 FG Swi sw2 2 FG 2 2 RD TXD 1 OFF 1 OFF TX 15 R
215. and error 11 25 e The next data was received before processing of the previous data was completed e Multiple requests was simultaneously issued for one channel e The OS of the Q series C24 detected some error An ASCII code that cannot be converted to binary code was received An odd number of bytes of data was received during data communications using ASCII BIN conversion When data are received by the protocol including a packet that contains a conversion variable the data corresponding to the conversion variable cannot be converted to binary numbers When data are received by the protocol including a packet that contains an error check code ASCII hexadecimal or ASCII decimal the data corresponding to the error check code cannot be converted to binary numbers e There is an error in the command frame part e An ASCII code that cannot be converted to binary code was received e A nonexistent command or device was designated e The remote password length is wrong MELSEC Q Corrective action e lf there is an error in the CPU eliminate the error on the CPU side and communicate again e Interlock handshake the send requests Make the transmission data count smaller than the transmit buffer size Make the non procedure protocol transmit buffer size larger Designate the first address and size of transmission receipt buffer in the free area range of the user When writing to Flash RO
216. ansmission reception by specifying transparent code Data transmission reception by a protocol selected from the pre defined protocol Chapter 8 Operating Manual Pre defined protocol support function Communication using bidirectional protocol 1 User s Manual Application Communication using pre defined protocol 2 Data transmission reception by a created or edited protocol Communication via Communication with MC Protocol non procedure protocol bidirectional protocol public network etc modem function Programmable controller access from GX Developer 5 Application so DC code control including Xon Xoff control Transmission control DTR DSR ER DR control Independent linked operation of each interface Section 4 5 2 Monitoring testing of initial settings and setting values with utility software Chapter 9 Section 2 10 of Reference S rti Itiple CPU syst upporting multiple system Manual Remote password check pA EA p Manual Application Echo back enable disable setting for RS 422 485 interface Section 3 3 4 1 Ifthe external device is capable of incorporating a program and communicating data using a protocol of a MELSEC programmable controller it is possible to access the programmable controller CPU using the MC protocol Communication of any data is also available using the bidirectional protocol User s Manual Ey o lt 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q x2 When the protocol of an external device suc
217. are initialized b When initializing the communication error information By making the CHOI LED off Communication error clear request on the Monitor test others screen the LEDs ERR NEU of the Q series C24 turn off and the communication error information is initialized 3 Turning off the ERR LED and initializing the error codes by sequence program a Input signals used to notify of error occurrences and output signals used to initialize the error code Initialization of error code is continuously performed when ERR clear request YE YF is on The CHn side error information can be initialized by the LED off Communication error clear request address OH 1H By using the ERR clear request YE YF the error codes stored in the above buffer memory can further be initialized cleared However protocol execution logs are not cleared even if the ERR clear request YE YF is used 11 6 11 6 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Turn off command MELSEC Q b Initializing communication error information by writing Communication error information can be initialized by writing 1 to the corresponding bit in the communication error clear request and to turn LED off address OH 1H The displayed LEDs and communication error information may be turned on off in the following cases e NEU to NAK turn on off depending on the status e C N to SIO turn on when errors occur and keep the ON status even after the operation retu
218. arget programmable controller using the logical station number a When Visual Basic is used 1 Screen example Form1 Text1 Enter the logical station number Connection 1 Command or Button Connect to the communication line Command2 or Button2 ne Read the device data Disconnection kef Command3 or Button3 Cut the communication line ACT control ActEasy IF ACT control for utility setting type b Program example For each development software the program examples are described below 1 Visual Basic NET 2003 2 Visual C NET 2003 3 Visual Basic 6 0 4 Visual C 6 0 1 When Visual Basic NET 2003 is used Private Sub Command1_Click ByVal sender As System Object ByVal e As System EventArgs Handles Command1 Click tkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Connection tkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Dim rtn As Integer Get LogicalstationNumber AxActEasylF1 ActLogicalStationNumber Val Text1 Text Connection rtn AxActEasylF 1 0pen If rtn 0 Then MsgBox The connection was successful Else MsgBox Connection Error amp Hex rtn End If End Sub App 28 App 28 APPENDIXE MELSEC Q Private Sub Command2_Click ByVal sender As System Object ByVal e As System EventArgs Handles Command2 Click tkkxkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Read Dim rtn As Integer Dim idata 5 As Short DO D4 are read rtn AxActEasylF 1 ReadDe
219. ata reception can be changed to any setting values chosen by the user using GX Configurator SC 6 1 1 Receiving methods The following shows the methods for receiving data in any format using the non procedure protocol There are two methods for receiving data the reception via receive complete code for receiving variable length messages and the reception via received data count for receiving fixed length messages The receive complete code and received data count used for data reception can be changed to any setting values chosen by the user using GX Configurator SC Programmable Q series C24 controller CPU Receiving area 1 buffer memory Reception data Receive data 10 read request count 004 Ax Head data Receive complete code A STX 2 3 Receive data 414 Oe stx Ale lc c x ler 7 431 421 024 414 42H 431 44H 45x 46x 471 48 03H instruction aea D 44x 46x External device F 47n 46u ETX 03x 481 ane 45H 1 444 Transmission data G 1 H Description CH1 CH2 Control timing Reception data read request X3 XA INPUT instruction complete device INPUT instruction 1 When data is received from the external device using either reception via receive complete code or reception via received data count method the reception data read request X3 XA turns ON 2 Control data is stored in the device designated
220. ate a registered data for f There is an error in the designation of the output frame CHn initialization number within the range of function number ERR the designated number of outputs from moe the location of the output head pointer There is an error in the designation of the user frame number e Designate the data for initialization in There is an error in the designation of the number of the range of 1 to 78 Section 3 4 3 registered data bytes e Designate 80 for the data for Section 3 4 4 connection a e Recheck the message length of the There is an error in the data for connection ae os Section 3 4 4 message for notification There is an error in the designation of the no e Designate the no communication rar i ashe Section 3 3 6 communication interval time interval time in the range of 0 to 120 Clear the Ai lated t of unlock The number of remote password mismatch exceeded i EA T yo ae Section 3 3 3 the value designated at the address 200Du P f P yey processing address 22FCu to 0 Callback denial exceeded the value designated at the e Clear the callback denial accumulated Section 3 3 4 address 2002 count address 22F 11 to 0 as x1 Take corrective action in the following procedure 1 Check whether the Q series C24 power supply module and CPU module are mounted correctly on the base unit 2 Check whether the operating environment of the Q series C24 is within the general specifications range of the CPU mod
221. ate is also indicated on the front of the module lower part It is not indicated on the front of the module if the Q series C24 is e QJ71024 or QJ71C24 R2 QJ71C24N RUN ERR NEU NEU 4 om sD SD CH2 RD RD CH1 RS 232 eo SDA SG 1 2 SDB roA 3 4 RDA ror 1 5 RDB nal 26 CH2 7 RS 422 RS 422 1485 l J 1001 19000000000 B 4 Sa Li Serial No Serial No labelling on the front of the module was started from December in 2007 Note that however some of the modules manufactured around the time of change may not have the serial No label attached 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q c Confirming the serial number on the system monitor Product Information List To display the system monitor select Diagnostics gt System Monitor gt Product Inf List of GX Developer Function version Serial No Production number Product Information List E x a QO3UDCPU 0 0 Intelli Q QI 71C24 R2 32pt 0000 0 1 None None jijijiji 0 3 None a None ka 1 Production number display Since the Q series C24 does not support the production number display is displayed The serial No displayed in the Product Information List of GX Developer may be different from the one on the rating plate and the front of the module e The serial
222. ates ieaden aaa eena lan tetera lett ae eeed 4 27 4 7 1 ROM RAM switch tests ccccccecceceeeeeeeceeeceeeeneeceaeeeeaeeecaceeseaeeseaeescaeeesaaeesaeeseaeeseaeeessesseeeseaeeseaees 4 27 4 7 2 Individual station loopback teSt ccccccceeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeaeeseaeeseaeeesaaeesaeeseaeessaeeescesieeesiaeessaees 4 30 4 3 Loopback IGS 774 koet oni eet nie e a anliacomAuastAcaws daara and ae a a antes 4 32 4 9 Maintenance and INSpeCtion ccecccceecceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeneeeeaeeceaeeeeaneeseaeeseaeeseaeeesanesseneeeneeeeneetenetes 4 34 4 9 1 Maintenance and inspection cccccccecceeeceeeeceeeeceeeeaeeeeeceeeeaeeseaeeseaeeesaceeceaeeseaeesaeeesaeeesieeeseeessaees 4 34 4 9 2 When mounting dismounting the MOCUIC ceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeesaeeeeeeateeaeeas 4 35 5 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE MELSEC COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL 5 1 to 5 6 5 1 Data Communication Functions ccccccccesccececeeeeceeeeeeceaeeeeaeeccaceeeaneecaaeeseaeeseaeeesceeseaeessaeeneaeessaseesaas 5 1 5 1 1 Accessing the programmable controller CPUs using the MC protocol ecceeceseeeeeeeeereeeeeeeees 5 1 5 1 2 Message format and control procedure for data COMMUNICATION ceeeeeeeeteeteetteeteeettetteeteees 5 2 5 1 3 Programmable controller CPU setting for performing data communication cceceeeeeeeeees 5 2 5 1 4 Support of multiple CPU system or redundant system
223. ation 290 fer control Echo back enable disable setting for RS 422 485 interface z 0 Enable echo back Allowed Section 3 3 4 a hacia 1 Disable echo back Use prohibited System area For confirmation of station No setting status Station No switch setting LED ON status and communication error status on CH1 side 0 LED OFF no error 1 LED ON error SD WAIT b0 C N b4 SIO b1 NAK b5 For PRO b2 ACK b6 oes a P S b3 NEU b7 ot allowe ection 4 5 confirmation of Depends Section 9 6 10 LED ON status For system b8 to b15 SA LED ON status and communication error status on CH2 side and module communication 0 LED OFF no error 1 LED ON error elus error status SD WAIT b0 NAK b5 SIO b1 ACK b6 PRO b2 NEU b7 P S b3 CH2 ERR b14 CN b4 CH1 ERR b15 For system b8 to b13 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q Address Initial Protool y Reference Decimal Hex Application Name value Registration action mc non Bi Pa Switch setting error and mode switching error status 0 No error Other than 0 Switch setting error and mode switching error CH1 Communication protocol setting No b0 0 Normal 1 Error CH1 Communication rate setting b1 0 Normal Error For confirmation CH1 Setting change prohibit time mode switching b3 of switch setting 0 Norma Error Section 43 and thede CH2 Communication protocol setting No b4 Not allowed Section 4 5 2 swit
224. ation the processing speed will be increased from the second access b The programmable controller CPU information is cleared in the following cases When the programmable controller is powered OFF and then ON or when the CPU module is reset e When the programmable controller CPU information clear request is executed 2 If the programmable controller CPU information has not been correctly obtained The following problems may occur e Accessible device range is narrowed Error code 7140n Some of commands and or devices cannot be used Error code 7142p 714Dn etc In the above case execute the programmable controller CPU information clear request If initial access is made at startup of the access target CPU or while the network is unstable the programmable controller CPU information may not be correctly acquired 3 Operation of the programmable controller CPU information clear request a Write 4C43n to the programmable controller CPU information clear request address 80H Set by the user b15 to bO Buffer memory address 80H Default 0000 t Write 4C43x 00004 No request Set by Q series C24 4C43H Requested b The programmable controller CPU information clear processing of the Q series C24 is executed 1 c Upon completion of the clear processing 0000 is written to the programmable controller CPU information clear request address 80x Set by the Q series C24
225. ation of bit numbers is done in hexadecimal For example bit 10 of DO is designated as DO A However there can be no bit designation for timers T retentive timers ST and counters C 2 Available devices are given in each of the Constant field 10 10 2 10 2 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTION S SASE MELSEC Q 10 2 G P ONDEMAND Data can be sent using the on demand function of the MC protocol Applicable device Set Internal device Link direct device Intelligent function Index register data wees user File register JOO module device E Constant Others n S1 uoco wora e E R IRE Instruction Executing code condition Gaminand G ONDEMAND G ONDEMAND GP ONDEMAND P ONDEMAND Set data Set data Setby Data type Start I O signal of the module User BIN16 bit 00 to FE Top two digit when I O signals are expressed in 3 digit st Head number of the devices in which control data is stored Us ae Devio name Device name S2 Head number of the devices in which transmission data is stored User O Bit device number to be turned on at completion of execution System Bt The file register per local device and program cannot be used as the set data Control data Set data Setting range _ Set by e Set transmission channel Transmission channel 1 Channel 1 CH1 side 1 2 User 2 Channel 2
226. ations e An error was detected upon access to a Check the error and take corrective action special function module at the specified according to the manual of the position corresponding module Special function module bus error N x 11 30 11 30 11 TROUBLESHOOTIN Se MELSEC Q e f an error occurs during A compatible 1C frame communications the Q series C24 adds a 2 character error code 00H to 10H 42H to the NAK code and returns the NAK code to the external device and stores the error code equivalent to QnA compatible 2C 3C 4C frame error code to buffer memory address 25AH CH1 or 26AH CH2 The exact error contents can be checked by reading the value stored to the buffer memory See Section 11 2 1 for a detailed description of the error codes 11 31 11 31 11 TROUBLESHOOTIN Sea MELSEC Q 11 2 3 Error code list while modem function is used The following describes the error codes contents and corrective actions for errors including errors at the abnormal completion that may occur while the Q series C24 modem function is used The error codes for the modem function are stored in the modem function error code address 221H 545 The reference pages listed in the table below are found in the User s Manual Application Error code Hexa Error Contents Corrective action Reference section decimal execution designation connection retries the range of 1 to 5 retry interval range of
227. available Function version B or later first 5 digits of the serial No are 11062 or greater Version 2 20W or later Additional function Execution of the protocol selected from the pre defined protocol library Execution of the created or Function version B or later first 5 digits of the serial No are 10122 or greater edited protocol Pre defined Addition of Sign character Version 8 78G protocol Number of decimals and communication Delimiter settings to Conversion Function version B or variable later first 5 digits of Variable number of characters the serial No are setting for Non verified reception 11062 or greater Acquisition of protocol setting data error information or later Usable no restrictions depending on the version Not usable 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 2 Checking the version and serial No of Q series programmable controller functions The serial No and function version of the Q series C24 can be confirmed on the rating plate and GX Developer s system monitor a Confirming the serial number on the rated plate The rating plate is situated on the side face of the Q series C24 MITSUBISHI MODEL Serial No Upper 5 digits Function version Relevant regulation standards aa MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC MADE IN JAPAN b Checking on the front of the module The serial No on the rating pl
228. ave been added or changed as well as manuals that provide detailed explanations hereof e Appendix 1 1 provides a breakdown of the functions of Q series C24 GX Configurator SC by function version software version The structure of this manual The module s buffer memory stores default values that are used as initial settings to execute the data send receive functions in order to communicate with the external devices Data can be sent to or received from the external devices using these default values However it may be necessary to change the default values depending on system specifications This manual explains how to perform the initial settings in order to use each function of the utility package available for this module GX Configurator SC When changing a default value for sending and receiving data to from an opposite device first see the section describing the applicable function to verify the initial setting item and setting value you wish to change then change the default value as explained in Chapter 9 About The Generic Terms and Abbreviations This manual uses the following generic terms and abbreviations to describe the serial communication modules unless otherwise specified 1 Generic terms and abbreviations of relevant modules In this manual the following generic terms and abbreviations are used to indicate the programmable controller CPU and other modules used for the data communication functions of the serial com
229. binary code Examples Transmitting the character G The ASCII code for the character G is 47H and is transmitted as the two bytes 34H 37H Transmitting the character A The ASCII code for A is 41H and is transmitted as the two bytes 34H 31H If the ASCII code 41n for the character A is transmitted unchanged the Q series C24 ASCII BIN conversion will convert it to AH 10 and pass it to the programmable controller CPU e A device No outside the When designating a device check Device setting designated range was of the parameters written to the CPU and correct it to designated a device No within the designated range and restart data communications e A remote RUN STOP Check if remote STOP is applied from another request was issued while module and restart data communications remote STOP was applied from another module 11 44 11 44 11 TROUBLESHOOTIN Se MELSEC Q 11 3 11 Communication error SIO Symptom Corrective action jt adalat ICTS stop bit setting settings are the same e Transmission rate is too e Decrease the transmission rate and restart fast and the next data is data communications transmitted before the Q series C24 completes processing of the receive data Data larger than the e Use DTR and DC control and interrupt receive buffer size was transmission before the buffer becomes full received Perform RS and CS control when the modem function is used e Increase the tran
230. ble controller CPUs controller CPU aa DC code control Transmission control DTR DSR signal control i Go Half duplex communication control Mode switching Setting the same protocol Independent operation of two interfaces Setting different protocols Linked operation of two interfaces mn ie aa Registering initial setting values of the buffer memory Registering user frame O Flash ROM O EEPROM ee eee ee lt a I O signal transmission receive by multi drop link function EE ee x Lo x Connection of GX Developer E ee ee cee Communication data monitoring ee x Registering and monitoring of setting values by the utility package l o BME QCPU QnACPU Programmable controller that can be mounted MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 remote I O station Remote I O station AnACPU AnACPU AnUCPU AnUCPU QnACPU QnACPU Data transmission rate bps 230400 maximum 115200 19200 19200 19200 issi p 6 maximum maximum maximum maximum O Function exists possible A Function exists possible specification is different depends on the function version see Appendix 1 X No function impossible x1 Access is possible only within the range of an AnACPU device x2 A multiple block batch read write function can be used for the local station QCPU to which the Q series C24 is mounted and the next CPU module which will be another station via CC Link IE controller network MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 P Programmable controller
231. can be installed and which can transmit and receive data in accordance with the MELSEC programmable controller protocol can communicate with the programmable controller CPUs using the MC protocol 5 1 1 Accessing the programmable controller CPUs using the MC protocol This section describes the main functions for accessing the programmable controller CPUs using the MC protocol An overview of the data communication functions using the MC protocol is provided in Section 3 4 With the exception of the on demand function described below the Q series C24 sends and receives data based on commands from the external devices Thus the programmable controller CPU side does not require sequence programs for data communication 1 Data read write This function reads and writes data from to the programmable controller CPU device memory of the local station or other station on the CC Link IE controller network MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 as well as the intelligent function module buffer memory By reading and writing data the programmable controller CPU operation monitoring data analysis and production management can be performed on the external device side Also production directions can be executed on the external device side 2 File read write This function reads and writes files stored in the programmable controller CPU such as sequence programs and parameter files By reading and writing files file management for the GX Configurator SC
232. ccececceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeseneeteaeeeeneeseneetsaees X1030 e Delete command pulse signal ccecceeeeeeeeeteeeeeteeeeenteees M10 Delete 1ag 2 ciel deneelenadeneedel ae cevienidetiae serene M11 e Delete result acquisition command cccceeeeeeeeeeeees M12 e Completion device for REMFR REMTO instruction M100 to 103 e Normal abnormal completion flag for REMFR REMTO IMISUPUICHON eea a eaaa n a e a a a M200 to 202 e Delete instruction cc ccccccecesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeineetans DO Frame NO rore a A aaa D1 Delete result i anannsnnao e e a a a i D2 b Buffer memory settings used in this example These settings assume that the user frame registered in Appendix 9 9 is deleted Address Decimal Hexadecimal Setting Name value Register read delete instructions Frame No direction 03E8H Registration read delete result storage le aye App 56 App 56 APPENDIXES 2 Program examples lt Delete command gt X1030 H PLS lt Setting of delete instruction gt M10 M11 X101E K3 HE8 K2 M100 M101 SET M101 _ SE lt Flash ROM write request gt M11 X1018 f SET X1018 1 PLS lt Read of delete result gt M12 X101E t k L RENFR JI Kl Kl HO H4 D2 Ki M102 M103 SET M103 App 57 M10 D0 01 M100 M11 M200 Y1018 M12 M102 M201 M202 Y1018 Mu MELSEC Q J Changes the del
233. ce at completion Turns on and off depending on the completion status of the ONDEMAND instruction e Normal completion Off with no change Abnormal completion Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the ONDEMAND instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing Operation during execution of an ONDEMAND instruction END END END END Sequence processing processing processing processing program t 7 Completion of reading user frame if Execution of ONDEMAND J by ONDEMAND instruction instruction ONDEMAND i I i instruction i ON l i Completion device geeen O O oaae k i y Abnormal i i i i i ON completion at completion Normal completion lt lt One scan i i Status display device OFF I 1 When a dedicated instruction is completed abnormally the abnormal completion signal D 1 turns on and the error code is stored in the transmission result S1 1 In case of operation errors the error flag SMO turns on and the error code is stored in the SDO See one of the following manuals according to the error code and check and correct the error lt Error code gt 4FFFu or less QCPU Q Mode User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 70004 or more Section 11 2 of the User s Manual Basic 10 5 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Program example MELSEC Q A program that sends data stored in D10 to D11 using an on demand transmission
234. ceeeeaeeseaeeecaeessaceeseaeeseaeetsiseesiseesaas App 24 Appendix 7 2 Usage Procedure of MX Component c cccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeaeetsieeeenneeeaes App 27 Appendix 8 Example of Clear Process Program for Receive Data cccccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteneeteeeeees App 34 Appendix 9 Program Examples for Using Q Series C24 at MELSECNET H Remote I O Station App 36 Appendix 9 1 System configuration and program conditions cccceeceeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteneetsaees App 36 Appendix 9 2 When accessing buffer memory using Sequence program ccccesceeeeeeeteeteees App 38 Appendix 9 3 When sending on demand data ccccccecescceeeeeeeeeeceeeeseneeeaeeeeneeecaeeeeaeeesaseeteneeesaees App 39 Appendix 9 4 When receiving data using nonprocedural or bidirectional protocol 0 e App 41 Appendix 9 5 When sending data using nonprocedural or bidirectional protocol 0 cee App 43 A 12 A 12 Appendix 9 6 When clearing received data cccccccceeceeeeceeeeeeeeeneeeeaeeeeaeeseaeeesaneeseaeeseaeeseaeeeeaeeeeanees App 45 Appendix 9 7 When sending data using user frames cceccceeeceeeeeeeeceeeeceeeeneeecaeeeeaeeesaneeteneetsnees App 47 Appendix 9 8 When performing initial Setting ccccecesceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseaeeecaeeecaeeeseneeseaeesseetaees App 50 Appendix 9 9 When registering user frame cccccceeeeeeeeeeee
235. ceived is stored 1 or more system Allowable number of Set the allowable number of words for received data that S 3 1 or more User receive data can be stored in D1 1 The command of G P BIDIN cannot be converted into pulse 2 G P BIDIN should be executed while the read request of the input output signal is turned on 10 18 10 18 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Function 10 19 MELSEC Q x1 When setting Word byte units designation by GX Configurator SC set the number of bytes when bytes are designated and set the number of words when words are designated as the unit types x2 The settings are done by either of the following e User Data set by the user before executing the BIDIN instructions e System The programmable controller CPU stores the execution result of the BIDIN instructions The function stores in the device designated in D1 and succeeding devices the data received via the bidirectional protocol of the module designated in Un according to the control data of the device designated in S and succeeding devices Simultaneous execution of dedicated instructions The following table shows the handling for when executing another instruction during execution of the BIDIN instruction or executing the BIDIN instruction during execution of another instruction in the same channel Availability of Instruction simultaneous Handling of simultaneous execution execution e The
236. center or representative for repair 5 If the problem cannot be solved through the above steps please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem 11 29 11 29 11 TROUBLESHOOTIN See MELSEC Q 11 2 2 A compatible 1C frame communications error code table The following table lists the error code error contents and corrective action for errors generated during A compatible 1C frame communications Corrective action Non Bidire Pre MC Proce _ ctional defined dure Ch the setting to Enable writ e A write command was designated when SU PENG O TENAS ee ene during RUN and restart dat Disable write during RUN was set rel i eek ict Disable during RUN Paraineterors d ence biooiatn Was communications e d Pog Stop the CPU and restart data written during RUN Sa on communications Error code Hexa Error Contents decimal e The data does not match the parity bit Match the Q series C24 and external Parity error setting device settings e The sum check calculated by the Q Sum check error series C24 and the transmitted sum U 4 n Check the external device sum check check are not the same e Received message that is different from Check and correct the external device Protocol error the control procedure with the transmit message and restart data communication protocol setting communications e T
237. cessed by the device memory read write function Note that the accessible devices and the ranges vary depending on the type of frames used for the data communication See the Reference Manual for a detailed explanation Device name Special relay Device symbol Device name Device symbol Link relay Special register Data register Input relay Output relay Link register Link special relay Internal relay Link special register It is only possible to read write from to the buffer memory of an intelligent function module for the MELSECNET 10 remote I O station compatible with the QnA A series x2 Programmable controller CPU monitoring can be registered using the MC protocol or GX Configurator SC The dedicated instruction CSET cannot be used for registration The device to be monitored can be registered within the device range of the MELECNET H remote I O station 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 3 The dedicated instructions are unavailable for the MELSECNET H remote I O station For the functions that use the dedicated instructions to make communication perform programming by the following methods Dedicated instruction Method Explanation section FROM TO Perform programming using the REMFR REMTO instruction Appendix 9 2 ONDEMAND Appendix 9 3 Appendix 9 4 Appendix 9 5 I O signal BIDIN Appendix 9 4 BIDOUT aa 9 5 SPBUSY No method Perform programming using the
238. ching 0 Normal Error Section 9 6 10 CH2 Communication rate setting b5 0 Normal Error CH2 Setting change prohibit time mode switching b7 0 Normal Error Setting station No b14 0 Norma Error Linked operation setting b15 0 Norma 1 Error Number of registered user frames 0 No registration 1 to 200 Number of registered frames User frame registration status for confirmation of registration No b765 0 No registration o 1 Registered Section 9 6 10 205H to 21Dx l Bit corresponding to registration No is O OFF 1 ON For confirmation Registration No 3E8H 1000 Address 205H b0 to Not allowed of user frame Registration No 4AFH 1199 Address 211H b7 Section 9 6 10 Section 9 1 2 bs gt Number of registered default registration frames for system of User s Manual ar a For confirmation Flash ROM system parameters write result Bee of flash ROM 0 Normal completion Not allowed Section 9 6 10 write result Other than 1 error code Abnormal completion Modem function error code error code when modem function is being used pan 0 Normal completion Other than 1 error code Abnormal completion Modem function sequence status 7 Modem disconnected 0 Idle ni a eae 8 Callback Request reception waiting 1 Waiting for initialization x EE a 9 Callback Modem disconnect 2 Initializing modem Ee 3 Waiting waiting zi 4 Checking password 10 Callback Delay time waiting Section 9 6 2 ea
239. ck the signal on off status of the RS 232 interface 1 RS 232 control signal status address 254H 264n The status of the RS 232 signals is stored as follows b15 to b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO Buffer memory address 254 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 110 Information on CH1 side 2644 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 110 Information on CH2 side A ON RS 0 OFF DSR DTR CD System area for QJ71C24 R2 CSx RI 1 For more details on signals for RS 232 see Section 3 2 1 2 Signals output from the Q series C24 side RTS and DTR are controlled by the operating system OS of the Q series C24 They cannot be directly controlled by the sequence program 3 There is a maximum delay of 100 ms in signal status stored in the buffer memory above 2 Example of a program that reads from RS 232 control signal status address 2544 2641 The following shows an example of a program that reads the RS 232 control signal status input output signals X Y00 to X Y1F of the Q series C24 Example of FROM instruction Reads the status of RS 232 control signal on FROMP HO H264 D1 KI o Reads the status of RS 232 control signal on TFROHP Ho paoi Do Kl the CH1 side from address 2544 the CH2 side from address 264 b15 to b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 DO 0 0 00 4 4 4 bee DTR signal ON DSR signal ON RTS signal ON D1 0 0 4 4 41 ee CD signal ON DTR signal
240. cols 1 OVERVIEW Inverter station No is set in device DO Operating mode value is stored in device D100 MELSEC Q d By specifying transmission and reception data storage areas device or buffer memory data can be set in communication packets For sending The user can set a variable system dependent element such as a channel number in the specified device or buffer memory The QJ71C24N R2 R4 automatically places the value in the user specified device or buffer memory into the appropriate position of the send packet before sending the packet For receiving The QJ71C24N R2 R4 automatically stores only the necessary data such as readout values in the user specified device or buffer memory The following is an example System example The QJ71C24N R2 R4 is connected to an inverter and reads the operating mode value from the inverter A packet with the inverter station No set in device DO is sent and an operating mode value is stored in device D100 DO D100 Device FREQROL A700 DO Inverter station No Header Inverter Check code Terminator station No D100 aa Operating x Header mode value Check code Terminator Operating mode value e With the debugging support function of GX Configurator SC Pre defined protocol support function
241. creen The Q series C24 does not have the setting switches to set the operation mode station number and transmission specification that are available in the serial communication modules for QnA series Appendix 2 2 1 Using programs designed for the QC24 N App 9 The data communication between the QnACPU and external devices as well as other QnACPU which has been performed by QC24 N can also be performed by the Q series C24 The following explains how to use programs designed for QC24 N during data communication using the Q series C24 1 The communication programs directed to the QC24 N on the external device side and the communication programs on the QnACPU self station side to which the QC24 N is mounted can be used for the Q series C24 However note the following points There is no function that allows data communication with other station s programmable controller CPUs by a data link instruction Delete the part of data communication program by data link instructions When using a new function create a new program e 2 Make sure to check operation when using communication programs for QC24 N on the external device side and the QnACPU self station side 3 The notes during data communication by RS 422 485 interface also apply to the Q series C24 e Take measures against data error reception on the external device side see Section 3 3 3 Operation of RS 422 485 interface on the programmable contro
242. cription Set by Data type Start I O signal of the module User BIN16 bit 00 to FE Top two digit when I O signals are expressed in 3 digit st Head number of the devices in which control data is stored User User system Device nane vi S2 Head number of the devices in which transmission data is stored D Bit device number to be turned on at completion of execution system Bt The file register per local device and program cannot be used as the set data Control data Set transmission channel S1 0 Transmission channel 1 Channel 1 CH1 side 1 2 User 2 Channel 2 CH2 side e Transmission result by an OUTPUT instruction are stored Transmission result 0 Normal System Other than 0 Error code 1 S1 2 Transmission data count e Set the transmission data count 2 x1 For error codes relating to abnormal completion see Chapter 10 of the User s Manual Basic x2 When setting Word byte units designation by GX Configurator SC set the number of bytes when bytes are designated and set the number of words when words are designated and set the number of words when words are selected as the unit types x3 The settings are done by either of the following e User Data set by the user before executing the OUTPUT instructions e System The programmable controller CPU stores the execution result of the OUTPUT instructions 10 7 10 7 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS
243. crosoft Windows Millennium Edition Operating System Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Operating System Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition Operating System Microsoft Windows Vista Home Basic Operating System Microsoft Windows Vista Home Premium Operating System Microsoft Windows Vista Business Operating System Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate Operating System Microsoft Windows Vista Enterprise Operating System Depending on the version of MX Component used different operating systems are supported See the manual of MX Component for details e e Communication support tools e MX Component SWOD5C ACT E or later 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL Data communication using the non procedure protocol is a function for sending and receiving data between a programmable controller CPU and an external device using the message format and transmission control procedure specified by the user Data can be transferred using the non procedure protocol when it is necessary to perform data communication using the protocol for external devices such as a measuring instrument and a bar code reader In that case transmission receive data processing can be simplified by using the communication functions with the user frames described in the User s Manual Application This chapte
244. crosoft Windows Vista Business Operating System Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate Operating System Microsoft Windows Vista Enterprise Operating System Windows XP Generic term for the following Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition Operating System Definitions and Descriptions of Terminology The following table lists the definitions and descriptions of terminology used in this manual and related manuals for the Q series serial communication modules Terms Description A compatible IC frame Formats 1 to 4 Bidirectional protocol One of the message formats for the serial communication module for performing communication using the MC protocol and ASCII code data This is the same message format as when communicating using the protocol for the A series computer link modules Device memory read write operations for the QCPU are allowed within the device range of the AnACPU For details see Chapter 5 of the Reference Manual A communication procedure for the serial communication modules and one of the data communication functions for communicating any data between the programmable controller CPU and an opposite device Details are explained in Chapter 7 Independent operation A mode of interface operation to communicate data with external devices using a function specified in each communication protocol setting Two interfaces of serial
245. ction 2 6 Section 8 4 4 8 6 2 Table Section 10 2 1 716FH 7FEFH 10 2 3 7FE9u 10 3 14 Appendix 3 Addition About The Generic Terms and Abbreviations Section 1 2 Section 2 1 2 7 Section 4 5 2 Section 8 2 1 8 2 2 Section 10 2 1 Appendix 1 1 6 Addition The Manual s Use and Structure About The Generic Terms and Abbreviations Section 1 2 1 4 Section 2 1 2 4 Section 5 2 Section 6 1 4 Section 9 8 Appendix 7 Jan 2003 SH NA 080006 F Addition model QJ71C24N QJ71C24N R2 QJ71C24N R4 The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Print Date_ Manual Number an 2003 SH NA 080006 F Addition SAFETY PRECAUTIONS About Manuals About The Generic Terms and Abbreviations Product Configuration Section 1 3 Section 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 5 2 6 2 7 Section 3 1 3 2 1 3 3 1 3 6 3 8 3 9 Section 4 1 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 1 Section 6 1 1 6 1 2 Section 7 1 7 2 2 Chapter 8 all J Section 9 1 9 6 Section 10 1 2 b 10 1 3 1 10 2 Appendix 1 Appendix J 2 1 Appendix 3 Appendix 5 Appendix 9 un 2004 SH NA 080006 G About The Generic Terms and Abbreviations Product Configuration Chapter 2 all Section 3 8 Section 4 2 2 1 Section 5 1 3 POINT Section 5 1 4 Chapter 8 screen change Section 8 6 10 Section 10 1 1 Section 10 2 Addition Appendix 9 Sep 2004 SH NA 080006 H Correction Section 1 3 Section
246. d monitoring time and buffer memory assignment Operating procedure e Online operation Monitor screen gt CHO Transmission control system setting e Offline operation Flash ROM setting screen gt CHO Transmission control system setting Setting screen EE Module information Module type Serial Communications Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name 0J71C24N Setting item Setting value DTR DSR ER DR DC control designation IDTR DSR control E DC1 DC3Kon Xoff code designati 1311 b0 b7 DC1 codefvalue H00 Hff b8 bf DC3 code value HO0 Hff DC2 DC4 code designation b0 b7 DC2 code value HOO Hff b8 bf DC4 code value HOO Hff Communication system designation Full duplex bd CD terminal check designation No check X Half duplex communications control designation it Simultaneous transmission priority non priority designation O Priority Others Non priority transmission wait time units 100ms 1412 Retransmission time transmission Do nat retransmit a method designation r Flash ROM setting Details Wiite to Save file Bani _ seve Select input Read from oad file module DTR DSR control DC1 2 3 4 control DC1 3 control DC2 4 control zi Make text file Execute test Close 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q Setting items Buffer rere eal address Item T cn Reference section DTR DSR ER DR DC
247. d notification execution No F 555 10 557 User s Manual 22BH SDA For confirmation System area use prohibited E eee Application 558 to 561 of notification 22Ex to 231n status Data storage area 2 Pes 5 z Data storage area 3 566 to 569 The configuration of each area is the same as the data storage area 1 236H z 239H Data storage area 4 570 to 573 23An to 23DH Data storage area 5 ite For confirmation s i A Section 4 5 2 Ca of station No panes No instruction setting Not allowed Section 96 3 setting status 0631 Section 11 1 6 RS 232 control signal status 0 OFF status 1 ON status RS b0 DTR b2 CS b4 DSR b1 CD b3 RI b5 Not used b6 to b15 All 0 Section 9 6 3 Section 11 1 3 596 612 Control signal 254H 2641 Communication protocol status switch setting 0 GX Developer connection 5 MC protocol format 5 Section 4 5 2 592 608 1 MC protocol format 1 6 Non procedure protocol ot x Section 9 6 3 250H 2601 2 MC protocol format 2 7 Bidirectional protocol Section 11 1 5 3 MC protocol format 3 8 For linked operation Ki 4 MC protocol format 4 9 Pre defined protocol Transmission setting status switch setting Operation setting b0 0 Independent 1 Link Data bit b1 0 7 bit 1 8 bit Parity bit b2 0 No 1 Yes Odd even parity b3 0 Odd 1 Even 593 609 2511 2614 Stop bit b4 0 1 bit 1 2 bit Sum check code b5 0 No 1 Yes Write during RUN b6 0
248. d write prohibited setting columns in the command list of the Reference Manual 8 Setting modifications setting This sets whether or not the following actions are allowed after starting up the Q series C24 Changing data communication functions and transmission e Specifications and the switching mode of each interface e Writing data to the flash ROM writing the system setting values and user frame 1 2 A setting change in the connected interface side should be set to Allowed in order to register a user frame to the flash ROM from an external device using the MC protocol Setting changes in interfaces on the CH1 and CH2 sides should both be set to Allowed in order to register the system setting values and user frames to the flash ROM from the programmable controller CPU 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q b Communication rate setting CH1 side switch 1 upper level CH2 side switch 3 upper level 1 x2 3 Communication rate Bit rs el Communication rate Bit eee esl Remarks Unit at m b8 Unit a m b8 14400 19200 e lowering the communication 01H 28800 rate when data cannot be oe hee ee communicated normally with an errors and framing errors etc x1 Transmission speed of 230 400 bps is available for only CH1 of the QJ71C24N R2 R4 x2 When connecting external devices to both of two interfaces the total of the communication speed should be 115 200bps or less 230 400 bps or le
249. d can be unlocked canceled using either one of the methods below to allow data communication from the external device It is necessary to connect a line to the modem first e When communicating using the MC protocol Use the dedicated command for communication using the MC protocol to unlock the remote password from the external device e When accessing the programmable controller through GX Developer Unlock the remote password using GX Developer at the start of online operation The remote password is automatically locked by disconnecting the line to the modem Set the parameters to make the Q series C24 as a subject to the remote password check Accessing external device QCPU Q series C24 T Remote 1 ee 5 password check Communication through GX Developer Communication using MC protocol GX Developer 1 OVERVIEW 1 3 About Added Changed Functions in Function Version B Function Simultaneous connection of GX Developer and GOT Control of RS and DTR signal states Support for 230 400 bps MELSEC Q The table below lists the functions that have been added or changed in the Q series C24 of function version B 1 The added changed functions shown in this section includes the functions added in the first products of function version B or later For the function version serial No and software version of the Q series C24 and related products CPU module GX Developer and GX
250. d instructions simultaneous execution error 7FFOH OUTPUT occurs in the dedicated instruction attempted later However simultaneous execution is available when channels to BIDIN be used are not the same When instructions are executed in order of INPUT CSET e Dedicated instructions simultaneous execution error 7FFOH occurs in the CSET instruction the right column However simultaneous execution is available when channels to be used are not the same When instructions are executed in order of CSET INPUT e Simultaneous execution is available e The next instruction will be ignored until the active instruction has been completed However simultaneous execution is available when channels to be used are not the same CSET PUTE GETE as ISPBUSY UINI e Dedicated instructions simultaneous execution error 7FFOH occurs in the dedicated instruction attempted later O Available X Not available x1 The same channel cannot be used for the CPRTCL and CSET instructions because different communication protocols are used for them Using these instructions on the same channel will cause a communication protocol setting error 7FF2u 10 24 TRUCTION 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 The status of the CSET instruction whether it is being executed or completed normally abnormally can be checked by the complete device D2 specified by the setting data a Complete device D2 0 This dev
251. d the Q series C24 transmit at the same time during data communications using the bidirectional protocol Since the external device and the Q series C24 do not transmit at the same time during half duplex communications see User s Manual Application Chapter 8 this section does not have to be read When an external device and the Q series C24 transmit at the same time the Q series C24 processing depends on the setting of Simultaneous transmission data valid invalid designation with GX Configurator SC The GX Configurator SC setting value Simultaneous transmission data valid invalid designation is stored in the following areas of the buffer memory Simultaneous transmission data valid invalid designation addresses 9BH 13Bu The Q series C24 communication data processing for each setting is described in Section 7 3 2 Setting contents Value set to buffer Q series C24 processing contents sotto bufer Gsevies C24 processing contents with GX Configurator SC Address 9Bu 13Bx Message transmit processing Message receive processing Waits to receive the response message 1 2 Transmits a response message 2 2 while checking time out after data after data reception 2 1 is complete transmission 1 1 is complete Posts the receive data and receive Posts normal end or abnormal end according result to the programmable controller to whether or not the programmable controller CPU through the buffer memory Transmission data Val
252. data area addresses 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 6 2 2 Arrangement and contents of the transmission area and the transmission data This section explains the arrangement and contents of the transmission area and the transmission data for performing data transmission using the non procedure protocol 1 Transmission area The transmission area is a memory area for storing the data and the data count that are transmitted from the programmable controller CPU to the external device via the Q series C24 By default the transmission area is assigned to addresses 400H to SFFH CH1 side and 800 to 9FFH CH2 side CH1 side i Sssseee The unit of transmission data count words bytes address Buffer memory is in accordance with the word byte units designation in QSCU 400 Transmission data count 3 The transmission data count designated with the 4014 re ON BN ie ee OUTPUT instruction is written to 2 w Transmission data le f wi ene The transmission data designated with the OUTPUT Fa instruction is written 5FFu Default setting 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 1 The position and size of the transmission area in the buffer memory can be changed with GX Configurator SC in accordance with the specifications of the external device and the received data length See Sections 9 4 5 and 9 4 7 a When changing the position and size of the tra
253. dicated instructions The following table shows the handling for when executing another instruction during execution of the INPUT instruction or executing the INPUT instruction during execution of another instruction in the same channel oOo Handling of simultaneous execution e The next instruction will be ignored until the active instruction has been completed However simultaneous execution is available when channels to be used are not the same When instructions are executed in order of INPUT CSET e Dedicated instructions simultaneous execution error 7FFOH occurs in the CSET instruction the right column However simultaneous execution is available when channels to be used are not the same When instructions are executed in order of CSET INPUT e Simultaneous execution is available PUTE GETE BUFRCVS INPUT instruction and BUFRCVS instruction cannot be used at the same time However simultaneous execution is available when channels to be used are not the same SPBUSY 5 asst sins i ncn atest ene J UINI 7 e Dedicated instructions simultaneous execution error 7FFOH occurs in the dedicated instruction attempted later O Available X Not available 1 Since the dedicated instructions shown below use a different communication protocol from that for the INPUT instruction they are not used in the same channel ONDEMAND BIDOUT BIDIN CPRTCL If the dedicated instructions shown above are used in the same c
254. dule is changed to a Q series programmable controller module make sure to check operation App 14 App 14 APPENDIXE 3 MELSEC Q Appendix 3 Processing Time 1 Time required to process communication using the non procedure protocol guideline The processing time for the Output and Input instructions can be estimated by the following formula Note however that the processing time may become longer depending on other communication functions e g communication using the MC protocol and special functions e g ASCIl binary conversion transmission control that are used at the same time The value obtained from the following formula should be used as a guideline for the processing time when reception or transmission only is performed using only CH1 RS 232 connection a Output instruction Tp St Per X 1000 0 07 x Ds T1 Tp The time from the start of execution of the Output instruction to the End processing of the sequence scan at the completion of the Output instruction execution ms St Scan time Die Data length of 1 byte at data transmission number of bits Cr Communication rate bps Ds Number of bytes of transmission data T1 QJ71C24N R2 R4 T1 3 0 QJ71024 R2 T1 4 86 1 This stands for the time range of processing Tp Start of the Output Start of the End processing of instruction execution y Tp aa the scan at the completion of Step 0 ae bs the
255. e Communication format definition program Data reception processing program Received data check program Enomous amounts of sequence programs must be created QCPU QJ71C24N External R2 R4 Dedicated instruction for starting the protocol Protocol setting data Executable with one dedicated instruction Simply registered in GX Configurator SC Pre defined protocol support function 8 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE PRE DEFINED PROTOCOL MELSEC Q For details refer to the following manual Operating Manual Pre defined protocol support function A protocol used in the pre defined protocol function is a means for communicating with an external device It comprises of the following information e Packet element packet format e Packet data e Communication type Send only Receive only or Send and receive 2 Numbers of protocols and packets that can be registered The following are the maximum numbers of protocols and packets that can be registered e Protocols Up to 128 e Packets Up to 256 Once a protocol is registered a packet determined for each protocol is registered to the packet data area Because of this the available number of protocols is 127 or less when 1 The number of registered packets reached the maximum 256 2 The usage rate of the packet data area reached 100 The usage rate of the packet data area can be confirmed in GX Configurator SC Pre defined p
256. e Pre defined protocol mode No protocol setting data Write the protocol setting data from GX have been written to the Q Configurator SC Pre defined protocol series C24 support function and then execute the CPRTCL instruction 11 46 11 46 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Symptom Corrective action e The protocol By GX Configurator SC Pre defined MELSEC Q Bidirectional procedure Pre defined corresponding to the protocol support function read the protocol protocol No specified in setting from the Q series C24 the control data for the On the protocol selection screen check the CPRTCL instruction is not registered protocol and protocol No for an registered error To the same channel multiple CPRTCL instructions were Correct the sequence program so that upon completion of one CPRTCL instruction O execution another is executed concurrently executed Incorrect control data are specified for the CPRTCL instruction Correct the control data for the CPRTCL instruction The user edited protocol Check the packet format of the external setting in GX Configurator device and correct the protocol setting SC Pre defined protocol 1 When a conversion variable exists in the support function is receive packet check for an error in the inconsistent with the setting of Conversion Sign character packet format of the Number of decimals Delimiter or Number e When the pre external device
257. e The reception data read request will not be sent to the programmable controller CPU The reception abnormal detection X4 XB does not come on Control data is stored in the device designated with the BIDIN instruction and then the BIDIN instruction is executed Receive data is read from the receive area of the buffer memory When the BIDIN instruction has been executed the Q series C24 sends a normal end response ACK message to the external device 7 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 7 1 2 Arrangement and contents of the receive area and the receive data This section shows the arrangement and contents of the receive area and the receive data for performing data reception using the bidirectional protocol 1 Receive area The receive area is a memory that stores the received data length receive data count and data area received from an external device The receive area is allocated to addresses 600H to 7FFH CH1 side and AOO to BFFH CH2 side at initial setting CH1 PROEST The units of data length word byte is in accordance address puffer memory with the word byte units designation in GX Configurator SC 6004 fo i Data length Receive dat t g 2 heer OSEN a at The contents of data length of the received 6014 g message are stored to 3 Receive data Data area Y The contents of the data area of the received 7FFH message are stored in ascending address order Default 7 DATA
258. e LW10000 or higher using MC protocol QnA compatible 4C 3C frame only This function allows access to link direct device LW10000 or higher Section 3 2 of Reference Manual Access to extended data register D65536 or higher or extended link register W10000 or higher using MC protocol QnA compatible 4C 3C 2C frame only Support for multiple CPU system This function allows access to extended data register D65536 or higher and extended link register W10000 or higher This function allows access to the control non control CPUs specified by the user when performing the following forms of data communication with a multiple CPU system e Communication using the MC protocol QCPU access from GX Developer Section 3 2 of Reference Manual Section 2 10 of Reference Manual Data communication using the pre defined protocol function Data can be transferred with the protocol appropriate to the communication target device User s Manual Basic Chapter 8 Operating Manual Pre defined protocol support function 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS This Chapter explains the system configuration and available functions 2 1 Applicable Systems This section describes the applicable systems 1 Applicable modules and base units and No of modules a When mounted with a CPU module The table below shows the CPU modules a
259. e the time out time the time shown below or longer Programmable controller CPU maximum scan time x 2 100 ms External device framing error When nothing is transmitted from the Q series C24 to the external device though the RS 422 or RS 422 485 interface a framing error may be generated in the external device Make the external device skip the data up to transmission of the head data ENQ NAK etc of the message from the Q series C24 Before communicating data through the RS 422 485 interface check Q series C24 specifications given in Section 3 3 Data bit settings When adding a sum check code to a message set the data bits to 8 bits using the transmission setting of the GX Developer For more details on the data bit settings see Section 4 5 8 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE PRE DEFINED PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 8 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE PRE DEFINED PROTOCOL Data can be transferred between the QJ71C24N R2 R4 and an external device using GX Configurator SC Pre defined protocol support function with a protocol appropriate to the external device Protocols can be selected from the pre defined protocol library offered or can be created and edited arbitrarily Since registered setting data are written to a flash ROM the program volume in a programmable controller CPU can be reduced 1 Data communication using the pre defined protocol Using non procedure protocol communication QJ71C24N External R2 R4 devic
260. e CPU system QO6UDHCPU Multiple CPU system Version 8 48A or later Version 2 12N or later Q10UDH az0uDHcPu Single CPU system Version 8 76E or later Version 2 17Tor later Multiple CPU system Single CPU system Q13UDH Q26UDHCPU Version 8 62Q or later Version 2 12N or later Multiple CPU system Q03UDE Q04UDEH Single CPU system QO6UDEH Q13UDEH Version 8 68W or later Version 2 17T or later Q26UDEHCPU Multiple CPU system O IOUDEFIQAJUDEHE Single CPU system Version 8 76E or later Version 2 17T or later PU Multiple CPU system ee anMELSECNETH remot VO Version 6 or later SWOD5C QSCU E 30D or later 1 For GX Developer and GX Configurator SC versions that support the new functions of the Q series C24 refer to Section 2 8 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q b Communication support tools for external devices ItemName Model Remark O ActiveX control library MX Component SWnDSC ACT E The n in the model name is 0 or greater 1 1 Depending on the version of MX Component used different versions of Q series C24 are supported See the manual of MX Component for the details 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 2 2 Combinations of Programmable Controller CPU and External Device and Available Functions The following describes the system configurations and available functions when using the Q series C24 1 System configurations System configurations combinat
261. e Q series C24 must be installed firmly The pins of the Q series C24 must not be bent or otherwise abnormal Test the Q series C24 alone See Section 4 7 e ROM RAM switch test must not generate any errors Self loopback test must not generate any errors Check the state of the programmable controller CPU There must not be any errors that stop programmable controller CPU Whether the operation communications error Note cause is in the Q The following methods are available for series C24 or an testing if normal communications are external device is possible with the Q series C24 alone unclear 1 With one the Q series C24 set CH1 and CH2 to the non procedure protocol and connect the wiring the same as for the self loopback test and transmit data from one channel and receive the transmitted data at the other channel If the transmitted data and the received data are the same transmit and receive processing is performed normally When two Q series C24 are available set one Q series C24 to the non procedure protocol and the other Q series C24 to the MC protocol and transmit an MC protocol message from the non procedure protocol station If the MC protocol station returns the transmit message normally transmit and receive processing is normal 11 52 11 52 11 TROUBLESHOOTIN See MELSEC Q 11 3 16 Communication is not available via the modem Non Bidirectional Symptom Cause Corrective acti
262. e QC24 N and Installing the Q Series C24 ILO EXISTING SYStOMS uses scsi eni Ph ened a vedeteats Heat acetadl alpeedgh Maxis E App 9 Appendix 2 2 1 Using programs designed for the QC24 N cccccceeeeieeeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeetneeeee App 9 Appendix 2 2 2 Installing on existing SYStEMS c ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteceneaeeeeeeeeeseesnaeeeeees App 10 Appendix 2 3 Using Programs Designed for the Computer Link Module and Installing the Q Series C24 into Existing SySteMS 0 ce ececeeceseeeeeeeseeseeeseeeeeeeseeeseeeeeneeeeeeaes APP 11 Appendix 2 3 1 Using programs designed for the computer link module ceeee App 11 Appendix 2 3 2 Installing the Q series C24 into existing SySteMS ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteees App 14 Appendix 3 Processing Time ccccccccscceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaneeseaeeeeaeeceaeeecaceesaeseeaeescaeeeeaeeeseaeesereseeeseineess App 15 Appendix 4 ASCI Code T ables a e a a a ten dha teat ihe Ha alah a aaa e a App 18 Appendix 5 External Dimensions 2 cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeaeeeeaeeecaceeseaeeseaeeseaeeeeeeeseaeeseeteneessireess App 19 Appendix 6 Connection Examples When Using a Converter ccccccececeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees App 21 Appendix 7 Communication Support Tool MX Component cccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeees App 24 Appendix 7 1 Overview of MX Component cccecceeeeeceeeeeceeece
263. e a QJ71C24N R2 R4 of function version B or later whose serial No first five digits is 10042 or later 4 Use a Q series C24 of function version B later 5 For safety CPUs extension base units are not connectable 6 Pre defined protocol communication is not available for Redundant CPUs and C Controller modules When using the Q series C24 with a C Controller module refer to the user s manual for the C Controller module b Mounting to a MELSECNET H remote I O station The table below shows the network modules and base units applicable to the Q series C24 and quantities for each network module model Depending on the combination with other modules or the number of mounted modules power supply capacity may be insufficient Pay attention to the power supply capacity before mounting modules and if the power supply capacity is insufficient change the combination of the modules No of modules Main base unit of Extension base unit of remote I O station remote I O station Applicable network module 1 Limited within the range of I O points for the network module 2 Can be installed to any I O slot of a base unit 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q The Basic model QCPU module or C Controller module cannot create the MELSECNET H remote I O network Pre defined protocol communication is not available for MELSECNET H remote I O stations 2 Support of the multiple C
264. e combinations of setting values for each switch with 16 bit binary data according to the following table Switch number Switch 1 Bite bg priob See a and b CH1 Communication rate setting CH1 Transmission setting Switch 2 CH1 communication protocol setting b15 to b8 b7 to b0 Switch 3 PS tobs O s Ais sa CH2 Communication rate setting CH2 Transmission setting Switch 4 CH2 Communication protocol setting Switch 5 Station number setting X For settings to perform linked operation between two Q series C24 interfaces see 2 When GX Developer or a GOT is connected to the Q series C24 on a 1 1 one to one basis The switch setting in GX Developer is not required for accessing or monitoring a QCPU If the switches are not set the GX Developer connection mode will be active When GX Developer or a GOT is connected to the Q series C24 on a 1 n multi drop basis Refer to the GX Developer Operating Manual 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q a Transmission setting CH1 side switch 1 lower level CH2 side switch 3 lower level b0 CH1 side OFF 0 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b7 ON 1 Remarks bo Operation setting Independent Link Must be set to OFF on CH1 Data bit 8 Parity bit is not included Parity bt no ai pay Ooo b5 Sumoneckoods no Yes be WriteduringRUN Prohibited Allowed All items listed in the
265. e different from those of UC24 C24 S8 The Q series C24 has more initial setting items The setting method is different such that the settings are performed using the utility package GX Configurator SC 2 Register necessary initial setting values according to Chapter 8 3 The default value for the CD terminal check setting is changed to No check 2 Data communication using the MC protocol identical to the communication functions of the dedicated protocol of UC24 C24 S8 a Communication protocol setting Data communication is performed using an A compatible 1C frame by setting the communication protocol setting of the Q series C24 specified by GX Developer to the same form as set in the mode setting switch of UC24 C24 S8 App 11 App 11 APPENDIXES MELSEC Q b Command message and response message 1 The message format used in the data communication using the A compatible 1C frame is the same as the message format of UC24 C24 S8 2 Check available commands and devices that can be accessed in Chapter 8 of the Reference Manual and access the programmable controller CPU from the external device 3 For the QCPU only read write of device memory is possible For the range of devices that can be accessed see Section 5 2 1 of the Reference Manual The devices added to the QCPU i e the latch relay L step relay S and file register R devices are accessed using commands for QnA compatible 2C 3C 4C frames It is
266. e error codes and take corrective action according to Section 11 2 XOE p FRONP FRONP FRONP Turn off clear eeu command JH ToP 11 TROUBLESHOOTIN sees eS MELSEC Q When data is communicated using the MC protocol the displayed ERR LED may not be turned on if the Q series C24 sends an NAK message to the external device in response to the command message Error codes see Section 11 2 corresponding to the error content when the NAK message is sent back to the external device are stored in the following areas when communicating with an A compatible 1C frame the error codes differ from the transmission error code When checking error codes transmitted by the programmable controller CPU incorporate the following program in case of the interface on the CH1 side Read command FROMP HO H25A D0 Ki Reads transmission error codes from address 25An ToP HO H25A KO K1 Clears error codes Check the error codes and take corrective action according to Section 11 2 11 9 11 9 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 1 3 Reading the RS 232 control signal status 11 10 Read command This section explains how to read the control signal status stored in the buffer memory during communication using RS 232 interface When GX Configurator SC is used check the status using the Transmission control and others monitor test screen see Section 9 6 3 When a transmission problem occurs read operation is executed to che
267. e following program reads a user frame registered to the flash ROM of the QJ71C24N when the read command X1029 turns ON a Devices used Read COMMANG ceccceeecceeeceeeeceeeeeeeseaeeeeaeeteeessineeseaeessaees X1029 e Read command pulse Signal ccceceeeeeeeeseteeeeeteeeeeenes M10 VROAC MAG e g EE E E E ged eateg sl A M11 e Registration result acquisition command sees M12 e Number of data byte registered acquisition comman4d M13 e User frame acquisition COMMANG ccceeeeeeteeeeteteteeees M14 e Completion device for REMFR REMTO instruction M100 to 107 e Normal abnormal completion flag for REMFR REMTO INStHUCTION iias Gini ad aii aladdin M200 to 204 e Read instruction cc ccececcceeeeseceeeeeeeeeaeeseaeeeeeessaeeeseneessaees DO Prame NO ia aeda a nine D1 RE ACIRCS Uae fees elke lon See la te ace i ce ae D2 e Number of data bytes registered ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeneeees D3 WSCrTAMC i deli eke S ie ee BS ee ede ia D4 or later e Number of registered data cccccceeeseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseteeesaees D50 D100 b Buffer memory settings used in this example These settings are used to read the user frame registered in Appendix 9 9 Address Decimal Hexadecimal Name Register read delete instructions Frame No direction Registration read delete result storage Number of data bytes registered designation For flash ROM access User
268. e protocol register system setting values Operating procedure e Online operation Monitor screen gt CHO Non procedure system setting e Offline operation Flash ROM setting screen gt CHO Non procedure system setting Setting screen EE r Module information Module type Serial Communications Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name QJ71C24N Setting item Received data count designation Receive complete code designation Hffff Not designated receive complete code HOd0a CR LF HOO00 HOOF Receive complete code Setting value Receive user frame designation Do not use User frame use enable disable designation he Input following eight items within the following range O Not designated H0001 H03e7 Default frame HO3e8 HO04af Flash ROM user frame H8001 H801f Buffer memory user frame Receive user frame designation First frame No designation 1st X r Flash ROM setting r Details Samata Save file module ERT Hexadecimal input Readfrom Load file module Setting range L 0001 33FE Make text file Execute test Close Setting items Item Buter memory address Reference section Chapter 6 of User s Manual Basic AEH to BIH Last frame No designation 1st to 4th Receive user frame 2020H to 2120H to designation User frame receive format designation 1st to 4th 2023H 2123H Chapters 9 and 11 of 20244 to 21
269. e request type reception data clear Execute the reception data clear Normal completion Abnormal completion Reset the complete flag by external command 10 26 11 TROUBLESHOOTIN sees MELSEC Q 11 TROUBLESHOOTING This chapter explains the definitions of errors that may occur during data communication between the Q series C24 and external devices and the corrective actions 11 1 Checking the Status of the Serial Communication Module 11 1 1 Checking the LED ON status communications error status and switch setting status of the serial communication module This section explains how to check the status of communication between the Q series C24 and external devices the transmission status of the Q series C24 and the switch setting status of the Q series C24 When a communication problem occurs check the error status using one of the following procedures 1 Checking the module status and error codes in the detailed module information screen of the GX Developer diagnostic functions Startup procedure GX Developer gt Diagnostics gt System monitor gt Module s Detailed Information Module s Detailed Information xi r Module Module Name QJ71C24N Product information 051020000000000 B 120 Address 0 Implementation Position Main Base OSlot r Module Information Module access Possible 120 Clear Hold Settings Status of External Power Supply Noise Filter Setting
270. e set in the data length storage area or the data quantity storage area is out of range An out of range value is set for the decimal point position when the number of decimals is set to Variable The number of decimals is larger than the number of digits for each data Decimal point position error 7E00x to System error 7EO5x The OS of the Q series C24 detected some error Transmit receive buffer memory addresses are in the special applications area TEO7s e The OS of the Q series C24 detected some error e The UINI instruction was executed during programmable controller CPU information clear 7E09u system enor e The OS of the Q series C24 detected System error 7EOAn some error Feld Gammand error e Anonexistent command or subcommand was designated e A data length exceeding the number of points that can communicate during random read write was designated Buffer memory 7E06x j address setting error Currently inexecutable error 7E08x Data length error N m A ard aE 11 22 1 If it exceeds the range for word data MELSEC Q Protocol Non or MC Proce pidire pro ctional defined dure Corrective action Correct the data sent from the device If the protocol was edited in GX Configurator SC Pre defined protocol support function check the packet format of the external device to see if the number of digits is set correctly Check the data sent from the external devic
271. e set to GX Configurator SC both become valid In this case if the Q series C24 receives the receive complete code before receiving data that are equivalent to the receive data count Reception data read request X3 XA is set to ON 2 For details on how to change the receive complete code and received data count see Section 9 4 7 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 6 1 2 The receive area and the received data list The following shows the list of the receive area and the receive data for performing data reception using the non procedure protocol 1 Receive area The receive area is a memory area for storing the data received from the external device and the receive data count in order to read the receive data for the programmable controller CPU By default the receive area is assigned to addresses 600H to 7FFH CH1 side and AOOH to BFFH CH2 side CH1 address Buffer memory r The receive data count units word byte are up to the value 6004 i set to GX Configurator SC word byte units designation Receive data count Writes the receive data storage count when the programmable 6014 controller CPU is requested to read the receive data to Receive data Stores the arbitrary data area of the receive data 7FFH Default 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 1 The position and size of the receive area in the buffer memory can be chan
272. e to see if 1 The Length value is correct or not 2 Any of the data corresponding to the conversion variable is missing or not If GX Configurator SC Pre defined protocol support function was used for protocol editing check the sender s packet format to see if an incorrect value is set for the conversion variable Check the data sent from the external device If GX Configurator SC Pre defined protocol support function was used for protocol editing check the sender s packet format to see if an incorrect value is set for the conversion size change the conversion size setting to Double word 2 If it exceeds the range for double word data change the element to Non conversion variable Check the maximum allowable data length and specify the maximum length or less in the data length storage area Check the maximum allowable data quantity and specify the maximum quantity or less in the data quantity storage area Correct the value set for the decimal point position Check the number of digits setting and set the decimal point position so that the number of decimals is less than the number of digits e Change the buffer memory addresses so that they are outside the special applications area e Execute the UINI instruction while the programmable controller CPU information clear is not executed e Check and correct the external device transmit message and restart data communications e Check and correct the
273. e transmission 1 Start the local station programmable controller The values specified with GX Developer are stored in the Q series C24 2 When data is received from the external device the reception data read request X3 turns ON 3 After the control data for the BIDIN instruction is stored in the device the sequence program executes the BIDIN instruction and reads the receive data 4 When the reading of receive data is completed a response message ACK message when the operation was completed normally is sent and the device that has completed the BIDIN instruction turns ON 7 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL Program example When Q series C24 I O signals are from X Y00 to X Y1F MO DO D1 D2 D3 D10 to Dm Kove MOV wove MI 6 BIDIN UO DO For normal completion Interface number 1 Reception result 0 Receive data count n Receive data Receive data Allowable receive data count 10 4 ll BMOV D10 Ki K10 D10 D2 D110 Address 258H DO D2 D3 MO z0 KOZO MELSEC Q Designate the receive channel Clear the receive data count storage device to 0 J Designate the allowable receive data count With the normal completion the receive data within the allowable receive data count user designated is read from the receive j data storage area in the buffer memory
274. e version of the Q series C24N Protocol setting data e The protocol setting data written to the to confirm the supported functions Use Q series C24N includes unsupported the pre defined protocol function within function data the range of supported functions Write the protocol setting data again to the Q series C24N and execute the CPRTCL instruction If this error persists even after rewriting replace the module e The protocol setting data written to the Q series C24N is corrupted e The OS of the Q series C24 detected some error Check th t d and Remote passwords Soina malen Hf i ie ema fede ais to communicate again e The remote password is not registered e A remote password processing e The remote password processing command is not necessary when a command was received on the interface remote password is not registered side where the modem function is not e Perform a remote password unlock Processing disabled used processing through GX Developer O e The GX Developer connection is Alternatively change the selected in the communication protocol communication protocol setting of the setting on the corresponding CH corresponding CH to the MC protocol e Clear the storage area of the e The number of remote password accumulated cout of unlock process disagreements exceeded the value 3 abnormal completion processing designated at the address 200D x address 22FC n to 0 e There is an error in
275. ead from and written to the programmable controller CPU with a communication function using the MC protocol Details are described in the Reference Manual e Appendix 7 describes an overview of the communication support tool MX Component that supports communication using the MC protocol b To learn how to send and receive data between the programmable controller CPU and the external devices e Data communication between the programmable controller CPU and the external devices is performed with a communication function using the non procedure protocol or the bidirectional protocol e Chapter 6 explains details of the communication functions and programming using the non procedure protocol e Chapter 7 explains details of the communication functions and programming using the bidirectional protocol c To learn how to transfer data between a programmable controller CPU and an external device using the protocol of the external device With the pre defined protocol function data can be transferred between the QJ71C24N R2 R4 and external devices The details are described in the Operating Manual Pre defined protocol support function 5 To learn how to check for error occurrences and take corrective actions Chapter 11 describes troubleshooting how to check for errors and detailed explanations of error codes 6 To learn about functions that have been added or changed in function version B e Section 1 3 lists the functions that h
276. eading of receive data is as follows e Reception data read request X3 XA or reception abnormal detection X4 XB ON e Reception data read completion X1 Y8 OFF 2 Change procedure When data reception from an external device causes the reception data read request X3 XA reception abnormal detection X4 XB to turn ON turn ON the reception data read completion Y1 Y8 after performing the following e Read the receive data e Change the setting values for the receive complete code and the received data count Example When reading data received in the CH1 side interface device side J Programmable Data read request using ee Data read request using controller setting value A 1 gt s _ setting value B 2 CPU side E Reception data read 1 request X3 X X 2 Reads Y receive data Reads i ive data Reception data read ene Ea 5 completion Y1 Wo addres Adi Sakina value DXF Setting vaes address A4 Setting value A lt f Setting value B Receive complete code designation Ve address A5x Setting value 1 Setting value 2 Program example I O signals for the Q series C24 are from X Y00 to X Y1F Read request 1 x3 H Reads receive data count 2 FROMP HO H600 Do Kt DO z0 1 1 j DI KOZO Reads the data that is equal to the receive data count H14 KI Change the setting value for the received data count as needed H3 KI Change the setting value for the
277. eceive complete code designation User frame use enable disable designation H First frame No designation 1st to 4th AEn to B1H Receive user Last frame No designation 1st to 4th B2u to B5 i i User frame receive format designation 1st to 20204 to 2120 to Chapter 11 of 4th 2023H 2123H User s Manual Application Exclusive format 1 received data count 1st to 20244 to 2124n to 4th 2027H 2127H 5 Transmission CR LF output designation Output head pointer designation Output count designation Chapter 6 of Timeout at No protocol 2014H 2114H S User s Manual Application Chapter 6 of Receive data clear request A8H User s Manual Basic 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 9 6 6 Bidirectional monitor Purpose Monitor the status and setting values of the data transmission using the bidirectional protocol Operating procedure Monitor screen gt CHL Bidirectional monitor Monitor screen Psi Module information Module type Serial Communications Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name QJ71C24N Setting item Current value Setting value Data transmission result Data reception result gt 00 CH1 Transmission normal completion 01 Transmission abnormal completion x02 Transmission processing in progress x03 Reception data read request Y00 Transmission request 01 Reception data read completion Simultaneously transmission data valid invalid designation
278. eceive data Reception Receive Receive Reception clear processing data data abnormal acknowledge in progress clear read detection ment in progress request C24 normal Transmission in progress SET wt pog Receive data clear in progress lt Reads the status of receive data clear request gt M17 M200 FROM HO HOA8 D100 Ki Receive data clear in progress C24 normal KO D100 RST M16 Receive data clear acknowledgement RST M17 Receive data clear in progress X20 e yS PLS M20 Transmission Transmission request request pulse M20 Se M21 Transmission Transmission request request pulse App 34 App 34 APPENDIXE 2 MELSEC Q M16 M17 SMOV ABCDEFG D11 Transmission Reception request data clear i in progress Receive data clear acknowledgement MOV HOAOD D15 MoV K1 DO MOV KO DI MOV K5 D2 lt Executes the transmission procession gt G OUTPUT UO DO D11 MO Transmission completion status device SET M12 Transmission processing in progress MO M SET M101 Transmi Transmission Transmission ssion completion completion 4 normal completion mov D1 D10 Transmi ssion completion 1 SET M102 Transmission abnormal completion RST m2 Transmission processing in progress be OIR M21 Transmission request RST mior External Transmission commandi normal completion RST moz Transmissio abnormal completion When a f
279. ed Example QJ71C24N Points Select 32 points Setting for item Remarks I O Start XY Enter the start I O signal Hexadecimal for the target module assignment eT Seith icati fat er ificati witch setting et the communication rate transmission specifications See Section 4 5 2 communication protocol etc Detailed setting pl a the Q series C24 when a multiple See QCPU User s Manual y employee Multiple CPU System Multiple CPU settings Select when using a multiple CPU system 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 5 2 Switch settings for I O and intelligent functional module Setting purpose In the switch setting for I O modules and intelligent functional modules set the transmission specifications and communication protocols for communication with external devices Setting procedure PLC parameters I O assignment setting Switch setting For screen display see the GX Developer Operating Manual Setting screen Input format z Switch 2 Switch 3 Switch 5 4 MRES IE 1 0 0 feet perce o arco oom orco oom 0o00 Pp ee e a a EEE ee as ey ys E a re SSS SSE ESS ES EE Ee se Ee To o oo S S S S SS E E E e 7 7 SS SS 3 3 10f alt i e a a ee a a wae e e a a rt arr EE Ee EE z Cancel Display description 1 Switches 1 to 5 Set the transmission specifications and communication protocol of each interface using th
280. ed try to perform data communication as a connection test using the wiring connection as shown in Connection example 2 If data can be communicated using the wiring connection shown in Connection example 2 rewire after checking the interface specifications on the external device side 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q c When connecting the terminal resistor of the QJ71C24N R4 to the plug in terminal block of the RS 422 485 insert the terminal resistor as shown below Correct insertion Inserted vertically Ch H Incorrect insertion Inserted horizontally 1 When an RS 232 to RS 422 converter is used at a terminal station on the line a terminal resistor must be connected and set at the converter 2 When connecting the external device s and serial communication module s with RS 232 to RS 422 converter s the converters must support the system configurations 1 1 1 n and m n 3 To the RS 422 485 interface of the serial communication module an RS 422 or RS 485 device must be connected including the cases of 1 n n 1 and m n connections 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 4 2 Connecting the RS 422 485 interface The following shows the connection precautions and connection examples when using the Q series C24 RS 422 485 interface 1
281. ed continuously which is specified with an Correct the value set for the number of argument in the CPRTCL instruction is protocols to be executed continuously out of range 71694 CPU error e To use a Built in Ethernet port QCPU use a Q series C24 of function version B or later and the first 5 digits of its serial No must be 10042 or greater e Rewrite monitor data e Check and correct the external device transmit message and restart data communications 716FH Device error e Check and correct the external device transmit message and restart data communications Write the monitor data and use the A compatible 1C frame to a CPU other than a Q QnACPU Monitor data write error Protocol No setting error Continuous protocol execution count setting error Confirm Pre defined protocol ready X1D turned ON before executing the CPRTCL instruction e The protocol was executed while Pre To prevent concurrent execution of the defined protocol ready X1D is OFF CPRTCL instruction set the CPU to Protocol not ready e The CPRTCL instruction was executed STOP before writing the protocol setting error during protocol setting data writing data e The CPRTCL instruction was executed Write the protocol setting data again to with abnormal protocol setting data the Q series C24N and then execute the CPRTCL instruction If this error persists even after rewriting replace the module 11 20 11 20
282. ed in different areas of the buffer memory shown below 1 Station No switch setting address 200n b15 to bO Buffer memory address 2004 0 to 31 Station number 2 Switch setting error and mode switching error status address 203 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO Buffer memory address 203 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 F CH2 cH2 cH2 CH1 chifon TOEA Ignore including b2 and b6 Communication protocol number Station number of the Q series on CH side is outside the range C24 is outside the range Communication rate on CH side Linked operation setting error is outside the range see Section 4 5 2 2 Mode switching request was 1 Error 0 Normal issued when the setting modification allow prohibit was set to prohibit 3 Communication protocol status address 250H 260n b15 to bO Buffer memory address 250 0to9 Information on the CH1 side 260H 0 to 7 9 Information on the CH2 side 4 Transmission setting status address 251H 261h b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO Buffer memory address 251H O O O O 11 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 Information on the CH1 side 261H O0 O OJ O 1 0 1 0 1 0 11 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 Information on the CH2 side Commun
283. ee 9 23 9 4 4 Modem function system setting registration ceceeccseceeseeeeeeeteeseeeeeeesneesieesieesieesieesieesieesieesieenees 9 24 9 4 5 Transmission control and others system Setting ceecceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseesieesieesieetieesaee 9 25 9 4 6 MC protocol system Setting 2 2 2 cccceceecceecceecceeceteceeeceneceneceneceneceneceeeceneceneceneceneadteceneadnecceateeadteaenes 9 27 9 4 7 Non procedure System Setting c cccceecseecceecceeccneceeeccueceneccheceeecenecceecdueceueccuecenecdhecseecceedeeceseedteedied 9 28 9 4 8 Bidirectional system Setting 02 cccecceecceecctecceecceeceeeccteceeeccteceneccneceesaduecenecdueceuecduecenecdtecneadeeadtecees 9 29 9 4 9 Pre defined protocol system Setting ce eeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesieeteesieesieeseeseesieesieesieesieesieesieeieesieee 9 30 9 4 10 PLC CPU monitoring system setting ce eee eeceeececeeeenee sees eeeeseeseeeieeseesaeeseeseesieesieesieesieesieneee 9 31 9 4 11 Transmission user frame No designation system Setting cc ecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeaes 9 33 9 4 12 Resetting the buffer memory flash ROM setting values to the default values eee 9 34 A 10 A 10 9 4 13 Flash ROM write allow prohibit setting eeeceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeaeeseesaeeseeseesieesieesieesineneeseee 9 34 9 5 Auto Refresh stung iid seni eane e EE E ENA 9 35 AGLo ATE EA KE AAE trates ant tee ts sag tts acetate eae nade aes ees anes T 9
284. eeeeeaeeeceeeeseaeeseaeeseaeescaeeesneeseaeessaeetanes App 52 Appendix 9 10 When reading user frame cccccccescceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeceneeceaeeeeaeeseaeeeeaeeeseaeeteaeesseetnes App 54 Appendix 9 11 When deleting User frame cccccececceseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeecaneeseaeeceneeecaeescaeeeseneeseaeessaeenanes App 56 Appendix 9 12 When changing the communication protocol and transmission setting App 58 Appendix 10 Setting Value Recording Sheet 2 ccccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeaeescaeeeeaeeeseaeeseeessieeeeeeess App 61 INDEX Index 1 to Index 2 1 OVERVIEW 1 1 Overview 1 2 Functions Added Changed by Function Version B 2 USING THE PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU MONITORING FUNCTION 2 1 Overview 2 2 About the Programmable Controller CPU Monitoring Function 2 3 Settings for Using the Programmable Controller CPU Monitoring Function 2 4 Precautionary Notes for Using the Programmable Controller CPU Monitoring Function 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION 3 1 Overview 3 2 System Configuration 3 3 Specifications 3 4 Start up of the Modem Function 3 5 Sample Programs 4 RECEIVING DATA WITH AN INTERRUPT PROGRAM 4 1 Settings for Receiving Data Using an Interrupt Program 4 2 Interrupt Program Startup Timing 4 3 Reception Control Method Using an Interrupt Program 4 4 Programming 5 CHANGING SEND AND RECEIVE DATA LENGTH UNITS TO BYTE UNITS WORD BYTES UNITS SETTING 6 CHANGI
285. eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeees 11 54 11 3 18 Periodic transmission is not performed normally c cecceeeeeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeteeteeeeeeaes 11 54 11 3 19 Condition agreement transmission is not performed normally cceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeteeetteeeeeteeees 11 54 11 3 20 Data cannot be received due to an interrupt Program cceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteneees 11 54 11 3 21 Data cannot be written to the flash ROM c cccccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeeeeaeeseaeeeeaeeeeeeeetieeessaeeaas 11 55 11 3 22 Troubleshooting on protocol setting data reading writing ee eee eeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeees 11 56 11 23 23 The ERR LED isiliteAcacseh wait a alee ae eee era Gath 11 57 Appendix 1 Functional Improvements of the Q Series C24 eeceecccececceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteneeteneees App 1 Appendix 1 1 Comparison of Q Series C24 GX Configurator SC 0 ceccceeccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeneees App 1 Appendix 1 2 Precautions When Updating the Module from Function Version A to B 00 App 5 Appendix 1 3 Precautions When Replacing the QJ71C24 R2 with the QJ71C24N R2 R4 App 6 Appendix 2 QnA A Series Module 2 cceccccceccececeeeececeseeeeneeseneeseneeesaneecaneeeeaeeseaeessaneeseneeseaeeeeeeeneeees App 7 Appendix 2 1 Functional Comparison with the Q series C24 and the QnA A Series Modules App 7 Appendix 2 2 Using Programs Designed for th
286. ending data f Itis possible to clear the current reception data without interrupting the transmission processing by using the dedicated instruction CSET 3 Data communication using the bidirectional protocol Details are explained in Chapter 7 and the User s Manual Application a In communication between programmable controller CPUs and communication with an external device for which transmission receive control programming is allowed data communication is performed in a sequence of data transmission and response receipt b Error check of received data can be performed using the sum check code while the occurrence of a reception error at an external device can be checked via an ACK NAK response MITSUBISHI ENQ Data length Sum check Any data Goda Sending completed normally Error Sending completed code abnormally NAK c ASCII code data can be used for communication using the ASCII BIN conversion function Q series C24 noon ASCII BIN z8 conversion Binary Mo jt data Binary Pex data 1 VERVIEW MELSEC Q 4 Data communication using the pre defined protocol Details Chapter 8 the Operating Manual Pre defined protocol support function a Data can be transferred by using a protocol f
287. er serial communication modules UC24 etc that are connected to this serial communication module for data communication Abbreviation for G OUTPUT or GP OUTPUT Abbreviation for G PRR or GP PRR Abbreviation for G PUTE or GP PUTE Reference Manual Q Corresponding MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual RS 232 interface Abbreviation for interface conforming to RS 232 RS 422 485 interface Abbreviation for interface conforming to RS 422 and RS 485 Abbreviation for G SPBUSY or GP SPBUSY Special function modules Generic term for the A QnA series programmable controller modules that are operated by commands from the programmable controller CPU equivalent to the Q series programmable controller intelligent function modules Examples e CC Link interface module e A D and D A conversion modules e High speed counter module e Ethernet interface module Computer link module and serial communication module Generic term for intelligent function module switch setting Abbreviation for ZP UINI User s Manual Application or Application Q Corresponding Serial Communication Module User s Manual Application User s Manual Basic or Basic Windows Vista Q Corresponding Serial Communication Module User s Manual Basic Generic term for the following Microsoft Windows Vista Home Basic Operating System Microsoft Windows Vista Home Premium Operating System Mi
288. ers 6 Chapter 7 Section 9 4 5 Section 3 2 1 Section 9 4 5 144 304 90H 1301 0005 1311 1412 For designation DC1 DC3 Xon Xoff code designation e e a cya oe ion 94h 134 A DC3 code b8 to b15 00H to FFH DC3 code DC2 DC4 code designation 149 309 DC2 code b0 to b7 95x 1351 00H to FFH DC2 code e DC4 code b8 to b15 00H to FFH DC4 code 150 310 96H 1361 For designation of communicatio 151 311 n control 97H 1371 Word byte units designation 0 Word units 1 Byte units CD terminal check designation for RS 232 0 Check 1 No check 3 SPECIFICATIONS Address cag pric ia Decimal Hex Application Name ees rotoco Mc Non Bi Pa 152 312 For designation Communication system designation for RS 232 f icati 881 1381 2 communication o Eun duplex communication 1 Half duplex communication Chapter 7 Section 9 4 5 Section 9 4 8 Allowed Chapter 9 of User s Manual MELSEC Q Reference Registration 9 section 153 313 For half duplex Simultaneous transmission priority non priority designation 91 1391 communications 0 Priority control 1 to 125 Non priority transmission wait time unit 100 ms 154 314 designation RS Retransmission time transmission method designation 9AH 13AH 232 0 Do not resend 1 Resend Simultaneously transmission data valid invalid designation 455 315 F designation Receive data valid
289. es C24 Reading writing from to the buffer memory of intelligent function modules eee EOL Reading writing from to sequence program files o Jo Monitoring the programmable controller CPUs programmable controller CPU monitoring function E O Bon Transmission of the monitoring information using the modem function O fO Status control of the programmable controller CPUs remote RUN STOP ete O Jofo Turning on off input signals of the Q series C24 from an external device global function O ofo l Data transmission from a programmable controller CPU to an external device on demand function of o o ojo Communication using non procedure protocol Data transmission reception in any format o lolo Data transmission reception using user frames Data reception using format 0 2 Data reception using format 1 Data reception by interrupt programs Monitoring the programmable controller CPUs programmable controller CPU monitoring function Transmission of the monitoring information using the modem function Sea ASCII data transmission reception by ASCII BIN conversion Data transmission reception by specifying transparent code Specification of Receive transparent code I Ox I Specification of Transmission transparent 1st 3 oo Multiple specification of Transmission transparent 2nd to 10th Reception data clear by dedicated instruction CSET instruction App 1 App 1 APPENDIXE Z MELSEC Q
290. esaneseaeeseaeeseaeeescesseaeseceessaeeeseseetaas 3 1 3 2 RS 232 Interface Specification ceececceecceecccececeeeceeeeaeeceneeeeaeeecaceesaneecaeeseaeeseaeeesecesseaeeseeeesueeesiseesees 3 3 3 2 1 RS 232 connector specifications ccceccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeaeeseaeeeeaeeesaceesaeeseaeeeeaeeeceeseeeeeieeetans 3 3 3 2 2 RS 232 Cable specification arne ene e anaiai a aaaea aaa a aaa aa aiaa ENa 3 5 3 3 RS 422 485 Interface Specifications ii ai ia anae aaraa eaaa a aea aa aE a aaa eaea a a aaa 3 6 3 3 1 RS 422 485 terminal block specifications ecccceeeeeeeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeceaeeseeeeeeaeeeeceeteneeseaeeeeeeeeaeeess 3 6 3 3 2 RS 422 485 cable specifications ccccccececcceeeceeeeceeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeseneeseaeeesaeecsaneeseneessaeseieetseeess 3 7 3 3 3 Precautions when transferring data using RS 422 485 circuit sssesesseeeeseresrsereersrrsrrsrsrrsrrsene 3 8 3 3 4 Echo back enable disable setting for RS 422 485 interface ececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeteneeeeeeaes 3 11 3 4 Serial Communication Module Function List cccccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeseneeseaeescaeeecaeeeseneeseaeeneessaees 3 13 3 5 Dedicated Instruction Eist aa aiaia iaaea niade 3 15 3 6 Utility Package GX Configurator SC Function List ei eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeecaeeeaeeeaeesaeeeresas 3 16 3 7 List of GX Developer Setting Items for Serial Communication MOdUIES c ceeceeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeneeees
291. ess 00 Type QJ71C24N Channel CH1 Protocol Execution Error No Protocol name Type result code FR E700 H7B RD Opera Send amp rece Sending 2009 04 17 10 22 4 QJ71C24N Send Recy Mor Functional 3 2009 04 17 10 22 22 2009 04 17 10 22 4 FR E700 H7B RD Opera Send amp rece 4 2009 04 17 10 22 22 2009 04 17 10 22 2 QJ71C24N Send Recy Mor Functional 2009 04 17 10 21 05 2009 04 17 10 21 2 FR E700 H7B RD Opera Send amp rece x 6 2009 04 17 10 20 44 2009 04 17 10 21 0 FR E700 H7B RD Opera Send amp rece In the Protocol execution log list information of the executed protocol such as protocol name start and end times and dates execution result can be monitored With the circuit trace function communication data and control signal states can be also confirmed Starttime and date End time and date Model Update log Save CSV file Communication using the modem function is not available for the pre defined protocol 8 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE PRE DEFINED PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 8 1 2 Pre defined protocol system setting In the Pre defined protocol system setting window of GX Configurator SC Intelligent function module utility register the system setting value for data communication with the pre defined protocol For information on how to display the setting screen refer to Section 9 4 9 Setting screen CH1 Pre defined protocol system setting Module information Module type Serial Communications Module
292. estart data communications or data write e Monitoring was requested before the e Write the device to be monitored before device to be monitored was written issuing a monitor request or PC No e The written PC No and PC No in the CIN e Rewrite the monitor data monitor request are different e Rewrite the monitor data e Check and correct the external device transmit message and restart data communications e Correct the designated block No and restart data communications e Change the setting to Enable write during RUN and restart data communications e Stop the CPU and restart data communications 1 e Check and correct the external device transmit message and restart data communications e If no error is found in the command clear the programmable controller CPU information and retry Refer to Section 11 1 7 e Check and correct the other station access valid module No in the network parameters e Rewrite the monitor data e Check and correct the external device transmit message and restart data communications e Review the transmission message e Correct the message format so the number of access points is within the allowable range e If there is an error in the CPU remove the CPU error and restart data 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Error code Signal N Protocol Hexa Error Description 9 Corrective action on Bidire name MC Proce decimal ctional dure e Check the trans
293. ete command into pulses Sets the delete instruction Sets the frame No Transfers the setting values to the flash ROM access area of the buffer memory F Sets the delete flag Abnormal completion of REMTO instruction Turns ON the flash ROM write request signal Delete result acquisition command Reads the delete result from the flash ROM access area of the buffer memory to D2 J Normal completion of REMFR instruction J Abnormal completion of REMFR instruction J Turns OFF the flash ROM read request signal J Sets the delete flag App 57 APPENDIXES MELSEC Q Appendix 9 12 When changing the communication protocol and transmission setting This section provides a program example that changes the communication protocol and transmission setting using the REMFR REMTO instructions and I O signals When the module is used on a MELSECNET H remote I O station the station No cannot be changed because the UINI instruction is unavailable For changing the communication protocol and transmission setting refer to Chapter 15 of the User s Manual Application 1 Program conditions When the change command X1031 turns on the communication protocol and transmission setting are changed Address Decimal Hexadecimal Specified a ae 114 90H 304 130H 145 91 305 1311 515 203H App 58 a 4 to b11 Devices used by user Change COMMAMN
294. eteeees 11 14 OUTPUT Ate cale celta tiie etre es ert 10 7 PISS evidence hh AA E 11 43 Parity Dity i a hese eae eae 4 16 Part names and functions 00e 4 3 PRO w cciidcccdesdialitl tered RAAR 11 44 Pre defined protocol cccccceeeeees 8 1 SD LED aien a 11 39 Data communication procedure 8 3 Protocol cancellation eeceeeee 8 6 Number of protocol executions 8 6 Pre defined protocol monitor test 8 6 Execution log options s 8 7 Protocol execution log storage function 8 7 Processing time ceseseeeeeeeeeees App 15 QnAVA series module cceee App 7 Reading the data communication status vee ex a tes tas tea else ta reae 11 11 Reading the RS 232 control signal status sales Th aah fod a aa teense comets sehr ta 11 10 Reading the switch setting status 11 12 Receive area bidirectional ee 7 4 Receive area non procedure ceee 6 6 Receive complete code setting 6 20 Receive data bidirectional 7 6 Receive data non procedure s s 6 8 Receive data clear bidirectional 7 14 Receive data clear non procedure 6 14 Received data count 6 20 Receiving methods bidirectional 7 2 Receiving methods non procedure 6 2 ROM RAM switch tests cesses 4 27 RS 232 interface specification 0 3 3 RS 422
295. etting change prohibit time Set station No out of range error SD WAIT status SIO status PRO status P S status Gini 202 Chapter 11 of zans User s Manual Basic NAK status ACK status 203H Linked operation setting error 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 9 6 11 Display LED off and communication error information error code initialization This section explains how to turn off the display LEDs of the Q series C24 and initialize its communication error information and error codes 1 CHO ERR clear request on Monitor Test screen This is used to turn off the CHO ERR LED of the Q series C24 and to initialize clear the error codes stored in the CHU side buffer memory Refer to Section 11 1 2 1 for the buffer memory where the error codes are stored Operation procedure MEE Module information Module type Serial Communications Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name QJ71C24N Setting item Current value Setting value CH1 ERR occurrence Off CH2 ERR occurence Off Turing off ERR LED and initializing the error code by the ERR clear request Designate Clear request for the test CH1 ERR clear request Off Clear request X CH2 ERR clear request Off Clear request X XZY monitor test XZY monitor test Modem function monitor test Modem function monitor test CH1 Transmission control and others monitor test CH1 Trans control mon
296. etting value Data for modem connection 1 H0bb8 No notification Pager receiver designation i Telephone number No extemalline dialing ha External line dialing Pulse g Start 1 0 No 0000 Line types Wait time for message transmission units sec Message Comment Data for modem connection 2 H0bb9 No notification Pager receiver designation he Telephone number External line dialing No extemalline dialing X Pulse X Line types Sy I p Flash ROM setting gt Details ne Save file Select input Read from oad file ned No notification Notification Make text file Execute test Close Setting item Fea eed address hapter 3 of Data for user initialization 1 to N inita conma Voor aono daa Gfiapter 3 initialization command command User s Manual Application Use code to specify a field to register if GX Configurator SC is used for data for modem initialization Example To register the Q2 of data Q2 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 9 4 3 Data for modem connection registration Data for modem connection 1 to 30 Purpose For data communication and notification using the modem function register the data for connection with external devices Operating procedure e Online operation Monitor screen gt Data for modem connection e Offline operation Flash ROM setting screen
297. etwork MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 MELSECNET 10 with the GX Developer The local station CPU on monitor etc and perform the checks and the CC Link IE controller take the corrective action described in the network MELSECNET H CC Link IE controller network MELSECNET 10 generated MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 ee an error reference manual e Communication Module installation address Change the transmit message designation designation during error signal C N turned on cies i communications with intelligent function module is incorrect A command that cannot be transmitted during RUN sequence program Set the Enable disable write during RUN parameters etc was switch to Enable by command transmitted or Disable write during RUN is set 11 3 9 Communication error P S Symptom Corrective action parity bit setting data format and match the settings e Check if the sum check code transmitted from not match the external device is correct Recalculate e When CH1 and CH2 are When using CH1 and CH2 independently check used in the linked mode that the Q series C24 is not in the linked mode e Communication the cable is not e When using CH1 and CH2 in the linked mode error signal P S connected to one of the also connect the cable to both of the interfaces turned on interface If the cable is not connected to one of the interfaces when CH1 and CH2 are used in Bidirectional procedure Pre
298. evice side Reception data Calculation example Estimate the time required to process the Input instruction when receiving 100 bytes Unit ms of data using the non procedure protocol with the QJ71C24N e Scan time 10 ms 10 0 09 2 When x 100 7 0 26 00 ms only using CH1 of the Q series C24 and when processing only 30 bytes of data received the time until the reception data read request X3 comes on is displayed after the Q series C24 receives data from the network App 16 APPENDIXE z MELSEC Q 2 Processing time of dedicated instructions The following table shows the operation processing time rough standard of each dedicated instruction The operation processing time differs slightly depending on the system configuration and communication protocol a For Basic model QCPU High Performance model QCPU Process CPU Processing time unit ms Instruction execution condition nama on the right Transmission Transmission receive Others QJ71C24N QJ71C24 QJ71C24N QJ71C24 QJ71C24N QJ71C24 speed registered data count 19200 bps 26 7 Datasiz 8 adbytes 203 pan bit 1 9 se ES none gt 8 bytes X 5 frames INPUT 40 bytes after 40 bytes have been received Bour 236 azo 30o5 474 326 496 l4obytes TY e a e ee ee ee 40 bytes i Pure s19 819 e844 sesa erma e995 faobyes ee eia es a a a Mi 40 Bee CSET buffer ee
299. execution status of INPUT and BIDIN instructions directed to channel 1 Stores the execution status of ONDEMAND OUTPUT PRR and BIDOUT instructions directed to channel 2 Stores the execution status of INPUT and BIDIN instructions directed to channel 2 Stores the execution status of GETE and PUTE instructions Stores the CPRTCL instruction execution status of channel 1 Stores the CPRTCL instruction execution status of channel 2 Osi J vay tes 0 3 The SPBUSY instruction is executed for every scan while the read command is ON if the system is executing during ON And the instruction will be executed for a single scan when the read command rises from OFF to ON if the system is starting up 4 Simultaneous execution of dedicated instructions It is possible to execute another instruction during execution of the SPBUSY instruction and to execute the SPBUSY instruction during execution of another instruction 10 21 10 21 D INSTRUCTION 10 DEDICATE STRUCTIONS MELSEC Q Error 1 In case of operation errors the error flag SMO turns on and the error code is stored in SDO See one of the following manuals according to the error code and check and correct the error lt Error code gt A4FFFu or less QCPU Q Mode User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 70004 or more Section 11 2 of the User s Manual Basic Program example A program that reads the communication status of a target module When input o
300. external devices must not Simultaneous 7FF7H remote station on the same network at access a remote station on the same ALCRIS ete the same time network at the same time 7FF8H e The OS of the Q series C24 detected System error 7FFFH some error Bo00n e Take corrective action by referring to Errors detected by the CC Link module the CC Link Master Local Module User s Manual C0001 e Take corrective action by referring to to Errors detected by the Ethernet module the Ethernet Interface Module User s CFFFu Manual BFFFu E000 i i i H Errors detected by the CC Link IE e Take corrective action by referring to to il k MO CC Link IE controller network system controller network module reference manual Errors detected by the MELSECNET H e Take corrective action by referring y f MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 MELSECNET 10 network system network system reference manual EFFFx F000 to FFFFn x1 Take corrective action in the following procedure 1 Check whether the Q series C24 power supply module and CPU module are mounted correctly on the base unit 2 Check whether the operating environment of the Q series C24 is within the general specifications range of the CPU module 3 Check whether the power supply capacity is sufficient or not 4 Check whether the hardware of the Q series C24 CPU module and base unit are normal according to the manuals of the corresponding modules If any module is faulty please contact your local Mitsubishi service
301. f an error has occurred in the CPU MELSEC Q Protocol Bie dure Corrective action Bidire ctional Check if the specified protocol No is correct Check the Protocol registration area buffer memory 4091H to 4098H to see if the specified protocol No is registered Write the protocol setting data from GX Configurator SC and then execute the CPRTCL instruction Check if the transmission is interrupted due to some reason such as DTR control Check if the CS signal is ON Check the cables for disconnection Check if the reception is interrupted due to some reason such as DTR control Check the cables for disconnection Check the sending device for an error Using the circuit trace function communication data monitoring function check if 1 Transmissions from external devices are interrupted 2 Any data are missing due to a receive error 3 An error exists in the data packet sent from the other device Increase the Response monitoring time timer 1 value Default 5 seconds If an error has occurred in the CPU refer to the troubleshooting section of the QCPU Q mode User s Manual Maintenance and Inspection and take corrective actions Increase the Response monitoring time timer 1 value Default 5 seonds refer to the troubleshooting section of the QCPU Q mode User s Manual Maintenance and Inspection and take corrective actions Check the cancelled protocol
302. f the buffer memory SET M202 Normal completion of REMTO instruction M103 i H SET M203 J Abnormal completion of REMTO instruction App 38 App 38 APPENDIXES MELSEC Q Appendix 9 3 When sending on demand data Switch No The following program example sends on demand data using the REMFR REMTO instruction and I O signals For the on demand function refer to Section 3 11 of the Reference Manual and Chapter 10 of the User s Manual Application 1 Program conditions The following program sends on demand data from the CH1 side when the transmission command X1022 turns ON a Devices used b eee Setting Description Position Designated value nated value value b8 to b15 e Transmission command cceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetsteeteneets X1022 Transmission command pulse signal M10 On demand function designation command sssssesseseeeeee M11 On demand data transmission flag ceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeteeetteeee M12 On demand execution result acquisition command M13 LED ON status acquisition command cccceceeeeeeees M14 Completion device for REMFR REMTO instruction M100 to 107 Normal abnormal completion flag for REMFR REMTO HSU CTION An Soares ane ee a eat De el le ot Be Bled M200 to 204 Normal abnormal completion of on demand data TANS MISSION nannaa a a a a N rience taal M300 M301 Transmission datai iei raars DO D1 Bu
303. ffer memory head address designation for on demand ITALE a EREE EE AEA E E E E E D2 Data length designation for on demand function D3 On demand execution result ccecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeneeeeees D8 LED ON status and communication error status on CH1 side a bits Parity bit bit O7E2H E Communication rate setting 19200bps Switch 2 Communication protocol setting MC protocol format 1 0001H Switch 5 Station number setting Station 0 0000H c Buffer memory settings used in this example meee Pa o O value 150 96H Word byte units designation 160 AOH Buffer memory head address designation for on demand function designation OCO0H CH1 161 A1H Data length designation for on demand function designation 513 201H LED ON status and communication error status on CH1 side eet al 598 256H On demand execution result i a App 39 App 39 APPENDIXES 2 Program example lt Transmission command gt X1022 PLS lt Setting of transmission data gt M10 X101E N LMOV H1234 vov H5678 Z2 REMO N Ki K1 HO HOCOO 0 K2 M100 M101 a PLS M101 lt Setting of buffer memory head address and data length gt M11 X101E B L MOV HOCOO vov K2 z REMTO J1 KI KI HO HOAG 2 K2 M102 M103 7 f SE M103 E i SE lt On demand transmission gt M12 X101E X1000 X1001 Y1000 SE RS lt P
304. fixed number of data variable number of digits number of data is 1 delimiter set 2 Non conversion variable variable length e Conversion variable variable number of data e Conversion variable fixed number of data variable number of digits number of data is 1 no delimiter e Conversion variable fixed number of data variable number of digits number of data is 2 or more e Non verified reception variable number of characters 2 When function data not supported by the Q series C24 are included in the protocol setting data Check the version of the Q series C24N to confirm supported functions Set the protocol within the range of supported functions if any unsupported function is applied 11 56 11 56 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 3 23 The ERR LED is lit N F P Bidirectional Pre Symptom Cause Corrective action procedure protocol defined protocol A communication error has occurred Check the error and remove the cause according to Section 11 1 1 Switch settings of the Q series C24 are e Review the switch settings of the Q incorrect series C24 e ERR LED is lit The communication protocol mode is For communication in the pre defined set to Pre defined protocol mode and protocol mode change the setting to linked operation is set for two interfaces separate operations The Q series C24 is powered off while Write the data to the flash ROM again data are written to the
305. flash ROM 11 57 11 57 APPENDIXE z MELSEC Q APPENDIXES Appendix 1 Functional Improvements of the Q Series C24 The Q series C24 of function version B has several functions that have been added or changed from the conventional product function version A This chapter explains a comparison of the functions of Q series C24 GX Configurator SC accompanied by the change addition of functions and explains how to utilize programs created for function version A as well as how to incorporate function version B modules into the existing system Appendix 1 1 Comparison of Q Series C24 GX Configurator SC 1 Comparison of the functions of Q series C24 The following table shows the functions of Q series C24 function version Function QJ71C24N QJ71C24 oB BLA Communication using the MC protocol Communication with Communication with QnA compatible 2C 3C 4C frame Formats 1 to 4 exist o EEA ASCII code Communication with A compatible 1C frame for each T icati ith eae oe eure een Fomes o ofo binary code Monitoring of devicememory EO Jojo Batch read write ofmultipleblocks CE oO Jojo Read write of device Read write by extension designation O Jofo memory Accessing other stations via network system OO OO Access to link direct device LW10000 or higher Access to extended data register D65536 or higher or extended link register A s 7 W10000 or higher Reading writing from to the buffer memory of the Q seri
306. fo Section 9 4 12 System setting write Write the setting values in the buffer memory to the flash ROM ceto toto Section 9 4 12 Flash ROM wite g Set whether to allow or prohibit writing to the flash ROM Section 9 4 13 allow prohibit designation Perform the monitoring testing of I O signals to from the ion 9 6 1 programmable controller CPU on Modem function monitor test_ Monitor the execution status of the modem function Lo o o sectiong 6 2 CHn Transmission p Monitor the status of interface control signals values set from the i control and others O O O Section 9 6 3 GX Developer etc monitor test CHn MC protocol monitor Can be used CHn Non procedure Monitor the data communication result I O signal status and only via monitor test setting values in the buffer memory Jonline CHnh Bidirectional i operation monitor CHn Pre defined protocol monitor test X Y monitor test Monitor the data communication result I O signal status and ion 9 6 7 setting values in the buffer memory ron CHn PLC CPU Monitor the setting values and operating status of the ion 9 6 8 monitoring monitor programmable controller CPU monitoring function ria CHn User frame No designati pane teed Monitor the setting value for user frame to be transmitted ction 9 6 9 monitor for transmission Monitor test others Monitor the data reception result error occurrence status etc ko o do lo Section 9 6 10 ERR LED off
307. following values for the timer constant K Baton pass status TO T2 Cyclic transmission status Parameter communication status More than sequence scan time x 3 More than sequence scan time x 4 T1 T3 T4 Reason Not to stop the control even if the network detects an instantaneous error due to a faulty cable condition or noise interference Also the multipliers of 4 and 3 should only be considered as a guideline REMFR REMTO instruction Perform programming so that the next instruction is executed after the REMFR REMTO instruction is executed and then completed The completion of the REMFR REMTO instruction can be confirmed by the completion device 1 After the execution of the REMFR REMTO instruction several scans are required before the read write of the actual data is completed 2 For the interlock program for the remote master station and remote I O station App 37 of the MELSECNET H and details of the REMFR REMTO instruction refer to the Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual Remote I O Network App 37 APPENDIXE z MELSEC Q Appendix 9 2 When accessing buffer memory using sequence program In the following program example data are read from or written to the buffer memory of the Q series C24 using the REMFR REMTO instruction Use GX Configurator SC to change the default value of the buffer memory Using GX Configurator SC save the new setting value to the flash RO
308. for CH2 e Total transmission speed of two interfaces is available up to 230400 bps Transmission speed e Total transmission speed of two interfaces is available up to 115200 bps when the communication data monitoring function is used QJ71C24 R2 so so eo 12 2400 4800 9600 14400 19200 28800 38400 57600 115200 bps e Total transmission speed of two interfaces is available up to 115200 bps Start bits 1 Data bits 7 8 Data format TAEI a Parity bits 1 vertical parity or none Stop bits Processes one request during installed programmable controller CPU END processing MC protocol communication Number of scans that must be processed number of link scans depends on the contents of the request See Reference Manual Full duplex half duplex communications Non procedure protocol Access cycle communication Bidirectional protocol communication Sends each time a send request is issued Can receive at any time Pre defined protocol Dee ne RIR ro Sends or receives data when requested with the dedicated instruction CPRTCL communication 6 Parity check Selected for all protocols and when this check is enabled ODD or EVEN is selected by a parameter For the MC or bidirectional protocol selected by a parameter Error detection For the non procedure protocol selected in the user frame Sum check code For the pre defined protocol whether or not a sum check code is needed depends on the selected
309. for MC protocol non procedure protocol and bidirectional protocol and pre defined protocol GETE Abbreviation for G GETE or GP GETE GX Configurator SC Abbreviation for GX Configurator SC SWOD5C QSCU E or later Initial settings for the module monitoring and testing can be performed without using a sequence program and without considering I O signals or buffer memory Intelligent function utility Converting sequence programs necessary for data communication processing into function blocks FB can shorten program production man hours In addition the monitoring and analysis of the transmitted received data by the communication network can shorten the system start up time Protocol FB support function Since the protocol required for communication with each external device thermal regulator barcode reader etc can be set easily the steps for creating transmission control programs appropriate to the external device can be reduced Also the volume of the programs written to a programmable controller CPU can be reduced because protocol setting data are written to a flash ROM The debugging support function allows monitoring and analysis of communication data on the network enabling a shorter system startup time Pre defined protocol support function Generic product name for SWnD5C GPPW E SWnD5C GPPW EA SWnD5C GPPW EV and SWnD5C GPPW EVA n means version 4 or later A and V mean volume license product and ver
310. forms setting for reading CPU side 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 8 List of Input Output Signals for the Programmable Controller CPU This section describes the input output signals of the Q series C24 The following I O signal assignment is based on the case where the start I O No of the Q series C24 is 0000 installed to slot O of the main base unit Device numbers starting with X indicate input signals from the Q series C24 to the programmable controller CPU Device numbers starting with Y indicate output signals from the programmable controller CPU to the Q series C24 The following table lists the input output signals for the programmable controller CPU Device Signal descripti xO 4 CH1 Transmission normal completion ON Normal completion X1 k1 CH1 Transmission abnormal completion i ON Abnormal completion Xo k1 CH1 Transmission processing ON Transmission in progress x2 CH1 Reception data read request i ON Requesting read X X3 d CH1 Reception abnormal detection ON Abnormal detection X N For system CH1 Mode switching ON Switching H2 Transmission normal completion N Normal Completion O X lt a wo ome H2 Transmission abnormal completion N Abnormal completion ome H2 Transmission processing N Transmission in progress OIO H2 Reception data read request N Requesting read N oo H2 Reception abnormal detection N Abnormal detection oQ e For sy
311. frame App 54 App 54 N N E wo ag N a En Ea a slo Sje T APPENDIXES 2 Program example lt Read command gt X1029 PLS lt Setting of read instruction gt HI M11 X101E _ aaa LMOV K2 Mov HBE8 Z REMTO J1 KI K1 HO H2 0 K2 M100 M101 1 SET M101 SET lt Flash ROM read request gt M11 X1017 f SET X1017 PLS lt Read of read result gt M12 X101E z REMFR J1 KI KI HO H4 D2 Ki M102 M103 D2 KO PLS M103 SET RST RST lt Read of the number of data bytes registered gt MIS X101E i z REMFR J1 K1 K1 HO H5 D3 Ki M104 M105 E 1 D3 K2 D50 D51 PLS M105 a_r S pT PT lt Read of user frame gt Mi4 X101E t H H RENFR J K1 K1 HO H D4 D100 M106 M107 m is M107 SET RST App 55 M10 DO D1 M100 M11 M200 M201 Y1017 M11 M104 D50 D100 M14 M202 Y1017 M11 M106 M203 M204 M11 MELSEC Q Changes the read command into pulses Sets the read instruction Sets the frame No Transfers the setting values to the flash ROM access area of the buffer memory Sets the read flag Abnormal completion of REMTO instruction Turns ON the flash ROM read request signal Registration result acquisition command Reads the read resu
312. g Section 8 1 3 oe ae 1 to 65535 Number of executions 16452 to 16468 to 16463 16479 16449 16465 40414 40511 Checking pre defined protocol Use prohibited System area 4044n to ee to 40601 to 40851 Protocol No 16518 4086n 1 to 128 Protocol No 65535 Unidentified Setting type 16519 4087 0 Packet setting or element setting 1 Protocol detailed setting 65535 Not specified Protocol setting PAKEN Section data error acker No Not allowed 11 2 1 3 0 Send packet i information 16520 4088n 1 to 16 Receive packet 65535 Unidentified Valid when the Setting type value is 0 Element No 46521 4089x 1 to 32 Element No 65535 Unidentified Valid when the Setting type value is 0 16522 to 16527 ors 408A n to 408Fx Use prohibited System area or Number of registered protocols 4090n 0 No registration Chapter 8 1 to 128 Number of registrations Protocol registration 0 Not registered 1 Registered The bit corresponding to each protocol No turns on or off Checking protocol setting b15 b14 b13 b2 b1 16529 to 16536 data 40911 to 4098H 16 15 14 32 31 30 4 48 47 46 4 64 63 62 Each bit indicates the corresponding protocol No Not allowed n n ol 99 98 97 0 Not registered KU 1511141113 1 Registered oan 16607 cae to 16624 to 40E0n to 40F0n to Use prohibited System area Jesto je626 Pr
313. g a 5 bytes of data STX O2H C24 ETX OSH User frame 1 H03e8 2 H03e9 3H03e8 AHO3eb 5 H03ec BH03ed 7 H03ee TEER Details The various setting values to be registered in the Q series C24 s flash ROM can be saved in a file of the PC via offline operation Use online operation to write system setting values to the oe Q series C24 See Sections 9 4 1 to 9 4 11 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 1 When using online operation 2 When setting auto refresh Auto refresh Select Online Monitor Test from the menu bar Enter Start I O No and select Module type and Module model name Select monitor test module screen Auto refresh setting screen Select monitor test module Module information Start 1 0 No Module type Module type Serial Communications Module Start 1 0 No 0000 ij 0000 arial Communications Module v Module model name QJ71C24 N N R4 Module model name 0I71C24N N R4 F Module side Module side Transfer PLC side jetting item Bulfer size Transter direction Device word count Module implementation status Flash ROM access register read delete 1 1 gt result Start 1 0 No Module model name CH1 LED ON status communications error 1 1 gt O000 0J71C24 N N R4 tatus CH2 LED ON status communications error 1 1 gt Switch setting er
314. ged with the GX Configurator SC in accordance with the specifications of the external device and the receive data length See Section 9 4 7 a When changing the position and size of the receive area in the buffer memory with GX Configurator SC specify as follows Receive buffer memory head address designation Designate the starting address for the area to be used as the receive area in the user definable area address 400H to 1AFFH 2600H to 3FFFH Receive buffer memory length designation Designate by address the length of the area 0001H to 1A00x to be used as the receive area in the user definable area address 4004 to 1AFFu 2600H to 3FFFH b When changing the position and size of the receive area in the buffer memory if any of the functions below are used concurrently make sure that the addresses of the receive area do not overlap with the buffer memory addresses assigned for storing transmission receive data with the functions MC protocol buffer memory read write function MC protocol on demand function Non procedure protocol transmission receive function Bidirectional protocol transmission receive function Pre defined protocol function transmission reception data storage area Communication data monitoring function 2 When sending data from the external device to the Q series C24 one of the following two adjustments should be made so that the relationship shown below is maintained 1 Reduce the transmi
315. ges are running perform each operation after selecting the target utility package from the task bar and making it active When the menu screen for system registration to flash ROM see Section 9 4 is closed all the system setting data will be cleared Before closing the screen write the data to the module enabled only via online operation or save it to a file Data file to be created with utility package The following data or files that are created with the utility package can be also handled in GX Developer Figure 9 1 shows respective data or files are handled in which operation lt Intelligent function module parameter gt a This represents the data created in Auto refresh setting and they are stored in an intelligent function module parameter file in a project created by GX Developer Project Program Parameter PLC Parameter Network Parameter Intelligent Function Module Parameter b Steps 1 to 3 shown in Figure 9 1 are performed as follows 1 From GX Developer select Project gt Open project Save Save as 2 On the intelligent function module selection screen of the utility select Intelligent function module parameter Open parameters Save parameters 3 From GX Developer select Online gt Read from PLC Write to PLC gt Intelligent function module parameters Alternatively from the intelligent function module selection screen of the utility select Online gt
316. gistering the settings to the programmable controller 1 Settings using the GX Developer Required Perform the I O assignments and switch settings indicated in Section 4 5 and write the parameters to the programmable controller CPU where the Q series C24 is installed 5 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE MELSEC COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 2 System settings using the GX Configurator SC When it is necessary to change the default values registered in the Q series C24 perform the settings as indicated in Chapter 9 and register these to the flash ROM in the Q series C24 e MC protocol system setting e Transmission control and others system setting To write from the external device to the intelligent function module installed in the MELSECNET H remote I O station during communication using the MC protocol check Enable Write at RUN time on GX Developer 5 1 4 Support of multiple CPU system or redundant system When the external device accesses a QCPU in a multiple CPU system or redundant system it is possible to selectively access either a control or non control CPU in the multiple CPU system or a control or standby system CPU or System A or System B CPU in the redundant system by specifying the target QCPU in Requested module I O No of the QnA compatible 4C frame for the MC protocol Refer to the Reference Manual for details Refer to Chapter 2 of this manual for the system configuration Example When multiple CPU
317. glish version Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition Operating System English version Microsoft Windows Vista Home Basic Operating System English version Microsoft Windows Vista Home Premium Operating System English version Microsoft Windows Vista Business Operating System English version Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate Operating System English version Microsoft Windows Vista Enterprise Operating System English version x1 Install GX Configurator SC in GX Developer Version 4 or higher in the same language GX Developer English version and GX Configurator SC Japanese version cannot be used in combination and GX Developer Japanese version and GX Configurator SC English version cannot be used in combination x2 GX Configurator SC is not applicable to GX Developer Version 3 or earlier Apply GX Configurator SC Pre defined protocol support function as add in software to GX Developer Version 8 78G or later 3 Atleast 15GB is required for Windows Vista 4 Resolution of 1024 x 768 dots or more is recommended for Windows Vista 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q Operating system and performance required for personal computer Performance required for personal computer Operating system Memory Pentium 133MHz or more Pentium 133MHz or more Pentium 300MHz or more Pentium 1GHz or more Windows Vista Enterprise Pentium 1GHz or more e The functions shown below are not ava
318. gnation monitor for Monitor the setting value for user frame to be transmitted O Section 9 6 9 transmission Moniorkeatotners Monitor the data reception result error occurrence status ieee omen Section 9 6 10 ERR LED off Turn off the ERR LEDs on the front face of the module lof o o o Section 9 6 11 Non procedure protocol receive R Clear the currently received data Section 9 7 data clear 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 9 2 Installing and Uninstalling the Utility Package For how to install or uninstall the utility package refer to Method of installing the MELSOFT Series included in the utility package 9 2 1 Handling precautions The following explains the precautions on using the utility package 1 For safety Since the utility package is add in software for GX Developer read Safety Precautions and the basic operating procedures in the GX Developer Operating Manual 2 About installation The GX Configurator SC utility package is an add in package for GX Developer Version 4 or later Therefore GX Configurator SC must be installed on the personal computer that has already GX Developer Version 4 or later installed Screen error of Intelligent function module utility Insufficient system resource may cause the screen to be displayed inappropriately while using the Intelligent function module utility If this occurs close the Intelligent function module utility GX Developer
319. grammable controller CPU 602 618 25An 26A Section 9 6 4 Section 11 1 4 6 Response message transmission On demand execution result 0 Normal completion 1 or more Abnormal completion error code Data transmission result 0 Normal completion 1 or more Abnormal completion error code Data reception result 0 Normal completion 1 or more Abnormal completion error code For confirmation of communication result Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Section 9 6 5 Section 9 6 6 System area Use prohibited MC protocol transmission error code excludes A compatible 1C frame communication 0 No error 1 or more Transmission error code Receive user frame nth 0 Not received 1 to 4 Combination of user frame No designations for reception Not allowed Section 9 6 5 4 Accessing programmable controller CPU 603 619 25B 26Bu 5 Programmable controller CPU access complete 1024 2048 4001 8001 Use prohibited message System area Transmission data count P eae eee 0 No designation 1 or more Number of send data Transmission data designation Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Section 9 4 5 Section 9 4 7 Data to be sent to an external device Not allowed Receive data count Number of data for which read is requested 0 No receive data 1 or more Number of receive data Receive data 7 Data received from an external device User free area 3840 words 3072 to 6911 For user x De
320. h as a measuring instrument or a bar code reader must be used data communication is available by the non procedure protocol or pre defined protocol e Data communication by non procedure protocol Using user frames makes send receive data processing easy e Data communication by pre defined protocol The protocol of the external device can be simply selected created or edited on the screen of GX Configurator SC Pre defined protocol support function This can eliminate some communication control programs appropriate to the external device reducing the steps for creating sequence programs PECIFICATION ses a MELSEC Q 3 5 Dedicated Instruction List The following table lists dedicated instructions that can be used in the Q series C24 Available x Not available Ifi uct Ipul Imc vc non Bi fea sector ONDEMAND Seras aia winne on demand incon 0 x x lourrur sends designated nmberotsaa INPUT Receives data reads ecened cat o x pout sessa tx Px Jo Reads the status of data sent received with each SPBUSY y i dedicated instruction Allows clearing data received up to the present CSET without interrupting the data transmission For data processing communication Receives data with an interrupt program reads Chapter 17 BUFRCVS received data of User s Sends data with user frames using transmission Manual schedule table Application Operating Manual Pre defined protocol Executes the protocol
321. hange using the modem function described in User s Manual Application Chapter 3 first check the following items and confirm whether or not the error is caused by the modem TA connection If an error relating to the modem function is occurring perform necessary corrective actions for each cause according to the reference sections given below e Check the ON OFF status of current I O signals of the Q series C24 e Check the storage status for error codes related to the modem function See Sections 11 2 3 e Check the ON OFF status of the DR terminal of the modem TA See the manual for the modem TA 11 34 11 34 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 35 MELSEC Q The following are precautionary notes when exchanging data with an external device via one of the Q series C24 interfaces 1 When the power supply to the Q series C24 or external device is started the remote device that is connected may generate a reception error 2 If the remote device that is connected starts up while data is being transmitted the remote device side will generate a reception error When the Q series C24 error LED lights up because a reception error has occurred turn off the light if necessary in accordance with Section 11 1 Also if a reception error has occurred on the external device side handle the error by seeing to the operating manual for the external device Handle the occurrence of a reception error on the Q series C24 side using t
322. hannel with the INPUT instruction the communication protocol setting error 7FF2H occurs 10 12 10 12 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTION 0 C STRUCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 Whether an INPUT instruction was completed normally or abnormally can be checked by the completion device D2 or status display device at completion D2 1 a Completion device Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the INPUT instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing b Status display device at completion Turns on and off depending on the completion status of the INPUT instruction e Normal completion Off with no change Abnormal completion Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the INPUT instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing Operation during execution of an INPUT instruction END END END END Sequence processing processing processing processing program X3 X4 Completion device Status display device OFF at completion Normal 1 completion One scan Error 1 When a dedicated instruction is completed abnormally the abnormal completion signal D2 1 turns on and the error code is stored in the reception result S 1 In case of operation errors the error flag SMO turns on and the error code is stored in SDO See one of the following manuals according to the error code and check and correct the error lt Error code gt 4FFFu
323. he CPU abnormal monitoring Correct the setting value of the ransmission condition condition agreement transmission he CPU abnormal monitoring Correct the setting value of the read point of the monitoring device e Correct the setting value fixed value of the CPU abnormal monitoring Correct the setting value fixed value of Correct the setting value fixed value of e Correct the Cx to which notification is sent O 11 24 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Error code Hexa decimal CPU error 7E73x to 7E8Exn _ System error FEC3n Double send request error Transmission data count error 7EC4y Transmission receipt buffer setting error FEC5u Flash ROM access error Description The communication with the CPU could not be performed normally The OS of the Q series C24 detected some error A send request was performed while another send request was being processed Data larger than the transmit buffer size was transmitted Transmission receipt buffer settings out of range Write to Flash ROM was requested when the setting modification enable disable switch in the GX Developer was set to OFF 7EC6 Flash ROM access _ e There is an error in the Flash ROM error read write request contents The OS of th ies C24 detected il some error 7F01n Buffer full error 7FO2H to System error 7FO6x ASCII gt BIN conversion error TFA Receive header area error 7F224 Comm
324. he buffer memory Check the error codes and take corrective action according to Section 11 2 2 When data is communicated using the non procedure or bidirectional command ror protocol XOE H __ _ FROMP FROMP FROM Turn off clear Leone command Top i HO HO HO HO H201 H203 H257 HO DO D1 D2 HOFF Ki CYOE Reads LED and communication error information from address 201 Reads switch setting error description from address 203n Reads data transmission reception results from address 2571 to 258n Writes initialization request such as for displayed LED to address 0u Requests initialization of error information on the CH1 side and clearing of error codes in the buffer memory Check the error codes and take corrective action according to Section 11 2 3 When data is communicated using the pre defined protocol 201 203 H257 4042 D2 OFF CYOE Reads LED and communication error information from address 2014 Reads switch setting error data from address 203 Reads data transmission reception results from address 2574 to 258n Reads pre defined protocol function error data Writes initialization request LED initialization etc to address On Requests initialization of error information on the CH1 side and clearing of error codes in the buffer memory Check th
325. he data does not match the stop bit e Match the Q series C24 and external Framing error i SIO A O setting device settings e The next data was received before the eh 1 i e Decrease the transmission rate and restart Overrun error Q series C24 received all the preceding SIO eo sds dat data communications ata e Designation method error in part of a message e A command that does not exist was designated e The number of processing points is outside the range for the command e A device that does not exist was designated 07H e Received data that cannot be used Programmable 08x controller access 044 5H 0 e Check and correct the external device transmit message and restart data transmission Character area error e The CPU cannot communicate with the e Replace the CPU with a CPU that can Q series C24 communicate with the Q series C24 error Check and correct the external device e The PC No is not FF or a station No 5 10H PC No error X transmit message and restart data set in the network parameters oe communications Send again e An error was detected upon access to g 111 Mode error the programmable controller CPU Conduct individual station recovery test Special function Check and correct the external device and check the Q series C24 i e A special function module does not module designation f s transmit message and restart data exist at the specified position Sep error communic
326. he following corrective actions When communicating with the MC protocol The Q series C24 will disregard the received data or returns a response message indicating an abnormal termination if it detects a reception error after receiving the head data of the command message in the set format If the reception error is detected before the head data of the command message in the set format is received the received data will be disregarded When communicating using non procedure protocol If the Q series C24 detects a reception error the reception abnormal detection X4 XB turns ON Perform procedures such as detection of reception error or clearing received data as required by following the explanations found in Sections 6 1 4 and 6 1 5 When communicating using bidirectional protocol When the Q series C24 detects a reception error after the head data of a communication message for bidirectional protocol is received it returns a response message indicating an abnormal termination If the reception error is detected before the head data of the communication message for bidirectional protocol is received the received data will be disregarded e When communicating using the pre defined protocol If a reception error occurs an error code is stored in the Data reception result area address 258H 268h of the Q series C24 Reception error codes can be also checked with the communication data monitoring function Take actions such as detec
327. he interface CH that n Moy s 0 will send the data Mov KO 0 J Clear the transmission result storage device to 0 Designate the transmission data count in word units _ Me Designate K10 when the unit is bytes Lo Fe OUTPUT uo Do 1 Ho 1 The transmission data stored in the designated device is sent 11 y SE W101 After the OUTPUT instruction is executed the user ve a designated transmission complete signal MO turns MI _ ON for one scan 1 HOV D101 J Storing the transmission data and writing the trans mission data count in the buffer memory and issuing roe W102 a transmission request to the Q series C24 are all g executed by the programmable controller CPU 7 FRS M101 The completion flag is reset by an external 7 command RS M102 Q series C24 Address Buffer memory 257 Data transmission result For normal completion DO Interface number 00011 D1 Transmission result 0000n ie 400 Transmission data count designation D2 Transmission data count 0005n __ Wili We crs lots een oi tO bees sss eet e cee eee ea ee D11 Transmission data designation to 5FFH D15 For abnormal completion DO Interface number 00011 D1 Transmission result other than 00001 From buffer memory address 2571 D2 Transmission data count 00051 1 The SPBUSY instruction is u
328. he same as those of the QJ71C24N except for the model name part and serial number plate 1 Outside cable diameter x 4 10 SIIR ry i a om SD sD CH2 RD RD ha l r3 R l i ma 7 N CH1 i x RS 232 P i D ol t ice moth Ahi 5 he Gee 3 PERA R2 UO L 2 H r BYAR Sama A A O G 4 1 af Coe fo iz ERT spet ABH Ofek P AA ye a 4 HN fl 1 47 5 FTA R11 i A 1 Fo 5 x1 Ux ons r1 RDB Ss i wel RLA 3 aston Tr T Cao E 1 23 0 91 B 90 3 54 _4 5 0 18 27 4 1 08 Unit mm in 1 R1 Bending radius near terminal block Outside cable diameter X 4 2 R2 Bending radius near connector Outside cable diameter X 4 3 r1 Bending radius near crimp contact Connectable as long as not bended extremely App 19 App 19 APPENDIXE MELSEC Q 2 QJ71C24N R2 QJ71C24 R2 The external dimensions of the QJ71C24 R2 are almost the same as those of the Biei QJ71C24N R2 except for the model name part and serial number plate AS H Man E 4 0 16 Outside cable diameter X 4 10 Jawn 90 3 54 f 4 5 0 18 1 R2 Bending radius near connector 3 QU71C24N R4 oan
329. hed e Perform correct pressure displacement crimp contact or soldering for external wire connections using the tools specified by the manufactures Incorrect connection may cause short circuits fire or malfunction e Attach connectors to the module securely e Be sure to fix communication cables or power supply cables leading from the module by placing them in the duct or clamping them Cables not placed in the duct or without clamping may hang or shift allowing them to be accidentally pulled which may cause a module malfunction and cable damage e Before connecting the cables check the type o f interface to be connected Connecting or erroneous wiring to the wrong interface may cause failure to the module and external devices e Tighten the terminal screws within the range of specified torque If the terminal screws are loose it may result in short circuits or malfunction If the screws are tightened too much it may cause damage to the screw and or the module resulting in fallout short circuits or malfunction e When removing the communication cable or power supply cable from the module do not pull the cable When removing the cable with a connector hold the connector on the side that is connected to the module When removing the cable connected to the terminal block first loosen the screws on the part that is connected to the terminal block Pulling the cable that is still connected to the module may cause malfunction or damage
330. held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 1999 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION INTRODUCTION Thank you for purchasing the MELSEC Q series programmable controller Before using the equipment please read this manual carefully to develop full familiarity with the functions and performance of the Q series programmable controller you have purchased so as to ensure correct use Please forward a copy of this manual to the end user CONTENTS This manual SAFETYSPREGCAUTIONS this seinen ite es ceri is ah ee ait ae ee Be ey A 1 REVISIONS Sae chee rate eats a and cacevatsseh a cae t eS hedeaie tete A 5 CONTENT Sesigesiite tess anaa ata iis etal a ata ta ok eat ete aaa ett ad ee A ad A 8 AADOUT MainallS 2 c5e E A A iste seuss cade seaktlaeshieeads E ET see teuahs qateades A 17 Compliance with the EMC and Low Voltage Directives ceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeateeatas A 17 The Manual s Use and Structure c cccceccceeecceeeceececeeceaeeceneeeeaeeecaceesaeeceaeeecaeescaeessaeeseaeeseaeesaeessaeeeeaneesens A 18 About The Generic Terms and Abbreviations cc ccccccceeeceeeeseeeceeeeeeeeeeeceesaeeceaeeecaeeetneeseaeeeeaeeteeeeeees A 21 Definitions and Descriptions Of TerminOlogy ccecceeceseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeseaeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseateaeseneeaaes A 24 Product Configuration nisn
331. i 1F2AH o 1F52u For registration No 801BH Connection Data User s Manual Application Section 8019 to 8059 3 4 4 1F53H 5 1F7Bu For registration No 801CH 8060 to 8100 1F7CH 5 1FA4n For registration No 801DH 8101 to 8141 1FA5H o 1FCDs For registration No 801EH 8142 to 8182 1FCEu as 1FF6H For registration No 801FH 8192 System l Flash ROM wite allow prohibit designation RW Not allowed Section 9 4 13 2000H designation 0 Write prohibited 1 Write allowed Callback function designation Auto Callback connection during fixed Setting 4 Callback connection during designated number Setting 5 8193 Callback connection F during max designated number is 10 Setting 6 Section 9 4 4 2001H For callback Auto Callback connection during fixed Setting 1 Chapter 3 of function a pita conneenon Setting 2 RW Allowed User s Manual uring designated number ettin ee Auto Callback connection j Application during max designated number is 10 Setting 3 8194 Callback denial notification accumulated count designation Ou Not specified 1 2002H 1a to FFFFu Notification accumulated number count 8195 to 8198 8183 to 8191 1FFZH AFF pees of modem Complete signal handling for modem function designation Chapter 3 of 8201 i 2009 function 2 0 Do not turn on off X13 to X16 1 2009 1 Turn on off X13 to X16 User s Manual Not allowed Application 8202 Wait time of notification 200
332. iate storage or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design 2 Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user 3 When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided 4 Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced 5 Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage 6 Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi 7 Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not available after production is discontinued 3 Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted
333. icated instructions shown above are used in the same channel with the BIDOUT instruction the communication protocol setting error 7FF2h occurs 3 Whether a BIDOUT instruction was completed normally or abnormally can be checked by the completion device D or status display device at completion D 1 a Completion device Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the BIDOUT instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing b Status display device at completion Turns on and off depending on the completion status of the BIDOUT instruction e Normal completion Off with no change e Abnormal completion Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the BIDOUT instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing 10 16 10 16 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTION 2 A MELSEC Q Operation during execution of a BIDOUT instruction END END END END Sequence processing processing processing processing program t i T 7 ae 1 Execution of BIDOUT Completion of transmission by y instruction J BIDOUT 1 BIDOUT instruction root i i i ON 1 i I Completion device OFF i i i Abnormal i 1 ON _ completion Status display device OFF i i i 4 at completion i i i Normal i i i completion i One scan Error 1 When a dedicated instruction is completed abnormally the abnormal completion signal D 1 turns on and the error code is stored in the transmission result S1
334. ication rate setting Setting modification LL Operation setting allow prohibit Data bit setting 11 12 11 12 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 2 Example of a program that reads from the setting status storage area The following shows an example of a program that reads the setting of various switches of the Q series C24 from the setting status For details on ERR occurrence XE XF of the input output signals used in the program see Section 11 1 2 3 input output signals X Y00 to X Y1F of the Q series C24 Example of FROM instruction FROMP FROMP FROMP F ROMP HO HO HO HO H203 H200 H250 H260 DO DI D2 D4 K Kt K2 K2 Restarts the Q series C24 after checking the error code and resetting switches 11 13 DO D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 f b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 jon side jora sael Reads error description from address 203 Reads station number setting and switch setting description from address 200n Reads communication protocol setting and transmission setting description on the CH1 side from addresses 250n to 2514
335. ice turns on at the End processing of the scan at which the CSET instruction is completed and turns off at the next End processing b Complete device D2 1 It turns on off by the status at which the CSET instruction is completed At normal completion It is kept turned off and does not change At abnormal completion It turns on at the END processing of the scan at which the CSET instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing Operation at execution of CSET instruction End End End Sequence program Scan processing Scan processing Scan processing CSET instruction Complete device Complete device 1 paean AAA i r Q series C24 i 1 I Error 1 If the dedicated instruction is abnormally completed the error flag SMO turns on and the error code is stored in SDO See the following manuals according to the error code and check take action according to the error lt Error code gt 4FFFu or less QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 7000H or more Section 11 2 of the User s Manual Basic 10 25 10 25 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Program example MELSEC Q This is an example of a program that clears reception data on the Q series C24 side It is assumed that the input output signals of the Q series C24 are X Y00 to X Y1F KO DO K4 D2 D200 MO MO M1 SET M100 M1 SET M101 MOV D1 D300 RST M100 RST M101 10 26 Set the execution type Set th
336. id Receive data Valid CPU received a response message through the buffer memory Posts a simultaneous transmission error to Transmits a response message 2 2 the programmable controller CPU through the after data reception 2 1 is complete buffer memory after data transmission 1 1 Posts the receive data and receive Does not wait for a response massage 1 2 in result to the programmable controller reply to data transmission 1 1 CPU through the buffer memory Transmission data Invalid Receive data Valid while checking time out after data discards the received data transmission 1 1 is complete Does not transmit a response message Posts normal end or abnormal end according 2 2 Transmission data Valid Receive data Invalid to whether or not the programmable controller Does not inform the programmable CPU received a response message through __ controller CPU that data was received the buffer memory Posts a simultaneous transmission error to Ignored data reception 2 1 and the programmable controller CPU through the discards the receive data Transmission data Invalid Receive data Invalid buffer memory after data transmission 1 1 Does not transmit a response message Does not wait to a response massage 1 2 in 2 2 reply to data transmission 1 1 Does not inform the programmable controller CPU that data was received E to receive the response message 1 2 Ignores data recept
337. ies C24 according to this section Connect or set a terminal resistor at the external device according to the instruction manual of the external device The terminal resistor to connect to the Q series C24 e When communications performed using RS 422 330 Q 1 4 W resistor is connected e When communications performed using RS 485 110 Q 1 2 W resistor is connected How to discriminate between the terminating resistors 330 Q 110 Q Orange Orange Brown Brown Brown Brown Ae 24 d When connecting the terminal resistor of the QJ71C24N R4 to the RS 422 485 plug in socket block insert the terminal resistor in the orientation shown below Correct insertion Inserted vertically HHAH 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q Incorrect insertion Yt Inserted horizontally S TAR e If data cannot be communicated with the external device at all the polarity of the external device could be wrong and should be checked again If the polarities of the Q series C24 and the external device do not match reverse the polarity of each signal on either device side and connect the devices with the cable this may enable the data to be communicated 1 For terminal resistor setting connection described in this section when the RS 232 t
338. ilable for Windows XP and Windows Vista If any of the following functions is attempted this product may not operate normally Start of application in Windows compatible mode Fast user switching Remote desktop Large fonts Details setting of Display Properties Also 64 bit version Windows XP and Windows Vista are not supported e Use a USER authorization or higher in Windows Vista 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 9 3 Utility Package Operation 9 3 1 Operation overview GX Developer screen LD Edit mode MAIN 35 Step Tools window Help Check program te ue utelu Merge data sF7 sF8 aF aFt The following settings must be performed before starting the intelligent function module utility Delete unused comments Set the project using the GX Developer Check parameter Transfer ROM Clear all parameters IC memory card jA BR Set QCPU Q mode for the PC series Start ladder logic test Set TEL data Intelligent function utility EB support function Customize keys Change display color Options Create start up setting file Tools Intelligent function utility Start Select a target intelligent function When used via online operation module screen Fe 1 Go to next page 27 Inteligent function module utinty C MELSEE GPPM zix Inteligent function module parameter Onine Tools Help Select a target inteligent function m
339. in ai ean ai AN aa a ANAE A A A A A 26 1 1 Overview of the Serial Communication MOdUIE ccccceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseaeeeeaceeseneeteaeeseieeeeneees 1 1 1 2 Features of the Serial Communication MOdUule cccccceecceeceeeeeeeeeeceeeeneeeeeeeeeaeeeeceeseaeeseaeeeeeeeeeess 1 2 1 3 About Added Changed Functions in Function Version B ccceccceseeceeeeeeeeeseeseeeseeeseneseneteneseneeeneeaes 1 12 2 1 Applicable System S25 2 5 cecciisieit teats ett eden deel ee ae ee oct deeds 2 1 2 2 Combinations of Programmable Controller CPU and External Device and Available Functions 2 5 2 3 Usecin Multiple CPU System 2 4 cei ext cetscesdctedead cevate ects sche cflacevdcctadetactyacead chaadevdceadehacevaecuduevaceticeuadMacets 2 9 2 4 Use with Basic Model QCPU 0 cecccccesccceeceeeeceececeeeeaeeceaeeceaeeecaneesaaeesaaeescaeeeeaeeesaaeeseaeeseaeeseeeeceeesaseenans 2 10 2 5 Use with Redundant CPUS 2 20 28 aati eee wad ea ie oleh eee erie teeta te elit Ate nal Aa 2 11 2 6 Use on MELSECNET H Remote I O Stations 0 cccccceeecceesceececeeeeaeeeeaeeeeaeeesneeseaeeesaeeeseeeesseeessneess 2 13 2 Use with G Controller Modules smiren naea olin eet alae dedi ae aa aa a ee ieee det eid 2 17 2 8 Checking the Function Version Serial No and Software Version 2 cccccssceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeees 2 18 3 1 Performance Specifications ccccceccceceeeceeeeeeceeeecceeceneeseneeseaeeecaee
340. in base unit Refer to Section 2 5 In Transfer Setup of GX Developer select Not specified for Target system Refer to Section 2 5 e Write the data again to the flash ROM 11 55 MELSEC Q 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 3 22 Troubleshooting on the protocol setting data reading writing P Non Bidirectional Pre Symptom Cause Corrective action procedure protocol defined In Protocol setting data error information buffer memory 4086H to 4089h locate the error part protocol No packet No or element No and correct it Check the protocol setting for an error paying attention to the following and write corrected data to the Q series C24 again 1 When an error was detected in the user edited protocol Check if the following condition for element placement are satisfied in the packet setting or not If any elements of 1 and 2 are in the same packet 1 must be placed before 2 1 Conversion variable fixed number of data fixed number of digits 1 to 10 no sign character e Conversion variable fixed number of data fixed number of digits 1 to 10 variable decimal point The user edited protocol setting in GX e The ERR LED turns on Configurator SC Pre defined protocol when protocol setting support function has an error data are written to the Q Or function data not supported by the Q series C24 series C24 are included in the protocol setting data e Conversion variable
341. incorporate function version B into the existing system 1 Program utilization Programs created for the Q series C24 of function version A can be used as they are for the Q series C24 of function version B 2 Incorporation into the existing system The wiring used for function version A can be used as is for the Q series C24 of function version B App 5 App 5 APPENDIXES MELSEC Q Appendix 1 3 Precautions When Replacing the QJ71C24 R2 with the QJ71C24N R2 R4 Although the QJ71C24N R2 R4 can use existing programs created for the QJ71024 R2 without any changes take into account the following Wiring for the QJ71C24 R2 can be also used as it is 1 App 6 Increased internal processing speed Since the internal processing speed has been increased the time taken for the QJ71C024N R2 R4 to access a programmable controller CPU and to process message transmission to another device is shorter than that of the QJ71C24 R2 The usage of functions has not been changed however the performance and response time is different When utilizing any existing program be sure to check the operation in advance and if necessary adjust the communication timing The following are examples of communication timing adjustment a When communicating with MC protocol Increase the message wait time Especially in the case of Sequence scan time gt Message wait time an adjustment is required If the message wait
342. ing program t i l Execution of BIDIN instruction Completion of reception by i SDN instruction BIDIN i i instruction 1 i ON i h i Completion device aw oo o oo f do i i i i I i I I f i Status display device OFF i i at completion i i I Onescan I 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 lt _ _ __ gt Error 1 In case of operation errors the error flag SMO turns on and the error code is stored in SDO See one of the following manuals according to the error code and check and correct the error lt Error code gt A4FFFu or less QCPU Q Mode User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection Program example The following example shows a program that receives any data using the bidirectional protocol and stores that data in D10 or later The input output signals of the Q series C24 are from X Y00 to X Y1F MovP KI DO Designate the receive channel wovP Ko D2 Clear the receive data count storage device to 0 wove Ki0 D3 Designate the allowable receive data count _ With the normal completion the receive data within G BIDIN Uo DO D10 MO J the allowable receive data count user designated is read from the receive data storage area in the MO MI buffer memory ie n2 2 J After the BIDIN instruction is executed the user designated read completion signal M0 comes BWov D10 D110 KOZO on for 1 scan The reading of received data is performed by the programmable controller
343. innidariaianineieeiinan iaiia coterie D1 Registration reSult aaneen era AEE RS D2 e Number of data bytes registered 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeteeees D3 Usar Tame aidera ie AAA AA AMAA D4 to 8 b Buffer memory settings used in this example Address Decimal Hexadecimal Setting Name H1 value Register read delete instructions Frame No direction 03E8H Registration read delete result storage O AJo N BION ee SILI Number of data bytes registered designation For flash ROM access an H User fram 3030H 4646H 3030H oa _ oa pe o lt D T N Nj ag lt gt x SS gt I S S App 52 App 52 APPENDIXES 2 Program example lt Registration command gt X1028 PLS lt Setting of user frame gt M10 M12 X101E 7 f LMOV Kl MOV H3E8 s iov K10 Ah fio H3946 s iov H3030 MOV H3030 MOV H4646 Two H3030 Z RENTO J1 KI KI HO H2 00 K2 M100 M101 1 ai PLS M101 H SET lt Registration command 2 gt M11 X101E H Z RENTO J1 Kl Kl HO H5 D3 K6 M102 M103 SET M103 SET lt Flash ROM write request gt M12 X1018 SET X1018 lt Read of is registration result gt M13 X101E tk s EA REMFR J1 Kl Kl HO H4 D2 Ki M104 M105 SET M105 App 53 MIO M100 M11 M200 M102 M12 M201 Y1018 M13 M104 M202 M203 Y1018 M12 Lt
344. int out the content of the file generated by the Make text file function of GX Configurator SC which can be used as the setting value recording sheet Module No Recording sheet 1 Intelligent function module interrupt pointer setting GX Developer Set data Data item name setting screen Setting value Intelligent Interrupt pointer start No Po i CPU side Input format Decimal function module Interrupt pointer No of modules 2 fixed interrupt pointer Intelligent Start O number Input format Hexadecimal setting module side Start SI number O fixed Input format Decimal Recording sheet 2 Remote password setting GX Developer Set data Data item name setting screen Setting value Password Password Input format Character strings Remote settings password Password Modelname name QJ71C24 CMO Input format Selection settings active module F i Start XY Input format Hexadecimal settings Recording sheet 3 Intelligent function module switch setting Switch number number Description Sill CommuNCaNan fale setting ead Hatieniss2h AT Switch 1 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 Switch 2 CH1 Communication mE setting b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 CH2 Communication rate ET CH2 Transmission seting Switch 3 Switch 4 CH2 Communication ETE setting Switch 5 Station number setting Check the setting values in the next page and record them App 61 App 61 APPENDIXE ME
345. intelligent function module screen See Section 9 3 1 YES Read the data from the file Load file Read the data from the module s flash ROM Read from module j Set the flash ROM write allow prohibit designation to allowed gt y Display the system setting sub screens for changing the setting values y Click each of the setting items corresponding to the setting values to be changed For each item enter or select the new setting value in the Setting value field Designate the setting value for the item to be changed then click on the Execute test button The setting value will be written to the Q series C24 s flash ROM x1 Have you changed all the applicable setting values Do you wish to write the new setting values to the module s buffer memory In the Flash ROM setting screen click on the button Then in the file designation dialog box designate the file name under which the data will be saved All of the new setting values will be saved in the file 2 Set the flash ROM write allow prohibit designation to prohibited Close the Monitor Test screen Close v End Select in the Monitor screen See Section 9 4 13 Select in the Monitor screen See Section 9 4 Each system setting sub screen See Section 9 4 The Monitor screen or each sub screen See
346. ion 2 1 and m is the number showing the correspondence with the messages in the illustration shown in Section 7 3 2 7 24 7 24 7 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 7 3 2 Communication data processing when simultaneous transmissions occur Examples of the Q series C24 communication data processing for various settings of Simultaneous transmission data valid invalid designation by GX Configurator SC are explained 1 Transmission valid reception valid 2 1 1 2 E A N Arbitrary data Sum check c External device Q code K Q series C24 E x N Arbitrary data Sum check Time check c Q code timer 1 K 1 1 2 2 When the entire message of 2 1 was received while transmitting the message of 1 1 in the illustration e The Q series C24 sets Receive read request X3 X4 of 2 1 to ON after sending all of 1 1 2 Transmission invalid reception valid 2 1 Sum check code Arbitrary data Ignores the receive data of 1 1 Generates a simultaneous transmission error External device Q series C24 Sum check code Arbitrary data 3 Transmission valid reception invalid 1 1 1 2 Sum check code Arbitrary data External device E Ignores the receive N Arbitrary data Sum check Time check data of 2 1 Q code timer 1 Q series C24 7 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL MELSEC
347. ion allows messages to be received in the non reception protocol by time out in non reception monitoring time timer 0 if the received complete code and received data count have been not determined Chapter 6 of User s Manual Application Transmission control start end free area designation This function allows the designation of the available capacity of the OS area that notifies the data reception failure at the time of transmission control DTR DSR signal control and DC code control Chapter 7 of User s Manual Application 1 OVERVIEW Function Addition of changeable data to the user frame 05H OBH 11H 17H QJ71C24N R2 R4 QU71C24 R2 Addition of changeable data to the user frame 04H OAH E5H EBH Outline of function These functions allow the following codes to be registered as the changeable data of user frames for data communication e Horizontal parity code Sum check code of two s complement number MELSEC Q Reference section Chapter 9 of User s Manual Application Adding a reception function through the use of user frames This function allows reception of a message consisting of the head frame and any data field when receiving data by specifying the head frame The data length of the data field can be specified freely for each combination of user frames for reception set by the user Receiving 1 byte providing ACK NAK only is also possible b
348. ion error signal NAK turned Since the error code is added to NAK and is transmitted from the Q series C24 to the external Or device when the NAK signal is turned on take the corrective action described in the error code table see Section 11 2 Since the error code added when NAK is transmitted is stored to the Q series C24 buffer memory shown below it can also be checked at the Q series C24 Error code storage buffer memory address CH1 side CH2 side e Take corrective action corresponding to the contents of the error 11 3 8 Communication error C N Symptom Corrective action naa home be installed in the CPU can be installed e PC No designated local e Change the PC No to local station FF ora station FF or a station station No set with the network parameter other than a station No and restart data communications e Communication error set with the network Bidirectional procedure signal C N turned parameters between CPU with the Q up to the communications destination CPU series C24 loaded and communications destination CPU are not set on e Routing parameters e Check the routing parameters and set them e 11 42 11 42 11 TROUBLESHOOTIN C MELSEC Q Symptom Corrective action Bidirectional Non procedure An error was generated on Check the error contents from the state of the CC Link IE controller SB and SW related to the CC Link IE network MELSECNET H controller n
349. ion file register block No was designated Extension R block 71484 e A block No being used as an extension comment area sampling trace area or status latch area was designated system enor e The OS of the Q series C24 detected System error some error e A write command was designated when Disable write during RUN was set Parameter or sequence program was written during RUN No error 71494 Cannot execute a command during RUN 714An 714B4 e The OS of the Q series C24 detected System error some error Unusable command e An unusable command is issued to the error access target CPU The written monitor network No and the monitor request network No are different The OS of th ies C24 detected as some error PC No designation e APC No other than FF or 0 to 120 error 00x to 78x was designated The OS of th ies C24 detected ia some error e The received message length has exceeded the allowable range some error data error monitor data was written some error Programmable controller access Monitor network No error Frame length error 71544 System error e CPU model name cannot be confirmed 714Cu error e The OS of the Q series C24 detected System error some error 11 19 Error code Sian Pos ignal Hexa Error Description pai decimal MELSEC Q Corrective action Bidire ctional e Check and correct the external device transmit message and r
350. ions of programmable controller CPU and external device for data communication are shown below a External device and Q series C24 with 1 1 system configuration 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q c External device and Q series C24 with 1 n system configuration 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 2 Correspondence between the data communication functions and system configurations The following shows system configurations that can use the data communication functions of the Q series C24 The words in the reference section column in the table below represent the following manuals e Application Q Correspo
351. ior to the error occurrence Data will not be rewritten Data communications using the bidirectional protocol must be performed after a response message is received in reply to the preceding data transmission If the Q series C24 detects an error while receiving data it sends an NAK message response message to the external device after the data reception completion and ignores the data being received when the error was detected Therefore the receive data does not have to be cleared 7 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 7 2 Sending Data to the External Device This section explains data transmission from the programmable controller CPU to the external device 7 2 1 Transmission methods The following shows the method of sending data to the external device through data communication using the bidirectional protocol Programmable controller CPU Sequence program 1 Write BIDOUT instruction 5 Data gt a Sum check code 00x to FFn ER aot we 00n to FFn 4 lt lt Transmission SNS When abnormal completed PEY nak lenor exe eem Q series C24 External device enol When normal Buffer memory Transmission area Any data 3 2 Data portion Data length ACK Contents CH1 CH2 Control timing Send instruction BIDOUT instruction completion device BID
352. is not possible to combine the reading of data received by the main program and reading of data received by the interrupt program Accordingly use one or the other of the above programs to read the data received 2 The SPBUSY instruction is used to read the execution status when using a dedicated instruction See Chapter 10 3 More than one INPUT instruction cannot be executed simultaneously Execute the next INPUT instruction only after the execution of the first INPUT instruction is completed 4 When the communication data count is set in word units and if the received data count is an odd byte when requesting the reading of received data to the programmable controller CPU the receive data count is processed as follows Receive data count Receive data byte count 2 Fractions following the decimal point are rounded up Also OOH is stored in the higher byte of the final data storage position in the receive area where receive data is stored 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL 6 1 4 Receive data clear MELSEC Q For the data reception by a non procedure protocol if the transmission of data from a transmitting device is interrupted due to trouble occurring it may be necessary for the data received up to the present time are cleared in the receiving device and for the data to be received again from the start The methods for clearing reception data in the Q Series C24 are shown below Either method
353. it message and restart data communications Check and correct the external device transmit message and restart data communications Recheck the frame No Write the frame beforehand Change the frame No and restart data communications Recheck the frame No Change the write destination to an unwritten frame No When overwriting delete the given No beforehand Check and correct the external device transmit message and restart data communications Set to ON at GX Configurator SC Set to ON at GX Developer Check and correct the external device transmit message and restart data communications 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Error code Sicnal Hexa Error Description ah decimal e Cannot write to Flash ROM normally e Power is turned off during writing to CHn Flash ROM ERR Flash ROM write error error Flash ROM write Programmable controller CPU registration error 7E5F 1 0 number error on e I O number of requested module is i requested module incorrect Device monitoring duplicate registration error 7E61 H Programmable controller CPU error Transmission measure setting error 7E63H 7E64 1 Programmable controller CPU number error device CPU abnormal monitoring setting value error Transmission CPU abnormal monitoring setting value error Monitoring device read point range error 7E6Bu _ CPU abnormal 7E6Cx_ _ monitoring setting 7E6Du value error 7E6Ex Syste
354. ith the EMC and Low Voltage Directives is printed on the rating plate of the programmable controller 2 For the product No additional measures are necessary for the compliance of this product with the EMC and Low Voltage Directives The Manual s Use and Structure How to use this manual 1 2 In this manual details of the serial communication modules QJ71C24N QJ71C24N R2 QU71C24N R4 QJ71C24 and QJ71C24 R2 are organized as shown below according to their applications Please use this manual using the contents below as a reference To learn about features functions and component parts a To learn about features and functions Chapter 1 describes the features of the serial communication modules e Chapter 3 describes the common specifications and functions of the serial communication modules b To learn about the packed items and system configured items The section prior to Chapter 1 Product Configuration describes the parts that are packed along with the serial communication module e Parts and components other than those packed with the module must be prepared separately by the user To learn about processing required to start up the serial communication module a To learn about the startup procedure e Section 4 2 describes the general procedures prior to starting the operation of the serial communication module b To learn about the connection with the external devices e Section 4 4 describes the
355. itialization in the flash ROM LETO LOJ Section 9 4 2 Data for modem connection _ Register the data for model connection in the flash ROM 1Lololol Section 9 4 3 Mod lo em function system Register the system setting values for model function in the flash Section 9 4 4 setting ROM CHn Transmission Set the transmission specifications with the other device control and others DTR DSR control DC code control communication method data ion 9 4 5 system setting communication monitoring timer value etc CHn MC protocol Assign the buffer memory for on demand function set the user system setting frame number etc Assign the buffer memory needed to perform data communication using the non procedure protocol and change the setting values etc CHn Non procedure system setting CHnh Bidirectional Assign the buffer memory needed to perform data communication system setting using the bidirectional protocol and change the setting values etc CHn Pre defined EAT Change the set values for data communication by the pre defined protocol system O Section 9 4 9 S protocol monitoring system Set the programmable controller CPU monitoring function Peeps Section 9 4 10 setting CHn Transmission fi No S AR is Set the user frame number to be transmitted etc Section 9 4 11 designation system setting Reset the setti lues in the buff to their default System setting default ae Pee ne VA USSI MIS PUTET MEMON tate carne o o o
356. itor CH1 MC protocol monitor CH1 MC protocol monitor X Flash ROM setting Details Write to s Current value Monitoring mokis Save file displey Select input Reaton Losatie Make ett Clear request Off Stop monitor Execute ten Close 1 Display the Monitor Test screen 2 Select Clear request for CHO ERR clear request 3 Click on Execute test 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 2 Communication error clear request for CHO and to turn LED off on Monitor test others screen This is used to turn off the CHO LED of the Q series C24 and to initialize clear the communication error information The CHO LED on status and communication error information can be confirmed on the Monitor test others screen Operation procedure FE Module information Module type Serial Communications Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name J71C24N Setting item Current value Communication error clear request for CH1 No request and to tum LED off Request1 SI0 PRO P S C N NAK ERR LED Request2 SD WAIT ACK NEU LED Setting value CH2 SD WAIT status SID status PRO status P S status C N status NAK status r Flash ROM setting r Details Write to Save fil Current value Monitoring module Radel Lcd display Select input Mec Losdfie Make tet fl Request Request2 Request3 N
357. iving method Reception using a dedicated instruction INPUT or an interrupt program 1 cannot be performed Transmission using a dedicated instruction OUTPUT can be performed Data must be received using the FROM instruction in the main program The following describes the I O signals A program example is shown on the following page x1 For details on the data reception using interrupt programs see the User s Manual Application 1 0 VOsigal e Signal name EA that turns ON OFF Timing i imi Pe side CH2 side cpu Q series C24 When the reception abnormal detection X4 XB turns ON read the error code from the buffer memory below and then check the type of error and take corrective action based on the information found in Chapter 11 e Data reception result addresses 258H 268n 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 2 Setting values that can be changed Of the initial settings from GX Configurator SC stored in the buffer memory only the following setting values can be changed after data communication has started e Received data count designation addresses A4H 1441H e Receive complete code designation addresses A5H 145nH 3 Timing and procedure for changing the setting values 1 Timing of change To change the receive complete code and received data count after data communication has started change the setting when the status of the I O signals relating to the r
358. ixed length code transmitted from the external device are the same data was not received e Check if the external device transmitted the fixed length designated at the Q series C24 e Check if the trailer frame was transmitted during communications by user frame Use the communication monitoring function to check the e An external device transmitted a message and RD blinked but the read request signal X0 was not timed ON message from the external device When the send data from the external device is correct take the corrective action described in Sections 11 3 10 and 11 3 11 The Q series C24 setting e The data count basics message format etc depend on and message format do the following settings not match e ASCII BIN conversion enable disable e Transparent code setting User frame setting See the relevant section for a description of operation according to the set contents and setting of each item e Set or shorten the monitoring time and retransmit the message from the external device and determine the trouble from the contents of the time out error The Q series C24 data Note communications f s EIER a ch Error detection by the watchdog timer timer 0 to timer 2 monitoring time is set to Infinite wait or the monitoring time is too long is possible in the following cases e When part of a message is skipped e When transmission from an external device is interrupted See
359. k is performed against the remote password set to the local station QCPU with the Q series C24 x Access to the specified station is allowed if the remote password specified by the user and the remote password set to the QCPU match when accessing Data communication procedure 1 Initialize the modem 2 Connect the line from the external device 3 Unlock cancel the remote password of the QCPU belonging to the station with the Q series C24 mounted from the external device via the dedicated command for communication using the MC protocol 4 Initiate the data communication between the external device and programmable controller using the MC protocol 5 Disconnect the modem line from the external device side when completing the data communication using the MC protocol The remote password is automatically locked when the modem is disconnected 5 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE MELSEC COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL MELSEC Q The remote password should be set to a QCPU using GX Developer in order to use the remote password function of QCPU Unlocking the remote password is possible only for the QCPU of the local station with the Q series C24 It is impossible to unlock the remote password for the QCPU of other stations See Section 3 18 of the Reference Manual for the command for unlocking the remote password When accessing the programmable controller using GX Developer the remote password should be unlocked when starting the onli
360. kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Read Ikxkkxkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Dim rtn As Long Dim idata 5 As Integer DO D4 are read rtn ActEasylF1 ReadDeviceBlock2 DO0 5 idata 0 If rtn 0 Then MsgBox DO D5 amp idata 0 amp amp idata 1 amp amp idata 2 amp amp idata 3 amp amp idata 4 Else MsgBox Read Error amp Hex rtn End If End Sub Private Sub Command3_Click Ikkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Disconnection Ikkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Dim rtn As Long Disconnection rtn ActEasylF1 Close If rtn 0 Then MsgBox The disconnection was successful Else MsgBox Disconnection Error amp Hex rtn End If End Sub App 31 App 31 APPENDIXE Z MELSEC Q 4 When Visual C 6 0 is used FREEREREREREERES ES EREEREER I Connection kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk void CVCDIg OnOpen long IRet CString szMessage Reflects the logical station No set in the text box to variables UpdateData Get LogicalstationNumber m_actEasylf SetActLogicalStationNumber m_ LogicalStationNumber Connection Ret m_actEasylf Open if IRet 0 X MessageBox The connection was successful selse szMessage Format Connection Error x IRet MessageBox szMessage PEREREESEEAEE ERE EE SERA NSS II Read PPR void CVCDlg OnRead long IRet short sData 5 CString szMessage DO D4 are read
361. later Online gt Monitor Test Select monitor test module Monitor Test Monitor screen Startup from the system monitor GX Developer Version 6 or later GX Developer gt Diagnostics gt System Monitor Select the Q series C24 by installation status gt gt Monitor screen e Offline operation Tools gt Flash ROM setting Flash ROM setting screen Setting screen Screen displayed during online operation gt 1 Screen displayed during offline operation x Flash ROM setting r Module information R q Module type Serial Communications Module Start 1 0 No 0000 p Module information Module model name QJ71C24N Module type Serial Communications Module Setting item Current value Setting value Module model name QU71C24 N CH1 ERR occurence Dtf CH2 ERR occurrence Of Turning off ERR LED and initializing the code by the ERR clear request Designate Clear request for the test CH1 ERR clear request Off Clear request User frame User frame CH2 ERR clear request Off Clear request Data for user modem initialization Data for modem init X Y monitor test X Y monitor test Maninoa TG Data for modem connection Data for modem conn CH1 Transmission control and others maritor test CH1 Trans control monitor Modem function system setting Modem function CH1 MC protocol monitor
362. le controller CPU that is connected to a personal computer installed with GX Developer See the GX Developer Manual e Collection of measured data QU71C24 R2 Programmable controller data hee is collection change RD RD Programmable controller monitoring and control from an external device e Data receiving and sending in any formats that conform to the external device specifications Fe O SS Z GX Developer e File writing reading Collection of read data Device monitoring testing Being a convenient means of connection among different devices PCs display devices printers etc the serial communication line is the most widely used medium on the market today 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 1 2 Features of the Serial Communication Module The following describes the features of the Q series C24 1 Data communication based on the MELSEC communication protocol hereinafter referred to as the MC protocol Details are explained in the MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual a External devices can read write the programmable controller device data and sequence programs and can monitor programmable controller equipment status With the exception of the on demand function described below the programmable controller does not require a sequence program because the programmable controller sends and receives data based solely on commands from external devices b U
363. ller CPU to STOP status 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 2 Restart the programmable controller CPU station or reset the CPU The test starts automatically in about one second 3 For the Q series C24 the following tests should be performed once 1 ROM check Read the ROM data and verify the sum check 2 RAM check Write data to RAM and read and check it 3 Switch check Check whether or not each switch is set within the tolerance range and the operation setting in the transmission settings is set to off 4 Linked operation setting check perform this test with the operation setting in the transmission settings of CH2 set to on Check to see that the communication protocol setting on CH1 is set to 8H and whether the communication rate setting of each channel is within the tolerance range A linked operation setting check is performed when values are set as follows e Communication protocol setting on the CH1 side 8H e Operation setting in the transmission settings on the CH2 side bit 0 ON Procedure 3 Checking results of ROM RAM switch tests 1 The test is completed when the NEU LED on CH1 side is lit approximately 2 seconds 2 The test is completed normally when the ERR LED turns off 3 The test is completed with error when the ERR LED turns on Check the error description in one of the following screens e The Monitor test others screen of GX Configurator SC see Section 9 6 10
364. ller side App 9 APPENDIXE Z MELSEC Q Appendix 2 2 2 Installing on existing systems The following explains the Installation of the Q series C24 on an existing system 1 Installing on a multidrop connection system The Q series C24 can be installed on an existing system to which the programmable controller CPU and external devices are connected as 1 n or m n multidrop connection 1 1 This is when a QC24 N or a computer link module such as AJ71UC24 is used as the programmable controller CPU module of the multidrop connection However there are frame restrictions when data communication is performed See the Reference Manual 2 Replacing the QnNACPU module with a QCPU The wiring used by the QC24 N can be used as is The functional use is the same except for the functions added by the Q series C24 to the conventional module However with the introduction of high speed QCPUs there may be cases in which communication cannot be performed normally when a programmable controller module in the QnA series is replaced by a Q series programmable controller When a module is changed to a Q series programmable controller module make sure to perform an operation check App 10 App 10 APPENDIXES MELSEC Q Appendix 2 3 Using Programs Designed for the Computer Link Module and Installing the Q Series C24 into Existing Systems This section describes how to use programs created for A series computer link module
365. lock specifications The following shows the specifications of the RS 422 connector and RS 422 485 terminal block that connect to an external device soa Ed SDB pmi O G SDA Signal i Signal direction ee Signal name External RDA id SG abbreviation C24 4 sen w SDB evice RDB E eoa Send data sc ELT Roa Send data tl a OFS los Receive data 4 FG ty cr O Receive data Signal ground FG __Frameground gt arim C e QJ71C24N R4 QJ71C24 1 The following describes the control signals 1 SDA SDB signals These are signals to send data from the Q series C24 to the external device 2 RDA RDB signals These are signals for the Q series C24 to receive data from the external device 2 Terminating resistor Connect the termination resistor according to section 4 2 2 PECIFICATION eee MELSEC Q 3 3 2 RS 422 485 cable specifications The following shows the RS 422 485 cable specification 1 Use a 1200 m 3937 ft or shorter cable that satisfies the following specification for the RS 422 485 cable cable to connect the Q series C24 terminal block 2 Make the total distance within 1200 m 3937 ft when two or more device are connected in a 1 n or m n configuration 3 The RS 422 485 cable specification is shown below Shielded cable e fg 110 10Q Recommended cable SPEV SB MPC 0 2 X 3P MITSUBISHI CABLE INDUSTRIES Ltd
366. lt from the flash ROM access area of the buffer memory to D2 No of data byte registered acquisition command Abnormal completion of REMFR instruction Turns OFF the flash ROM read request signal Sets the read flag Reads the number of registered data bytes from the flash ROM access area of the buffer memory to D3 Converts the number of registered data bytes into the word units Adds 1 word when the number of registered data bytes is odd User frame acquisition command Abnormal completion of REMTO instruction Turns OFF the flash ROM read request signal Sets the read flag Reads the user frame from the flash ROM access area of the buffer memory to D4 and higher Normal completion of REMFR instruction Abnormal completion of REMFR instruction Sets the read flag App 55 APPENDIXE MELSEC Q Appendix 9 11 When deleting user frame The following program example deletes a user frame registered to the flash ROM of the Q series C24 using the REMFR REMTO instruction and I O signals Refer to Section 9 4 of the User s Manual Application for details It is recommended to use GX Configurator SC when deleting a user frame registered to the flash ROM of the Q series C24 Refer to Chapter 8 1 Program conditions The following program deletes a user frame registered to the flash ROM of the QJ71C24N when the delete command X1030 turns ON a Devices used e Delete COMMANG ccce
367. m the following forms of data communication can be performed with the Q series C24 1 Itis possible to perform data communication using the non procedure bidirectional protocols from the control CPU 2 Itis possible to read the buffer memory from non control CPUs Input output signals can be used as contacts Non control CPU Control CPU Q series C24 FROM TO instruction Buffer memory lt Dedicated instruction FROM instruction Use the input Use the input output signal as a x output signal as contact a contact It should be output Y to an output signal External device Data communication 1 OVERVIEW 3 MELSEC Q It is possible to access the control CPU and non control CPUs using the MC protocol and through GX Developer from the external device In addition data communication with the control CPU of the Q series C24 can be performed using the non procedure bidirectional protocol Example When communicating with the MC protocol External Non control CPU Control CPU Q series C24 device 03E0x to 03E3H r 1 1 I 1 Ny N N gt Data Bol ee he eee es i Device memory etc i i i er Command message Communication using the MC protocol read write transmitted using a ae aa p a A a QnA compatible 4C ii Specify the QCPU tobe frame 7 accessed by the I O number of the requested module Re
368. m error 7E6AH JE6Fu Modem connection error 11 24 Mode modification count over limit error monitoring function monitoring function Registration point range error abnormal monitoring Monitoring condition error of monitoring condition range error of monitoring device e There was an error in the mode No or transmission specification designated contents when changing the mode e Writing to flash ROM was performed 1000 times after power on e Writing to flash ROM was performed CHn e When the number of writes reached 100 000 times ERR 100 000 replace the module e The programmable controller CPU monitoring function is registered for the communication protocol that does not support the function e Programmable controller CPU monitoring registration was performed twice Cycle time units e Setting value of cycle time units is out of range error range e Setting value of programmable controller CPU monitoring function is out of range e Setting of transmission measure of the programmable controller CPU monitoring is incorrect e Registration point word bit is out of range e Setting value of the programmable controller CPU abnormal monitoring is out of range e Setting value of transmission condition is out of range e Setting value fixed value of CPU abnormal monitoring is out of range e Setting value of transmission condition condition agreement transmission is out of range
369. may be used to clear received data as necessary 1 Clear the reception data by the dedicated instruction CSET 2 Write to read from the reception data clear request address A8H 148h FROM TO instruction 3 Clear the reception data by GX Configurator SC see Section 9 7 When transmitting data to an external device from the Q Series C24 do not execute a clear request of the reception data shown in this section If a reception data clear request is executed when transmitting data to an external device The Q Series C24 stops data transmission and terminates the dedicated instruction for transmission abnormally The transmission completed signal does not go ON If a reception data clear request is executed during data reception the data received up to that point are cleared 1 Receive data clear processing The Q series C24 performs the following procession when the receive data clear is performed The data received up to that point can be ignored e The receive data count up to that point is 0 The receive area in the buffer memory is not initialized e Set to the status prior to the start of data reception Procedure for clearing the reception data by the dedicated instruction CSET This instruction clears the reception data up to the present without interrupting the data transmission processing Procedure for clearing In case of the CH1 side interface 1 Execute the CSET instruction If the CSET instructio
370. mission 7164 Red eek cor e Either the request or the device message request from the external q designation method is wrong device make the necessary corrections and send again The OS of the Q series C24 detected some error e A write command was designated when change the soting to Enable write Cannot execute a i i during RUN and restart data i Disable write during RUN was set A command during communications RUN e A command that cannot be executed cnl Stop the CPU and restart data during RUN was designated communications e If there is an error in the CPU remove the CPU error and restart data communications e Cannot communicate normally with the CPU 716A e The OS of the Q series C24 detected to System error some error 716Bu e The Q series C24 used is not compatible with the Built in Ethernet 716C System error port QCPU some error Monitor data write compatible 2C 3C 4C frame compatible 1C frame e Anonexistent device was designated e Device that cannot be specified by the corresponding command was designated range frame error designated e Written number of monitoring points is incorrect For example 0 was designated e Monitor data was written for a CPU other than a Q QnACPU using QnA compatible 2C 3C 4C frame e In control data of the CPRTCL instruction the specified protocol No is Correct the protocol No setting out of range e The number of protocols to be execut
371. mission setting Data bit setting Set each switch on both CH1 and CH2 sides to CH1 side a O the same specification Communication rate setting Match the external device Communication protocol setting Communication rate setting Match the external device Communication protocol setting Switch 5 Station number setting Set according to d of 1 Swi 8H Operation setting b0 ON Switch 3 Transmission setting Data bit setting Set each switch on both CH1 and CH2 sides to CH2 side Po the same specification wi 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q b Do not use the above settings for the following cases because linked operation cannot be performed 1 When using the QJ71C24N R2 or QJ71C24 R2 2 When an external device is not connected to either of the interfaces 3 When using the bidirectional or pre defined protocol 4 When communicating data with an external device connected to two interfaces that are not interacting using functions set in the communication protocol settings MC protocol non procedure protocol 5 When communicating data using the modem function When two interfaces are in linked operation the transmission time for one character becomes equal to the hardware gate off time of the Q series C24 c The data flow in linked operation is as follows 1 Two interfaces operate linked together using functions defined with the communication protocol setting on the CH2 side MC protocol in
372. mpletion the receive data within J the allowable receive data count user designated is read from the receive data storage area in the y buffer memory e Once the INPUT instruction is executed the user designated read completion signal MO turns ON I for 1 scan e The reading of receive data and switching of the ON OFF status are performed by the programmable controller CPU J The abnormal completion flag is reset by an external command Q series C24 Buffer memory Data reception result Receive data count x When the receive data count is larger than the allowable receive data count only the data up to the allowable receive data count will be stored and the excess data will be discarded For abnormal completion DO Interface number 1 D1 Reception result other than 0 D2 Receive data count n D3 Allowable receive data count 10 D10 Receive data to Dx Receive data 6 12 From the buffer memory address 2581 From the buffer memory address 6001 Data received prior to an error occurrence will be stored in the receive data storage device 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 1 Receive data can also be read using interrupt programs For more details on reading receive data with interrupt programs see Chapter 4 of the User s Manual Application Note that if the reading of data received from the same interface is to be performed it
373. mpletion flag for REMTO instruction M200 to 203 e Word byte Units designation 0 0 0 ee ceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeneeenreees DO e Buffer memory head address designation for on demand TUNIGUON cess css tsdetinatsstindestulin A RAE D1 e Buffer memory length designation for on demand FUNCHION ennta a t a iiA D2 e Transmission buffer memory head address designation D3 e Transmission buffer memory length designation D4 e Receive buffer memory head address designation D5 e Receive buffer memory length designation eceeee D6 Buffer memory settings used in this example Po eg Decimal Hexadecimal Setting Name value st ____ 96H Word byte units designation Buffer memory head address designation for on demand function 160 AOH 04001 designation App 50 App 50 APPENDIXES 2 Program example lt Initial setting command gt MIO DO M100 M11 M200 DI D2 D3 D4 M102 M12 M201 DS D6 M104 M202 M203 MELSEC Q J Changes the initial setting command into pulses 1 Sets the word byte units designation to byte Transfers the setting value to the word byte units designation area of the buffer memory Initial setting command 2 1 Abnormal completion of REMTO instruction y Sets 400 to the buffer memory head address for on demand transmission
374. munication modules Module model names are provided when relevant model names are needed to be shown Generic term abbreviation Description of generic term abbreviation Abbreviation for QJ71C24N QU71C24N R2 QJ71C24N R4 QJ71C24 and QU71C24 R2 type serial Q series C24 C24 communication modules Indicated as C24 in the diagrams oT es Ty E R2 A1SJ710QC24N A1SJ710C24N R2 acan o Generic term for Generic term for QC24 QC24N eee QC24N Generic term for QOOJCPU QOO0CPU Q01CPU Q02CPU QO2HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU QO02PHCPU QO6PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU Q25PRHCPU QOOUJCPU QOOUCPU Q01UCPU QO2UCPU Q03UDCPU Q04UDHCPU QO6UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU QO3UDECPU QO4UDEHCPU QO6UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU Generic term for Q12PRHCPU Q25PRHCPU Generic term for QQOUJCPU QOOUCPU Q01UCPU QO2UCPU Q03UDCPU QO04UDHCPU Universal model QCPU QO6UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU QO03UDECPU QO4UDEHCPU QO6UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q2Z0UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU Generic term for QQ3UDECPU QO4UDEHCPU QO6UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Built in Ethernet port QCPU Riga vee Q26UDEHCPU lacpUstation sd station Abbreviation for the programmable controller with QCPU installed QnACPU Generic term for Q2ACPU Q2ACPU S1 Q2ASCPU Q2ASCPU S1 Q2ASHCPU Q2ASHCPU S1 Q3ACPU Q4ACPU Q4ARCPU Generic term for QCPU QnACPU Generic term for
375. n 8529to 8538to 8547to 8556to 8565to 8574to 8583to 8592to 8601to 8610to 8530 8539 8548 8557 8566 8575 8584 8593 8602 8611 2151Hto 215Anto 2163Hto 216CHto 2175Hto 217EHto 2187Hto 2190Hto 2199Hto 21A2H to 21521 215Bx 21641 216Dx 21761 2147FH 21881 21914 219An 21A3H 8531 8540 8549 8558 8567 8576 8585 8594 8603 8612 21531 215CH 2165H 216EH 2177H 2180H 2189H 2192H 219BH 21A4H Head device No designation Designation of number of points read 8532 8541 8550 8559 8568 8577 8586 8595 8604 8613 Monitoring condition designation Judgment 2154H 215DH 2166H 216FH 2178H 2181H 218AH 2193H 219CH 21A5H condition designation 8533 8542 8551 8560 8569 8578 8587 8596 8605 8614 21551 215E 21674 21704 21794 21821 218BH 21944 219DH 21a6H Monitoring condition value designation 8534 8543 8552 8561 8570 8579 8588 8597 8606 8615 Transmission pointer designation for 2156H 215FH 2168H 2171H 217AH 2183H 218CH 2195H 219EH 21A7H conditional transmission data transmission 8535 8544 8553 8562 8571 8580 8589 8598 8607 8616 Designation of number of outputs for 2157H 2160H 2169H 2172H 217BH 2184H 218DH 2196H 219FH 21A8H conditional transmission data transmission 8536 8545 8554 8563 8572 8581 8590 8599 8608
376. n 2 18 Checking the LED ON status communications error statuS 0 11 1 Checking the software version GX Configurator SC eeeeeeeeees 2 22 Communication protocol setting 4 18 Communication rate cceeeees 4 18 Communication support tool App 24 Communication SyStOM cceeeeeeeeeeeee 3 1 Computer link module 00 App 11 Connecting the RS 232 interface 4 6 Connecting the RS 422 485 interface 4 9 Comparison of the function App 1 CPR TO One e a aged tee ade 3 15 CSET Receive data clear 6 14 10 23 D Data Dili ibid eed tied 4 16 Data communication functions 2 7 Data format cccceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteteeeeneeees 3 1 Data reception by receive complete code 6 3 Dedicated instruction list ee 10 1 Dedicated instructions ecceeeee 10 1 E Echo b ck iceren area eene eei 3 11 ERR LED zseni indie tal 11 6 Error code table ccccceteeeeeeeeees 11 18 External dimensions 00see App 19 Index 1 F G H 1 L M N Full duplex communications 0 7 24 Functions available with utility package 9 3 GX Configurator SC 0 A 22 2 3 9 1 GX Configurator SC function list 3 16 GX Developer ccccccccccccssseeesesseeees A 22 2 3 H W ga
377. n Write 1 to address A8H Example The following is an example program for clearing received data with the FROM TO instructions while send receive processing is performed using dedicated instructions OQUTPUT INPUT X23 1H PLS MIS ul Reception Reception clear clear request request pulse M15 SET M16 Reception clear Reception request pulse clear acknowledgement EEA lt Execute reception clear processing gt MiG M1 M12 Hi7 M8 1 8 X4 t H HE HE i 10 HO HOAS K1 K1 3 Reception OUTPUT INPUT Clearing Comuni Reception Reception clear in exection in exection reception cation read request abnormal acknowledgement i disable detection 1 s E M7 J Clearing reception Execute reception clear processing gt MI7 i FROM HO HOAS DO K1 Clearing reception DO KO 7 RST M16 J Reception clear acknowledgement RST M17 Cleaning reception A EET E ET ERE EE A ea SET M18 J Communication disable M18 H K10 i 11900 z C81 Communi H cation i disable i T0 VT LRST dy Communication disable H pasadannadianaj MiG M7 M18 f t m9 Reception Clearing Communication Communication clear reception 1 disable i able acknowledgement 9 7777777 1 x1 Add the dotted line portion to the sequence program when the function version AQ Series C24 is used Carry out communications when M19 is ON 6 DATA
378. n abruptly resulting in an abnormal completion of the dedicated transmission instruction The transmission completion signal will not be lit When the receive data clear is executed while the data reception is in progress the data received up to that point will be cleared 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Dedicated instructions are used to simplify programming when using intelligent function module functions This chapter describes the dedicated instructions for the Q series C24 which is part of the functions of the QCPU in Q mode explained in this manual 10 1 Dedicated Instruction List and Available Devices 1 Dedicated instruction list The following table lists the dedicated instructions explained in this chapter Application D edicaied Description of function Explanation instruction page On demand function 7 Sends data using the on demand function of the MC Non procedure protocol OUTPUT 1 Sends data for the specified data count Section 10 3 communication INPUT 1 Reads received data Section 10 4 Bidirectional protocol BIDOUT 1 Sends data for the designated data count Section 10 5 communication BIDIN 1 Reads received data Section 10 6 Communication status SPBUSY Reads the status of data transmission reception via a Section 10 7 confirmation dedicated instruction Receive date cl ar CSET Perform the receive data clear without stopping the Section 10 8 transmission pr
379. n and off the CD signal No 1 pin Q series C24 External device Signal name Pin No Signal name CD 1 CD RD RXD 2 RD RXD SD TXD 3 SD TXD DTR ER 4 DTR ER SG 5 le gt SG DSR DR 6 DSR DR RS RTS 7 RS RTS CS CTS 8 CS CTS RI Cl 9 The CD terminal check setting is set according to the specification of the external device When wiring shown above DTR DSR control or DC code control may be performed b Connection example with an external device not capable of turning on and off the CD signal No 1 pin 1 Connection example 1 Q series C24 External device Signal name Pin No Signal name cD 1 cD RD RXD 2 RD RXD SD TXD 3 SD TXD DTR ER 4 DTR ER SG 5 SG DSR DR 6 DSR DR RS RTS 7 RS RTS CS CTS 8 CS CTS RI Cl 9 x When wiring shown above DTR DSR control or DC code control may be performed 2 Connection example 2 Q series C24 External device Signal name Pin No Signal name CD 1 cD RD RXD 2 RD RXD SD TXD 3 SD TXD DTR ER 4 DTR ER SG 5 SG DSR DR 6 DSR DR RS RTS 7 RS RTS CS CTS 8 CS CTS RI Cl 9 When wiring shown above DC code control may be performed If the programmable controller CPU and an external device cannot be communicat
380. n data HO9c4 H09e1 Flash ROM initialization data H8001 H801F Buffer memory initialization data For PLC CPU monitoring input within the following value range in the non procedure protocol r Flash ROM setting Details Swims ta Save file module Cannot execute test ESS Load file module Close Make text file Setting item Item SHS ice ees Reference section cut CH1 i BAn to 15Au to Chapter 11 of Output frame No designation 1st to 100th es 11DH 1BDuH User s Manual Application 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 9 4 12 Resetting the buffer memory flash ROM setting values to the default values This section explains how to reset the values set in the buffer memory flash ROM to their default values Startup procedure Online gt Monitor Test Select monitor Test module Monitor Test gt Monitor screen Operating procedure Procedure 1 In the Monitor screen select Default request for System setting default Procedure 2 Click on Execute test The setting values in the buffer memory will return to their default values Procedure 3 Change the setting of Flash ROM write allow prohibit to Allowed Procedure 4 In the Monitor screen select Write request for System setting write Procedure 5 Click on Execute test The setting values in the flash ROM will return to their default values When confirming
381. n is executed while the reception data read request X3 XA or reception abnormal detection signal X4 XB is turned on the CSET instruction is kept waiting until the signal is turned off 2 The reception data clear processing is executed at the OS area of the Q series C24 see Section 6 1 2 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q The following is a program example of clearing the reception data by the dedicated instruction CSET MovP KO DO Set the execution type MOVP K4 D2 Set the request type Reception data clear ZP CSET U0 K1 DO D200 MO Execute the reception data clear MO Mi E M100 Normal completion Mi If SET M101 Abnormal completion Mov D1 D300 X21 RST M100 Reset the complete flag by external command RST M101 3 Receive data clear procedure using FROM TO instruction Write and read the receive data clear request address A8 H 148n using the procedure described below When resuming data communications with an external device resume it after completing the reception data clear processing with the Q Series C24 Depending on the data communications system it may be necessary to restart data communications with the external device after notifying the external device from the programmable controller CPU that resumption of communications is possible Clear Procedure When the CH1 side interface is used 1 While none of receiving sending and
382. n modules are connected in a 1 n or m n mode using the serial communication module s RS 422 485 interface Non procedure protocol An user s communication procedure and one of the data communication functions for communicating any data between the programmable controller CPU and an opposite device Details are explained in Chapter 6 Packet A string of data used for communication with external devices by the pre defined protocol Pre defined protocol One of the data communication functions available for the QJ71C24N R2 R4 In data communication between the QJ71C24N R2 R4 and an external device data can be sent and received by using a protocol for the external device This must be set in GX Configurator SC Pre defined protocol support function The details are described in Chapter 8 and the Operating Manual Pre defined protocol support function Pre defined protocol support function A function available in GX Configurator SC Pre defined protocol support function which includes e Registration of the protocol appropriate to each external device e Writing protocol setting data to or reading them from the flash ROM of the QJ71C24N R2 R4 Debug support function The details are described in Chapter 8 and the Operating Manual Pre defined protocol support function Terms Description One of the message formats for the serial communication module for performing communication using the MC protocol and
383. n number 80H to AOH 00h to 1FH designated in the Station number and Local station number items in the messages on the external device side It is not necessary to specify this when an A compatible 1C frame is used Alternatively it is necessary to change the message frame so that it has a data order different from that of the MC protocol e Station number Designate the number of device to which data is sent e Local station number Designate the number of the device that sends data 2 Perform the data communication according to Chapter 14 of the User s Manual Application c Processing reception data on the external device side Set the external device so that it ignores the following reception messages that are unrelated to the local station The command message and the corresponding response message that are sent from other stations when accessing the programmable controller CPU using the MC protocol Messages when accessing between external devices 2 Data communication using 1 n connection When the UC24 C24 S8 is connected on the line it is not possible to access the programmable controller in the QnA compatible 4C frame format 5 for binary code communication Since performances and response speeds are different between the Q series C24 and the UC24 C24 S8 communication may not be performed normally when a programmable controller module in the A series is replaced by a Q series programmable controller When a mo
384. n processing in progress R f rence Manual X1A CH1 Global sh X1B CH2 Global sh Y00 CH1 Transmission Ce et Y07 CH2 Transmission Ce et Buffer memory head address designation Data length designation Chapter 10 of User s Manual Application noe 2 Chapter 6 of Message wait time designation units 10 ms 11EH 1BEH sit User s Manual Application 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 9 6 5 Non procedure monitor test Purpose Monitor the status and setting values of the data transmission using the non procedure protocol The test operation for the receive data clear is explained in Section 9 7 Operating procedure Monitor screen gt CHL Non procedure monitor test Monitor Test screen CH1 Non procedure monitor test Sea es tase ne Start monitor 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q Monitor Test items Buffer memory address Reference section CH2 Data transmission result 267H Chapter 11 of Data reception result User s Manual Basic Receive user frame nth Chapter 11 of User s Manual Application X07 CH2 Transmission normal completion X08 CH2 Transmission abnormal completion X09 CH2 Transmission processing in progress XOA CH2 Reception data read request Chapter 6 of X0B CH2 Reception abnormal detection Y07 CH2 Transmission request Y08 CH2 Reception data read completion Received data countdesignation 14an A4H R
385. n sending data Output control input must be turned OFF when not sending data The Q series C24 side automatically controls the output control input External device or converter Send data Output control input p p an Receive data Send data Q series C24 R Output control input Receive data Send data Output control input Q series C24 Receive data When the Q series C24 is used if operation of the two interfaces is linked see Section 4 5 2 2 the time to send one character becomes the Q series C24 H W gate OFF time The Q series C24 turns OFF the gate after the one character send time PECIFICATION eee alee MELSEC Q 3 3 4 Enabling or disabling echo back of the RS 422 485 interface The echo back function is enabled or disabled for CH2 of the QJ71C24N R4 The echo back of the QJ71C24N R4 is defined as the function that when data are sent through RS 485 2 wire type from the RS 422 485 interface the same data are also sent to RDA or RDB of the QJ71C24N R4 Whether to receive the returned data or not discard can be specified Sending data QJ71C24N R4 Target device Receives or not receive discards the data 1 Application 1 Disabling the echo back will eliminate the processing for ignoring unnecessary data which has been programmed for non procedure protocol communication 2 When the same message format is used for req
386. n socket block to the QJ71C24N R4 be sure to confirm the layout of the socket block and then insert it into the RS 422 485 connector on the QJ71C24N R4 QJ71C24N R4 RUN ERR NEU NEU emf EA a ore im N lt 8 in eTii prm Tag D oy RS 422 485 y 3 SDA imal aq _ x SDB fr cee RDA ft sc pees RDB fr SS E EI bey ro Era RS CH2 Oe eal 7 Braided shield wire SDA ime SDB pmd RDA pmd RDB LI sc Ed Plate terminal woal A included with product QJ71C24N R4 4 Connect the external device according to its specifications 5 See Appendix 5 for the bend radius of the connection cable 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 4 1 Connecting the RS 232 interface full duplex communications The following shows the connection precautions and connection examples when using the Q series C24 RS 232 interface for full duplex communications 1 Connection precautions a For further information about the following items see the explanation in the applicable section in the User s Manual Application e Controlling the communication on the Q series C24 side by the external device side using the CD signal of the RS 232 interface This is affected by the CD terminal check designation in CHn transmission control and others s
387. nal instruction RST M102 7 10 10 10 10 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTION i SSE MELSEC Q 10 4 G INPUT Data can be received in any user defined message format using the non procedure protocol Applicable device Set Internal device ane direct device Intelligent function i Index register data ERA user File register ane module device Constant Others it woa unico Word Instruction Executing code condition Command G NPUT i Set data Setdata data Description Set by Data type Start I O signal of the module 2 os 9 User BIN16 bit ernie to FE Top two digit when I O signals are expressed in 3 digit s Head number of the devices in which control data is stored user syslen Davee name Device name Head number of the devices in which receive data is stored an So Bit device number to be turned on at completion of execution system Bit The file register per local device and program cannot be used as the set data Control data Set data Setting range _ Set by e Set receive channel Receive channel 1 Channel 1 CH1 side 1 2 User 2 Channel 2 CH2 side e Reception result by an INPUT instruction are stored Reception result 0 Normal System Other than 0 Error code 1 S 2 Receive data count Receive data count is stored 0 or more system lowable number oi Set the allowable number of words for received data Allowabl ber of Set the allowabl
388. name a ae SDB Cable connection ER DTR SG DR DSR RS RTS a ae CS CTS RI Cl FG Procedure 2 Communication protocol setting and transmission setting see Section 4 5 2 1 Set the communication protocol setting to FH individual station loopback test for both interfaces 2 Set transmission setting of the two interfaces according to the transmission specification for data communication with an external device Procedure 3 Performing the individual station loopback test 1 Set the programmable controller CPU to STOP status 2 Restart the programmable controller CPU station or reset the CPU The test starts automatically in about one second 3 For the Q series C24 perform the following tests in sequence and repeat them one test cycle takes approximately one second End testing when all test results become abnormal 1 Check communication with the programmable controller CPU Read and check the model type of the programmable controller CPU 2 Check transmission and reception functions of the interface Perform communication while changing data 4 The LED corresponding to a test item flashes when the test starts e The CH1 NEU LEDs flash when checking communication with the programmable controller CPU e The SD and RD LEDs of the interface being tested flash when checking the communication functions of interface 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q Pr
389. nd base units applicable to the Q series C24 and quantities for each CPU model Depending on the combination with other modules or the number of mounted modules power supply capacity may be insufficient Pay attention to the power supply capacity before mounting modules and if the power supply capacity is insufficient change the combination of the modules Applicable CPU module No of modules CPU type CPU model Extension base unit j eo A to 8 Basic model fQoocpu QCPU CT to 24 meo o ao2cPu o es High Performance ite BA model QCPU k aae ason Qo2PHCPU sid QO6PHCPU Process CPU foizpHcpu P to 64 amu _ Q25PHCPU Programmable Redundant CPU Q12PRHCPU controller CPU xe lazsPrucopu P 53 Q25PRHCPU i QOOUJCPU oe to 8 QOOUCPU wea to 24 QO01UCPU QO02UCPU Up to 36 i QO3UDCPU Universal model QO4UDHCPU QCPU QO6UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Up to 64 Q13UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU O Applicable x N A 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS No of modules MELSEC Q Applicable CPU module Extension base unit QO6UDEHCPU QS001CPU QO6CCPU V C Controller module QO6CCPU V B Up to 64 4 Universal model QCPU Programmable controller CPU Safety CPU N A Q12DCCPU V O Applicable x N A 1 Limited within the range of I O points for the CPU module 2 Can be installed to any I O slot of a base unit 3 Us
390. nd the processing time The range of devices that can be accessed differs depending on the frame used in data communications 2 Use a Basic model QCPU function version B or later When using the function version 8 or later of the GX Developer is required 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 2 5 Use with Redundant CPUs This section describes the Q series C24 on an extension base unit of the system where Redundant CPUs are used 1 Available functions For details refer to QNPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System 2 Access to Redundant CPU from external device For details refer to either of the following manuals e Users Manual Basic Section 5 1 4 e QnPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System 3 Dedicated instructions The dedicated instructions are not applicable Create programs with the FROM TO instructions For sample program using the FROM TO instructions refer to QNPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System 4 GX Configurator SC a Connecting GX Configurator SC GX Configurator SC cannot be used for accessing a Redundant CPU via an intelligent function module on an extension base unit from GX Developer Therefore the pre defined protocol communication is not available Connect a personal computer with a communication path indicated below Main base unit Bi ec loo esris Extension base unit 4 GX Configurator SC cannot be used Direc
391. nding Serial Communication Module User s Manual Application e Reference Q Corresponding MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual e Operating GX Configurator SC Version2 Operating Manual Pre defined protocol support function a Communication using the MC protocol O Available X Not available System configuration Function Reference section Programmable controller CPU device memory readwrite O O Inteligent function module buffer memory readwrte O O 0 Sequence programreadwrite OO OUT OL CO Section3 8 Reference Programmable controller CPU status control remote RUN Section 3 6 STOP etc Global function Section 3 10 3 10 Accessing the programmable controller of other stations in the Raisrence CC Link IE controller network MELSECNET H Section 2 7 MELSECNET 10 Programmable controller CPU monitoring function Lo lx ax Application Chapter 2 Section 3 11 3 11 On demand function e ETATS 10 b Communication using the non procedure protocol O Available lt Not available Function System configuration Reference section Anen in in Data Data transmission receiving in arbitrary format in arbitrary format TOES koe eee Data transmission receiving with userframes O O O O Programmable controller CPU monitoring function O x x Reading received data using interrupt programs o o o o Jeria Sending receiving ASCII data using ASCILBIN
392. ne operation 3 Q series C24 setting and monitoring function when using the QCPU remote password function a Modem function system setting by GX Configurator SC 1 Remote password mismatch notification count designation D Designate the number of times before notification when a remote password disagreement occurs at the unlock processing by the user external device after the line is connected The Q series C24 automatically disconnects the line if more remote password disagreements occur than the number of times designated by this value Remote password mismatch notification accumulated count designation Designate the number of times before notification when remote password disagreements occur at the unlock processing by the user external device after the startup of the Q series C24 The ERR occurrence XE XF and the ERR LED turn on if remote password disagreements occur more than the number of times designated by this value the line is not disconnected The user can clear the cumulative value counted by the Q series C24 at an occurrence of remote password disagreement using either one of the methods below e Set the cumulative number of abnormal completions of unlock processing to 0 in the modem function monitor test screen of GX Configurator SC e Write 0 to the storage area corresponding to the Accumulated count of unlock process abnormal completion processing address 8956 22FCu 5 DATA COMMUNICATION USING
393. necessary to create new programs c Accessing other stations 1 When accessing other station s programmable controller CPU via the MELSECNET 10 Valid module during other station access must be designated in the parameter setting by GX Developer 2 Check the stations that can be accessed in Chapter 5 of the Reference Manual and access the programmable controller CPU from the external device 3 When it is necessary to access other stations on other MELSECNET 10 data communication must be performed in a QnA compatible 3C 4C frame Create a new program for the external device side according to Chapter 3 of the Reference Manual 4 Itis not possible to access other stations via the MELSECNET II B d Transmitting data to the external device by the on demand function 1 The program for data transmission on the programmable controller CPU side is different from when UC24 C24 S8 is used Create a new program on the programmable controller CPU side according to Section 3 11 in the Reference Manual 2 Data to be sent to the external device is identical to when the UC24 C24 S8 is used 3 Data communication using the non procedure protocol a Data transmission reception 1 The same data transmission reception as used by UC24 C24 S8 can be performed 2 Create a new program for data communication upon checking functions and instructions used on the programmable controller CPU side in Chapter 6 of this manual and Chapter 11 of
394. ng error 1 1 gt D3 status umber of registered user frame gt Flash ROM system parameters write result 1 1 gt D5 Modem function error code 1 1 gt D6 Modem function sequence status 1 1 gt D7 x Make text file End setup Cancel This one row is counted as one setting Blank rows are not counted Count up all the setting items on this screen and add the total to the number of settings for other intelligent function modules to get a grand total 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 9 2 2 Operating environment This section explains the operating environment of the personal computer that runs GX Configurator SC Installation Add in target i Add in to GX Developer Version 4 English version or later Windows based personal computer CPU Refer to the next page Operating system and performance required for personal Required memory _ computer Hard disk For installation 65 MB or more space For operation __ 20 MB or more Display 800 x 600 dots or more resolution 4 Microsoft Windows 95 Operating System English version Microsoft Windows 98 Operating System English version Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition Operating System English version Microsoft Windows NT Workstation Operating System Version 4 0 English version Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Operating System English version Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System En
395. ng manuals according to the error code and check and correct the error lt Error code gt 4FFFu or less QCPU Q Mode User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 7000H or more Section 11 2 of the User s Manual Basic 10 9 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q Program example The following example shows a program that sends any data stored in D11 to D15 using the non procedure protocol When input output signals of the Q series C24 are from X Y00 to X Y1F X20 JH PLS M50 The transmission command is converted into pulse w50 i T M0V ABCDEFG Du J Transmission data is stored MOV HOAOD D15 Fov KI Do Designate the number of the interface CH pJ that will j send the data Moy KO D1 Clear the transmission result storage device to 0 roy i Designate the transmission data count in word units E Designate K10 when the unit is bytes e OUTPUT uo 0 ott Ho 7 The transmission data stored in the designated device is sent oee g M101 J After the OUTPUT instruction is executed the user designated transmission complete signal MO turns Hl _ ON for one scan VI NOY D mol Storing the transmission data and writing the transmission data count in the buffer memory and SET M02 issuing a transmission request to the Q series C24 are i all executed by the programmable controller CPU J RST W101 The completion flag is reset by an exter
396. ng multiple PCs installed with GX Developers to the programmable controller CPU or Q series C24 at the same time operations such as programming and monitoring can be performed simultaneously by multiple operators Operating the GX Developers using these simultaneous connections can improve program performance e Operations can be performed from a GX Developer by setting the communication protocol of the Q series C24 interface to which a PC is connected to 0 with the switch setting using the GX Developer b Connecting the GOT Details are explained in the GOT User s Manual Connection e By connecting a GOT graphic operation terminal to the interface for the Q series C24 operations such as monitoring the programmable controller CPU can be performed e Operations such as monitoring the programmable controller CPU can be performed by setting the communication protocol of the Q series C24 interface to which a GOT is connected to 0 with the switch setting using a GX Developer c Simultaneous connection of GX Developer and GOT e Itis possible to connect a PC with GX Developer and the GOT to two interfaces of the Q series C24 at the same time It is thus possible for more than one user to perform programming monitoring etc simultaneously When the GOT and the PC with GX Developer are connected at the same time the two interfaces of the Q series C24 cannot perform an interlock operation RS 232 cable When GX
397. nge A module used for routing can access the following modules when accessing other stations e CC Link IE controller network MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 network module Qseries C24 Ethernet interface module If there is a module of function version A among the modules for routing it is possible to access the control CPU of that particular module only In addition it is possible to access other stations via a module controlled by the same control CPU 1 10 1 VERVIEW s MELSEC Q 10 Remote password check function Details are explained in the User s Manual Application and the Reference Manual a The remote password check function of the Q series C24 prevents users at a remote location to access QCPUs illegally using the modem function of the Q series C24 The remote password is checked in the following forms of data communication e Communication using the MC protocol The remote password check is not carried out in data communication using the non procedure bidirectional protocols e Access to the programmable controller through GX Developer The remote password function is one of the QCPU functions and used for preventing illegal access to the QCPU by other users Use GX Developer to set a remote password for the QCPU in order to activate the remote password function of the QCPU b If the Q series C24 is specified in the parameters of a QCPU as being subject to the remote password check the remote passwor
398. nitoring time timer 1 default value is 5 seconds See Section 6 2 of the User s Manual Application If response messages still cannot be received after changing the setting value check the communication protocol setting of the corresponding interface the ON status of the displayed LED and the connection cable When the first part of a response message cannot be received Increase the setting value of the message wait time the default value is 0 ms See Section 6 4 of the User s Manual Application If response messages still cannot be received after increasing the setting value it is necessary to reduce the processing time from the end of transmission processing to the start of reception processing on the external device side 11 50 11 TROUBLESHOOTIN See MELSEC Q 11 3 14 Undecodable data are transmitted or received Symptom Corrective action Bidirectional procedure Pre defined e With a multidrop link e Connect the external devices and the Q series two or more devices C24 in a 1 1 configuration and perform a transmitted data at the communications test same time Since data is transmitted simultaneously from two or more devices with a multidrop link when normal data communications among all the devices is possible interlock the external devices so that they do not transmit simultaneously e Data does not match _ Match the Q series C24 and external device the parity bit setting parity bit settings
399. nsmission Turns OFF the transmission request signal Abnormal completion of transmission Transmission result acquisition instruction Reads the data transmission result of the buffer memory to D20 Normal completion of REMFR instruction Abnormal completion of REMFR instruction Turns OFF the transmission request signal App 44 APPENDIXES Appendix 9 6 When clearing received data App 45 MELSEC Q The following program example uses the receive data clear request area of the buffer memory Refer to Section 6 1 4 for received data clear 1 Program conditions The following program clears the received data in the OS area of the QJ71C24N when the receive clear command X1025 turns ON a b Devices used e Receive Clear command ecccecceeceeeeeteteeeeeteceteeteeteeeeaeeeaes X1025 e Receive clear processing execution command ce M10 e Receive clear command pulse Signal cccceceeeeeeeees M15 e Receive clear acceptance flag 0 eeceeeeeeeeceteeeeeeetetteeeeees M16 e Receive Clearing flag eeeeeseeeeeneeeneeeereeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeas M17 e Communication disable flag eeeeeeeeeeeeneeeneeeeeeeneeeteeees M18 e Communication enable flag ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenteeneeeeeees M19 Completion check flag cee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeaeeas M20 e Receive clear processing execution status acquisition feola alane LaO EEEE EE die deendtas cevedts s
400. nsmission area in the buffer memory with GX Configurator SC specify as follows Transmission buffer memory head address designation Designate the starting address for the area to be used as the transmission area in the user definable area address 400H to 1AFFu 2600H to 3FFFH Transmission buffer memory length designation Designate by addresses the length of the area 0001H to 1A00n to be used as the transmission area in the user definable area address 4004 to 1AFFH 2600H to 3FFFH When changing the position and size of the receive area in the buffer memory if any of the functions below are used concurrently make sure that the addresses of the transmission area do not overlap with the buffer memory addresses assigned for storing transmission receive data with the functions MC protocol buffer memory read write function MC protocol on demand function Non procedure protocol transmission receive function Bidirectional protocol transmission receive function Pre defined protocol function transmission reception data storage area Communication data monitoring function 2 Set the size of data per data transmission from the programmable controller CPU to the external device so that it is smaller than the size of the transmission data s designated area in the buffer memory Transmission data designation area 2 Size of arbitrary data portion to be sent from the programmable controller CPU To transmit data whose size is la
401. nto the base unit using the hook at the top of the module However it is recommended to secure the module with the module fixing screw if the module is subject to significant vibration 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 2 Settings and Procedures Prior to Operation The outline of the procedure before operation is shown below Check which functions and specifications are to be used Connection of the Q series C24 and an external device Connect the module with an See Section 4 4 in this manual external device using a cable y Connect GX Developer and QCPU with a cable y Perform various settings with GX Developer I O assignment setting of the Q series C24 Setting of operation mode and transmission specifications for the Q series C24 and the external device See Section 4 5 in this manual ROM RAM switch tests of the Q series C24 Self loopback test of the Q series C24 See Section 4 7 in this manual Perform individual station tests with GX Developer e When communication using the MC protocol is possible between the Q series C24 and the external device set the operation mode for MC protocol communication and perform a loopback test e See Section 4 8 in this manual Perform a loopback test from the external device y Set an operation mode with GX Developer Set an operation mode for the data communication system between the Q series C
402. nual Application Section 3 2 1 of User s Manual Basic User s Manual Application OE User s Manual Application Chapters 6 and 7 of User s Manual Basic are y 20304 to 21304 to Chapter 12 of Transmission transparent code designation 2nd to 10th ae 2038H 2138H User s Manual Application Receive transparent code designation s Chapter 13 of ASCII BIN conversion designation 121H 1C1H SY User s Manual Application beui Chapter 4 of Receive interrupt issued designation 2010H 2110H 13 User s Manual Application f Section 3 3 4 of Echo back enable disable setting for RS 422 485 I F 102H User s Manual Basic 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 9 6 4 MC protocol monitor Purpose Monitor the status and setting values of the data communication using the MC protocol Operating procedure Monitor screen gt CHO MC protocol monitor Monitor screen 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q Monitor items ea ffer TE a address Transmission sequence status On demand execution result Data transmission result Data reception result MC protocol transmission error code X00 CH1 Transmission normal T T CH2 T leti ransmission normal completion Chapter 10 of X01 CH1 Transmission abnormal eee e 7 s User s Manual Basic X08 CH2 Transmission abnormal E e e X02 CH1 Transmission processing in progress Sections 3 10 and 3 11 of X09 CH2 Transmissio
403. o olo x exs setings montor bufferhead aae Jofo TO FO x xi lMontorbufersee Jojolo olk XIX Transmission transparent code designation 2nd to x 10th Echo back enable disable setting for RS 422 485 I F EREKE zei Non procedure User frame receive format designation 1st to 4th FOKON LOJO FOS Section xclusive format 1 received data count 1st to B system setting Exclusive format 1 received data count 1st to 4th x Non procedure Section App 4 App 4 APPENDIXES MELSEC Q Software version Reference Screen Additional setting item section Operating Protocol cancel specification definded protocol Pre defined function protocol a 2 monitor test Execution status Section Communication error clear request for CHO and to 9 6 10 Monitor test others tum LED off FIA Section 9 6 10 Section 11 1 7 PLC CPU information clear request Accumulated count of unlock process normal completion setting completion 4 6 disconnect O Setting possible X Setting impossible 1 GX Configurator SC SWOD5C QSCU E 20C or later supports the Q series C24 of function version B 2 See Section 2 8 of this manual for how to check the software version of GX Configurator SC Appendix 1 2 Precautions When Updating the Module from Function Version A to B This section explains how to utilize programs created for the Q series C24 of function version A for the Q series C24 of function version B and how to
404. o 0 Designate the transmission data count in word units Designate K10 when the unit is bytes y The transmission data stored in the designated device is sent After the BIDOUT instruction is executed J the user designated transmission complete signal M1 turns ON for one scan Storing the transmission data and writing the transmission data count in the buffer memory and issuing a transmission request to the Q series C24 are all executed by the programmable controller CPU The completion flag is reset by the external command 7 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL MELSEC Q Q series C24 Address Buffer memory 257H Data transmission result For normal completion DO Interface number 00011 D1 Transmission result 0000 Transmission data count designation D2 Transmission data count 0005n 0A0Dn For abnormal completion DO Interface number 00011 D1 Transmission result other than 0000 From buffer memory address 2571 D2 Transmission data count 0005n D11 to Transmission data to psl S OAODn 1 The SPBUSY instruction is used to read the execution status when using a dedicated instruction See Chapter 10 2 More than one BIDOUT instruction cannot be executed simultaneously Execute the next BIDOUT instruction only after the execution of the first BIDOUT instruction is completed 7 DATA COMMUNICATION U
405. o 1A00x to be used as the transmission area in the user definable area address 400H to 1AFFH 2600H to 3FFFx b When changing the position and size of the receive area in the buffer memory if any of the functions below are used concurrently make sure that the addresses of the transmission area do not overlap with the buffer memory addresses assigned for storing transmission receive data with the functions 1 MC protocol buffer memory read write function MC protocol on demand function Non procedure protocol transmission receive function Bidirectional protocol transmission receive function Pre defined protocol function transmission reception data storage area Communication data monitoring function 2 Set the size of data per data transmission from the programmable controller CPU to the external device to be smaller than the size of the transmission data designation area in the buffer memory Transmission data designation area gt Size of data portion to be sent from the programmable controller CPU To transmit data whose size is larger than the transmission data designation area increase the transmission area or divide the transmission data before sending 7 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 2 Transmission data arrangement The following example shows an arrangement of the transmission data to be sent to the external device when storing it in the transmission area Example When ABC
406. o RS 422 converters or similar device is used at the external device at both ends of the circuit a terminal resistor must be set or connected at the converter When using the RS 232 to RS 422 converters to connect the external devices and the Q series C24 use a converter that is compatible with the external device and programmable controller CPU system configuration 1 1 1 n m n Device connected to the Q series C24 RS 422 485 interface must be standardized as RS 422 or RS 485 including 1 n n 1 and m n connections 2 Connection examples a External device and Q series C24 with 1 1 system configuration Q series C24 External device Signal name Terminal resistor RDA ieee ats Roa C81 se SDA ae SDB RSA RSB CSA CSB Signal name Terminal resistor SG FG 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q b External device and Q series C24 with 1 n multidrop system configuration 1 Connection example External device C24 1 C24 2 C24n SDA Hod i RI so RDA R RDB D RS 232 SD Te S Oe i I RD RD FG Garaa pee IN E RS 422 485 RS 422 485 cable cable Linked Terminal operation TRI resistor 2 Connection example 2 External device C24 1 C24 2 C24n face eae py ee ae ee in SDA SDA 1 1 SDA I ot l R SDB SDB h snp R RDA RDA l tL RDA
407. o request Stop monitor Execute Sy Close 1 Display the Monitor test others screen 2 Select any of Request 1 to 3 for Communication error clear request for CHO and to turn LED off Setting range Target of LED off communication error information initialization Request 1 SIO PRO P S C N NAK ERR LED 1 Request 2 SD WAIT ACK NEU LED Request 3 All of Requests 1 and 2 x1 The ERR LED is turned off However it is not turned off if an error has occurred on either the CH1 or CH2 side 3 Click on Execute test 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 9 7 Non Procedure Protocol Receive Data Clear This section explains how to clear the received data using the non procedure protocol By using this function the receive data can be cleared from GX Configurator SC while the communication with the non procedure protocol is still in progress without resetting the programmable controller CPU or turning off the power Operation procedure Procedure 1 Display the Non procedure monitor test screen See Section 9 6 5 Procedure 2 Set Clear request issued for Receive data clear request Procedure 3 Click on Execute test The received data will be cleared Clear the received data when transmission reception are not in progress with the external device Executing a receive data clear while the data transmission is in progress causes the Q series C24 to stop the data transmissio
408. o the transmission user frame designation area of the buffer memory J Turns ON the transmission request signal J Abnormal completion of REMTO instruction J Normal completion of transmission Turns OFF the transmission request signal J Abnormal completion of transmission J Transmission result acquisition instruction J Reads the data transmission result of the buffer memory to D20 Normal completion of REMFR instruction J Abnormal completion of REMFR instruction J Turns OFF the transmission request signal App 49 APPENDIXE z MELSEC Q Appendix 9 8 When performing initial setting The following program example performs initial setting using the REMTO instruction Execute this program when changing the default values of the Q series C24 buffer memory Refer to Chapter 8 when changing the default values of the Q series C24 buffer memory using GX Configurator SC 1 Program conditions The following program performs initial setting on the CH1 side when the initial setting command X1027 turns ON a Devices used Initial Setting commanderen eii X1027 Initial setting command pulse Signal ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees M10 e Initial setting command 2 00 ec eceeeeeteeeteteeeteeeteeeteeeteeeeeneeees M11 Initial Setting command 3 0 ce eceeeeeteeeteteeeteeeteeeteeeteneteneeees M12 e Completion device for REMTO instruction ee M100 to105 e Normal abnormal co
409. ocedure 4 Checking the results of an individual loopback test 1 This test is performed repeatedly When the ERR LED is off the test is being executed normally 2 The test is completed with an error when the ERR LED is lit Check the error description on one of the following screens The ERR LED is lit upon error occurrence and the test is completed The Monitor test others screen of GX Configurator SC see Section 9 6 10 e The buffer memory monitor screen of GX Developer see the GX Developer Manual for operation method x When checking for errors in the buffer memory monitor screen of GX Developer monitor the LED ON status and communication error status address 201H 202n Check the error descriptions on the screens by bit decoding the monitored value 16 bit integer Each bit corresponds to the following error description Buffer memory monitored Description when corresponding i Address CH1 side CH2 side bit is on Corrective action Bit location 2014 2024 bO to b3 Oooo o T f F Remove errors occurring in the CPU Error occurrence in the CPU module odile u Not enough power supply capacity Examine the power supply capacity Module is not mounted correctly Reinstall the module properly Check each module and remove the cause of the error Reconnect the cable correctly Reinstall the module correctly b5 to b13 o o S CH2 ERR CH2 side communication error Reconnect the cable correctly CH1 ERR
410. ocessing during the non procedure protocol The user should not change data values control data request data etc designated by a dedicated instruction until the execution of the dedicated instruction is completed 1 To change the following values preset in the buffer memory for use of dedicated instructions use GX Configurator SC or execute the CSET instruction Initial setting before starting data exchange See the User s Manual Application Section 17 4 e Word byte units designation address 96H 136nH e Buffer memory head address designation for on demand function designation address AOH 140n e Transmission buffer memory head address designation address A2H 142n e Transmission buffer memory length designation address A3H 143H e Receive buffer memory head address designation address A6H 146n e Receive buffer memory length designation address A7H 147n The dedicated instructions are executed based on the values preset in the buffer memory at module startup or those that have been changed by the CSET instruction Initial setting 10 10 1 10 1 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q 2 Available devices The following devices are available for the dedicated instructions Internal devices f x2 Eq File register Constant XY MLFV B T ST CD W x1 Word device bit designation can be used as bit data Word device bit designation is done by designating Word device Bit No Design
411. odule Start 1 0 No 000 When auto refresh is set 2 Go to next page Parameter setting module Flash ROM settings screen Module information Start 170 No Module model name Initial setting Auto refresh TOCCANI AA Unavailable Module type Serial Communications Module Module model name QJ71C24 N nan Aona Delete Ew Setting item Setting value User frame User frame Data for user modem initialization Data for modem init Data for modem connection Data for modem conn See Section 9 3 2 eea ree CH1 Transmission control and others system setting CH1 Transmission control i e 7 CH1 MC protocol system setting CH1 MC protocol When used via offline operation CHT Non procedure system seting CHT Non procedure File save File read See Section 9 4 Select Tools Flash ROM setting from the menu bar Flash ROM setting E Module type Module model name QI71C24N xl Select the module type and To each setting screen module model name User frame p Module information Module type Serial Communications Module Cancel Module model name QJ71C24 N Setting tem Setting value a The data which can be changed is shown by Hff and the following byte Please specily the registering part of the control code as code Hex Ex 02024 03 in case of registerin
412. of the error during NAK response For more details on the error codes see Chapter 11 1 For data communication from the external device to the Q series C24 For error codes from the external device transmit the codes specified by the user The error codes 0022H to 005F x that are not used by the Q series C24 can be used The Q series C24 stores the received error codes as a completion status in the control code for the BIDOUT instruction They are also stored in the data transmission result address 257n For data communication from the Q series C24 to the external device The error codes are added by the Q series C24 When an error code is transmitted the Q series C24 writes the same error code in the data reception result address 258p 7 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 7 1 3 Sequence program for data reception This section explains the sequence program for data reception For details on the BIDIN instruction for data reception see Chapter 10 X3 Read request CH1 Create control data from DO 1p Processing for normal completion stores receive data etc Q series C24 ready X1E Reception data read request X3 BIDIN instruction BIDIN instruction complete device BIDIN instruction complete device 1 Normal completion Receive data count address 6004 Receive data address 601H to 7FFH Data reception Respons
413. ol execution log storage function allows you to confirm the detailed pre defined protocol execution status and results for each channel Up to 32 protocol execution logs can be checked If the number of the stored logs exceeds 32 the oldest log will be overwritten 1 Checking methods The following two checking methods are available a GX Configurator SC Pre defined protocol support function The logs can be checked in the Protocol execution log dialog box For details refer to the Operating Manual Pre defined protocol support function b Checking the buffer memory The logs can be checked in the Execution log storage area address 4102H to 4701H CH1 4802H to 4E01H CH2 For details refer to Section 3 9 Do not perform the above two methods at the same time The latest execution logs are not in the buffer memory while they are being updated in GX Configurator SC Pre defined protocol support function 2 Setting for protocol execution logs Whether to store all protocol execution logs or only the failed protocols in the Execution log storage area can be specified The following shows how the Execution log options area address 40E2H 40F2n in the buffer memory is set b15 bO Buffer memory address ft 40E2H 40F2H registration condition O OFF Register failed protocols only 1 ON Register all protocol execution states and results 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 9 UTILI
414. oller CPU to the external device via the Q series C24 By default the transmission area is assigned to addresses 400H to 5FFH CH1 side and 800H to 9FFH CH2 side address Buffer memory 400x 4014 to Transmission area 5FFu Transmission data count designation eee Transmission data designation Default The unit of transmission data count words bytes is in accordance with the word byte units designation in QSCU e Transmission data count The transmission data count designated with the BIDOUT instruction is written and sent as the data length Transmission data The transmission data designated with the BIDOUT instruction is written and then sent 7 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 1 The position and size of the transmission area in the buffer memory can be changed with GX Configurator SC in accordance with the specifications of the external device and the transmission data length See Section 9 4 5 a When changing the position and size of the transmission area in the buffer memory with GX Configurator SC designate as follows Transmission buffer memory head address designation Designate the starting address for the area to be used as the transmission area in the user definable area address 400H to 1AFFu 2600H to 3FFFH Transmission buffer memory length designation Designate by addresses the length of the area 0001H t
415. ommunication setting utilities The user only needs to select settings from menus displayed on the screen in an interactive manner to achieve the communication settings required to access the target programmable controller CPU Moreover once the communication setting has been performed it is possible to access the programmable controller CPU simply by specifying the logical station number that is stored via the communication setting utilities App 24 App 24 APPENDIXE MELSEC Q 3 Support for wide choice of basic operating systems MX Component can run on IBM PC AT compatible personal computers running the following basic operating systems e Microsoft Windows 95 Operating System e Microsoft Windows 98 Operating System e Microsoft Windows NT Workstation Operating System Version 4 0 e Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition Operating System Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Operating System Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition Operating System e Microsoft Windows Vista Home Basic Operating System Microsoft Windows Vista Home Premium Operating System Microsoft Windows Vista Business Operating System Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate Operating System Microsoft Windows Vista Enterprise Operating System e e 4 Support for a wide variety of programming languages MX Component supports the following programming languages It allows the user
416. on is read Read and discard receive data as needed 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q Programmable Q series C24 controller CPU Receive area P Si Reception buffer memory Reception error causing data RUN Receive data o PEH count storage 3 Receive oo SCO el area 00n 03x Head data complete code bad data 411 02x stx A B c D E F G H lex INPUT storage area C B i 02u 414 421 43x 44H 45x 46x 47H 48x 03H instruction 6S0 02a lt 4 i 451 44n Transmission data External device Q series C24 ready X1E Reception data read request X3 Reception abnormal detection X4 INPUT instruction INPUT instruction complete device INPUT instruction complete device 1 normal completion abnormal completion Receive data count address 600n Receive data addresses 6011 to Receive data ERR LED lights up J Reception abnormal detection data Data reception x When the data from G to in the reception message shown in the figure above is received normally the data is stored in the Q series C24 OS area The receive data stored in the OS area will be read to the programmable controller CPU in the succeeding read operation 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 6 1 6 Received data count and receive complete code settings The following defa
417. on procedure ee Pre defined protocol R EREET Check the error code and execute A modem initialization error occurs g A processing accordingly a inc Modem connection channel designation Set Modem connection channel Auto modem initialization 3 is not performed designation cannot be executed __ Review the switch settings Set it to There is an error in the switch settings in aT the local station modem and the the GX Developer Communication protocol setting is Set the communication protocol to MC Data cannot be incorrect protocol format 5 communicated with GX __ Transmission setting does not match the Developer supporting the external device e Review the transmission setting Q series C24 Communication rate does not match the external device The product is not supported by the GX Confirm the GX Developer s S W Developer version The GX Developer does Check the GX Developer s connection not receive the callback There was an error in the GX Developer system e Review the communication rate setting signals from the Q Series connection system Set the connection system on callback C24 reception waiting and connect There is an error in the GX Developer Set the modem s settings on Auto side s modem settings Reception There s an error in the GX Developer s Checkthe SX Developer siconnection Callback connections c nneciionsystem sy
418. on protocol setting error 7FF2h occurs 10 8 10 8 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Error 10 9 MELSEC Q 3 Whether an OUTPUT instruction was completed normally or abnormally can be checked by the completion device D or status display device at completion D 1 a Completion device Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the OUTPUT instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing b Status display device at completion Turns on and off depending on the completion status of the OUTPUT instruction e Normal completion Off with no change Abnormal completion Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the OUTPUT instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing Operation during execution of an OUTPUT instruction END END END END Sequence processing processing processing processing program Completion of transmission by ieee cuner or OUTPUT ye the OUTPUT instruction instruction OUTPUT instruction 1 1 1 I 1 1ON 1 1 1 Completion device OFF Abnormal i at completion Normal t completion One scan i i Status display device OFF i i 1 When a dedicated instruction is completed abnormally the abnormal completion signal D 1 turns on and the error code is stored in the transmission result S1 1 In case of operation errors the error flag SMO turns on and the error code is stored in the SDO See one of the followi
419. onitored on the Q series C24 side It should be connected as needed The RI signal is not needed to be connected when the modem is not connected 2 The ON and OFF states of each signal indicate the following conditions Output side Input side ON e 5 V DC to 15 V DC 3 V DC to 15 V DC OFF ee 15 V DC to 5 V DC 15 V DC to 3 V DC 3 Interface connector The following RS 232 interface connector is used for the Q series C24 e DDK Ltd 9 pin D sub female screw type 17L 10090 27 D9AC FA Use one of the following as a connector shell for the connection cable of the Q series C24 side e DDK Ltd Plug shell 17JE 23090 02 D8A CG 3 SPECIFICATIONS 1 Confirmation of RS 232 control signal status MELSEC Q Each status of the control signals DTR DSR RS and CD can be confirmed in RS 232 control signal status address 254H 264n Buffer memory address l Bit position CH1 side b6 to b15 x1 System area for QJ71C24 R2 2 Designation of RS and DTR signal status CH2 side The ON OFF status of the RS or DTR signal which is normally set by the Q series C24 can be specified by turning ON OFF the come ponding bi bit in RS x1 k2 gt k and DTR signal status designation address 92H 132h b15 b3 b2 b1 b0 Buffer memory address 92 132 1 0 1 0 Default 0005 L J System li RS DTR 1 0N 0 OFF x1 The RS signal is controlled by the Q series
420. or callback designation 6 a No for callback designation 7 a No for callback designation 8 a No for callback designation 9 a No for callback designation 10 For callback function Use prohibited System area Programmable controller CPU monitoring function operation status 0 Not executed waiting for registration of programmable controller CPU monitoring 1 Wait for programmable controller CPU monitoring time waiting to access programmable controller CPU 2 Accessing programmable controller CPU Programmable 3 Sending monitoring results controller CPU monitoring function Programmable controller CPU monitoring function execution result current 0 Normal completion 1 or more Abnormal completion error code Programmable controller CPU monitoring function number of transmission 0 Not executed 1 or more Number of transmissions The structure of each area is the same as the first block monitoring device MELSEC Q Registration Allowed Reference section Applicable protocol Mc Non Bi Pa Initial value Chapter 2 of User s Manual Application R Ww Chapter 2 of User s Manual Application Allowed Section 9 4 4 Chapter 3 of User s Manual Application Allowed Chapter 2 of Not allowed User s Manual Application PECIFICATION eS AC al MELSEC Q Address sy 2 ant Initial Protocol y s Reference Decimal Hex Application Name valu Registra
421. or framing error Therefore skip the erroneous data Since the first data during data reception is fixed in the following cases also skip the receive data until the fixed head data is received e When using an MC protocol to send data the first data is fixed according to the frame and format the user uses e When transferring data using user frames with non procedure protocol or bidirectional protocol the first data is selected according to the user frame that the user registers to the Q series C24 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 2 RS 422 485 interface operation 1 RS 422 485 interface construction The following illustration shows the construction of the Q series C24 RS 422 485 interface driver send receiver receive 1 Output control input also called send gate of the driver send section of the illustration at the left determines whether or not data from SDA SDB is output to the outside 2 RS 422 485 interface operation When the Output control input in the illustration above is ON the interface enters the low impedance state state in which data can be sent When the Output control input is OFF the interface enters the high impedance state state in which data cannot be sent Timing to start sending and to complete the transmission processing for the Q series C24 e Timing to start sending During data transmission the Q series C24 outputs the actual data after sending a mark for 2 characters
422. or the external device GX Configurator SC Pre defined protocol support function allows simple protocol setting required for communication with the external device thermal regulator barcode reader etc A protocol can be selected from the pre defined protocol library or newly created and edited Communication control programs appropriate to the target device such as programs for creating send packets and analyzing receive packets can be eliminated This can reduce the steps for creating programs b Writing registered protocol setting data to the flash ROM reduces the volume of the program to be written the programmable controller CPU The following is the procedure for the pre defined protocol communication 1 In GX Configurator SC Pre defined protocol support function select a protocol of the external device and write protocol setting data to the flash ROM of the QJ71C24N R2 R4 2 With a dedicated instruction CPRTCL execute the protocol written to the flash ROM GX Configurator SC Pre defined protocol support function 1 Write protocol setting data of the external device to the flash ROM of the QJ71C24N R2 R4 External device Send packet lt M Receive packet NTAH 2 Execute the protocol with the dedicated instruction CPRTCL c Use of the dedicated instruction CPRTCL allows a continuous execution of up to eight proto
423. otocol Execution log options 40E2H 40F2H execution log 0 Error logs of failed protocol executions are stored RW Allowed Section 8 1 3 specification 1 Execution states and logs of all protocols are stored PECIFICATION ees A ae MELSEC Q Address Decimal T 2 Initial Protocol Pa Reference Hex Application value Registration section Mc Non Bi Pa 16611 to 16627 to 16623 16639 40E3u to 40F3x to 40EFH 40FFx Number of stored protocol execution logs 16640 18432 0 No I 41001 48001 HINO 109 1 to 32 Number of stored o mn er 2 ore ogs Not allowed Section 8 1 4 Protocol execution log write pointer 16641 18433 4101H 4801H 0 Noilog 1 to 32 Latest protocol execution log No 16642 18434 System area use prohibited Checking y use p protocol Protocol No 16643 18435 execution logs 0 No log Section 8 1 3 4103 H 48031 1 to 128 Protocol No Operating Execution 201 to 207 Functional protocol No Manual Pre ae External device model Not allowed defined 0 Protocol unexecuted protocol Other than 0 External device model support Up to 32 bytes are stored in ASCII function codes Use prohibited System area 16643 to 18436 to 3 SPECIFICATIONS Address Decimal Hex CH1 16676 18468 4124n 4824n 16677 18469 4125H 48251 16678 18470 41261 48261 4 16679 18471 41271 48271 18472 48281 16
424. otocol function error code 0000 0000 Normal Other than 0000 Error Execution log options Eror logs Error logs Number of protocol executions 0j Flash ROM setting Details Write to Curent value Monitoring module Save file display Cannot execute test Read from module Load file Make text file Stop monitor Pre defined protocol monitor test items X1D Pre defined protocol ready The ON OFF status of X1D can be confirmed Operating Manual The cancel status of the pre defined protocol can be Pre defined protocol Protocol cancellation confirmed support function Execution status The protocol execution status can be confirmed Section 8 1 4 Pre defined protocol function error An error code for the pre defined protocol function can be Sedona ection 11 2 code confirmed Condition for registering protocol execution logs can be confirmed and specified i Section 8 1 4 Execution log options i Operating Manual The specification will take effect when the dedicated Pre defined protocol instruction CPRTCL is executed ieee Pee support function Failed protocol execution logs are stored All logs All protocol execution logs are stored Number of protocol executions The number of protocol executions can be confirmed Section 3 9 8 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE PRE DEFINED PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 8 1 4 Protocol execution log storage function The protoc
425. points rea 8376 8385 8294 8303 8312 8321 8330 8339 8348 8357 Monitoring condition designation Judgment 2054H 205DH 2066H 206FH 2078H 2081H 208AH 2093H 209CH 20A5H condition designation 8277 8286 8295 8304 8313 8322 8331 8340 8349 8358 Monitoring condition value designati 2055x 205EH 20671 20704 20794 20821 208BH 20941 209DH 20A6H ONY condon value designation 8278 8287 8296 8305 8314 8323 8332 8341 8350 8359 Transmission pointer designation for 2056H 205FH 2068H 2071H 207AH 2083H 208CH 2095H 209EH 20A7H conditional transmission data transmission 8279 8288 8297 8306 8315 8324 8333 8342 8351 8360 Designation of number of outputs for 2057H 2060H 2069H 2072H 207BH 2084H 208DH 2096H 209FH 20A8H conditional transmission data transmission 8280 8289 8298 8307 8316 8325 8334 8343 8352 8361 Designation of data No for connection 2058H 2061H 206AH 2073H 207CH 2085H 208EH 2097H 20A0H 20A9H for conditional transmission and notification b CH2 side buffer memory address decimal hexadecimal N th block monitoring device 5 6 8528 8537 8546 8555 8564 8573 8582 8591 8600 8609 2150H 2159H 2162H 216BH 21741 217DH 2186H 218FH 2198H 21A1H Monitoring device designatio
426. program comments etc and other applications and then start Intelligent function module utility again from GX Developer To start the intelligent function module utility a In GX Developer select QCPU Q mode for PLC series and specify a project If any PLC series other than QCPU Q mode is selected or if no project is specified the Intelligent function module utility will not start b Multiple Intelligent function module utilities can be started However Open parameters and Save parameters operations under Intelligent function module parameter are allowed for one Intelligent function module utility only Only the Monitor test operation is allowed for the other utilities Switching between two or more Intelligent function module utilities When two or more Intelligent function module utility screens cannot be displayed side by side select a screen to be displayed on the top of others using the task bar A Start MELSOFT series GX Deve Intelligent function Module JA Intelligent function M 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 6 Number of parameters that can be set in GX Configurator SC When multiple intelligent function modules are mounted the number of parameter settings must not exceed the following limit When intelligent function modules are Maximum number of parameter settings installed to umuucmmuregiuery __ __siz__ _asg__ gozucpu i O Q03UD Q04UDH Q06UDH Q10UDH Q13UDH Q20
427. protocol 6 Continued on next page 3 1 3 1 PECIFICATION eS Sle ah MELSEC Q Continued from preceding page Specifications lem QU71C24N QU71C24N R2 QU71024 OU71024 RO QU71C24N R4 ria RS 232 RS 422 485 DTR DSR ER DR control Enabled Disabled sat RS CS control Enabled Disabled Transmission control CD signal control Enabled Disabled DC1 DC3 Xon Xoff control DC2 DC4 control Enabled oo e DTR DSR signal control and DC code control are selected by the user Line configuration RS 232 Fe T a T O Connection 2 RS 422 485 1 4 1 n n 1 m n DOO oas 1 1 1 n n 1 m n 3 i ae communication RS 232 Non proced protocol 1 1 1 1 communicati Bidirectional protocols 1 1 1 1 communicati a K 1 1 1 1 communication 6 Line configuration Data communication MC protocols 2 communication 1 1 1 n m n 1 1 1 n m n Non proced protocol communicati RS 422 protocols 1 1 1 1 communicati communication 6 distance Overall i een Geen overall distance overall distance 32 points per slot I O assignment Intelli 32 points 3 7 0 127 OP HRV SV Outside diameter 8 5mm 0 33in or more Recommended Oki Electric Cable Co Ltd Applicable number is specified in O cable SPEV SB MPC 0 2 X 3P Outside diameter approx 6 5mm 0 26 in Mitsubishi Cable Industries LTD SPEV SB 0 2 X 3P Outside diameter approx 7 5mm 0 3 in Mitsubishi Cable Industries LTD
428. r bidirectional protocol 0007H Station number setting Station 0 00001 c Buffer memory settings used in this example DE aA Decimal Hexadecimal Setting Name value ____ 96H Word byte units designation 162 A2H Transmission buffer memory head address designation 04001 163 A3H Transmission buffer memory length designation 02001 599 257H Data transmission result MS App 43 APPENDIXES 2 Program example lt Transmission command gt X1024 X1000 X1001 Y1000 H if PLS lt Setting of transmission data gt M10 X101E m0v ABCDEFGH vov HOAGD mov K5 Z RENTO J1 KI KI HO H400 D10 K6 lt Transmission request gt M100 M101 SE M101 SE lt Processing for normal completion gt X1000 E f SE RS lt Processing for abnormal completion gt X1001 SE PLS lt Abnormal completion Read of data transmission result gt M11 X101E H HH REWFR Ul KI KI HO H257 D20 KI M102 M103 H SET M103 e LSET RST App 44 Y1000 M200 M300 Y1000 M301 M11 M102 M201 M202 Y1000 MELSEC Q Changes the transmission command into pulses Sets the transmission data Sets the transmission data count Transfers the setting value to the communication area of the buffer memory Turns ON the transmission request signal Abnormal completion of REMTO instruction Normal completion of tra
429. r explains the basic transmission and reception methods when performing data communication using the non procedure protocol Follow the procedure described in this chapter to create sequence programs for sending and receiving data for the programmable controller CPU For details on the additional functions listed below for data communication using the non procedure protocol see the separate User s Manuals Application Sending receiving data using user frames See Chapter 11 Application Monitoring the programmable controller CPU automatic information function See Chapter 2 Application Switching modes from the programmable controller CPU See Chapter 15 Application Reading received data using interrupt programs See Chapter 4 Application Sending receiving data using transparent code designation See Chapter 12 Application Sending receiving data using ASCII data ASCII BIN conversion See Chapter 13 Application Controlling half duplex communication See Chapter 8 Application e e 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 6 1 Data Reception from the External Device This section explains data reception from the external device There are two methods for receiving data the reception via receive complete code for receiving variable length messages and the reception via received data count for receiving fixed length messages The receive complete code and received data count used for d
430. r how to display each setting screen Parameter setting items for the Q series C24 mounted to a MELECNET H remote I O station Parameter setting item Setting Remarks I O Assignment Set the module mounting information See Section 4 5 1 Set the transmission specification and the Switch setting for I O and A haa communication protocol for communication See Section 4 5 2 intelligent function module i with the external device User s Manual Application Remote password setting Perform settings for the remote password Section 3 3 3 POINT 1 Connect GX Developer to a MELECNET H remote I O station and set the parameters 2 Reset the MELECNET H remote I O station after changing the setting 4 When monitoring setting with GX Configurator SC a About the automatic refresh setting 1 Use GX Developer to perform Read from PLC Write to PLC of data created by the automatic refresh setting It cannot be performed from GX Configurator SC 2 The devices used for the automatic refresh setting must be of the types M B D or W 1 GX Configurator SC should be connected to a MELECNET H remote I O station before the monitoring setting 2 The MELECNET H remote I O station should be reset after changing the setting 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 2 7 Use with C Controller Module This section describes how the Q series C24 is used with a C Controller module When using
431. r in an environment outside the range of the general specifications may cause electric shock fire malfunction and damage to or deterioration of the product e While pressing the installation lever located at the bottom of module insert the module fixing tab into the fixing hole in the base unit until it stops Then securely mount the module with the fixing hole as a supporting point If the module is not installed properly it may cause the module to malfunction fail or fall off Secure the module with screws especially when it is used in an environment where constant vibrations may occur e Tighten the screws within the range of specified torque If the screws are loose it may cause the module to fallout short circuits or malfunction If the screws are tightened too much it may cause damage to the screw and or the module resulting in fallout short circuits or malfunction e Before mounting dismounting the module be sure to shut off all phases of external power supply used by the system Failure to do so may cause product damage e Do not directly touch the conductive area or electronic components of the module Doing so may cause malfunction or failure in the module Wiring Instructions CAUTION e When turning on the power and operating the module after installation and wiring are completed always attach the terminal cover that comes with the product There is a risk of electric shock if the terminal cover is not attac
432. r request and to turn LED off address 0H 1h 2 To turn off the ERR LED and clear the error code turn ON the ERR clear request YE YF Example To perform the ERR LED OFF and the error code clear on the CH1 side Read command MI YOE XOE 7 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 2 Confirmation using the module and GX Configurator SC 7 1 5 Receive data clear 1 Confirmation using the display LED When the Q series C24 detects an error including a transmission error the ERR LED lights up See Chapter 11 Confirmation using GX Configurator SC The monitor function is used to check for errors See Sections 9 6 3 and 9 6 6 The ERR LED is turned off with the ERR LED OFF function See Section 9 6 11 Confirming the error code Use one of the following to confirm the error code GX Configurator SC monitor function See Section 9 6 6 e GX Developer buffer memory monitor function monitors addresses 258H 268n Handling of receive data when a reception error occurs 1 All of the receive data for which an error was detected is ignored and a response message indicating an abnormal completion NAK message is sent to the external device x When an error is detected during message reception the Q series C24 does not issue a reception data read request to the programmable controller CPU The receive area in the buffer memory will contain the data received normally just pr
433. r the error code turn ON the ERR clear request YE YF Example To perform the ERR LED OFF and the error code clear on the CH1 side INPUT instruction Completion device 1 MI 1 YOE XOE 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 2 Confirmation using the module and GX Configurator SC 1 2 Confirmation using the display LED When the Q series C24 detects an error including a transmission error the ERR LED lights up See Chapter 11 Confirmation using GX Configurator SC The monitor function is used to check for errors See Sections 9 6 3 and 9 6 5 The ERR LED is turned off with the ERR LED OFF function See Section 9 6 10 Confirming the error code Use one of the following to confirm the error code GX Configurator SC monitor function See Section 9 6 5 e GX Developer buffer memory monitor function monitors addresses 258H 268n Receive data when a reception error occurs a Storing receive data The receive data for which an error was detected is discarded and only the normally received data is stored in the Q series C24 Thus there may be missing data among the data that has been read to the programmable controller CPU when a reception error occurs Reading receive data When receive data is read to the programmable controller CPU by turning the reception abnormal detection X4 XB ON the data that was normally received prior to the error detecti
434. rammable controller CPU monitoring Programmable Programmable controller CPU monitoring Programmable controller CPU monitoring function Communications using the bidirectional protocol Data reception by interrupt program Communications using the pre defined protocol Communications using dedicated instructions Communications via public line etc modem function oun Transmission DC code control including Xon Xoff control Control DTR DSR ER DR control Communications protocol switching Independent linked operation of each interface Initial setting and monitoring testing of setting values by the utility package O See 4 Connecting the GX Developer Available Xx Not available 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 1 The following functions are available when communicating with the MELSECNET H remote I O station using the MC protocol Available function Function Device memory read write Batch read and batch write Random read test random write Monitor data registration monitoring Batch read of multiple blocks batch write of multiple blocks Buffer memory read write Reading writing from to the buffer memory of the Q series C24 Reading writing buffer memory of an Reading writing from to the buffer memory of the specified intelligent function module intelligent function module The following devices of a MELSECNET H remote I O station can be ac
435. ransmission control procedure for the Q series C24 bidirectional protocol between external devices and programmable controller CPUs Any external devices that can install application programs and transmit and receive data in accordance with the MELSEC programmable controller protocol can communicate with the programmable controller CPUs using the bidirectional protocol This chapter explains the basic transmission and reception methods when performing data communication using the bidirectional protocol Follow the procedure described in this chapter to create sequence programs for sending and receiving data for the programmable controller CPU Regarding the additional functions listed below for data communication using the bidirectional protocol see the separate User s Manuals Application e Reading receive data using interrupt programs See Chapter 4 of Application e Sending receiving data using ASCII data ASCII BIN conversion See Chapter 13 of Application e Sending receiving data using transparent code designation See Chapter 12 of Application 7 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL 7 1 Data Reception from the External Device MELSEC Q This section explains the data reception from the external device 7 1 1 Receiving methods The following shows how to receive data sent from the external device using the bidirectional protocol Since the size of each message received is recognized using the data length
436. rator SC MELSEC Q 9 4 9 Pre defined protocol system setting Purpose For data communication using the pre defined protocol register system setting values Operating procedure e Online operation Monitor screen gt CHO Pre defined protocol system setting e Offline operation Flash ROM setting screen gt CHO Pre defined protocol system setting Setting screen CH1 Pre defined protocol system setting Module information Module type Serial Communications Module Start 1 0 No Module model name QJ71C24N Setting item Setting value Execution lag options Enoriogs ooo r Flash ROM setting Details White to anig Save file Select input Read from module Load file Setting range Error logs Alllogs Make text file Execute test Setting item im CH1 Section 8 1 2 of Execution log options 40E2H 40F2H User s Manual Basic 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 9 4 10 PLC CPU monitoring system setting Purpose Register system setting values to use the programmable controller CPU monitoring function Operating procedure e Online operation Monitor screen gt CHO Monitoring system setting e Offline operation Flash ROM setting screen gt CHO Monitoring system setting Setting screen CH1 PLC CPU monitoring system setting Bj x r Module information Module type Serial Communications Module Module model name
437. re connected securely 2 Verify that the module fixing screws and the terminal block installation screws are securely tightened Be sure to read through the Safety Precautions in the beginning of this manual regarding the Q series C24 inspection and maintenance 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 9 2 When mounting dismounting the module Please read 4 1 Handling Precautions before mounting or dismounting the module and make sure to pay attention to safety and handle the module properly during the operation When replacing the Q series C24 and QCPU it becomes necessary to register the following data on the Q series C24 again for the module to be replaced e Q series C24 System setting data in the flash ROM e QCPU PLC parameters I O assignment switch setting etc The procedure for replacing a module including re registration of data is as follows lt Operation procedure when replacing the Q series C24 gt Step 1 Read all the system setting data of the Q series C24 using the Read from module function of GX Configurator SC Step 2 Save the system setting data read to the specified file using the function of GX Configurator SC gt 1 Step 3 Turn the power supply to the Q series C24 off Step 4 Dismount the cables and the module itself Step 5 Replace the module and start up the module according to 4 2 Settings and Procedures Prior to Operation Step 6 Read the data saved in
438. re performed by the Q series C24 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 Even odd parity setting This sets whether the parity bit vertical parity should be odd parity or even parity when adding the parity bit vertical parity according to the specifications of the external device 5 Stop bit setting This sets the stop bit length for one character in data communicated with an external device according to the specifications of the external device 6 Sum check code setting e This sets according to the specifications of the external device whether or not a sum check code is added to transmission and reception messages of each frame and format during data communication using the MC or bidirectional protocol For an explanation of the message configuration and sum check code when a sum check code is added set to Yes see the applicable explanation of each protocol 7 Write during RUN setting This sets according to the system specifications whether or not data transmitted using the MC protocol is written to the programmable controller CPU from an external device while the programmable controller CPU is running When write during RUN is prohibited disabled the data is not written and an NAK message is returned if the external device requests the programmable controller CPU to write data while it is running For an explanation of the functions available in this setting check in the write allowed setting an
439. receive data clear request area CSET Receive data clear Appendix 9 6 of the buffer memory No method BUFRCVS ee o cannot be received using an interrupt program PR Perform programming using the REMFR REMTO instruction and E 9 7 CSET CSET Initial setting setting I O signal Appendix9 8 9 8 No method Register delete the programmable controller CPU using the MC Perform programming using the REMFR REMTO instruction and CSET Programmable controller CPU monitoring function f protocol or GX Configurator SC Appendix 9 9 Appendix 9 11 I O signal GETE Appendix 9 10 Perform programming using the REMFR REMTO instructions UINI Appendix 9 12 and I O signals However the station No cannot be changed No method CPRTCL Communications using the pre defined protocol are not available 4 Available for the MELSECNET H remote I O station of function version D or later GX Developer Version 8 18U or later is required to use the function Perform programming using the REMFR REMTO instruction and 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 3 Setting from GX Developer The following parameters should be set through GX Developer in order to use the Q series C24 mounted to a MELECNET H remote 1 O station Each of setting is the same way as when setting the parameters for the Q series C24 mounted to a QCPU station see Section 4 5 and after See the operating manual for GX Developer fo
440. receive data storage area and turns on the reception data read request X3 X4 to the programmable controller CPU Timer 0 set time External device Q series C24 Reception data read request X3 XA 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q e Ifthe next data LF etc is not received within the time set in the non reception monitoring time timer 0 after CR is received the Q series C24 stores the received data up to CR to the buffer memory receive data storage area and turns on the following signals to the programmable controller CPU When non procedure and non reception monitoring time format is 0 Reception abnormal detection X4 XB When non procedure and non reception monitoring time format is 1 Reception data read request X3 XA 1 Timer 0 External device set time Q series C24 Reception abnormal detection X4 XB Format is 0 Reception data read request X3 XA Format is 1 x1 In non procedure protocol a message is received by the increase in non reception monitoring time timer 0 if the received complete code and the received data count are not decided For the non procedure protocol at the non reception monitoring time format see Chapter 6 of the User s Manual Application 2 CR is included as 1 byte of data included in the message 2 When the receive complete code is changed and an arbitrary code is designated OOWIUd designated User defined receive complete
441. ress 253H 263H b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 bd b4 b3 b2 b1 bO Buffer memory address 2534 0 0 O O 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 Information on the CH1 side 263H 0 O O O 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 Information on the CH2 side Communication rate setting Operation setting Data bit setting Parity bit setting Even odd parity setting Stop bit setting Sum check code setting Write during RUN setting Setting modification allow prohibit 11 14 11 14 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 2 Example of a program that reads from the current setting status storage area The following shows an example of a program that reads from the switch setting status for current operation of the Q series C24 For details regarding ERR occurrence XE XF used in the program see Section 11 1 2 3 input output signals X Y00 to X Y1F of the Q series C24 Example of FROM instruction 11 15 FROMP nr D FROMP FROMP HO HO HO HO H203 oo KI Reads error description from address 203n Reads CH1 side communication protocol H252 DI K2 status and transmission status from addresses 2524 to 253n a i Ke Reads CH2 side communication protocol status and transmission status from addresses 2621 to 263n H24F D KI J Reads station No from address 24Fu
442. restart data communication with an external device after an individual station test check the specifications of the devices used before defining various settings and reconnecting cables For the interface that is not used for communication no cable connection define the switch settings in GX Developer as follows for the setting method see Section 4 5 2 e Communication protocol setting any of OH to 7H or 9H e Transmission settings and communication rate settings all set to OFF If an error occurs even though the correct settings have been made for the Q series C24 through an individual station test please consult your nearest dealer or branch office with a description of the error 4 7 1 ROM RAM switch tests A ROM RAM switch test checks the contents of the memory of the Q series C24 and the switch settings set with GX Developer Perform a ROM RAM switch test with the procedure described below Procedure 1 Communication protocol setting and transmission setting see Section 4 5 2 1 Set the communication protocol setting on the CH2 side to EH ROM RAM switch test Set the communication protocol setting on the CH1 side to the number 1 to 9 used for data communication with an external device following the test 2 Set the transmission settings for the two interfaces to match the specifications used when communicating data with an external device Procedure 2 Performing ROM RAM switch tests 1 Set the programmable contro
443. rger than the transmission data designation area increase the transmission area or divide the transmission data before sending 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 2 Transmission data arrangement The following example shows an arrangement of the transmission data to be sent to the external device when storing it in the transmission area Example When transmitting ABCDEFG123 The transmit area is the default value CH1 side address Buffer memory 400 1 n 5Sor10 fFe Transmission data count In accordance with the word byte units designation 4011 B A Word units 5 424 41u Bytes units 10 4024 D C 44n 43u 43 E amp E 45 Transmission data designation Peta 461 She he ce en ra Sequentially store the transmission data to low address L gt H next 4041 1 G address L gt H in the order of transmission 31H 4Tu 4051 3 2 33H 324 4064 5 4 35H 34n N N 6 2 3 Sequence program for transmission data A sequence program for transmission data is explained below For details on the OUTPUT instruction used for data transmission see Chapter 10 Transmission instruction In case of the CH1 side Create transmission data from D11 Create control data from DO G OUTPUT Un MO M1 Processing for normal completion Processing for abnormal completion retransmission etc 6 DATA COMMUNICATI
444. rns to normal 1 Communication error clear request and to turn LED off address 0H 1H The contents of the error information corresponding to each bit in this request area are the same as those for the LED ON status and communication error status address 2011 2024 For more details see Section 11 1 1 1 The following describes the correspondence between the LED OFF request areas and the LED ON status storage areas e Communication error clear request for CH1 and to turn LED off address 0H gt LED ON status and communication error status on CH1 side address 2014 e Communication error clear request for CH2 and to turn LED off address 1H gt LED ON status and communication error status on CH2 side address 202n Example of a program for turning off displayed LEDs The following shows an example of a program that issues an initialization request for all the communication error information of CH1 and CH2 Input output signals X Y00 to X Y1F of QC24 Example of TO instruction X i bror Ho HO HOCOF FOOFF K1 Writes OOFF to 11 7 1 address 0x and COFFu to address 1n Initialization requests are valid only when write operation is performed The initialization requests clear all data in the LED ON status and communication error status address 201 202 at the same time Furthermore when initialization of error information on the CH1 and CH2 sides is requested ERR occurrence XE XF also turns off
445. rocessing for normal completion gt X1000 x f SE RS lt Processing for abnormal completion gt X1001 t SE PLS lt Abnormal completion Read of on demand execution result gt M13 X101E H z REMFR J1 Ki KI HO H256 D8 KI M104 M105 7 WF PLS M105 E H SET lt Abnormal completion Read of LED ON status gt M14 X101E tk H z REMFR J1 Ki K1 HO H201 Dg K1 M106 M107 SET M107 App 40 M10 DO D1 M100 M11 M200 D2 D3 M102 M12 M201 Y1000 M12 M300 Y1000 M301 M13 M104 M14 M202 M106 M203 M204 Y1000 MELSEC Q Changes the transmission command into pulses Sets the transmission data Transfers the transmission data to the transmission area address of the buffer memory On demand function designation command Abnormal completion of REMTO instruction Buffer memory head address for on demand function Data length for on demand function Transfers the setting value to the on demand function designation area of the buffer memory Sets the on demand data transmission flag Abnormal completion of REMTO instruction Turns ON the transmission request signal Resets the on demand data transmission flag Normal completion of on demand data transmission Turns OFF the transmission request signal Abnormal completion of on demand data transmission On demand execution result acquisition command Reads the on demand
446. ror made switching error 1 1 gt pes Number of registered user frame 1 1 gt Flash ROM system parameters write result 1 1 gt Modem function error code 1 1 gt Modem function sequence status T 1 gt Make text fle End setup Cancel Moritor Test Exit Monitor Test Select a module to be monitored tested See Screen 4 6 Monitor Test screen Satie 0009 aren vius Setra vaie p ai ci of ci and arenae eri FISh RON setin Witt Cnet vakio rodde serene aplay Readfom Loadrie Make teste Sion montor Epa a See Section 9 4 See Section 9 6 1 When the setting operation is complete in each system setting screen register the system setting data in the flash ROM then restart the programmable controller CPU to resume data transmission 2 With the Q series C24 monitoring testing and reading writing of setting values can be performed via online operation 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q The following diagram illustrates the overview of a procedure in which the GX Configurator SC is used to change the system setting values of the Q series C24 and save the new values to a file or write them to the Q series C24 s flash ROM Siar gt i Do you wish to NO change the setting values via Ai wan Go to 1 setting via online
447. rotocol format 1 00074 Bidirectional protocol 00024 MC protocol format 2 0009H Pre defined protocol 0003H MC protocol format 3 OOFFH GX Developer 00044 MC protocol format 4 connection 0005x MC protocol format 5 Transmission specifications after switching designation Designates transmission specifications below after switching when b15 of this area is 1 ON For designation Operation setting b0 Independent 1 Link pares of mode Data bit b1 7 bit 1 8 bit 0 RW Not allowed ve a User s Manual switching Parity bit b2 No 1 Yes Application Odd even parity b3 Odd 1 Even 145 305 Stop bit b4 1 bit 1 2 bit 91H 131H Sum check code b5 No 1 Yes Write during RUN b6 Prohibited 1 Allowed Setting modification b7 Prohibited 1 Allowed Communication rate b8 to b11 50 bps to 230400 bps For system b12 to b14 All O Transmission specifications after switching b15 designation 0 Match settings in GX Developer 1 Match settings in this area RS and DTR signal status designation 0 Off 1 On ae ee Signal setting RS signal b0 Allowed Section 3 2 1 DTR signal b2 For system b1 b3 to b15 DTR DSR ER DR DC control designation e Transmission control b0 147 307 0 DTR DSR control 1 DC code control 93x 133H e DC1 DC3 control b8 0 No control 1 Controlled DC2 DC4 control b9 0 No control 1 Controlled Section 9 4 5 Chapter 7 of User s Manual Application Allowed Chapt
448. rotocol support function Note that the usage rate of the packet data area varies by protocol 8 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE PRE DEFINED PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 8 1 Function of the Pre Defined Protocol The function of the pre defined protocol is shown below Operating Manual Data communication with Data can be sent and received using the protocol of the A Pre defined protocol external device external device 8 1 1 Data communication procedure By the following procedure taken in GX Configurator SC Pre defined protocol function data can be exchanged with an external device Step 1 Register the protocol of the external device Add protocol Add editable protocol In the Add protocol dialog box select ie Manufacturer Model Protocol name Select from pre defined protocol library or Add editable protocol and set MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FREQROL Series necessary data OK Cancel Step 2 Specify the send or receive data storage area Specify the send or receive data storage area Specify the send or receive data storage area Device or buffer memory data can be taken into communication packets and thereby this protocol communication is suitable for data that may change every transmission otting project1 pcf EZ Eie Edt Module readjwrite Tool Debugging support function Window Help Dente ea gt H7B AD Operation Mode i __ NOF AD Data 4 Digits
449. s and installing the Q series C24 into an existing system When using the Q series C24 make sure to set the operation mode station number and transmission specifications with the following parameter setting screen of GX Developer e Intelligent function module switch setting screen The Q series C24 does not have the setting switches to set the operation mode station number and transmission specification that are available in the computer link module for A series Appendix 2 3 1 Using programs designed for the computer link module The data communication between the programmable controller CPU and external device as well as other programmable controller CPU that has been performed by A series computer link modules hereinafter abbreviated as UC24 C24 S8 can also be performed using the Q series C24 However UC24 C24 S8 and the Q series C24 have major differences in the following points For programmable controller CPU side create a new program according to the explanation in the section of the function used Differences between UC24 C24 S8 and the Q series C24 e Initial setting items and the setting method of addresses and special application areas of the buffer memory e Input output signals for handshake e Dedicated instructions of the programmable controller CPU 1 Initial settings for special application area in buffer memory 1 Inthe Q series C24 the addresses for special application areas in the buffer memory ar
450. s and test again When an error occurs in a ROM or RAM check check the mounting status of module and test again If there is no error in the mounting status of module consult your nearest dealer or branch office Perform the ending procedure for ROM RAM switch test 1 Follow the procedure in Section 4 7 2 to perform an individual loopback test operation 2 Perform the following procedure to end the test and start data communication with an external device e Set the switch settings on GX Developer according to the procedure specified in Section 4 5 2 Turn off the power to the station on which the Q series C24 is installed and connect the communication cable with an external device Turn on the power to the station on which the Q series C24 is installed 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 7 2 Individual station loopback test The individual station loopback test checks the operation of the communication function of the Q series C24 Follow the procedure below to perform an individual station loopback test Procedure 1 Connecting cable 1 Connect cables to two interfaces as follows e Connect cables to the RS 232 interface within the connector and install it to the interface e Connect cables to the RS 422 485 interface on a terminal block RS eee interface D Sub 9 pin RS 422 485 interface series C24 side series C24 side Cable connection RD 2 2 SD EREE a Q series C24 side Signal
451. s the data transmitted received on the communication network By using the protocol FB support function producing sequence programs and transmission debug is made easy For use of this function the non procedure protocol is used For details on the protocol FB support function see the GX Configurator SC Operating Manual Protocol FB support function 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 3 Pre defined protocol support function The Pre defined protocol support function is offered for the QU71C24N R2 R4 to use the pre defined protocol communication Protocol settings required for data communication can be configured easily by selecting any options on the protocol selection screen and writing the data to the flash ROM Furthermore the debugging for the pre defined protocol communication debug support function is also available The Pre defined protocol support function can reduce the programming man hours and the volume of the program that is to be written to a programmable controller CPU This function is used with the pre defined protocol For details of the Pre defined protocol support function refer to the Operating Manual Pre defined protocol support function 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 9 1 Functions Available with Utility Package The following table the utility package function indicates that the setting is valid with the applicable protocol Non Bidirectional Explana
452. sed to read the execution status when using a dedicated instruction See Chapter 10 2 More than one OUTPUT instruction cannot be executed simultaneously Execute the next OUTPUT instruction only after the execution of the first OUTPUT instruction is completed 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 6 2 4 How to detect transmission errors This section explains how to detect errors that may occur when sending data to the external device The following items are considered as the primary causes of errors that may occur during data transmission Cause of reception error Reference section A oa Hees nae User s Manual A timeout occurred for the transmission monitoring time timer 2 Application Section 6 3 pplication Designated number of transmission data was larger than the size that could be stored in the G Section 6 2 2 transmission area 1 Confirmation using the sequence program a Detecting a transmission error 1 The following device and input signal turn ON e OUTPUT instruction complete device 1 ERR occurrence XE XF 2 The transmission error code can be checked using the OUTPUT instruction control data S1 1 Or it can be checked by reading the data transmission result address 257H 267h For details on how to check the error code contents and corrective actions see Chapter 11 b How to turn off the ERR LED and clear the error code see Section 11 1 2
453. setting data written to the CPRTCL flash ROM by GX Configurator SC Pre defined protocol support function support p Stores user frames in flash ROM of the Q series Setting value PUTE A i C24 writing registration Reads user frames stored in flash ROM of the Q reading GETE series C24 Performs programmable controller For Programmable ne Chapter 17 CPU monitoring registration programmable controller CPU of User s monitorin C l bl troll CONCRET HEN Manual ancels programmable controller 3 CSET alsi monitoring instructions CPU monitoring ee Application uncti setting instruction words bytes and the data communication area foe lw teem sesame elel instruction and host station No of the Q series C24 Abbreviations used in the Protocol column MC MC protocol Non Non procedure protocol Bi Bidirectional protocol Pd Pre defined protocol 3 15 3 15 PECIFICATION eS aie MELSEC Q 3 6 Utility Package GX Configurator SC Function List The following table lists the utility package function for the Q series C24 O Protocol for which setting is valid aos panaion romans mc Non Bi Pa page Auto refresh setting Refresh the Q series C24 s rror codes and set devices on the Section 4 6 programmable controller CPU side User frame Register the user frame in the flash ROM o o Section 9 4 1 Section 9 4 1 Data for modem initialization Register the data for modem in
454. sing the on demand function data can be sent from the programmable controller CPU to the external devices in each frame format of the MC protocol c Data communication can be performed using a program at the external device side that has been created for communicating data with conventional A QnA series computer link module serial communication modules d If the external device is a PC running one of the basic operation systems below it is possible to create a communication program for the external device without considering the detailed MC protocol transmission reception procedures using one of the following separately sold communication support tools Supported basic operation systems Microsoft Windows 95 Operating System Microsoft Windows 98 Operating System Microsoft Windows NT Workstation Operating System Version 4 0 Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition Operating System Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Operating System Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition Operating System Microsoft Windows Vista Home Basic Operating System Microsoft Windows Vista Home Premium Operating System Microsoft Windows Vista Business Operating System Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate Operating System Microsoft Windows Vista Enterprise Operating System Depending on the version of MX Component used different operating systems are supported See
455. sion upgrade product respectively Abbreviation for interface Abbreviation for G INPUT Intelligent function module devices Intelligent function modules Generic term for buffer memory of the intelligent function modules used for storing data sent to or received from the programmable controller CPU setting values monitor values etc Generic term for the Q series programmable controller modules that are operated by commands from the programmable controller CPU equivalent to the A series programmable controller special function modules Examples e CC Link interface module e A D and D A conversion modules Ethernet interface module e Serial communication module MELSECNET 10 Abbreviation for MELSECNET 10 network system MELSECNET H MX Component Abbreviation for MELSECNET H network system Abbreviation for MX Component SWOD5C ACT E or later ONDEMAND Abbreviation for G ONDEMAND or GP ONDEMAND Operating Manual Protocol FB support function GX Configurator SC Version 2 Operating Manual Protocol FB support function Operating Manual Pre defined protocol support function GX Configurator SC Version 2 Operating Manual Pre defined protocol support function Generic term abbreviation Description of generic term abbreviation Opposite devices external devices Generic term for computers indicators measuring instruments ID modules bar code readers regulators oth
456. smission interval and provide an ample programmable controller CPU read processing time Note The non procedure protocol stores the data received up to first the end code received or fixed length data to the non procedure receive buffer memory and turns on the Read Request signal to the programmable controller CPU If the next data is sent while the Read Request signal is ON the data is temporarily stored to the OS receive buffer When the OS receive buffer becomes full the Q series C24 skips the rest of the data and turns on the SIO LED With a multidrop link two e Connect the external devices and the Q series or more devices C24 in a 1 1 configuration and perform a transmitted data at the communications test Since data is same time transmitted simultaneously from two or more devices with a multidrop link when normal communications among all the devices is possible interlock the devices so that cannot transmit simultaneously Bidirectional procedure Pre defined Communication error signal SIO turned on 11 45 11 45 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 3 12 Communication error CH1 ERR or CH2 ERR Symptom There is an error in the communication protocol or transmission setting There is an error in the on line mode switching designation On demand execution generated an error The Q series C24 detected an error while transmitting data Corrective action Read the error code from the buffer
457. smits the response message after it receives the ready to send signal DC1 received DSR signal ON from the external device 7 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 7 4 Data Communications Precautions The following shows the precautions when performing data communications using the bidirectional protocol 1 When the transmission sequence is in the initial status it indicates that data transmission and reception processing has not been started The Q series C24 transmission sequence is initialized in the following cases The power is turned on the CPU is reset When operating or the mode is switched When a response message ACK NAK etc was received in reply to data transmission When a response message ACK NAK etc was transmitted in reply to data reception When the CD signal was turned off during data communications using Check CD terminal in full duplex communications through the RS 232 interface e As a data transmission procedure data transmission from the external device or the Q series C24 should be performed after a response for the immediately preceding data transmission has been received The external device and programmable controller CPU must agree so that the units of the data length word count byte count in the message to be transmitted and received is the same The programmable controller CPU units can be set using the GX Configurator SC word byte units designation
458. sponse message If the MC protocol GX Developer is used to access other stations it is possible to access the control CPU and non control CPUs of the station to be accessed even if the relay station and the accessed station are multiple CPU systems Example It is possible to access other stations regardless of whether the control CPU of the module to be routed through is the same or different External device Local sae Peripheral device Setting from GX Developer Communication through GX Developer 3 4 4 2 1 Communication using the MC protocol CC Link IE controller network Relay station 1 CPU No 1 2 CPU No 2 3 CPU No 3 1 2 3 4 2 12 4 CPU No 4 1 Module used for routing controlled 7 by CPU No 1 Station to be accessed Ec Lins IE conog network 1 Q series C24 controlled by CPU No 1 2 Module used for routing controlled 1 2 3 4 2 by CPU No 2 The modules used for the routing are CC Link IE controller network modules x The QnA compatible 4C frame should be performed for access to non control CPUs when communicating using the MC protocol However the available functions differ depending on the QCPU to be accessed whether it is a control CPU or a non control CPU See the Reference Manual for the available functions and accessible ra
459. ss if using QJ71C24N R2 R4 When connecting an external device to either of two interfaces the maximum of 115 200 bps is available for the interface the maximum of 230 400 bps if using QJ71C24N R2 R4 In this case set 300 bps for the other interface to which no external device is connected x3 Set 00n to the interface for which GX Developer connection is set in the communication protocol setting Serial communication module will operate at the communication speed set on the GX Developer c Communication protocol setting CH1 side switch 2 CH2 side switch 4 GX Developer connection GX Developer communication rate and transmission specifications are connection to MELSOFT ee automatically set Fomai 1 Format 2 For communication with ASCII code in the specified form of an A compatible 1C MC protocol Format3_ frame or QnA compatible 2C 3C 4C frame Format 4 el For communication with binary code in a QnA compatible 4C frame e Non procedure protocol For communication using non procedure protocol Bidirectional protocol For communication using bidirectional protocol Set to the CH1 side when CH1 and CH2 interfaces are used in linked operation For linked operation setting operated with the communication protocol of the CH2 side Pre defined protocol For communication using pre defined protocol Setting prohibited Ooo gt y ROM RAM switch test For self diagnosis of the modules Individual station loopback test For
460. ssion data designated by the sequence program using the BIDOUT instruction The Q series C24 sends this value as is from the lower byte L Data portion This consists of an array of original one byte data to be transmitted to the external device side which can handle 00H to FFH code data 1 For data communication from the external device to the Q series C24 If the receive data portion is normal the Q series C24 takes the codes as is and stores them in the receive data storage area in sequence beginning with the youngest address The storage size is in accordance with the data length in the message See item b above and the word byte units designation in GX Configurator SC For data communication from the Q series C24 to the external device The transmission data portion is the number of the transmission data designated by the sequence program using the BIDOUT instruction The Q series C24 sends the transmission data using the existing codes until the transmission data count is reached in accordance with the word byte units designation in GX Configurator SC to the transmission data designation area 7 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL MELSEC Q d Sum check code The sum check code expresses the numeric value for the lower two bytes 16 bits of the results sum from the addition of the data length and the data portion in the message as binary code data When Sum check is specified with the transmission set
461. ssion data ceceeeeee 6 23 6 2 3 Sequence program for transmission data cccecceeeceeeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseceeeeaeessaeeseieeesieeeseaeeaes 6 25 6 2 4 How to detect tranSMisSSiON errors cecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeesaeeseesaeesaeesaeesieesieesieetieesieesietineseee 6 28 6 3 Data Communications Precautions cccecceecceeceeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeaeecaeseaeseaeeeaeeeaeseaeseaeseaeeeaeeeaeseaeeeaeeaeeeatesas 6 30 7 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL 7 1 to 7 28 7 1 Data Reception from the External Device cccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeecaeeeseaeeseaeeesaeeecaeeesineeseaeeeaeeseaees 7 2 CVA RREGCIVING MOTOS 23 nesne etd tobetcd ixchec cb cewateh E dicen ghee 7 2 7 1 2 Arrangement and contents of the receive area and the receive data ceeecceeceeeeeeetteetteeteees 7T 4 7 1 3 Sequence program for data reception ccccccecccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeaeeeeaeeesneeseaeessaeeeeaeeesieeeseeetans 7 10 7 1 4 How to detect reception Crrors ccccccccecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeseaeeceaeeecaeeecaeeesneeeeaeeseaeescueeseeeenseetaas 7 13 AGB Recova Catan ClO AN rna ia a A I sedate aern E 7 14 7 2 Sending Data to the External Device oe ee eeeeneeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeecaeeeaeeeeseatenatenas 7 15 Tei Transmission methods aaan tase cad ads noua jadanaud aden A Aa A tad 7 15 7 2 2 Arrangement and contents of the transmission area and the
462. ssion data size 2 Increase the receive area Receive data storage area 2 Size of data sent from the external device 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL From external device 2 Head 321GFEDCBA MELSEC Q Receive data list The following describes the data list when data received from an external device is stored to the receive area 1 The receive message is stored to the Q series C24 buffer memory receive data storage area 2 The data is stored to the receive data storage area in low address L H next address L H order Under the following conditions when the receive data count is an odd byte OOH is stored in the upper byte of the final data storage position When the unit for the received data count is designated in bytes When data reception is performed using the receive complete code Example When receive arbitrary data area ABCDEFG123 was stored The receive area is the default value Q series C24 CH1 address 6001 Buffer memory Receive data count storage area 6011 6024 OS area 6034 Receive data storage area BS pers Sys eee The receive data is stored in low address L gt H DAG aN Sa aoe aoe next address L H order in the order in which 5 7 3 it is received 604H 6051 6064 1 The OS area of the Q series C24 shown in the above diagram is the memory 8448 bytes
463. st Use this list as a reference The values set in the respective setting screens explained in Section 9 4 can be written to the Q series C24 module via online operation only or saved to a file Perform the following operations in advance to enable the registration of setting values in the flash ROM a Switch setting using the GX Developer see Section 4 5 2 Set Setting change under Transmission settings to Enable for both the CH1 and CH2 sides b Setting using GX Configurator SC see Section 9 4 13 Set the flash ROM write allow prohibit setting to Allowed When a multiple CPU system is employed GX Configurator SC should be connected to the control CPU of the Q series C24 and the system setting data register in the flash ROM It is not possible to set target PLC to multiple CPU setting of Transfer setup of GX Developer and register the system setting data in the flash ROM 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 9 4 1 User frame registration Purpose Register the user frame used in the following functions On demand function using the MC protocol e Data transmission receive function using the non procedure protocol Operating procedure e Online operation Monitor screen User frame e Offline operation Flash ROM setting screen gt Setting screen Module information Module type Serial Communications Module Start 170 No 0000 Module model name QJ71C24N
464. stem H2 Mode switching N Switching H1 ERR occurrence N Error occurring H2 ERR occurrence ON Error occurring Moden initialization completion ON Initialization completed x lt m oojooQ x ka QO X10 6 X11 6 Dialing l ON Dial in progress Connection Ser ON Connection in progress X13 6 Initialization connection abnormal completion ON Initialization connection abnormally completed X14 6 Modem disconnection complete ON Disconnection completed X15 6 Notification normal completion ON Normal completion Notification abnormal completion nee ON Abnormal completion XB 2 X1 X1 lash ROM read completion ON Completed ON Completed Flash ROM system setting write completion ON Completed cy lash ROM write completion a Reference section Section 9 6 4 Section 9 6 5 Section 9 6 6 Section 6 1 Section 7 1 Section 9 6 5 Section 9 6 6 Application Chapter 15 Section 9 6 4 Section 9 6 5 Section 9 6 6 Section 6 1 Section 7 1 Section 9 6 5 Section 9 6 6 Application Chapter 15 Section 9 6 11 Section 11 1 2 Section 9 6 2 Application Chapter 3 Device number section ON Requesting transmission ON Data read completed ON Requesting switch Chapter 15 Use prohibited ON Requesting transmission CH2 Reception data read completion ON Data read completed CH2 Mode switching request Application ON Requesting switch Chapter 15 Use prohibited
465. stem from the GX Developer Correct the Q Series C24 s settings are refused by the Q There is ar Shor in ihe eannecton e Check the telephone No Series C24 Change the telephone No to the data tem s teleph No system s telephone No for callback When performing Auto callback during fixed during designated There is an error in the GX Developer s number from the GX connection system Developer connection to the Q Series C24 is There is an error in the telephone No of Check the GX Developer s connection system e Check the Q Series C24 s settings Check the telephone No Change the telephone No to the data for callback refused the connection system Adjust each of the timer values for the The timer value for the status of the callback function on the GX Developer from the GX Devel ee ENS OPSI modem used or the line is short side Line callback cancel wait time but callback from the Q callback delay time Series C24 cannot be There is a problem with the modem Check the modem s specifications and performed specifications or settings settings It is possible to connect 11 53 11 53 11 TROUBLESHOOTIN See MELSEC Q 11 3 17 Communication is not available with the ISDN sub address Non Bidirectional Pre Symptom Cause Corrective action MC procedure protocol defined eon e Sub address is incorrect e Review the sub address Data cannot be Modem does not s
466. struction simultaneous Handling of simultaneous execution execution e The next instruction will be ignored until the active instruction has been completed However simultaneous execution is available when channels to be used are not the same e Dedicated instructions simultaneous execution error 7FFOH occurs in the dedicated instruction attempted later However simultaneous execution is available when channels to be used are not the same e Dedicated instructions simultaneous execution error 7FFOH occurs in the dedicated instruction attempted later O Available X Not available x1 Since the dedicated instructions shown below use a different communication protocol from that for the ONDEMAND instruction they are not used in the same channel e OUTPUT PRR INPUT BIDOUT BIDIN BUFRCVS CPRTCL If the dedicated instructions shown above are used in the same channel with the ONDEMAND instruction the communication protocol setting error 7FF2H occurs Except for the BUFRCVS instruction 10 4 10 4 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Error 10 5 MELSEC Q 3 Whether an ONDEMAND instruction was completed normally or abnormally can be checked by the completion device D or status display device at completion D 1 a Completion device Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the ONDEMAND instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing b Status display devi
467. switch settings by GX Developer see Section 4 5 2 For functions that cannot be used when write during RUN is set to prohibit see the explanation section in each command list of the Reference Manual When an error has occurred during access between the Q series C24 and the programmable controller CPU x2 NEU is valid when a target interface is set to use the MC protocol When the target interface is set to other than the MC protocol the status of NEU is off 11 4 11 4 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 5 a b c d MELSEC Q When a communication error occurs take corrective action according to Section 11 3 The initial status of the LED ON and communications error indicates the status when the Q series C24 starts up by turning on the power or resetting the programmable controller CPU Each of the communications error status C N to SIO CH1 ERR and CH2 ERR turns on when an error occurs and keeps its on status even after the communication returns to normal The programmable controller CPU can check the aforementioned LED ON status and communications error status and initialize any error information using read write to the buffer memory of the Q series C24 and input output signals Initialize the error information according to Section 11 1 2 NAK to NEU No 6 to 8 turn on off depending on the status SD WAIT turns on when data cannot be sent to the external device by the transmission control of the
468. szReadData I DO D4 are read iRet axActEasylF1 gt ReadDeviceBlock2 DO 5 sData if iRet 0 lpszarrData new String 5 lpszarrData 0 DO D4 II Storage of data to display the results for iNumber 0 iNumber lt 5 iNumber lpszarrData iNumber sData iNumber ToString szReadData String Join lpszarrData MessageBox Show String Format D0O D4 0 szReadData else MessageBox Show String Format Read Error 0x 0 x8 HEX __box iRet kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk II Disconnection kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk private System Void button3_Click System Object sender System EventArgs e int iRet Disconnection iRet axActEasylF 1 gt Close if iRet 0 MessageBox Show The disconnection was successful else MessageBox Show String Format Disconnection Error 0x 0 x8 HEX __box iRet App 30 App 30 APPENDIXE z MELSEC Q 3 When Visual Basic 6 0 is used Private Sub Command1_Click Ikkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Connection Ikkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Dim rtn As Long Get LogicalstationNumber ActEasylF1 ActLogicalStationNumber Val Text1 Text Connection rtn ActEasylF1 Open If rtn 0 Then MsgBox The connection was successful Else MsgBox Connection Error amp Hex rtn End If End Sub Private Sub Command2_Click Ikkkkkkkkk
469. t blink The Q series C24 station No switch setting and message station No designation do not match The Q series C24 data communications monitoring time is set to Infinite wait or the monitoring time is too long e The path setting of the programmable controller CPU to be accessed is incorrect 11 38 Corrective action Bidirectional Non procedure Pre defined e Check if the communication protocol is set correctly e Check if the mode was switched without using the buffer memory mode switching area The communication protocol setting contents and the communication protocol in the current operation can be checked at communication protocol status address 250H 260 H e Since the message is initialized skipped reading when the CD terminal is turned OFF when Check CD terminal is set change the wiring so that the CD terminal remains on all the time e Check if the external device sent a message matched to the protocol and format e Use the communication monitoring function to check the message from the external device The Q series C24 skips all the messages transmitted until the header byte set for each protocol and format for example ENQ 05n for format 1 is received e Check the Q series C24 station No setting and message station No designation e Use the communication monitoring function to check the message from the external device e When the station No designation is local station
470. t connection to the CPU Connection through an intelligent function module on the main base unit Through Ethernet module MELSECNET H module or CC Link module 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q b Writing to the flash ROM On the Transfer Setup screen of GX Developer select Not specified for Target system e A system switching during data writing may cause the data not to be written to the flash ROM Change the operation mode of the Redundant CPU to Separate mode before writing to prevent such situation from occurring If a system switching has occurred during data writing write the data to the flash ROM again 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 2 6 Use on MELSECNET H Remote I O Stations This section describes the use of the Q series C24 at a MELSECNET H remote I O station It is not necessary to read this section if the Q series C24 is used with the QCPU 1 System configuration Example Remote master station Remote I O station External device MELSECNET H Remote I O network QJ72 LP25 25 Remote I O station 2 Available functions The following table indicates the functions that can be used when the Q series C24 is mounted on a MELSECNET H remote I O station Function Availability O controller CPU monitoring function Communications using non procedure protocol a Data reception by interrupt program Prog
471. ta equivalent to the size of the end data that is set for the Q series C24 lololo code lt Reception data End When receiving variable length data aru c ASCII code data can be used for communication using the ASCII BIN conversion function ASCII Q series C24 data ASCII BIN conversion ELSES Dimi Binary EN i J data rsa p folo o 0 Binary gt data 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC MITSUBISHI vil T MELSEC Q d Itis necessary to create a sequence program for communication control that is appropriate to the external device e Communication can be performed using a user frame by registering the fixed format portion of the head and tail sections of a message as a user frame e When sending data the Q series C24 adds a user frame to any data specified by the user e When receiving data the Q series C24 transfers any data excluding the user frame to the programmable controller CPU When receiving data _ STX ofolo Any data format ETX ETX RS 232 E Any data format STX When s
472. tation refer to the respective manual for each station The communication error may result in an accident due to incorrect output or malfunction e When using the notification function the pager receiver may not be contacted due to the frequency transmission status from the system setup environment and error on the receiver side To ensure the safety of the programmable controller system install a call circuit with a lamp display or buzzer sound e When performing the control of the programmable controller in operation changing data by connecting a peripheral devices to the CPU module or personal computer etc to the intelligent device module configure an interlock circuit in a sequence program so the safety of the overall system is always maintained Also when performing other controls of the programmable controller in operation changing program and operation status status control read this manual carefully and confirm if the overall safety is maintained Especially when this control is performed to a remote programmable controller from an external device troubles that have occurred on the programmable controller side may not be able to immediately be handled if there is a data communication error Define a troubleshooting agreement between external devices and the programmable controller CPU for data communication error occurrences as well as construct an interlock circuit in the sequence program Design Instructions lt
473. tations via CC Link IE controller network MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 2 10 Compatibility with Multiple CPU Systems 2 11 Compatibility with the QOOCPU Q01CPU Serial Communication Function 3 WHEN COMMUNICATING USING THE QnA COMPATIBLE 3E 3C 4C FRAMES OR 4E FRAME 3 1 Message Formats 3 2 List of Commands and Functions for the QnA Compatible 3E 3C 4C Frames and 4E Frame 3 3 Device Memory Read Write 3 4 Buffer Memory Read Write 3 5 Reading from and Writing to the Buffer Memory of an Intelligent Function Module 3 6 Programmable Controller CPU Status Control 3 7 Drive Memory Defragmentation for Other Station QnACPU 3 8 File Control 3 9 Registering Deleting and Reading User Frames for Serial Communication Modules 3 10 Global Function for Serial Communication Modules 3 11 Data Transmission to an External Device On Demand Function for Serial Communication Modules 3 12 Initializing the Transmission Sequence for Serial Communication Modules 3 13 Mode Switching for Serial Communication Module A 16 3 14 3 15 3 16 3 17 3 18 SH 080008 L Turning Off Displayed LEDs and Initializing Communication Error Information and Error Code for Serial Communication Module Turning Off the COM ERR LED for Ethernet Modules Loopback Test Registering or Canceling Programmable Controller CPU Monitoring for Serial Communication Modules Remote Password Unlock Lock 4 WHEN COMMUNICATING USING THE QnA COMPATIBLE 2C FRAMES 4 1 4 2
474. te Accumulated count of lock process based on circuit disconnection Section 9 6 2 8959 22FFH password 0 or more Accumulated count of lock process based on circuit RW Not allowed Chapter 3 of function disconnection users Manual Application Use prohibited Systemarea o o S S O 9217 2401n oe one a Ges ROME coun Not allowed a S Soun 0 to 1000 Write count housing 9218 to 9427 a gre i33 User free area 2 6656 words 26001 n 3FFFH For user Transmission receiving data monitoring function default buffer RW Not allowed x Usage is determined by the user 16384 to 16416 to Use prohibited System area 401FH 403FH Section 8 1 3 Pre defined Protocol cancel tora 16448 16464 protocol function 0 No cancel instruction RW Not allowed defined 40401 4050 control data 1 Cancel request set by user specification 2 Cancel completed set by Q series C24N sane support function PECIFICATION eS A ae MELSEC Q Address es re Initial Protocol l Reference Decimal Hex Application Name value Registration Section cH cu mc Non Bi Pa Execution status 0 Unexecuted 1 Waiting for transmission 2 Sending Section 8 1 4 3 Waiting for data reception 4 Receiving 5 Completed Not allowed function z Pre defined protocol function error code 16450 16466 execution status 40421 0 Normal Section 11 2 40521 Other than 0 Error error code Number of protocol executions 16451 16467 0 No lo
475. te OFF time saae 3 9 How to detect reception error bidirectional pita EN A EE E ATEA AE eae 7 13 How to detect reception error non procedure E RE E E EEEE EE EEEE AT 6 17 How to detect transmission errors bidirectional uated EE winedaliins aciviioe oh 7 22 How to detect transmission errors non proceduro ccecececceeccceetecceeseteceeeetterenneeteee 6 28 I O assignment settings eee 4 14 Individual station loopback test 4 30 Individual station test eeeeeeeeeee 4 27 Initializing error information eee 11 6 INPUT eane e E 10 11 Installing utility package eects 9 4 Interrupt pointer cceceeeeeeseeeeeeeetees 4 22 LEDs displayed n se 4 4 Linked operation ccccceeseeeeeeeeteeetees 4 19 List the functions of the Q series C24 3 13 List of applications and assignments of the buffer MOMOTSY ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenreeeeees 3 22 List of input output signals for the programmable controller CPU 05 3 19 I A thicket tet ih haa rete Peete cues 2 6 Monitor test cceccceeeceeeeeeeeeteeeeteeeeneeees 9 36 Multiple CPU system eee 1 9 5 3 UE erect E EE eercrerrecer reece EAS 2 5 NAK sesie ee etree hee Gee aia 11 42 Non procedure protocol 2 cceeeeees 6 1 Index 1 Ind O P Q R ONDEMAND 0 cccceseeteeteeeteeeeeeseeees 10 3 Operation MOdEC ccccceeeeeeeeteee
476. ted in the following transmission frame No designation areas from the designated pointer position 8258 8514 2042 21421 8259 8515 2043n 21431 For designation of programmable 8260 8516 function 2044n 2144n 20411 21411 addresses CH1 side BAH to 11DH CH2 side 15AH to 1BDH Output count designation for fixed cycle transmission and data transmission 0 No designation 1 to 100 Output count designate the number of frame transmissions 8261 8517 2045n 21451 Data No for connection designation for fixed cycle transmission and notification 0 No designation OBB8x to OBD5n 8001H to 801FH Data No for connection Use prohibited System area pies of registered word blocks designation No designation It is possible to i to 10 Number of blocks of word devices designate a Number of registered bit blocks designation maximum of 10 0 No designation blocks in total 1 to 10 Number of blocks of bit devices Programmable controller CPU abnormal monitoring designation 0 Do not monitor 1 Monitor Monitoring device designation 0 No designation 90H to CCH Device code Head device No designation 0 or more Head device No R 8269 8225 204Dx 214Dx 8270 8226 204En 214En 8271 8527 204Fx 214Fx 8272 8528 2050x 21501 8273 to 8529 to 2051H to Ss 8275 8531 Read point designation 20531
477. teeae ate EEEE EE M21 e Receive clear processing execution status judgment feolaal ane la o PaE E at A EA M22 e Completion device for REMFR REMTO instruction M100 to 103 e Normal abnormal completion flag for REMFR REMTO WASTRUCUION a ane aa a ad susbicanceaadssahetiecsivaadass ai M200 M201 e Receive data clear request area information 0 00 DO Clear reg est iir ea e aa a aaa D a D1 Intelligent function module switch settings Refer to Section 4 5 2 Setti Switch No Description emng Position ERE value value or oF oF OFF Transmission Evenas rary oa oF oF oN oN b8 to b15 Switch 2 Switch 5 c setting Sum check code No n seg ts Buffer memory settings used in this example 07COH Communication protocol setting Non procedure protocol 00061 Station number setting Station 0 0000 ee Decimal Hexadecimal Setting Name value A8H Receive data clear request App 45 APPENDIXES 2 Program example lt Receive clear command gt MELSEC Q X1025 Ko Ps M15 Changes the receive clear command into pulses M15 JR _ str M16 Sets the receive clear acceptance r 4 1 flag M16 M17 M18 X1000 X1001 X1003 X1004 1000 Y1001 tt _ 14 p f r n H PLS M10 Receive clear processing execution eee tee command lt Receive clear processing execution gt M10 X101E m ov
478. ten 11 Callback Reconnecting For confirmation 5 Communicating of modem 6 Notification in progress Ie sealbark Reclining password Not allowed Chapter 3 of function User s Manual Number of data registration for connection Aa Application pee 0 No registration 1 to 30 Number of registrations Data registration status for connection for confirmation of registration No 548 to 549 0 No registration 1 Registered f 224H to 225H Bit corresponding to registration No is O0 OFF 1 ON f Registration No BB8H 3000 Address 224n b0 to Registration No BD5xH 3029 Address 225n b13 i Number of data registration for initialization 0 No registration 1 to 30 Number of registrations PECIFICATION eS A ae MELSEC Q Address Initial Protocol Reference Decimal Hex Application Name value uae Registration section mc Non Bi Pa Data registration status for initialization For confirmation for confirmation of registration No 551 to 552 of modem 0 No registration 1 Registered 227 to 228 tion Bit corresponding to registration No is 0 OFF 1 ON i Registration No 9C4H 2500 Address 227H b0 to Registration No 9E1H 2529 Address 228H b13 A 553 Number of notification execution 2294 0 Not executed 1 or more Number of executions Notification execution data No Section 9 6 2 554 0 Notification not executed 22An BB8H to BD5H 8001H to 801FH Not allowed Chapter 3 of Notification execute
479. terface The header information is also sent during m n connection 6 Operation of the accessed station The accessed station processes the request contained in the command message adds the header information to a response message and sends it using the interface that received the command message e e The following describes the header information that is added by the Q series C24 to a message in linked operation 1 When communicating with ASCII code formats 1 to 4 The following 13 or 15 character header information is added immediately before the control code ENQ STX ACK NAk at the start of each message 13 characters for formats 1 3 and 4 15 characters for format 2 2 When communicating in binary mode format 5 The following 10 byte header information is added immediately before the control code DLE STX at the start of each message STX in format 3 In ASCII code communication In binary code communication Existence in format Fe T l T T Pei u T T T T T T T x f x a Ihe BSE E 85 8 B E s s os g g Sslss g lols 8 N x 5 E on c IN x a LIT Z 5 c w c w ILIT amp Q g 2 Zo Qe Q g oO Zn on o faal lo ox oe 2 a E X 2 w oxlex lt l L JEX a nE V D S S c D D 2 no o Ss gt HA o A 2 a 3 25 ire Dla 2 o s 5 5 D gt 5 oO no ne oO ao no 0 E o E Q fo zZ E
480. termined by the user COOH to 1AFFx 6912 to 6952 1B00x to 1B28x 6953 to 6993 1B29n to 1B51H 6994 to 7034 B524 to 1B7An 7035 to 7075 B7Bu to 1BA3h 7076 to 7116 BA4u to 1BCCx 7117 to 7157 BCDx to 1BF5x 7158 to 7198 BF6u to 1C1En For user 7199 to 7239 registration 1C1FH to 1C47H 7240 to 7280 C48x to 1C70H 7281 to 7321 C71H to 1C99H 7322 to 7362 C9An to 1CC2n 7363 to 7403 CC3x to 1CEBn 7404 to 7444 CECu to 1D141 7445 to 7485 D15n to 1D3Dx For registration No 8001H For registration No 8002H For registration No 8003H The user registration area has the following combined uses with data written by the user according to the purpose of use by the TO instruction etc See each explanation item concerning the configuration of each area the data written etc For registration No 8006H1 14 If data communications is being carried out by user registration frame e User registration frame User s Manual Application Chapter 9 2 If data communications is being carried out by the modem function Initialization Data User s Manual Application Section 3 4 3 Connection Data User s Manual Application Section 3 4 4 For registration No 8004H For registration No 8005H For registration No 8007H Refer to left Not allowed oin description For registration No 8008H For registration No 8009H For registration No 800AH For registration No 800BH For
481. ternal device one of the following two adjustments should be made so that the relationship shown below is maintained 1 Reduce the send data size 2 Increase the receive area Receive data storage area 2 Size of data portion sent from the external device 7 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 2 Arrangement of receive data The following example illustrates the arrangement of data received from the external device when it is stored in the receive area 1 The receive message is stored to the Q series C24 buffer memory receive data storage area 2 The data is stored to the receive data storage area in low address L H next address L H order If the received data is ABCDEFG123 it will be stored as shown below for the CH1 side Q series C24 Receive area buffer memory Receive 5 H data count 001 05x Data B i length A 424 411 y 0005n D C Le H 44u 1 43x Receive Foi E data 46n 45x 1 G 31n 47n 3 2 33x 32h External device Normal completion When the data length unit is in bytes 00H is stored in the higher byte of the last data storage position in the receive area when the data length of the message is an even byte 3 Contents of receive data The contents of receive data including the receive data as indicated in Section 7 2 2 are explained below a Control codes The t
482. the same format or a non procedure protocol within the transmission specifications set in the respective transmission settings specifications for CH1 and CH2 must be the same Q series C24 data flow in linked operation Transmits only to a designated CH side 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q x In linked operation all data received from one of the two interfaces is transmitted from the other interface In this case exclusive control of the received data is necessary when data is communicated using the non procedure protocol since all the connected stations receive the data When data communication is performed using the MC protocol only the Q series C24 having the station number designated in the message performs the process designated by the command Furthermore when data communication is performed using QnA compatible 2C 3C 4C frames of the MC protocol the header information for linked operation is added to messages directed to other stations linked by multidrop connection Processing performed by the Q series C24 connected to an external device The header information is added to the command messages received from the external device that are directed to other stations and sends them to the stations through the other interface The header information is deleted from the response messages received from other stations and sends them to the external device using the other in
483. the Q series C24 with a QCPU please skip this section 1 Available functions parameter setting and use of interrupt programs For details refer to the C Controller Module User s Manual Hardware Design Function Explanation 2 Access from GX Developer to a programmable controller CPU on another station A programmable controller CPU on another station is not accessible via the Q series C24 controlled by a C Controller module For details refer to the C Controller Module User s Manual Hardware Design Function Explanation 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS 2 8 Checking the Function Version Serial No and Software Version MELSEC Q This section provides the information on function versions serial Nos and software versions of the related products that support new functions of the Q series C24 and explains how to check them 1 Correspondence of related products for use additional functions of Q series C24 Function version of the Q series C24 Additional function Simultaneous connection of GX Developer and GOT QJ71C24N R2 R4 QU71024 R2 Function version B Version of related product CPU module GX Developer GX Configurator SC RS and DTR signal status Bots designation Transmission specifications Support for 230400 bps Data transmission reception at low speed 50 bps Function version B Version 2 or later O Clearing reception data by
484. the User s Manual Application Data transmission reception is performed using dedicated instructions App 12 App 12 APPENDIXES MELSEC Q 3 When data is received by a reception end code the external device side must send the end code data the default is CR LF code ODH and 0An at the end of the data sent to the programmable controller CPU side Once any end code is registered data can be transmitted in the same way as for the UC24 C24 S8 4 The external device side can receive data from the Q series C24 in the same ways as UC24 b Message transmission by printer function when using programs designed for UC24 1 Message transmission using the printer function of the UC24 can be implemented by the data transmission function that uses a user frame 2 For the programmable controller CPU register and send messages according to the User s Manual Application Messages handled by the UC24 will become user frames in the Q series C24 4 Data communication using the bidirectional protocol a Setting to add a sum check code to a message The setting to add a sum check code to a message has been changed It is set during switch setting operation by GX Developer b Data transmission reception 1 The same data transmission reception as used by UC24 C24 S8 can be performed 2 Create a new program for data communication upon checking functions and instructions used on the programmable controller CPU side in Chapter
485. the error and status information stored in the buffer memory of the Q series C24 in devices designated by the programmable controller CPU By this setting the users can see the module error and status information without accessing the Q series C24 Setup procedure Tools gt Intelligent function utility Start gt Select a target intelligent function module screen gt Auto refresh For display screen see Section 9 3 Setting screen Auto refresh setting PIET Module information Module type Serial Communications Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name QJ71C24 N N R4 Module side Module side PLC side E Setting item Buffer size Transfer Traner Device 9 direction word count oe a Flash ROM access register read delete result CH1 LED ON status communications error 1 status CH2 LED ON status communications error 1 1 status EE aS Switch setting error mode switching error 1 1 gt D3 status E EE C Ta Number of registered user frame 1 1 D4 Flash ROM system parameters write result 1 1 D5 Modem function error code 1 1 Ez DG Modem function sequence status 1 1 gt D7 Make text file End setup Cancel 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION Setting items Setting item Flash ROM access register read delete result Buffer memory address CH1 CH2 LED ON status communication error status gt 1 Switch setting error mode switching error stat
486. the external device Error code Hexa Description decimal e There is no data ETX CR LF etc MC protocol 2 7F23H message errr following the character area or transmit message and restart data 2 designation was incorrect communications Check the sum check code of the external device e The sum check code calculated does Check the horizontal parity code not match the sum check code calculated of the external device received Check CRC 16 of the external device e The horizontal parity code calculated If GX Configurator SC Pre defined 7F244 Sum check error does not match the horizontal parity protocol support function was used for code received protocol editing check the sender s e The calculated error check code does packet format to see if an incorrect not match the received error check value is set for Processing method code Code type Data length Data flow Complement calculation or Calculating range of the check code Correct the data length that is transmitted from the external device e The length of the received data Change the word byte units set by the Pz Data length rror exceeds the receive area size Q series C24 to byte units mo p oF Increase the receiving area of the Q series C24 e Another command was received before Perform the communication after the 7F264 Command error an unlock processing while the remote unlock processing is normally password is registered completed 7F30n
487. the manual of MX Component for the details Separately sold communication support tools e MX Component SWOD5C ACT E or later See Appendix 7 for the overview of MX Component e e e e 1 VERVIEW MELSEC Q i I _ _ Command E e p 4 ja T Command request data oo E x In the MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 mode other stations including the A QnA series programmable controller CPUs can be accessed during data link operation The MC protocol is equivalent to the communication function using a dedicated protocol that is supported by the A QnA series computer link module serial communication modules 2 Data communication using the non procedure protocol Details are explained in Chapter 6 and the User s Manual Application a Data can be transferred in any message formats that conform to the specifications of external devices measuring devices PCs etc b Fixed or variable length messages can be received in accordance with the external device specifications e How to receive the variable length data The external device sends data by adding at the end of the message the end code data CR LF or any one byte data that is set for the Q series C24 e How to receive the fixed length data The external device sends the amount of da
488. the switch setting by CHn RAE GRU t me parameter anidireboot Switch setting error after correcting the setting value for the O O O the GX Developer switch System error 11 28 11 28 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Protocol Error code Sadi N ignal Hexa Error Description 9 Corrective action on Bidire Pre i name MC Proce decimal ctional defined dure Dedicated instructions e Executed dedicated instructions e Do not use dedicated instructions simultaneous simultaneously simultaneously O O O O execution error 7EF1n Control data error Setting value i incorrect e Correct the setting value in the control e Setting value is out of range data C icati AAEE e Instruction cannot be executed with the e Correct the setting value of the protocol setting ae ae Sirok current communication protocol communication protocol e The OS of the Q series C24 detected MAR System error some error e The processing in operation was cancelled due to execution of the Processing following cancelled due to aw Pate agai lt Mode switching transmission sequence k mode switching Nei Ahe ya e Do not execute these functions during Rees initialization reception data clear by O O O transmission any other processing sequence buffer memory user frame use initialization etc enable disable designation UINI instruction programmable controller CPU information clear gt J e Multiple external devices accessed a e Multiple
489. this product 1 Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company However if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer s discretion Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re commissioning maintenance or testing on site that involves replacement of the failed module Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen 18 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 2 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases 1 Failure occurring from inappropr
490. time is too short the external device may not be able to receive all or the first part of a response message from the Q series C24 1 2 For the QnA compatible 3C 4C frames specify a message wait time in the buffer memory address 11EH 1BEx For the A compatible 1C frames specify a message wait time in a request message sent from the external device When communicating with the non procedure or bidirectional protocol Delay the data transmission timing 1 Data transmission from the external device to the QU71C24N R2 R4 Delay the timing of transmission from the external device Adjusted on the external device side Data transmission from QJ71C24N R2 R4 to the external device For communications with the non procedure protocol delay the data transmission by one scan in the sequence program For communications with the bidirectional protocol delay the timing of turning ON the reception data read completion signal by one scan as well App 6 APPENDIXE MELSEC Q Appendix 2 QnA A Series Module This section explains a comparison of the functions of the Q series C24 and QnA A series modules and explains how to utilize programs created for A series modules as well as how to install the Q series C24 into the existing system QnA A modules refer to the following products QC24N AJ71QC24N R2 R4 A1SJ71QC24N1 R2 A1SJ71QC24N R2 QC24 AJ71QC24 R2 R4 A1SJ71QC24 R2 UC24 C24 S8 AJ71UC24 A1SJ71UC24
491. ting a reception error or clearing the received data if necessary For details of the communication data monitoring function refer to the User s Manual Application 11 35 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 3 1 The RUN LED is turned OFF Symptom Corrective action Bidirectional procedure Pre defined A transmission setting Set the switch by GX Developer correctly switch is set to an and after writing to the CPU reset the CPU unusable position Remove the cause of the CPU error and reset the CPU e During the Q series C24 and external device loopback test the minimum parameters file must be written to the CPU beforehand e Calculate the 5 V current drain of each installed module If the current capacity is Programmable controller CPU error The Q series C24 REN PED tamed ott insufficient check power module selection Power module 5 V current capacity is Whether or not the current capacity is insufficient insufficient can be checked by disconnecting the expansion base and installing only the Q series C24 to the basic base Extraneous noise e Check if the shield wire is 2 point ground caused the Q series e When ground is used with other devices C24 to abnormal ground the Q series C24 independently operation 11 36 11 36 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 3 2 The RD LED does not blink even after message transmission from the external device Symptom Correc
492. ting in GX Developer it is necessary to add a sum check code at the end of the message 1 For data communication from the external device to the Q series C24 The Q series C24 checks and processes the sum check code received It cannot be read from the sequence program When No sum check is specified once a data portion of message corresponding to the data length is received the succeeding data received will be ignored up to the control code that follows See a The following example shows the contents of a sum check code in the message 2 For data communication from the Q series C24 to the external device The sum check code to be transmitted is calculated and added by the Q series C24 When No sum check is specified no sum check code is transmitted Example The following shows the sum check code when ABCDEFGHIJ and the numeric value 100 are sent as data when the unit is in bytes e Arbitrary data ___ Data gt Data length 000CH External device side Q series C24 XX v D OCH OOH 41H 42H 43H 44H 45H 46H 4TH 48H 49H 4An 64H OOH Added value 03271 H L b15 to b8 b7 to b1 bO Contents of 03274 memory gt 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 41 1 J 03H 27H 7 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL MELSEC Q e Error code The error code indicates the definition
493. ting screen PTEI r Module information Module type Serial Communications Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name QJ71C24N Setting value No connection na Setting item Modem connection channel designation Notification execution designation Number of connection retries designation Do not execute Connection retry interval designation 180 90 300 Connection retry interval units sec Initialization connection timeout designation 60 1 60 Timeout units sec Number of initialization retries designation Data No for initialization designation Input by the following value range O User send frame No designation HO7d0 HO7dd 05 registered initialization data HO9 4 H09e1 Flash ROM initialization data H8001 H801f Butfer memory initialization data D Ss r Flash ROM setting 7 Details aln Save file module 7 Select input Read f i lead trom oad fe No connection 1CH 2CH Make text file Execute test Close Setting items Buffer memory address Item Reference section GX Developer connection designation Chapter 3 of User s Manual Application Data No for callback designation 1 to 10 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 9 4 5 Transmission control and others system setting Purpose For data communication with external devices register system setting values for the transmission control metho
494. tion 2052H 2152H Chapter 2 of Read point designation 2053H 2153H User s Manual Application Monitoring condition 2054H 2154H taai designation No 1 block monitoring E 7 Monitoring condition value device j goin Mas 2055H 2155H designation Transmission pointer T 2056H 2156H transmission designation Output count designation 2057H 2157H Data No for connection 2058H 2158H designation aana y 2059H to 21594 to No 2 to 10 block monitoring device 20A9H 21A9H Transmission pointer 20E6xH 21E6H E designation PLC CPU abnormal Number of output eae F h 20E7H 21E7H monitoring designation e designation transmission Data No for connection 20E8H 21E8H designation 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 9 6 9 Transmission user frame No designation monitor Purpose Monitor the setting value of output frame number used when transmitting data with the non procedure protocol using the user frame Operating procedure Monitor screen gt CHO Output frame monitor Monitor screen CH1 Transmission user frame No designation monitor la xj m Module information Module type Serial Communications Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name QJ71C24N Setting item Current value Setting value Dapa frame No designation 0000 st 2nd 0000 3rd 0000 4th 0000 5th 0000 6th 0000 7th 0000 8th 0000 3th 0000 10th 0000 X r Flash ROM setting Details
495. tion Function MC procedure i Remarks protocol page protocol Auto refresh setting Refresh the Q series C24 s error codes and set devices on Section 4 6 ae programmable controller CPU side lUserframe SY frame Register the user frame in the flash ROM lol o ction Section 9 4 1 4 1 Data for modem initialization Register the data for modem initialization in the flash ROM o o f ey Data for modem connection Register the data for model connection in the flash ROM lof o o Section 9 4 3 Register th t tti lues fi del function in th Modem function system setting Reset See eee ee LOC enue nye fale jl es fhe Section 9 4 4 Set the transmission specifications with the other device DTR DSR control DC code control communication ion 9 4 5 method data communication monitoring timer value etc CHn MC protocol system Assign the buffer memory for on demand function set the A ction 9 4 6 online setting user frame number etc Assign the buffer memory needed to perform data communication using the non procedure protocol and change the setting values etc CHn Transmission control and others system setting CHn Non procedure system setting Assign the buffer memory needed to perform data communication using the bidirectional protocol and ion 9 4 8 change the setting values etc CHn Pre defined protocol Change the set value for data communication using the i O Section 9 4 9 system setting pre defined protocol CHn PL
496. tion 1 Data reception 2 1 Start the self station programmable controller CPU The values specified with GX Developer are stored in the Q series C24 2 When the amount of data specified by the received data count or data containing the receive complete code is received from the external device the reception data read request X3 turns ON 3 After the control data for the INPUT instruction is stored in the device the sequence program executes the INPUT instruction and reads the receive data 6 11 6 11 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 4 The device completing the INPUT instruction turns ON when the reading of receive data is completed When the complete device 1 abnormal completion signal turns ON the error code is stored in the control data completion status S1 1 Program example When the Q series C24 I O signals are from X Y00 to X Y1F x3 Re ove x 4 D rove ko Move i INPUT UO DO K1 DO D1 K2 K10 D10 D2 D110 SET For normal completion Interface number 1 Reception result 0 Receive data count n 10 Allowable receive data count Receive data Dm Receive data RST Address 258H D3 MO ZO KOZO M100 M100 J Designate the receive channel Clear the reception result and receive data count storage device to 0 Designate the allowable receive data count With normal co
497. tion data No 5 notification execution data No Details r Flash ROM setting Write to 5 modiis Save file Read from 7 modals Load file Current value display Make text file Cannot execute test Monitoring Stop monitor Execute test Close Monitor Test items Item Buiter memory address Reference section CH2 Data storage area 4 notification execution data No Data storage area 5 notification execution data No X10 Modem initialization completion ee X11 Dial in progress X12 Connection in progress X13 Initialization connection abnormal completion oe X14 Modem disconnection completion i eee X16 Notification abnormal completion X15 Notification normal completion ificati F Y10 Modem initialization request Section 3 3 of User s Manual Application 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q areal ffer memory address eer cH A E T EEE Y12 Modem disconnection request o do o y Y14 Notification issued ene ocem comnecton crema desgrat m GX Developer designation No communication interval time designation units min 3m RS CS control yes nodesignaton m Section 3 3 of User s Manual Application Remote password mismatch notification accumulated count 2000 H designation 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q Test Items The following accumulated count of times counter values can be cleared to 0 by the
498. tion read from the programmable controller CPU matches the conditions set by the user conditional transmission b The programmable controller CPU monitoring function can be used in communication using the MC or non procedure protocol 6 Remote communications using the modem function Details are explained in the User s Manual Application a Data communication can be performed with a remotely located external device b Modem initialization and line connection disconnection can be performed c Data communication can be performed using the MC non procedure or bidirectional protocol Modem Modem mj 7 Initial settings and communication settings without using a sequence program Various initial settings can be performed using the GX Configurator SC SWOD5C QSCU E or later 1 VERVIEW MELSEC Q 8 Connecting the GX Developer and the GOT a Connecting the GX Developer Details are explained in the GX Developer Operating Manual e By connecting a PC installed with a GX Developer to the interface of the Q series C24 at the same time operations such as programming monitoring and testing for the programmable controller CPU can be performed e By connecti
499. tion section mc Non Bi Pa Monitoring condition arrival block No Programmable 0 The monitoring condition is not enabled for any block Chapter 2 of 8711 8967 controller CPU 1 to 10 Registration order of word bit block nth p ey 4 ie Not allowed User s Manual 2207 2307 monitoring 4096 CPU abnormal monitoring block Application The latest block No for which monitoring condition is enabled is Pp stored 8712 to 8968 to Use prohibited System area 22EFH 23FFH B Callback permit accumulated count 22 0 or more Accumulated count oes a Callback denial accumulated count 22F 14 0 or more Accumulated count Section 9 6 2 For callback Auto callback connection permit accumulated count Chapter 3 of 22 RW Not allowed function 0 or more Accumulated count pene Kanoa ication Auto callback connection denial accumulated count App 22F 34 0 or more Accumulated count San Accumulated count of callback receive procedure cancel 0 or more Accumulated count 8949 to 8954 P Accumulated count of unlock process normal completion Section 5 1 5 For the remote 0 or more Accumulated count of normal completion Section 9 6 2 password Accumulated count of unlock process abnormal completion RW Not allowed Chapter 3 of 8956 22FCx function processing User s Manual Application 0 or more Accumulated count of abnormal completion 8957 to 8958 ai Section 5 1 5 For the remo
500. tive action Bidirectional procedure e Check if the Q series C24 and external RD and SD signal lines are cross connected Use the external device OPEN statement to check if the opened port and the cable connection port are matched e Connect the wiring so that the DSR CS and other transmission control signals are External device ready e Signal lines are not connected correctly RD does not blink transmission control even through an signals are not turned Since the control signal specifications external device is ON depend on the device connect the wiring transmitting a by seeing the instruction manual of the message device used If the message passes through an RS 232 gt RS 422 e Check the specifications of the converter converter modem and modem and recheck the settings and etc the signal is a interrupted at one of wimg the intervening devices 11 37 11 37 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 3 3 No response message is returned even though the external device transmitted a message and the RD LED blinked Symptom e Communication protocol is set incorrectly e When Check CD terminal was set the CD terminal was turned OFF The header byte of the message is not data needed by the set protocol and format An external device transmitted a message and RD blinked but the Q series C24 did not return a response message NEU remains on and SD does no
501. to develop a wide range of customized applications Microsoft Visual Basic 6 0 Visual Basic Microsoft Visual Basic NET 2003 Microsoft Visual Studio 2005 Visual Basic Microsoft Visual C 6 0 Visual C Microsoft Visual C NET 2003 Microsoft Visual Studio 2005 Visual C Microsoft Excel 2000 Microsoft Excel 2002 Microsoft Excel 2003 Microsoft Excel 2007 Microsoft Access 2000 or Microsoft Access 2002 Microsoft Access 2003 Microsoft Access 2007 App 25 App 25 APPENDIXE MELSEC Q 5 Support for functions dedicated for data communication with programmable controllers MX Component provides the functions necessary for data communication with programmable controllers including functions for opening closing communication lines and reading writing devices Multi function communication programs can thus easily be developed with MX Component Function name Function Connect Connects a telephone line Open Opens a communication line Close Closes a communication line Disconnect Disconnects a telephone line Sets one device LONG type For details of the functions refer to the MX Component Programming Manual 6 Collecting data on Excel without programming Using MX Component and MX Sheet SWnD5C SHEET E allows users to collect programmable controller device data on Excel with only simple setting and without any programming App 26 App 26 APP
502. to the setting items oo 2 Tua GX Developer and GOT connection Simultaneous connection of GX Developer and GOT to the Q series C24 MREMEN Support for multiple CPU system Communication with non control CPU using the MC protocol Communication with QnA compatible 4C frame ASCII code Formats 1 to 4 gt e Communication with QnA compatible 4C frame binary code lFomats o lolx Multiple CPU setting using GX Developer I O assignment switch setting interrupt pointer setting EJ etc APPENDIXE z MELSEC Q O Usable A Usable Model serial no production date limited x Usable x1 There is restriction on production date of the Q series C24 or programmable controller CPU that can use the function For version verification see section 2 8 x2 The data reception using format 0O refers to the method of receiving data by user frame which was supported in the Q series C24 of function version A 3 The Q series C24 of function version A is capable of setting one pair of transparent code and additional code per interface for both transmission and reception x4 This function can be used when connecting with GX Developer x5 This function is available in GX Developer Version 6 or later x6 GX Developer can only be connected to the CH1 side in case of the Q series C24 of function version A It is not possible to connect both GX Developer and the GOT to the two interfaces at the same time App 3 App 3 AP
503. troller CPU Mov D1 D101 X21 The completion flag is reset by the external m RST moi J command RST M102 7 10 17 10 17 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTION i SSE MELSEC Q 10 6 G P BIDIN Data can be received using the bidirectional protocol Applicable device Set Internal device Link direct device Intelligent function f Index register data System user File register JOO module device Constant Others uoco O pr ol of E Instruction Executing code condition Command G BIDIN L _cinn Un amp Command GP BIDIN f GP BIDIN Un S D1 D2 Set data Setdata data Description Set by Data type Start I O signal of the module Ln p ta User BIN16 bit ere he to FE Top two digit when I O signals are expressed in 3 digit s Head number of the devices in which control data is stored uses sstem Soyo name Device name T Head number of the devices in which receive data is stored ETN D2 Bit device number to be turned on at completion of execution system Bt The file register per local device and program cannot be used as the set data Control data Set data Setting range _Setby Set receive channel Receive channel 1 Channel 1 CH1 side 1 2 User 2 Channel 2 CH2 side hag result by a BIDIN instruction are stored o forero forres aeon en or O 2 Receive data count e The number of data re
504. ts monitoring of the current value field Stops monitoring of the current value field Execute test Registers the system setting data of the selected item in the flash ROM 1 To apply Execute test to multiple items simultaneously set the data for the corresponding items select the multiple items while pressing down Ctrl then click Execute test x1 The settings for receive data clear request and flash ROM write allow prohibit designation are written to the buffer memory Registers all system setting data for the Q series C24 in the flash ROM Reads all system setting data for the Q series C24 from the flash ROM Saves all system setting data for the Q series C24 to the designated file extension UMD Reads all system setting data for the Q series C24 from the designated file extension UMD 9 16 9 16 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC 1 2 MELSEC Q Closes the screen that is currently open and returns to the previous screen End setup Saves writes the system setting data closes the current screen and returns to the previously displayed screen With offline operation only Save file and Load file are enabled When the setting operation is complete in each system setting screen register the system setting data in the flash ROM then restart the programmable controller CPU to resume data transmission If two or more intelligent function module utility packa
505. ual of the modem TA Check if the Q series C24 is faulty or not talking the procedure shown under 1 Modem connection channel number is not designated i Set 1 to 2 to the modem connection Designated value of modem connection channel is 3 S Section 3 3 6 channel designation incorrect 11 32 11 32 Connection to the modem TA was unsuccessful or the modem TA is not connected C After the modem has been initialized External destination is connected to network or connect to the network if the external Section 3 4 6 modem has not been initialized destination is not connected to the Section 3 4 7 network or report it There is an error in the designation of the data number Designate a registered number for the Section 3 3 6 for connection data for connection Section 3 4 6 C ERR EA z p 11 TROUBLESHOOTIN Sea MELSEC Q Error code Signal Hexa Error Contents BAN Corrective action Reference section decimal Recheck the user frame number Designate the registered user frame Section 3 4 3 number Section 3 4 4 Register the designated data for Section 3 4 5 initialization Designate the output head pointer in the range of 1 to 100 Designate the position n th position There is an error in the designation of the output head where the data for initialization number pointer is designated Designate the gan for i itialization Section 3 4 5 number at the designated position n th position oden Design
506. uction is not completed even O Section11 3 22 oe ee eee e The C N was tumed ON o o o OT Section 11 3 8 e The Pis wastumedON O o o f Section 11 3 9 e The PRO was tumed on OS oO f o J Section 1 3 10 e The SIO was turned ON o o o O Section11 3 11 Communication errors occurred e The CH1 ERR or CH2 ERR was tumed ON O o O section11 3 12 check according to Section 11 1 1 e Communications are intermittently established and Section 11 3 13 lost Data that t be decoded t itted and received e Whether the cause of the communications error is in Section 11 3 15 the cea ot al series C24 or the external device is unknown Cannot communicate via modem e Cannot communicate viamodem communicate via modem Co f Section 11 3 16 1 e Cannot communicate with ISDN sub address SS Section 11 3 17 D t te in th le time d ted in th The programmable controller CPU Doos not operate We cree time designated inthe Section 11 3 18 ae constant cycle transmission setting monitoring function does not operate D i i ih e imed tedi in the designated cycle time i ee ee operate ifi the LSE mee esigna aii O Section 11 3 19 condition agreement transmission setting Ci t ive b int t program C t write setti lue in flash ROM of the Q Cannot perform initial setting T PEN AR ee nage Ont O O Section 11 3 21 series C24 x1 If an error occurs while performing data exc
507. uest command and response in the pre defined protocol communication proper communication with the other device can be performed by disabling the echo back 2 Setting method 1 Setting by GX Configurator SC Enable or disable the function on the CHn Transmission control and others system setting screen For details refer to Section 9 4 5 2 This function is set in sequence programs In the echo back enable disable setting area address 450 1C2H set either of the following values Default 0 When the QJ71C24N R4 sends data it also receives the sent data 0 Enable echo back lie in its own RDA or RDB When the QJ71C24N R4 sends data it does not receive the sent 1 Disable echo back me data in its own RDA or RDB The data are discarded 3 SPECIFICATIONS Example of setting in sequence program Send command a o K1 Do L K1 a LTO HO H1C2 DO Data transmission program MELSEC Q Set echo back to Disable Set the value in the echo back J enable disable setting area address 450 1C2H PONT The echo back enable disable setting must be done before sending data Any setting changed during transmission does not take effect PECIFICATION eS A ae MELSEC Q 3 4 Serial Communication Module Function List The following table lists the functions of the Q series C24 Communication with Communication with QnA compatible 4C frame Formats 1 to 4 A
508. ule 3 Check whether the power supply capacity is sufficient or not 4 Check whether the hardware of the Q series C24 CPU module and base unit are normal according to the manuals of the corresponding modules If any module is faulty please contact your local Mitsubishi service center or representative for repair 5 If the problem cannot be solved through the above steps please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem 11 33 11 33 11 TROUBLESHOOTIN Sea MELSEC Q 11 3 Troubleshooting by Symptom This following shows troubleshooting of trouble generated during communications between the Q series C24 and external device according to the trouble symptom When trouble occurs first confirm the status of the Q series C24 and check the relevant item in the table below Protocol Symptom Symptom description Non saps Pre Reference section Dedicated RERA defined O Section 11 3 1_ ROY does not blink even through an external device S is transmitting a message e An external device transmitted a message and RD Danan blinked but the Q series C24 did not return a Section 11 3 3 response message LED turns on off check according to e SD does not blink even after a send request was e An external device transmitted a message and RD ECAC blinked but the Q series C24 did not turn ON the Section 11 3 5 read request e The CPRTCL instr
509. ult values have been set for the received data count and receive complete code that are used for data reception with the non procedure protocol The received data count and the receive complete code setting value can be changed by the sequence program before data receive processing Refer to Section 6 1 6 3 The default value can be changed by Non procedure system setting of GX Configurator SC Refer to Sections 9 4 5 and 9 4 7 Setting data Default Allowable range Buiter memory address where Remarks value the setting value is stored Received data 511 1FFH Less than the size of the A4ul144u Unit is in accordance with the receive data storage area word byte units designation 00004 to OOFFH When any code is set Receive ODOAH A5H 145H When there is no receive complete code CR LF complete code REMARKS Other than through the setting using GX Configurator SC or the TO instruction at the startup of the Q series C24 the received data count and receive complete code setting values can be changed even after data communication has started if the timing is as shown in the chart below The following describes the procedure for changing setting values for data reception via the non procedure protocol after the start of data communication and for the resumption of data reception processing Specifically the module restrictions are explained along with the timing and procedure for changing the setting values count 1 Data rece
510. unction error code area address 221 error address 2205H 2305n function error 11 48 11 48 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 3 13 Communication is intermittent Symptom Corrective action Bidirectional procedure Pre defined With a multidrop link two or Connect the external devices and the Q series C24 in more devices transmitted a 1 1 configuration and perform a communications data at the same time test Since data is transmitted simultaneously from two or more devices with a multidrop link when normal communications among all the devices is possible interlock the external devices so that they do not transmit simultaneously The signal cable wiring connection is faulty Replace the cable or make the connections firm When Check CD terminal isje Change the wiring so that the CD signal remains ON set the CD signal is turned all the time or change the setting to Do not check on off repeatedly CD terminal When half duplex communications is selected the ON OFF timing of each Communications are signal is not matched Control the external device so that the ON OFF timing of each signal is matched See Chapter 8 of User s Manual Application intermittently Requested processing of the established and lost next transmission before the 7 1 processing of the current transmission is completed Make sure to obtain handshake in the sequence Requested processing of the program next reception
511. unction version A for the Q Series C24 is used add the partial circuit shown with 1 shown in the program example in Section 6 1 4 3 Communications are possible when M19 is ON App 35 App 35 APPENDIXES MELSEC Q Appendix 9 Program Examples for Using Q Series C24 at MELSECNET H Remote I O Station Appendix 9 1 System configuration and program conditions 1 App 36 System configuration The system configuration used in the program examples of this section is shown below QJ71LP21 25 Remote master station 2 MELSECNETI H remote I O net network No 1 Control target target l QJ72LP25 25 Remote 1 O station Station No 1 x1 Itis assumed that the QJU71C24N is mounted on Slot 0 of the base unit and the starting I O No is 0 2 Set the network parameters of the remote master station as shown below 1 Network type MNET H Remote master 2 Starting I O No 0O00H 3 Network No 1 4 Total stations 1 5 Mode Online 6 Network range assignment XY setting M station gt A station M station lt R station a StationNo vi Y Points Start End Points Start End Points Start End Points Start End 1 64 1000 103F 64 oooo o03F 64 1000 103F 64 o000 _oO3F v 4 gt 7 Refresh parameters Link side PLC side a Dev name Points Start End
512. upport ISDN sub Use modem that supports ISDN sub communicated with ISDN address address sub address Sub address is incorrectly partitioned e Review how to partition the sub address using the TA manual 11 3 18 Periodic transmission is not performed normally Non i Bidirectional Pre Symptom Cause Corrective action procedure protocol defined protocol Does not operate inthe The setting value of the constant cycle Review the constant cycle transmission cycle time designated in transmission is incorrect setting the constant cycle The cycle time is affected by some Remove the causes or designate the transmission setting causes cycle time anticipating the causes 11 3 19 Condition agreement transmission is not performed normally N A B Bidirectional Pre Symptom Cause Corrective action procedure protocol defined protocol Does not operate inthe The setting value of the condition e Review the condition agreement cycle time designated in agreement transmission is incorrect transmission setting condition agreement The cycle time is affected by some Remove the causes or designate the transmission setting causes cycle time anticipating the causes 11 3 20 Data cannot be received due to by an interrupt program Non Bidirectional Pre Symptom Cause Corrective action procedure protocol defined protocol Interrupt issuance was not designated Designate interrupt issuance a ees es eee e Recei
513. urrent operation Status cccccceecceeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeceeseaeeseaeeesaeeeeaeeesieeeseaeeaes 11 14 11 1 7 Clearing the programmable controller CPU information cceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeas 11 16 11 2 Error Code lables 4 27 5 Stas eeniateA e E ie ed cee ee eA eee 11 18 11 2 1 Errorcode table zier ada tel Sentence A ee tte a een an aa a foe Ta eaae eta 11 18 11 2 2 A compatible 1C frame communications error Code table ccccccceeeeceeeeeeeeeteeeteeeeteneeees 11 30 11 2 3 Error code list while modem function is USEC ceeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeteeeceeeeeeeseeeeeaeeeneseaeeeaeeate 11 32 TRS Troubleshooting DY Symptoms sancie E E EEE 11 34 TT The RUN TERNE tumed OF Foe a E E A 11 36 11 3 2 The RD LED does not blink even after message transmission from the external device 11 37 11 3 3 No response message is returned even though the external device transmitted a message and the RDH LED blinked 2 a 0 ciediea dinette wad sian eee tnt 11 38 11 3 4 Transmission request does not make the SD LED blink ccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeneeeeaes 11 39 11 3 5 Read request signal does not turn ON even though the external device transmitted a message and the RD LED was blinking eeeeceeceseeeeeeeteeeteeeeeeeseeeseeeseneseeeteneseneeeneteneeeaes 11 40 11 3 6 The CPRTCL instruction execution is not completed although the RD LED blinked 11 41 1
514. us x 1 Number of registered user frame Flash ROM system parameters write result MELSEC Q Reference section Section 9 6 10 Section 11 1 Modem function error code Modem function sequence status Number of data registrations for connection Number of data registrations for initialization Number of notification execution Data storage area 1 notification execution data No Data storage area 2 notification execution data No Data storage area 3 notification execution data No Data storage area 4 notification execution data No Data storage area 5 notification execution data No Accumulated count of unlock process normal completion Accumulated count of unlock process abnormal completion Accumulated count of lock process based on circuit disconnection Section 9 6 2 Section 3 3 of User s Manual Application CH1 CH2 communication protocol status 1 Transmission status 1 RS 232 control signal status 1 Transmission sequence status 1 On demand execution result Data transmission result Data reception result MC protocol transmission error code Section 4 5 2 Section 9 6 3 Section 11 1 Sections 9 6 4 to 9 6 6 Section 11 1 Receive user frame nth User frame being transmitted Section 9 6 5 Chapter 11 of User s Manual Application Operation status PLC CPU monitoring A Execution result function
515. using the MC protocol correspond to the data communication functions using the dedicated protocol for the conventional products listed below A series computer link module e QnA series serial communication module Therefore the message format and control procedure are the same as when accessing the programmable controller using these conventional modules The external device side can access the Q series programmable controller with a program used for accessing the programmable controller via a conventional module Example Data for the number of device points Number of device points x 4 characters No of device points Head device 2 characters hexadecimal code code Station No a 3 z o 2 2 B A n O N I sum check I sum check o rT i it 1 i 0 0 0 ICID i N e 1 H 30H 58H 30H 30H3OH3OHI34HI3OH 30H 32H Command message for A compatible 1C frame Response for A compatible 1C frame 8 2 g 4 H 30H 30H 30H13 1431 32H 33H 34H 41H42H43H 444 03H g 8 The following manual is available for performing data communication using the MC protocol MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual sold separately 5 1 3 Programmable controller CPU setting for performing data communication Data communication using the MC protocol is achieved by performing the GX Developer settings indicated below on a PC performing the system settings by the GX Configurator SC and re
516. utput signals of the Q series C24 are from X Y00 to X Y1F Hi The function reads the communication status of a rr ss uo DO ses a target module and stores it in a device 10 22 10 22 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTION S SASE MELSEC Q 10 8 ZP CSET Receive data clear Applicable device Set Internal device Link direct device Intelligent function Index register Constant data Ena user File register JOO module device 2 ee Others n Word uoco a Ea e a e CO sl o z l 2 O Instruction Executing Instruction code condition form ZP CSET ae Un S1 82 D1 D2 H 1 x1 If the originating station is a Basic model QCPU function version B or later or Universal model QCPU double quotation of the first argument can be omitted Set data Set data Description Set by Data type Un Start I O signal of the module 00 to FE Top two digit when I O signals are expressed in 3 digit Number of the channel that demands to clear receiving data User BIN16 bit S1 1 Channel 1 CH1 side 2 Channel 2 CH2 side Head number of the device that stores the control data User System Head number of the bit device at the self station that turns on for one scan D2 at the completion of the instruction System Bit D2 1 also turns on at an abnormal completion Each of file registers for local device and program cannot be used as the setting data Control data
517. viceBlock2 D0 5 idata 0 If rtn 0 Then MsgBox D0 D4 amp idata 0 amp amp idata 1 amp amp idata 2 amp amp idata 3 amp amp idata 4 Else MsgBox Read Error amp Hex rtn End If End Sub Private Sub Command3_Click ByVal sender As System Object ByVal e As System EventArgs Handles Command3 Click tkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Disconnection Itkkxkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Dim rtn As Integer Disconnection rtn AxActEasylF 1 Close If rtn 0 Then MsgBox The disconnection was successful Else MsgBox Disconnection Error amp Hex rtn End If End Sub 2 When Visual C NET 2003 is used kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk I Connection RAE E APSE AIRIAN EE SERRATE private System Void button1_Click System Object sender System EventArgs e int iRet I Get LogicalstationNumber axActEasylF 1 gt ActLogicalStationNumber Convert Tolnt32 textBox1 gt Text I Connection iRet axActEasylF1 gt Open if iRet 0 MessageBox Show The connection was successful selse MessageBox Show String Format Connection Error 0x 0 x8 HEX _ box iRet App 29 App 29 APPENDIXES MELSEC Q PEE EEE ES CRETE REESE II Read PPR E private System Void button2_Click System Object sender System EventArgs e int iRet short sData 5 String szMessage String lpszarrDatal int iNumber String
518. ving by instruction other than Use BUFRCVS instruction to receive BUFRCVS interrupt data e Cannot receive data with Parameter setting PC system Review Parameter setting PS the interrupt program setting or Interrupt pointer setting system setting Interrupt pointer are not set on the programmable setting on the programmable controller controller CPU side or the settings are CPU side incorrect 11 54 11 54 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 3 21 Data cannot be written to the flash ROM ii i Bidirectional protocol Corrective action not set to allow to allow the switch settings by GX Developer setting by GX Developer When a multiple CPU system is used a target CPU is specified in Multiple CPU setting of Transfer Setup in GX e Cannot write data to Developer Flash ROM When the Q series C24 is mounted on an extension base unit of the Q12PRH Q25PRHCPU the communication path set in GX Developer is incorrect The Q series C24 was turned off during writing to the flash ROM Communication with GX Configurator SC was interrupted during writing to the flash ROM e The data written to the flash ROM are not valid 11 55 Connect GX Configurator SC to the control CPU of the Q series C24 and save the system setting data to the flash ROM Directly connect the CPU or change the communication path so that it is routed through an intelligent function module on the ma
519. wed Section 9 4 7 transmitted 1 to 100 User frame being transmitted nth 183 343 CR LF output designation Chapters 9 B7H 157H 0 Do not send 1 Send and 11 of 184 344 Output head pointer designation User s Manual B8x 1581 For user frame 0 No designation 1 to 100 Send from nth Application being 185 345 Output count designation Allowed transmitted B9x 1591 x A 0 No designation 1 to 100 Output n designation Output frame No designation A maximum of 100 can be specified OH No transmission 1H to CO1FH Designated For designation Message wait time designation f ti issi RW Section 9 4 6 ME lane ot transmission 9 No wait time 1H to FH Wait time unit 10 ms wait time Transmission transparent code designation 1st 0000H No designation Other than 0000H Designated below FA Transparent code b0 to b7 00H to FFH Transparent code Fardesianation Additional code b8 to b15 2 00H to FFH Additional code of transparent z Chapter 12 of Receive transparent code designation Allowed code 3 User s Manual 0000H No designation vs lh i Application Other than 0000H Designated below mip Transparent code b0 to b7 00H to FFH Transparent code Additional code b8 to b15 00H to FFH Additional code ASCII BIN conversion designation Section 9 4 5 449 For conversion ene 10 1H designation 0 No conversion 1 Convert a 1 aay Section 9 4 5 oa Chapter 13 of User s Manual Applic
520. x Flash ROM setting Details Write to Save fik Current value Monitoring module BEALS display Cannot execute test Readfiom oad fle Make text file Close Stop monitor Monitor Test items Item Butler memory address Reference section X00 CH1 Transmission normal completion X01 CH1 Transmission abnormal completion X02 CH1 Transmission processing in progress x06 CH1 Mode switching ooo O X06 CH1 Mode switching X0E CH1 ERR Occurrence Section 3 8 X1A CH1 Global signal es X07 CH2 Transmission normal completion i as 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC 9 6 2 Modem function monitor test Purpose for monitor test MELSEC Q Monitor test the operating status and setting values of the modem function Operating procedure Monitor screen gt Modem function monitor test Monitor Test screen ixi r Module information Module type Serial Communications Module Start 170 No 0000 Module model name QJ71C24N Setting item Current value Setting value Modem function error code 0000 Modem function sequence status Idle status C indicates callback Number of data registrations for connection 0 Number of data registrations for initialization 0 Number of notification execution 0 Data storage area 1 notification execution data No 2 notification execution data No 3 notification execution data No 4 notification execu
521. x 00H Sunday to 06H Saturday 0 No log Upper 8 bits Month Lower 8 bits Last 2 digits of year b15 to b8 b7 to bo Month 01H to 12H Year 00H to 99h last 2 digits 0 No log Upper 8 bits Hour b0 Day 01H to 31H Hour 00H to 23H MELSEC Q Reference section Protocol Initial eae Not allowed Not allowed D Not allowed Registration Section 8 1 3 Operating Manual Pre defined protocol support function Section Section 8 1 4 Operating Manual Not allowed Pre defined protocol support function 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q Address Decimal bs pres Initial Protocol paar Reference Hex Application Name Registration cia 0 No log Upper 8 bits Second Lower 8 bits Minute b15 to b8 b7 to bO Second 00H to 59H Minute 00H to 59H 16688 18480 41301 48301 Section 8 1 4 Execution Operating Checking log 1 OOS ie iq Manual protocol tee i S year Not allowed Pre defined 16689 18481 ower 8 bits Day of wee 4131n 48311 execution logs b15 3 b8 D7 i bo protocol Year 00H to 99h first 2 digits Day of week 00H to 06x support 00x Sunday to 06x Saturday function Execution log 2 to 32 Same as Execution log 1 4702n to 4E02h to 20224 to 20479 4F00n to 4FFFH Operating Send receive Manual 20480 to 24575 aloha oi Pre defined protocol function buffer R
522. y Sets 0x to the buffer memory length for on demand transmission J Sets 0C00 to the transmission buffer memory head address y Sets 400 to the transmission buffer memory length Transfers the setting values to the J on demand function designation and transmission area designation areas of the buffer memory J Initial setting command 3 1 Abnormal completion of REMTO instruction J Sets 600 to the receive buffer memory head address y J Sets 2004 to the receive buffer memory length Transfers the setting value to the receive area designation area of the buffer memory Initial setting completion J Abnormal completion of REMTO instruction When changing the default values of the following buffer memory areas refer to X1027 PLS lt Setting of word byte units designation gt M10 XIO1E H mov K REMTO J1 Kl Kl HO H96 DO K M100 M101 _ 1 WF PLS M101 H SET lt Setting of on demand function designation and transmission area designation gt M11 X101E H400 HO HOCOO H400 K4 PLS SET lt Setting of receive area designation gt M12 X101E 1 mov H600 Mov H200 Z RENTO J1 KI Kl HO HOAS D5 K2 M104 M105 j H WF SET M105 H SET REMARKS above 2 Program example to perform programming DTR DSR ER DR DC control designation e DC1 DC3 Xon Xoff code designation e DC2 DC4 code designation e CD terminal check designation for RS 232 e Communication system designation for RS 232 e
523. y by multiple devices Match the Q series C24 and external device settings Clear the error information according to the ERR clear request YE YF In addition when communicating data with the non procedure protocol execute the INPUT instruction and read and discard the unnecessary data Measure the noise When connecting the multidrop remove the interlock so that data will not be transmitted simultaneously by multiple devices Use DTR and DC control and perform data communications so that the buffer does not become full Perform RS CS control when the modem function is used If the Read Request signal was turned ON execute read immediately Recheck the CD signal control of the external device Send while the CD signal is ON Set no CD terminal checking and perform communication Transmit data after line connection processing on the interface side that uses the modem function 11 27 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Protocol Error code Hexa Description Corrective action ie cat Bidire decimal roce tional dure e The OS of the Q series C24 detected System error some error Identify the incorrectly edited protocol in Protocol setting data error information A i buffer memory 4086H to 4089H e There is an error in the protocol setting correct the setting data and write them that was edited in GX Configurator SC again to the Q series C24N Pre defined protocol support function Check th
524. y setting the data length of the data field to 0 Chapter 11 of User s Manual Application Multiple specification of transparent codes for transmission Switching to the GX Developer connection mode by switching the mode This function allows specification of a maximum of 10 types of transparent codes for transmission per interface when sending data using one of the following protocols e Non procedure protocol e Bidirectional protocol This functions allows the GX Developer connection mode to be switched by an external device or the programmable controller CPU Chapter 12 of User s Manual Application Chapter 15 of User s Manual Application Section 3 13 of Reference Manual Communication data monitoring function This function allows the monitoring of communication data transmitted on the communication network of the Q series C24 and an external device Chapter 16 of User s Manual Application Operating Manual Protocol FB support function UINI instruction The UINI instruction allows change of the mode transmission specifications and host station No of the Q series C24 Chapter 17 of User s Manual Application Specification of station No 65 to 120 by MC protocol QnA compatible 4C 3C frame only This function allows to access station No 65 to 120 of the CC Link IE controller network Sections 3 1 3 and 3 1 6 of Reference Manual Access to link direct devic
525. ypes of control codes are shown in the table below Signal Code has Contents Application name hexadecimal Code for starting data transmission Response code to the opposite side when data was 06H Acknowledge received normally Response code to the opposite side when data could Negative not be received normally Error code is sent Acknowledge immediately after the response code 1 For data communication from the external device to the Q series C24 the Q series C24 checks and processes the control code received It cannot be read from the sequence program 2 For data communication from the Q series C24 to the external device The control code to be transmitted is added by the Q series C24 7 6 7 6 7 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL MELSEC Q b Data length This indicates the number of bytes or words for the data portion of the message The unit of data length words bytes is in accordance with the word byte units designation in GX Configurator SC 1 For data communication from the external device to the Q series C24 The Q series C24 checks the length of the data received When the reception is normal the Q series C24 stores the receive data in the receive data storage area of the Q series C24 buffer memory assigning the first byte as the lower byte L For data communication from the Q series C24 to the external device The length of the transmission data is the number of the transmi
526. ystem setting screen on GX Configurator SC e Performing half duplex communication using specifications on the external device side an example of such a connection is shown in this section e Using modem functions b The connection cable FG signal and shield are connected as follows _ Connection on the Q series 624 side Connect to the Q series C24 connector Do not short the communication cable FG Connection cable FG signal Rousing signal and the SG signal When the FG signal and the SG signal are Connection cable shield Connect to the external device FG terminal connected inside the external device do not or the Q series C24 connector housing connect the FG signal to the Q series C24 c When normal data communication is not obtained due to external noise perform the wiring as follows 1 Connect the FG terminals on the external device and the Q series C24 using the shield of the connection cable 2 Signals other than SG should be connected with SG signals in the twisted pair Q series C24 Shield External device To Connector So housing When using an RS 232 to RS 422 converter to connect the external device and the Q series C24 use a converter that is compatible with the external device and programmable controller CPU system configuration 1 1 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 2 Connection examples a Connection example with an external device capable of turning o
527. z 2 z H L L H L H Header information 13 15 characters Header information 10 byte 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 5 3 The Intelligent function module interrupt pointer setting The following explains the interrupt pointer setting with GX Developer in order to receive data using an interrupt program For the method to receive data using an interrupt program see User s Manual Applications Chapter 4 Setting purpose The intelligent function module interrupt pointer sets the information to read the receive data with an interrupt program of the programmable controller CPU during communication using the non procedural bidirectional protocol By performing this setting an interrupt program starts when data is received from an external communicating device and the reading of data received by the programmable controller CPU becomes possible Startup procedure PLC parameters PLC system setting Interrupt pointer setting For display screen see the GX Developer Operating Manual Setting screen Intelligent function module interrupt pointer setting x PLC side PaA Intelli module side a Interrupt pointer Interrupt pointer a ue No of module Setting description 1 Interrupt pointer start No on the PLC side Set the start number ranging from 50 to 255

Q Corresponding Serial Communication Module User`s Manual (Basic)

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents